advertisement
▼
Scroll to page 2
of 684
Canon MP270 series / MP250 series On-screen Manual Strana 1 z celkového počtu 684 Ako používať túto príručku Tlač tejto príručky MC-3770-V1.00 Základná príručka Rozšírená príručka Obsahuje súhrnné informácie o tomto výrobku. Podrobne opisuje funkciu tohto výrobku. Riešenie problémov MP270/MP250 series Základná príručka Strana 2 z celkového počtu 684 Ako používať túto príručku Tlač tejto príručky MP-3291-V1.00 Rozšírená príručka Obsah Prehľad zariadenia Vkladanie papiera a originálov Hlavné súčasti Vkladanie papiera Displej LED a základné úkony Umiestnenie originálov Kopírovanie Bežná údržba Kopírovanie dokumentov Keď je tlač nejasná alebo sa tlačia nesprávne farby Kopírovanie fotografií Kopírovanie s prispôsobením strane Výmena kazety FINE Čistenie zariadenia Skenovanie Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači Príloha Zákonné obmedzenia týkajúce sa používania výrobku a obrázkov Tlač z počítača Tlač fotografií (Easy-PhotoPrint EX) Tlač dokumentov (Windows) Tlač dokumentov (Macintosh) Ďalšie použitie Tlač fotografií zo zariadenia kompatibilného so štandardom PictBridge (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) Užitočné softvérové aplikácie Rady týkajúce sa používania zariadenia Prehľad zariadenia Strana 3 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Prehľad zariadenia Prehľad zariadenia Táto časť obsahuje názvy súčastí zariadenia a opisuje základné úkony, s ktorými sa musíte oboznámiť pred jeho používaním. Hlavné súčasti Pohľad spredu Pohľad zozadu Vnútorné súčasti Ovládací panel Displej LED a základné úkony Na začiatok strany Hlavné súčasti Strana 4 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Prehľad zariadenia > Hlavné súčasti Hlavné súčasti Pohľad spredu Pohľad zozadu Vnútorné súčasti Ovládací panel Pohľad spredu (1) Kryt dokumentov Otvorte ho pri umiestňovaní originálov na ploché predlohové sklo. (2) Podpera papiera Zdvihnite ju a sklopte dozadu, aby ste mohli papier vložiť do zadného zásobníka. (3) Zadný zásobník Vložte doň rôzne veľkosti a typy papiera, ktoré možno použiť v zariadení. Naraz možno vložiť jeden alebo viacero hárkov rovnakej veľkosti a typu papiera, ktoré sa však automaticky budú podávať po jednom. Pozrite si časť Vkladanie papiera . (4) Vodiace lišty papiera Posunutím ich zarovnajte s bočnými hranami balíka papiera. (5) Ovládací panel Používajte ho na zmenu nastavení alebo ovládanie zariadenia. Pozrite si časť Ovládací panel . Poznámka Ak sa približne päť minút nepoužívajú ovládacie prvky zariadenia, vypnú sa displej LED a indikátory na ovládacom paneli (okrem indikátora Napájanie (Power) ). Ak ich chcete obnoviť, stlačte ľubovoľné tlačidlo okrem tlačidla ZAP. (ON) alebo vykonajte tlač. (6) Výstupný zásobník papiera Automaticky sa otvorí pri spustení tlače alebo kopírovania a vysunutí vytlačeného papiera. (7) Vysúvacia časť výstupného zásobníka Hlavné súčasti Strana 5 z celkového počtu 684 Po otvorení podopiera výtlačky. Otvorte ju pri tlači alebo kopírovaní. (8) Ploché predlohové sklo Položte sem originál, ktorý chcete kopírovať alebo skenovať. (9) Port priamej tlače (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) Umožňuje priamu tlač zo zariadenia kompatibilného so štandardom PictBridge, napríklad digitálneho fotoaparátu. Pozrite si časť Tlač fotografií zo zariadenia kompatibilného so štandardom PictBridge (len pre zariadenie MP270 series). Varovanie K portu priamej tlače na zariadení nepripájajte iné zariadenia než zariadenia kompatibilné so štandardom PictBridge. Mohli by ste spôsobiť požiar, úraz elektrickým prúdom alebo poškodenie zariadenia. Dôležité Nedotýkajte sa kovového krytu. Pohľad zozadu (10) Port USB Zasuňte sem kábel USB, ktorým sa zariadenie pripája k počítaču. Dôležité Nedotýkajte sa kovového krytu. Kým zariadenie tlačí alebo skenuje originály pomocou počítača, neodpájajte ani znova nepripájajte kábel USB. (11) Konektor napájacieho kábla Zasuňte sem dodaný napájací kábel. Hlavné súčasti Strana 6 z celkového počtu 684 Vnútorné súčasti (12) Zaisťovacie kryty kazety s atramentom Zaisťujú kazety FINE na svojom mieste. (13) Skenovacia jednotka (kryt) Slúži na skenovanie originálov. Otvorte ju pri výmene kaziet FINE alebo odstraňovaní zaseknutého papiera vnútri zariadenia. Pri otváraní skenovacej jednotky (krytu) nechajte kryt dokumentov zatvorený. (14) Podpera skenovacej jednotky Pridržiava skenovaciu jednotku (kryt), kým je otvorená. (15) Držiak kazety FINE Slúži na vloženie kaziet FINE. Farebná kazeta FINE sa vkladá do ľavej zásuvky ( ) a čierna kazeta FINE do pravej zásuvky ( (16) Kazety FINE (kazety s atramentom) Vymeniteľné kazety s integrovanou tlačovou hlavou a kazetou s atramentom. Poznámka Podrobné informácie o vkladaní kaziet FINE nájdete v tlačenej príručke Prvé spustenie . Dôležité Oblasť (A) znázornenú na nasledujúcom obrázku môže pokrývať rozliaty atrament. Nemá to vplyv na výkon zariadenia. Nedotýkajte sa oblasti (A). Ak sa jej dotknete, zariadenie nemusí správne tlačiť. Ovládací panel MP270 series MP250 series ). Hlavné súčasti Strana 7 z celkového počtu 684 (1) Tlačidlo ZAP. (ON)/indikátor Napájanie (Power) Zapína a vypína zariadenie. Pred zapnutím skontrolujte, či je zatvorený kryt dokumentov. Dôležité Odpojenie zástrčky napájacieho kábla Keď sa po vypnutí zariadenia chystáte odpojiť zástrčku napájacieho kábla, vždy skontrolujte, či nesvieti indikátor Napájanie (Power) . Ak vytiahnete zástrčku napájacieho kábla z nástennej elektrickej zásuvky, kým indikátor Napájanie (Power) svieti alebo bliká, môžete tým znemožniť správnu tlač zo zariadenia, pretože tlačová hlava nie je chránená. Poznámka Indikátory Napájanie (Power) a Alarm Pomocou indikátorov Napájanie (Power) a Alarm môžete skontrolovať stav zariadenia. - Indikátor Napájanie (Power) nesvieti: zariadenie je vypnuté. - Indikátor Napájanie (Power) svieti na zeleno: zariadenie je pripravené na tlač. - Indikátor Napájanie (Power) bliká na zeleno: zariadenie sa práve spúšťa alebo vypína. - Indikátor Alarm svieti alebo bliká na oranžovo: vyskytla sa chyba a zariadenie nie je pripravené na tlač. Bližšie informácie nájdete v časti Riešenie problémov v príručke onscreen manual Rozšírená príručka . - Indikátory striedavo blikajú – indikátor Napájanie (Power) na zeleno a indikátor Alarm na oranžovo: pravdepodobne sa vyskytla chyba, ktorá vyžaduje kontaktovanie servisného strediska. Bližšie informácie nájdete v časti Riešenie problémov v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka . (2) Displej LED (Dióda emitujúca svetlo (Light Emitting Diode)) Zobrazuje počet kópií, kód údržby alebo prevádzkový stav, napríklad kód chyby. (3) Tlačidlo [+] Slúži na zadanie počtu kópií. (4) Indikátory Atrament (Ink) Svietia alebo blikajú na oranžovo, napríklad keď sa minie atrament. Indikátor naľavo signalizuje stav farebnej kazety FINE a indikátor napravo stav čiernej kazety FINE. (5) Tlačidlo Papier (Paper) Slúži na výber veľkosti strany a typu média. (6) Tlačidlo SKENOVAŤ (SCAN) Spúšťa skenovanie originálu, ktorý chcete uložiť v počítači. (7) Tlačidlo Stop/Reset Ruší úkony. Stlačením tohto tlačidla môžete tiež zrušiť prebiehajúcu tlačovú úlohu, úlohu kopírovania alebo skenovania. (8) Tlačidlo Farebne (Color) * Hlavné súčasti Strana 8 z celkového počtu 684 Spúšťa farebné kopírovanie. Stlačením tohto tlačidla môžete tiež dokončiť výber položky nastavenia. (9) Tlačidlo Čiernobielo (Black) * Spúšťa čiernobiele kopírovanie. Stlačením tohto tlačidla môžete tiež dokončiť výber položky nastavenia. (10) Tlačidlo a indikátor Prispôsobiť strane (Fit to Page) Povoľuje funkciu kopírovania s prispôsobením strane. Veľkosť kopírovaných originálov môžete automaticky zväčšovať alebo zmenšovať tak, aby sa prispôsobili vybratej veľkosti strany. Pokiaľ je funkcia kopírovania s prispôsobením strane vypnutá, môžete vytvárať kópie rovnakej veľkosti ako originál. (11) Tlačidlo (Údržba) Slúži na zadanie kódu údržby. (12) Indikátor Papier (Paper) Rozsvietením signalizuje veľkosť strany a typ média vybraté pomocou tlačidla Papier (Paper) . (13) Indikátor Alarm Svieti alebo bliká na oranžovo, keď sa vyskytne chyba. Napríklad keď sa minie papier alebo atrament. * V softvérových aplikáciách alebo príručkách sa tlačidlá Čiernobielo (Black) a Farebne (Color) spoločne nazývajú Spustiť (Start) alebo OK. Na začiatok strany Displej LED a základné úkony Strana 9 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Prehľad zariadenia > Displej LED a základné úkony Displej LED a základné úkony Zariadenie môžete používať na vytváranie kópií alebo vykonávanie operácií údržby bez použitia počítača. Táto časť opisuje displej LED a základné úkony vykonávané pomocou ovládacieho panela. Po zapnutí zariadenia sa na displeji LED spravidla zobrazí číslo 1. Displej LED signalizuje stav zariadenia nasledujúcim spôsobom. Stav zariadenia Pri kopírovaní Displej LED Počet kópií (bliká) Pri tlači, skenovaní alebo vykonávaní údržby (bliká v tomto poradí) Pokiaľ sa objaví chyba Striedavo sa zobrazujú písmeno E a príslušné číslo. Podrobné informácie o kódoch chýb nájdete v časti Riešenie problémov v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka . Striedavo sa zobrazujú písmeno P a príslušné číslo. Zrejme sa vyskytla chyba, ktorá vyžaduje kontaktovanie servisného strediska. Bližšie informácie nájdete v časti Riešenie problémov v príručke onscreen manual Rozšírená príručka . Pokiaľ je otvorená skenovacia jednotka (kryt) (bliká) Poznámka Ak je k zariadeniu pripojené zariadenie kompatibilné so štandardom PictBridge, napríklad digitálny fotoaparát, na displeji LED sa bude zobrazovať písmeno C (len na zariadení MP270 series). Počet kópií Po spustení kopírovania sa na displeji LED zobrazí zadaný počet kópií. Počas kopírovania bliká na displeji LED číslo, ktoré sa postupne o jedno znižuje, čím signalizuje počet zostávajúcich kópií. Každým stlačením tlačidla [ +] sa číslo na displeji LED zvýši o jedno. Keď sa zobrazí písmeno F, znamená to, že počet kópií je nastavený na hodnotu 20. Opätovným stlačením tlačidla [ +] sa vrátite späť na Displej LED a základné úkony Strana 10 z celkového počtu 684 hodnotu 1. Kódy údržby (Údržba). Po zobrazení Ak chcete vykonať údržbu zariadenia, opakovane stláčajte tlačidlo požadovaného kódu na displeji LED stlačte tlačidlo Čiernobielo (Black) alebo Farebne (Color) . Kód Úkon údržby Pozrite si časť Vytlačí sa vzorka na kontrolu dýz. Tlač vzorky na kontrolu dýz Vyčistí sa tlačová hlava. Čistenie tlačovej hlavy Hĺbkovo sa vyčistí tlačová hlava. Hĺbkové čistenie tlačovej hlavy Vytlačí sa hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy. Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy Naskenovaním hárka na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy sa automaticky zarovná tlačová hlava. Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy Vytlačia sa aktuálne hodnoty upravujúce polohu tlačovej hlavy. Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy Vyčistí sa valček podávača papiera. Čistenie valčeka podávača papiera Vyčistí sa vnútro zariadenia. Čistenie vnútra zariadenia (čistenie spodnej platne) Slúži na prepínanie medzi veľkosťami Prepínanie medzi veľkosťami papiera A4 a 8,5" x 11" A4 a 8,5" x 11" (Letter) papiera (Letter) vloženého v zadnom zásobníku. (Toto nastavenie sa používa pri vytváraní kópií.) Zariadenie sa nastaví tak, aby bránilo odretiu papiera. Informácie nájdete v odseku Na papieri sú šmuhy/ Vytlačený povrch je poškriabaný v časti Riešenie problémov v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka . Kódy chýb Pokiaľ nastane chyba, na displeji LED sa začnú striedavo zobrazovať písmeno E a príslušné číslo, ktoré označuje kód chyby. Napríklad E, 1, 6. (bliká v tomto poradí) Poznámka Podrobné informácie o kódoch chýb nájdete v časti Riešenie problémov v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka . Ak sa zobrazí kód chyby s písmenom P, zrejme sa vyskytla chyba, ktorá vyžaduje kontaktovanie servisného strediska. Bližšie informácie nájdete v časti Riešenie problémov v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená Displej LED a základné úkony Strana 11 z celkového počtu 684 príručka . Na začiatok strany Kopírovanie Strana 12 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Kopírovanie Kopírovanie Okrem bežných kópií môžete z originálu vytvárať zväčšené alebo zmenšené kópie prispôsobené strane a kópie vytlačenej fotografie bez okrajov. Kopírovanie dokumentov Prepínanie medzi veľkosťami papiera A4 a 8,5" x 11" (Letter) Kopírovanie fotografií Kopírovanie s prispôsobením strane Na začiatok strany Kopírovanie dokumentov Strana 13 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Kopírovanie > Kopírovanie dokumentov Kopírovanie dokumentov Táto časť opisuje postup pri kopírovaní dokumentov veľkosti A4 alebo Letter na obyčajný papier. Konkrétne úkony sú opísané v poznámkach a operačných postupoch na príslušnej referenčnej strane. Musíte si pripraviť: Originály, ktoré chcete kopírovať. Pozrite si časť Originály, ktoré možno použiť . Papier na tlač. Pozrite si časť Použiteľné typy médií . 1. Pripravte sa na kopírovanie. (1) Zapnite zariadenie. Pozrite si časť Ovládací panel . (2) Vložte papier. Pozrite si časť Vkladanie obyčajného alebo fotografického papiera . V tomto príklade sme vložili obyčajný papier veľkosti A4 alebo Letter. (3) Opatrne otvorte výstupný zásobník papiera a potom aj jeho vysúvaciu časť. Kopírovanie dokumentov Strana 14 z celkového počtu 684 (4) Položte originál na ploché predlohové sklo. Pozrite si časť Umiestnenie originálov . Originál umiestnite tak, aby STRANA URČENÁ NA KOPÍROVANIE SMEROVALA NADOL a bola zarovnaná so značkou zarovnania , ako je to znázornené nižšie. Potom opatrne zatvorte kryt dokumentov. Poznámka Podrobnosti o typoch a podmienkach pre originály, ktoré možno kopírovať, nájdete v časti Originály, ktoré možno použiť . 2. Spustite kopírovanie. (1) Opakovaným stláčaním tlačidla [ +] zadajte počet kópií (max. 20 kópií). Ak chcete vytvoriť 1 až 9 kópií alebo 20 kópií Na displeji LED zobrazte požadovaný počet kópií. Kopírovanie dokumentov Strana 15 z celkového počtu 684 Každým stlačením tlačidla [ +] sa číslo na displeji LED zvýši o jedno. Keď sa zobrazí písmeno F, znamená to, že počet kópií je nastavený na hodnotu 20. Opätovným stlačením tlačidla [ +] sa vrátite späť na hodnotu 1. Ak chcete vytvoriť 10 až 19 kópií (1) Na displeji LED zobrazte písmeno F. (2) Vložte len požadovaný počet hárkov na kopírovanie. (2) Opakovaným stláčaním tlačidla Papier (Paper) vyberte veľkosť strany a typ média. Indikátor Papier (Paper) signalizuje vybratú veľkosť strany a typ média. V tomto príklade sme vybrali typ Plain Paper veľkosti A4 alebo 8,5" x 11". Poznámka Môžete vybrať nasledujúce veľkosti strán a typy médií. - Typ Plain Paper veľkosti A4 alebo 8,5" x 11" - Typ Photo Paper veľkosti A4 alebo 8,5" x 11" - Typ Photo Paper veľkosti 10 x 15 cm alebo 4" x 6" Bez ohľadu na veľkosť signalizovanú na ovládacom paneli môžete prepínať medzi veľkosťami A4 a 8,5" x 11" (Letter) papiera vloženého v zadnom zásobníku. Pozrite si časť Prepínanie medzi veľkosťami papiera A4 a 8,5" x 11" (Letter) . Ak je zapnutá funkcia kopírovania s prispôsobením strane, môžete veľkosť kopírovaných originálov automaticky zväčšovať alebo zmenšovať tak, aby sa prispôsobili vybratej veľkosti strany. V takom prípade sa originál skopíruje na obyčajný papier s okrajmi a na fotografický papier bez okrajov. Ak chcete vytvoriť kópiu rovnakej veľkosti ako originál, zrušte funkciu kopírovania s prispôsobením strane. Pozrite si časť Kopírovanie s prispôsobením strane . (3) Stlačením tlačidla Farebne (Color) nastavte farebné kopírovanie, stlačením tlačidla Čiernobielo (Black) čiernobiele kopírovanie. Zariadenie spustí kopírovanie. Počas kopírovania bliká na displeji LED číslo, ktoré sa postupne o jedno znižuje, čím signalizuje počet zostávajúcich kópií. Po dokončení kopírovania zoberte originál z plochého predlohového skla. Ak chcete vytvoriť 10 až 19 kópií Pokiaľ sa minú všetky vložené papiere, nastane chyba minutia papiera (na displeji LED sa zobrazí kód E, 0, 2). Chybu zrušte stlačením tlačidla Stop/Reset . Poznámka Kvalitu tlače môžete nastaviť na hodnotu „Fast“ (uprednostnenie rýchlosti) len v prípade, ak je ako veľkosť strany a typ média vybratý obyčajný papier veľkosti A4 alebo Letter. Nastavenie kvality tlače na hodnotu „Fast“ (uprednostnenie rýchlosti) 1. V bode (3) kroku č. 2 stlačte a minimálne dve sekundy podržte tlačidlo Farebne (Color) alebo Čiernobielo (Black) . Displej LED raz zabliká. * Ak tlačidlo Farebne (Color) alebo Čiernobielo (Black) podržíte kratšie ako dve sekundy, zariadenie spustí kopírovanie s kvalitou tlače „Standard“. 2. Uvoľnite tlačidlo. Zariadenie spustí kopírovanie. Ak kvalitu tlače nastavíte na hodnotu „Fast“, rýchlosť tlače sa uprednostní pred kvalitou. Ak chcete uprednostniť kvalitu, tlačidlo Farebne (Color) alebo Čiernobielo (Black) podržte stlačené kratšie ako dve sekundy, čím sa spustí kopírovanie s kvalitou tlače „ Standard“. Dôležité Kým sa kopírovanie nedokončí, neotvárajte kryt dokumentov ani nepremiestňujte položený originál. Poznámka Kopírovanie dokumentov Strana 16 z celkového počtu 684 Ak chcete zrušiť kopírovanie, stlačte tlačidlo Stop/Reset . Prepínanie medzi veľkosťami papiera A4 a 8,5" x 11" (Letter) Môžete prepínať medzi veľkosťami A4 a 8,5" x 11" (Letter) papiera vloženého v zadnom zásobníku. Toto nastavenie je užitočné, ak zvyčajne vkladáte papier veľkosti Letter do zadného zásobníka, pričom ovládací panel signalizuje veľkosť strany A4, alebo naopak. 1. Opakovane stláčajte tlačidlo 2. Stlačením tlačidla Čiernobielo (Black) vyberte veľkosť A4, stlačením tlačidla Farebne (Color) veľkosť 8,5" x 11" (Letter). (Údržba), kým sa nezobrazí písmeno d. Poznámka Po prepnutí na veľkosť A4 alebo 8,5" x 11" (Letter) vložte papier vybratej veľkosti bez ohľadu na veľkosť signalizovanú na ovládacom paneli. - Ak je nastavená veľkosť strany A4, vložte obyčajný alebo fotografický papier veľkosti A4. - Ak je nastavená veľkosť strany 8,5" x 11" (Letter), vložte obyčajný alebo fotografický papier veľkosti Letter. Na začiatok strany Kopírovanie fotografií Strana 17 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Kopírovanie > Kopírovanie fotografií Kopírovanie fotografií Táto časť opisuje postup pri kopírovaní vytlačenej fotografie na fotografický papier veľkosti 4" x 6"/10 x 15 cm. Musíte si pripraviť: Vytlačené fotografie. Papier na tlač fotografií. Pozrite si časť Použiteľné typy médií . 1. Pripravte sa na kopírovanie fotografií. (1) Zapnite zariadenie. Pozrite si časť Ovládací panel . (2) Vložte papier. Pozrite si časť Vkladanie obyčajného alebo fotografického papiera . V tomto príklade sme vložili fotografický papier veľkosti 4" x 6"/10 x 15 cm. (3) Opatrne otvorte výstupný zásobník papiera a potom aj jeho vysúvaciu časť. (4) Umiestnite fotografiu na ploché predlohové sklo. Pozrite si časť Umiestnenie originálov . 2. Spustite kopírovanie. (1) Opakovaným stláčaním tlačidla [ +] zadajte počet kópií. Pozrite si krok č. 2 v časti Kopírovanie dokumentov . (2) Opakovaným stláčaním tlačidla Papier (Paper) vyberte veľkosť strany a typ média. Indikátor Papier (Paper) signalizuje vybratú veľkosť strany a typ média. V tomto príklade sme vybrali typ Photo Paper veľkosti 10 x 15 cm alebo 4" x 6". Poznámka Môžete vybrať nasledujúce veľkosti strán a typy médií. - Typ Plain Paper veľkosti A4 alebo 8,5" x 11" Kopírovanie fotografií Strana 18 z celkového počtu 684 - Typ Photo Paper veľkosti A4 alebo 8,5" x 11" - Typ Photo Paper veľkosti 10 x 15 cm alebo 4" x 6" Bez ohľadu na veľkosť signalizovanú na ovládacom paneli môžete prepínať medzi veľkosťami A4 a 8,5" x 11" (Letter) papiera vloženého v zadnom zásobníku. Pozrite si časť Prepínanie medzi veľkosťami papiera A4 a 8,5" x 11" (Letter) . Ak je zapnutá funkcia kopírovania s prispôsobením strane, môžete veľkosť kopírovaných originálov automaticky zväčšovať alebo zmenšovať tak, aby sa prispôsobili vybratej veľkosti strany. V takom prípade sa originál skopíruje na obyčajný papier s okrajmi a na fotografický papier bez okrajov. Ak chcete vytvoriť kópiu rovnakej veľkosti ako originál, zrušte funkciu kopírovania s prispôsobením strane. Pozrite si časť Kopírovanie s prispôsobením strane . (3) Stlačením tlačidla Farebne (Color) nastavte farebné kopírovanie, stlačením tlačidla Čiernobielo (Black) čiernobiele kopírovanie. Zariadenie spustí kopírovanie. Po dokončení kopírovania zoberte fotografiu z plochého predlohového skla. Dôležité Kým sa kopírovanie nedokončí, neotvárajte kryt dokumentov ani nepremiestňujte položenú fotografiu. Poznámka Ak chcete zrušiť kopírovanie, stlačte tlačidlo Stop/Reset . Na začiatok strany Kopírovanie s prispôsobením strane Strana 19 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Kopírovanie > Kopírovanie s prispôsobením strane Kopírovanie s prispôsobením strane Funkcia kopírovania s prispôsobením strane umožňuje kopírovaný originál automaticky zväčšovať alebo zmenšovať tak, aby sa prispôsobil vybratej veľkosti strany. 1. Pripravte sa na kopírovanie. Pozrite si krok č. 1 v časti Kopírovanie dokumentov . 2. Opakovaným stláčaním tlačidla [ +] zadajte počet kópií. 3. Opakovaným stláčaním tlačidla Papier (Paper) vyberte veľkosť strany a typ média. Poznámka Pokiaľ ako typ média vyberiete obyčajný papier, originál sa skopíruje s okrajmi. Pokiaľ ako typ média vyberiete fotografický papier, originál sa skopíruje bez okrajov a vyplní celú stranu. Pri tlači bez okrajov môže dôjsť na okrajoch k jemnému orezaniu, pretože kopírovaný obrázok sa zväčší, aby vyplnil celú stranu. 4. Stlačte tlačidlo Prispôsobiť strane (Fit to Page) . Rozsvieti sa indikátor Prispôsobiť strane (Fit to Page) a zapne sa funkcia kopírovania s prispôsobením strane. Kopírovaný originál sa automaticky zväčší alebo zmenší, aby sa prispôsobil vybratej veľkosti strany. Poznámka Ak chcete zrušiť funkciu kopírovania s prispôsobením strane a vytvárať kópie rovnakej veľkosti ako originál, opätovne stlačte tlačidlo Prispôsobiť strane (Fit to Page) . 5. Stlačením tlačidla Farebne (Color) nastavte farebné kopírovanie, stlačením tlačidla Čiernobielo (Black) čiernobiele kopírovanie. Zariadenie spustí kopírovanie s prispôsobením strane. Po dokončení kopírovania zoberte originál z plochého predlohového skla. Dôležité Kým sa kopírovanie nedokončí, neotvárajte kryt dokumentov ani nepremiestňujte položený originál. Poznámka Kopírovanie s prispôsobením strane Strana 20 z celkového počtu 684 Kvalitu tlače môžete nastaviť na hodnotu „Fast“ (uprednostnenie rýchlosti) len v prípade, ak je ako veľkosť strany a typ média vybratý obyčajný papier veľkosti A4 alebo Letter. Ak chcete nastaviť kvalitu tlače na hodnotu „Fast“, v kroku č. 5 stlačte a minimálne dve sekundy podržte tlačidlo Farebne (Color) alebo Čiernobielo (Black) . Pozrite si časť Nastavenie kvality tlače na hodnotu „Fast“ (uprednostnenie rýchlosti) . Ak chcete zrušiť kopírovanie, stlačte tlačidlo Stop/Reset . Na začiatok strany Skenovanie Strana 21 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Skenovanie Skenovanie Naskenované údaje môžete uložiť v počítači a upraviť alebo spracovať pomocou dodanej softvérovej aplikácie. Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači Prípravy na skenovanie pomocou ovládacieho panela Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači Na začiatok strany Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači Strana 22 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Skenovanie > Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači Táto časť opisuje postup týkajúci sa skenovania originálov pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia a ich ukladania v počítači podľa nastavení zadaných programom MP Navigator EX. Informácie o skenovaní z počítača nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka . Dôležité Spoločnosť Canon nenesie zodpovednosť za poškodenie ani stratu údajov z akéhokoľvek dôvodu, a to ani počas záručnej doby zariadenia. Prípravy na skenovanie pomocou ovládacieho panela Pred skenovaním originálov skontrolujte nasledujúce skutočnosti. Sú nainštalované potrebné softvérové aplikácie (ovládače MP Drivers a program MP Navigator EX)? Ak softvérové aplikácie nie sú nainštalovane, pozrite si tlačenú príručku Prvé spustenie . Sú požadované nastavenia zadané programom MP Navigator EX? Ak pomocou ovládacieho panela skenujete tak, aby sa originály ukladali v počítači, môžete v položke Preferences programu MP Navigator EX zadať nastavenia na ukladanie naskenovaných údajov. Podrobné informácie o týchto nastaveniach nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka . Vyhovuje originál určený na skenovanie požiadavkám na originály ukladané na ploché predlohové sklo? Bližšie informácie nájdete v časti Originály, ktoré možno použiť . Je zariadenie správne pripojené k počítaču? Zistite, či je pripojenie zariadenia k počítaču fyzicky bezpečné. Dôležité Počas skenovania originálov neodpájajte ani znova nepripájajte kábel USB. Ak používate systém Mac OS X v.10.3.9 Program MP Navigator EX musíte nastaviť ako úvodnú softvérovú aplikáciu aplikácie Image Capture v ponuke Aplikácie (Applications) systému Mac OS X. (1) V ponuke Prejsť (Go) vyberte položku Aplikácie (Applications) a potom dvakrát kliknite na ikonu Image Capture. (2) V ľavom dolnom rohu okna skenera kliknite na tlačidlo Možnosti (Options), v zozname Aplikácia, ktorá sa spustí pri stlačení tlačidla skenera (Application to launch when scanner button is pressed) vyberte možnosť MP Navigator EX 3 a potom kliknite na tlačidlo OK. Ak chcete ukončiť aplikáciu Image Capture, v ponuke Image Capture vyberte možnosť Ukončiť aplikáciu Image Capture (Quit Image Capture). Poznámka Ak sa tlačidlo Možnosti (Options) nezobrazí, v ponuke Image Capture vyberte položku Predvoľby (Preferences), kliknite na položku Skener (Scanner) a potom kliknutím na možnosť Vždy, keď je to možné, použiť softvér TWAIN (Use TWAIN software whenever possible) zrušte túto možnosť. Potom ukončite a reštartujte aplikáciu Image Capture. Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači 1. Pripravte skenovanie. Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači Strana 23 z celkového počtu 684 (1) Zapnite zariadenie. Pozrite si časť Ovládací panel . (2) Položte originál na ploché predlohové sklo. Pozrite si časť Umiestnenie originálov . 2. Stlačením tlačidla SKENOVAŤ (SCAN) spustite skenovanie. Originál sa naskenuje a uloží v počítači podľa nastavení zadaných programom MP Navigator EX. Po dokončení skenovania zoberte originál z plochého predlohového skla. Dôležité Kým je zariadenie v prevádzke, nevypínajte ho. Kým sa skenovanie nedokončí, neotvárajte kryt dokumentov ani nepremiestňujte položený originál. Poznámka V závislosti od typu originálu sa nemusí správne naskenovať poloha a veľkosť originálu. V takom prípade si pozrite príručku on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka a zmeňte nastavenia Document Type a Document Size v programe MP Navigator EX, aby sa zhodovali so skenovaným originálom, a naskenujte ho. Ak používate systém Windows Vista Po vykonaní kroku č. 2 sa môže zobraziť obrazovka výberu programu. V takom prípade vyberte program MP Navigator EX Ver3.0 a kliknite na tlačidlo OK. Ak používate systém Windows XP Po prvom vykonaní kroku č. 2 sa môže zobraziť obrazovka výberu programu. V takom prípade vyberte program MP Navigator EX Ver3.0 ako aplikačný softvér, ktorý chcete použiť. Potom vyberte príkaz Pre túto akciu vždy použiť tento program (Always use this program for this action) a kliknite na tlačidlo OK. Odteraz sa bude program MP Navigator EX spúšťať automaticky. Na začiatok strany Tlač z počítača Strana 24 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Tlač z počítača Tlač z počítača Táto časť opisuje spôsob tlače fotografií alebo dokumentov pomocou počítača. Pomocou programu Easy-PhotoPrint EX dodaného so zariadením môžete poľahky tlačiť fotografie zhotovené pomocou digitálneho fotoaparátu. Tlač fotografií (Easy-PhotoPrint EX) Používanie rôznych funkcií programu Easy-PhotoPrint EX Tlač dokumentov (Windows) Tlač dokumentov (Macintosh) V systéme Mac OS X v.10.5.x V systéme Mac OS X v.10.4.x alebo Mac OS X v.10.3.9 Na začiatok strany Tlač fotografií (Easy-PhotoPrint EX) Strana 25 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Tlač z počítača > Tlač fotografií (Easy-PhotoPrint EX) Tlač fotografií (Easy-PhotoPrint EX) Pomocou programu Easy-PhotoPrint EX dodaného so zariadením môžete tlačiť obrazové údaje uložené v počítači. Táto časť opisuje postup pri tlači fotografií bez okrajov na fotografický papier veľkosti 4" x 6"/10 x 15 cm. Podrobné informácie o programe Easy-PhotoPrint EX nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka . Poznámka Obrazovky použité v tejto časti opisujú tlač v systéme Windows. Úkony sú rovnaké ako pri tlači z počítačov Macintosh. Ak ste program Easy-PhotoPrint EX nenainštalovali alebo odinštalovali, nainštalujte ho z disku Inštalačný disk CD-ROM (Setup CD-ROM). Program Easy-PhotoPrint EX nainštalujete výberom položky Easy-PhotoPrint EX počas inštalácie Custom Install. 1. Pripravte tlač. (1) Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie zapnuté. Pozrite si časť Ovládací panel . (2) Vložte papier. Pozrite si časť Vkladanie obyčajného alebo fotografického papiera . V tomto príklade sme vložili fotografický papier veľkosti 4" x 6"/10 x 15 cm. (3) Opatrne otvorte výstupný zásobník papiera a potom aj jeho vysúvaciu časť. 2. Spustite program Easy-PhotoPrint EX a vyberte položku Photo Print. (1) Spustite program Easy-PhotoPrint EX. Dvakrát kliknite na ikonu (Easy-PhotoPrint EX) na pracovnej ploche. Kliknite sem: Easy-PhotoPrint EX V ponuke Prejsť (Go) vyberte položky Aplikácie (Applications), Canon Utilities, Easy-PhotoPrint EX a dvakrát kliknite na položku Easy-PhotoPrint EX. Tlač fotografií (Easy-PhotoPrint EX) Strana 26 z celkového počtu 684 Poznámka Ak chcete program Easy-PhotoPrint EX spustiť z ponuky Solution Menu, na pracovnej ploche dvakrát kliknite na ikonu (Solution Menu) a potom na ikonu (Print photos or albums, etc.). Pozrite si časť Solution Menu . Ak chcete program Easy-PhotoPrint EX spustiť z ponuky Štart (Start), postupne vyberte položky Všetky programy (All Programs) (alebo Programy (Programs)), Canon Utilities, Easy-PhotoPrint EX a Easy-PhotoPrint EX. Ak chcete program Easy-PhotoPrint EX spustiť z ponuky Solution Menu, v Doku (Dock) kliknite na ikonu (Solution Menu) a potom na ikonu Pozrite si časť Solution Menu . (Print photos or albums, etc.). (2) Kliknite na položku Photo Print. Poznámka Okrem položky Photo Print môžete vybrať aj položky Album, Calendar, Stickers atď. Pozrite si časť Používanie rôznych funkcií programu Easy-PhotoPrint EX . 3. Vyberte fotografiu, ktorú chcete vytlačiť. (1) Vyberte priečinok, v ktorom sú fotografie uložené. (2) Kliknite na fotografiu, ktorú chcete vytlačiť. Ako počet kópií sa zobrazí číslo 1 a vybratá fotografia sa zobrazí v oblasti vybratých obrázkov (A). Naraz môžete vybrať aj dve alebo viac fotografií. Poznámka Ak chcete vytlačiť dve alebo viac kópií, klikaním na tlačidlo (šípka nahor) zmeňte počet kópií. Ak chcete svoj výber zrušiť, kliknutím na fotografiu zrušte jej výber v oblasti vybratých (Delete Imported Image). Prípadne pomocou tlačidla fotografií a potom kliknite na tlačidlo (šípka nadol) môžete zmeniť počet kópií na nulu. Vybratú fotografiu môžete tiež opraviť alebo vylepšiť. Pozrite si časť Používanie rôznych funkcií programu Easy-PhotoPrint EX . (3) Kliknite na tlačidlo Select Paper. Tlač fotografií (Easy-PhotoPrint EX) 4. Strana 27 z celkového počtu 684 Vyberte typ vloženého papiera. (1) Skontrolujte, či je v poli Printer vybratý názov vášho zariadenia. (2) V ponukách Paper Size a Media Type vyberte veľkosť a typ vloženého papiera. V tomto príklade sme v ponuke Paper Size vybrali veľkosť 4"x6" 10x15cm a v ponuke Media Type typ vloženého fotografického papiera. Poznámka Ak vyberiete nesprávny typ média, zariadenie nemusí tlačiť v správnej kvalite. (3) Kliknite na položku Layout/Print. 5. Vyberte rozloženie a spustite tlač. (1) Vyberte rozloženie fotografie. V tomto príklade sme vybrali možnosť Borderless (full). Zobrazí sa ukážka s vybratým rozložením, na ktorej môžete skontrolovať požadovaný výsledok tlače. Poznámka Môžete zmeniť orientáciu fotografie alebo orezať fotografie, ktoré chcete vytlačiť. Podrobné informácie o týchto úkonoch nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka . (2) Kliknite na tlačidlo Print. Tlač fotografií (Easy-PhotoPrint EX) Strana 28 z celkového počtu 684 Poznámka Ak chcete zrušiť prebiehajúcu tlačovú úlohu, stlačte tlačidlo Stop/Reset na zariadení alebo kliknite na možnosť Cancel Printing v monitore stavu tlačiarne. Ak chcete zobraziť monitor stavu tlačiarne, na paneli úloh kliknite na položku Canon XXX Printer (kde XXX označuje názov zariadenia). Kliknutím na ikonu tlačiarne v Doku (Dock) zobrazíte zoznam prebiehajúcich tlačových úloh. Ak chcete zrušiť prebiehajúcu tlačovú úlohu, v zozname Názov (Name) vyberte požadovanú úlohu a potom kliknite na tlačidlo Odstrániť (Delete). Ak chcete prebiehajúcu úlohu dočasne zastaviť, kliknite na tlačidlo Pozastaviť (Hold). Ak chcete dočasne zastaviť všetky úlohy v zozname, kliknite na tlačidlo Pozastaviť tlačiareň (Pause Printer) (alebo Zastaviť úlohy (Stop Jobs)). Na začiatok strany Používanie rôznych funkcií programu Easy-PhotoPrint EX Rozšírená príručka Strana 29 z celkového počtu 684 Riešenie problémov Obsah > Tlač z počítača > Tlač fotografií (Easy-PhotoPrint EX) > Používanie rôznych funkcií programu Easy-PhotoPrint EX Používanie rôznych funkcií programu Easy-PhotoPrint EX Táto časť predstavuje niekoľko užitočných funkcií programu Easy-PhotoPrint EX. Podrobné informácie nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka . Vytváranie vlastných výtlačkov Z fotografií si môžete vytvoriť album alebo kalendár. Album Calendar Stickers Layout Print Korekcia fotografií Na automatickú alebo manuálnu úpravu, korekciu alebo vylepšenie fotografií môžete použiť napríklad funkciu Red-Eye Correction, Face Sharpener, Digital Face Smoothing, Brightness alebo Contrast. Brightness Používanie rôznych funkcií programu Easy-PhotoPrint EX Strana 30 z celkového počtu 684 Na začiatok strany Tlač dokumentov (Windows) Strana 31 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Tlač z počítača > Tlač dokumentov (Windows) Tlač dokumentov (Windows) Táto časť opisuje postup pri tlači dokumentu veľkosti A4 na obyčajný papier. Podrobné informácie nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka . Poznámka V niektorých softvérových aplikáciách sa môžu jednotlivé úkony líšiť. Podrobné informácie o úkonoch nájdete v príručke k aplikácii. Obrazovky použité v tejto časti opisujú tlač v operačnom systéme Windows Vista Ultimate Edition (v ďalšom texte označovaný ako Windows Vista). 1. Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie zapnuté. Pozrite si časť Ovládací panel . 2. Vložte papier. Pozrite si časť Vkladanie obyčajného alebo fotografického papiera . V tomto príklade sme vložili obyčajný papier veľkosti A4. 3. Opatrne otvorte výstupný zásobník papiera a potom aj jeho vysúvaciu časť. 4. Použitím vhodnej softvérovej aplikácie vytvorte (alebo otvorte) dokument, ktorý chcete vytlačiť. 5. Otvorte okno nastavenia ovládača tlačiarne. (1) V ponuke Súbor (File) alebo na paneli príkazov softvérovej aplikácie vyberte položku Tlačiť (Print). Zobrazí sa dialógové okno Tlač (Print). (2) Skontrolujte, či je vybratý názov zariadenia. Poznámka Ak je vybratý názov iného zariadenia, kliknutím vyberte názov svojho zariadenia. (3) Kliknite na položku Predvoľby (Preferences) (alebo Vlastnosti (Properties)). Tlač dokumentov (Windows) 6. Strana 32 z celkového počtu 684 Určte požadované nastavenia tlače. (1) V ponuke Commonly Used Settings vyberte položku Business Document. Poznámka Ak je v ponuke Commonly Used Settings vybratý objekt tlače, napríklad Business Document alebo Photo Printing, automaticky sa vyberú položky ponuky Additional Features. Zobrazia sa tiež nastavenia vhodné pre daný objekt tlače, napríklad typ média alebo kvalita tlače. Po zadaní minimálne dvoch kópií v ponuke Copies sa začiarkne políčko Collate. (2) Skontrolujte zobrazené nastavenia. V tomto príklade kontrolujeme, či je v ponuke Media Type vybratá možnosť Plain Paper, v ponuke Print Quality možnosť Standard a v ponuke Printer Paper Size možnosť A4. Poznámka Nastavenia môžete zmeniť. Po zmene položky Printer Paper Size však skontrolujte, či nastavenie Page Size na karte Page Setup zodpovedá nastaveniu v softvérovej aplikácii. Podrobné informácie nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka . Ak vyberiete nesprávny typ média, zariadenie nemusí tlačiť v správnej kvalite. (3) Kliknite na tlačidlo OK. Poznámka Ak sa chcete dozvedieť podrobné informácie o funkciách ovládača tlačiarne, kliknutím na položky Help alebo Instructions zobrazte Pomocníka online alebo príručku on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka . Ak je príručka on-screen manual nainštalovaná v počítači, na kartách Quick Setup, Main a Maintenance sa zobrazí tlačidlo Instructions. Zmenené nastavenia môžete pomenovať a pridať do ponuky Commonly Used Settings. Podrobné informácie nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka . Ak chcete pri najbližšom otvorení okna nastavenia ovládača tlačiarne zobraziť aktuálne nastavenia, začiarknite políčko Always Print with Current Settings. Niektoré softvérové aplikácie nemusia túto funkciu podporovať. Ak chcete zobrazením ukážky skontrolovať výsledok tlače, začiarknite políčko Preview before printing. Niektoré softvérové aplikácie nemusia mať funkciu ukážky. Podrobné nastavenia tlače môžete určiť na karte Main alebo Page Setup. Podrobné informácie nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka . 7. Spustite tlač. Kliknutím na tlačidlo Tlačiť (Print) (alebo OK) spustite tlač. Tlač dokumentov (Windows) Strana 33 z celkového počtu 684 Poznámka Pri tlači na obálky sa zobrazí hlásenie informujúce o spôsobe ich vkladania. Ak začiarknete políčko Do not show this message again., hlásenie sa nabudúce nezobrazí. Bližšie informácie o nastaveniach tlače obálok nájdete v časti Vkladanie obálok. Ak chcete zrušiť prebiehajúcu tlačovú úlohu, stlačte tlačidlo Stop/Reset na zariadení alebo kliknite na možnosť Cancel Printing v monitore stavu tlačiarne. Ak chcete zobraziť monitor stavu tlačiarne, na paneli úloh kliknite na položku Canon XXX Printer (kde XXX označuje názov zariadenia). Ak sa rovné čiary vytlačia nezarovnané alebo ak sú výsledky tlače neuspokojivé, upravte polohu tlačovej hlavy. Pozrite si časť Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy. Na začiatok strany Tlač dokumentov (Macintosh) Strana 34 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Tlač z počítača > Tlač dokumentov (Macintosh) Tlač dokumentov (Macintosh) Táto časť opisuje postup pri tlači dokumentu veľkosti A4 na obyčajný papier. Podrobné informácie nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka . Poznámka V niektorých softvérových aplikáciách sa môžu jednotlivé úkony líšiť. Podrobné informácie o úkonoch nájdete v príručke k aplikácii. V systéme Mac OS X v.10.5.x 1. Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie zapnuté. Pozrite si časť Ovládací panel . 2. Vložte papier. Pozrite si časť Vkladanie obyčajného alebo fotografického papiera . V tomto príklade sme vložili obyčajný papier veľkosti A4. 3. Opatrne otvorte výstupný zásobník papiera a potom aj jeho vysúvaciu časť. 4. Použitím vhodnej softvérovej aplikácie vytvorte (alebo otvorte) dokument, ktorý chcete vytlačiť. 5. Otvorte dialógové okno Tlač (Print). V ponuke Súbor (File) softvérovej aplikácie vyberte položku Tlačiť (Print). Zobrazí sa dialógové okno Tlač (Print). Poznámka Ak sa zobrazí dialógové okno znázornené nižšie, kliknite na tlačidlo 6. (šípka nadol). Určte požadované nastavenia tlače. (1) Skontrolujte, či je v poli Printer vybratý názov vášho zariadenia. (2) V ponuke Paper Size vyberte veľkosť strany vloženého papiera. V tomto príklade sme vybrali veľkosť A4. (3) V rozbaľovacej ponuke vyberte položku Quality & Media. Tlač dokumentov (Macintosh) (4) V ponuke Media Type vyberte typ vloženého média. V tomto príklade sme vybrali možnosť Plain Paper. Poznámka Ak vyberiete nesprávny typ média, zariadenie nemusí tlačiť v správnej kvalite. (5) V ponuke Print Quality vyberte kvalitu tlače. V tomto príklade sme vybrali možnosť Standard. Poznámka Podrobné informácie o kvalite tlače nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka . Poznámka Ak chcete zobraziť podrobné informácie o funkciách ovládača tlačiarne, kliknite na ikonu (otázka) na obrazovke Quality & Media, Color Options, Borderless Printing alebo Margin. Naľavo od dialógového okna sa zobrazí ukážka, na ktorej môžete skontrolovať výsledky tlače. Niektoré softvérové aplikácie nemusia mať funkciu ukážky. 7. Spustite tlač. Kliknutím na tlačidlo Tlačiť (Print) spustite tlač. Poznámka Kliknutím na ikonu tlačiarne v Doku (Dock) zobrazíte zoznam prebiehajúcich tlačových úloh. Ak chcete zrušiť prebiehajúcu tlačovú úlohu, v zozname Názov (Name) vyberte požadovanú úlohu a potom kliknite na tlačidlo Odstrániť (Delete). Ak chcete prebiehajúcu úlohu dočasne zastaviť, kliknite na tlačidlo Pozastaviť (Hold). Ak chcete dočasne zastaviť všetky úlohy v zozname, kliknite na tlačidlo Pozastaviť tlačiareň (Pause Printer). Ak sa rovné čiary vytlačia nezarovnané alebo ak sú výsledky tlače neuspokojivé, upravte Strana 35 z celkového počtu 684 Tlač dokumentov (Macintosh) Strana 36 z celkového počtu 684 polohu tlačovej hlavy. Pozrite si časť Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy. V systéme Mac OS X v.10.4.x alebo Mac OS X v.10.3.9 Poznámka Obrazovky použité v tejto časti opisujú tlač v systéme Mac OS X v.10.4.x. 1. Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie zapnuté. Pozrite si časť Ovládací panel . 2. Vložte papier. Pozrite si časť Vkladanie obyčajného alebo fotografického papiera . V tomto príklade sme vložili obyčajný papier veľkosti A4. 3. Opatrne otvorte výstupný zásobník papiera a potom aj jeho vysúvaciu časť. 4. Použitím vhodnej softvérovej aplikácie vytvorte (alebo otvorte) dokument, ktorý chcete vytlačiť. 5. Zadajte veľkosť strany. (1) V ponuke Súbor (File) softvérovej aplikácie vyberte položku Nastavenie strany (Page Setup). Zobrazí sa dialógové okno Nastavenie strany (Page Setup). (2) Skontrolujte, či je v položke Formátovať pre (Format for) vybratý názov vášho zariadenia. (3) V ponuke Veľkosť papiera (Paper Size) vyberte veľkosť strany vloženého papiera. V tomto príklade sme vybrali veľkosť A4. (4) Kliknite na tlačidlo OK. 6. Určte požadované nastavenia tlače. (1) V ponuke Súbor (File) softvérovej aplikácie vyberte položku Tlačiť (Print). Zobrazí sa dialógové okno Tlač (Print). (2) Skontrolujte, či je v poli Printer vybratý názov vášho zariadenia. Tlač dokumentov (Macintosh) Strana 37 z celkového počtu 684 (3) V rozbaľovacej ponuke vyberte položku Quality & Media. (4) V ponuke Media Type vyberte typ vloženého média. V tomto príklade sme vybrali možnosť Plain Paper. Poznámka Ak vyberiete nesprávny typ média, zariadenie nemusí tlačiť v správnej kvalite. (5) V ponuke Print Quality vyberte kvalitu tlače. V tomto príklade sme vybrali možnosť Standard. Poznámka Podrobné informácie o kvalite tlače nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka . Poznámka Ak chcete zobraziť podrobné informácie o funkciách ovládača tlačiarne, kliknite na ikonu (otázka) na obrazovke Quality & Media, Color Options, Special Effects, Borderless Printing alebo Margin. Ak chcete zobrazením ukážky skontrolovať výsledok tlače, kliknite na tlačidlo Preview. Niektoré softvérové aplikácie nemusia mať funkciu ukážky. 7. Spustite tlač. Kliknutím na tlačidlo Tlačiť (Print) spustite tlač. Poznámka Kliknutím na ikonu tlačiarne v Doku (Dock) zobrazíte zoznam prebiehajúcich tlačových úloh. Ak chcete zrušiť prebiehajúcu tlačovú úlohu, v zozname Názov (Name) vyberte požadovanú úlohu a potom kliknite na tlačidlo Odstrániť (Delete). Ak chcete prebiehajúcu úlohu dočasne zastaviť, kliknite na tlačidlo Pozastaviť (Hold). Ak chcete dočasne zastaviť všetky úlohy v zozname, kliknite na tlačidlo Zastaviť úlohy (Stop Jobs). Ak sa rovné čiary vytlačia nezarovnané alebo ak sú výsledky tlače neuspokojivé, upravte polohu tlačovej hlavy. Pozrite si časť Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy. Na začiatok strany Ďalšie použitie Strana 38 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Ďalšie použitie Ďalšie použitie Táto časť predstavuje funkciu tlače fotografií zo zariadenia kompatibilného so štandardom PictBridge, napríklad z digitálneho fotoaparátu, pripojeného pomocou kábla USB (len pre zariadenie MP270 series). Táto časť predstavuje aj užitočné softvérové aplikácie, ktoré možno použiť so zariadením. Tlač fotografií zo zariadenia kompatibilného so štandardom PictBridge (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) Užitočné softvérové aplikácie Solution Menu My Printer Easy-WebPrint EX Na začiatok strany Tlač fotografií zo zariadenia kompatibilného so štandardom PictBridg... Strana 39 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Ďalšie použitie > Tlač fotografií zo zariadenia kompatibilného so štandardom PictBridge (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) Tlač fotografií zo zariadenia kompatibilného so štandardom PictBridge (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) Pomocou kábla USB odporúčaného výrobcom zariadenia môžete k multifunkčnému zariadeniu pripojiť zariadenie kompatibilné so štandardom PictBridge a priamo tlačiť uložené snímky. Podrobné informácie o spôsobe tlače uložených snímok po pripojení k zariadeniu kompatibilnému so štandardom PictBridge nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka . Podrobné informácie o nastaveniach tlače v zariadení kompatibilnom so štandardom PictBridge nájdete v príručke dodanej s týmto zariadením. Pripojiteľné zariadenia: Bez ohľadu na výrobcu alebo model možno k multifunkčnému zariadeniu pripojiť ľubovoľné zariadenie kompatibilné so štandardom PictBridge. Poznámka PictBridge je štandard určený na priamu tlač fotografií bez použitia počítača z pripojených zariadení, akými sú digitálny fotoaparát, digitálna videokamera alebo mobilný telefón vybavený fotoaparátom. (PictBridge) Zariadenie označené touto značkou je kompatibilné so štandardom PictBridge. Formát tlačiteľných obrazových údajov: Zariadenie podporuje snímky* zhotovené pomocou fotoaparátu kompatibilného so štandardom DCF (Design rule for Camera File system – Tvorba systému súborov pre fotoaparáty) a súbory PNG. * Kompatibilné so štandardom Exif, verzie 2.2 alebo 2.21 Na začiatok strany Užitočné softvérové aplikácie Strana 40 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Ďalšie použitie > Užitočné softvérové aplikácie Užitočné softvérové aplikácie Na obsluhu zariadenia môžete používať rôzne užitočné softvérové aplikácie, ako sú Solution Menu, My Printer a Easy-WebPrint EX. Solution Menu Prostredníctvom ponuky Solution Menu môžete spúšťať softvérové aplikácie dodané so zariadením alebo zobrazovať prevádzkové pokyny. Dvakrát kliknite na ikonu (Solution Menu) na pracovnej ploche. Kliknite sem: Solution Menu Kliknite na ikonu (Solution Menu) v Doku (Dock). * Nasledujúce obrazovky sú určené pre systém Windows Vista. Kliknite na tlačidlo funkcie, ktorú chcete použiť. Po spustení ponuky Solution Menu kliknite na tlačidlo na hlavnom paneli, čím zmenšíte veľkosť okna. Poznámka Ak ste ponuku Solution Menu nenainštalovali alebo odinštalovali, nainštalujte ju z disku Inštalačný disk CD-ROM (Setup CD-ROM) . Ponuku Solution Menu nainštalujete výberom položky Solution Menu počas inštalácie Custom Install. Tlačidlá zobrazené na obrazovke sa môžu líšiť v závislosti od krajiny alebo oblasti zakúpenia. Ak chcete ponuku Solution Menu spustiť z ponuky Štart (Start), postupne vyberte položky Všetky programy (All Programs) (alebo Programy (Programs)), Canon Utilities, Solution Menu a Solution Menu. Ak chcete ponuku Solution Menu spustiť z panela ponúk, vyberte ponuku Prejsť (Go), položky Aplikácie (Applications), Canon Utilities, Solution Menu a dvakrát kliknite na položku Solution Menu. My Printer Použitím aplikácie My Printer môžete zobraziť okno nastavenia ovládača tlačiarne. Poskytuje tiež informácie o tom, aké kroky treba vykonať pri problémoch s prevádzkou. Aplikácia My Printer nie je k dispozícii pre počítače Macintosh. Užitočné softvérové aplikácie Dvakrát kliknite na ikonu Strana 41 z celkového počtu 684 (My Printer) na pracovnej ploche. Poznámka Aplikáciu My Printer môžete spustiť aj z ponuky Solution Menu alebo z panela úloh. Ak ste aplikáciu My Printer nenainštalovali alebo odinštalovali, nainštalujte ju z disku Inštalačný disk CD-ROM (Setup CD-ROM) . Aplikáciu My Printer nainštalujete výberom položky My Printer počas inštalácie Custom Install. Ak chcete aplikáciu My Printer spustiť z ponuky Štart (Start), postupne vyberte položky Všetky programy (All Programs) (alebo Programy (Programs)), Canon Utilities, My Printer a My Printer. Easy-WebPrint EX Aplikácia Easy-WebPrint EX umožňuje rýchlu a jednoduchú tlač webových stránok z programu Internet Explorer. Webové stránky môžete tlačiť s veľkosťou automaticky prispôsobenou šírke papiera, aby sa neorezali okraje stránok. Môžete tiež zobraziť ukážku požadovaných webových stránok a vybrať tie, ktoré chcete vytlačiť. Aplikácia Easy-WebPrint EX nie je k dispozícii v systéme Windows 2000 a v počítačoch Macintosh. Dôležité Bez súhlasu vlastníka autorských práv je nezákonné reprodukovať alebo upravovať diela iných osôb chránené autorskými právami s výnimkou osobného použitia, domáceho použitia alebo použitia v rámci obmedzeného rozsahu definovaného autorskými právami. Navyše, reprodukovanie alebo úpravy fotografií ľudí môžu porušovať práva na zobrazenie osôb. Po nainštalovaní aplikácie Easy-WebPrint EX sa na obrazovku programu Internet Explorer pridá panel s nástrojmi. Tento panel s nástrojmi je k dispozícii pri každom spustení programu Internet Explorer. Funkcia orezania napríklad umožňuje orezať požadované časti webových stránok a pred tlačou ich upraviť. Užitočné softvérové aplikácie Strana 42 z celkového počtu 684 Ak sa chcete dozvedieť podrobnejšie informácie o tlači webových stránok, kliknutím na tlačidlo (Pomocník) zobrazte Pomocníka online. Poznámka Poznámky k inštalácii aplikácie Easy-WebPrint EX Ak aplikácia Easy-WebPrint EX nie je nainštalovaná, na paneli úloh pracovnej plochy sa môže zobraziť upozornenie na inštaláciu aplikácie Easy-WebPrint EX. Ak chcete aplikáciu Easy-WebPrint EX nainštalovať, kliknite na zobrazené upozornenie a postupujte podľa pokynov na obrazovke. Aplikáciu Easy-WebPrint EX môžete nainštalovať aj z disku Inštalačný disk CD-ROM (Setup CDROM) . Aplikáciu Easy-WebPrint EX nainštalujete výberom položky Easy-WebPrint EX počas inštalácie Custom Install. Na inštaláciu aplikácie Easy-WebPrint EX v počítači sa vyžaduje program Internet Explorer 7 alebo novší a pripojenie počítača na internet. Na začiatok strany Vkladanie papiera a originálov Strana 43 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Vkladanie papiera a originálov Vkladanie papiera a originálov Táto časť opisuje typy papiera a originálov, ktoré môžete vkladať do zariadenia, spôsob vkladania papiera do zadného zásobníka a spôsob vkladania originálov, ktoré chcete kopírovať alebo skenovať. Vkladanie papiera Vkladanie obyčajného alebo fotografického papiera Vkladanie obálok Použiteľné typy médií Nevhodné typy médií Umiestnenie originálov Umiestnenie originálov Originály, ktoré možno použiť Na začiatok strany Vkladanie papiera Strana 44 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Vkladanie papiera a originálov > Vkladanie papiera Vkladanie papiera Vkladanie obyčajného alebo fotografického papiera Vkladanie obálok Použiteľné typy médií Nevhodné typy médií Vkladanie obyčajného alebo fotografického papiera Dôležité Ak na skúšobnú tlač nastriháte papier na malú veľkosť, napríklad 4" x 6"/10 x 15 cm, 4" x 8"/101,6 x 203,2 mm, 5" x 7"/13 x 18 cm alebo 2,16" x 3,58"/55,0 x 91,0 mm (veľkosť kreditnej karty), môže dôjsť k zaseknutiu papiera. Poznámka Pri tlači fotografií sa odporúča používať originálny fotografický papier od spoločnosti Canon. Podrobnosti o originálnom fotografickom papieri od spoločnosti Canon nájdete v časti Použiteľné typy médií . Možno použiť univerzálny kopírovací papier. Informácie o veľkosti strany a hmotnosti papiera použiteľného v tomto zariadení nájdete v časti Použiteľné typy médií . 1. Pripravte papier. Zarovnajte okraje papiera. Ak je papier zvlnený, vyrovnajte ho. Poznámka Pred vložením úhľadne zarovnajte okraje papiera. Ak papier vložíte bez zarovnania okrajov, môže sa zaseknúť. Ak je papier zvlnený, chyťte skrútené rohy a jemne ich ohýbajte v opačnom smere, kým sa papier úplne nevyrovná. Podrobné informácie o spôsobe vyrovnávania zvlneného papiera nájdete v časti Riešenie problémov v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka . 2. Vložte papier. (1) Otvorte podperu papiera, zdvihnite ju a sklopte. (2) Opatrne otvorte výstupný zásobník papiera a potom aj jeho vysúvaciu časť. Vkladanie papiera Strana 45 z celkového počtu 684 (3) Posunutím roztvorte vodiace lišty papiera (A) a vložte papier do stredu zadného zásobníka tak, aby STRANA URČENÁ NA TLAČ SMEROVALA K VÁM. Dôležité Papier vždy vkladajte v orientácii na výšku (B). Vloženie papiera v orientácii na šírku (C) môže spôsobiť jeho zaseknutie. (4) Posunutím zarovnajte vodiace lišty papiera (A) s bočnými hranami balíka papiera. Vodiace lišty papiera neposúvajte príliš veľkou silou. Papier by sa nemusel správne podávať. Vkladanie papiera Strana 46 z celkového počtu 684 Poznámka Dajte pozor, aby hárky papiera výškou nepresahovali značku limitu vkladania papiera (D). Poznámka Zariadenie môže pri podávaní papiera vydávať prevádzkový hluk. Po vložení papiera Pri kopírovaní vyberte veľkosť a typ vloženého papiera pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia. Pozrite si časť Kopírovanie . Pri tlači pomocou počítača vyberte veľkosť a typ vloženého papiera v ponukách Printer Paper Size (alebo Paper Size) a Media Type v ovládači tlačiarne. Pozrite si časť Tlač dokumentov (Windows) alebo Tlač dokumentov (Macintosh) . Na začiatok strany Vkladanie obálok Strana 47 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Vkladanie papiera a originálov > Vkladanie papiera > Vkladanie obálok Vkladanie obálok Môžete tlačiť na obálky veľkosti European DL a US Comm. Env. #10. Pri správnom nastavení ovládača tlačiarne sa adresa automaticky otočí a vytlačí podľa orientácie obálky. Dôležité Tlač na obálky je možná len pomocou počítača. Nemožno používať nasledujúce obálky: - obálky s reliéfnym alebo upraveným povrchom, - obálky s dvojitými chlopňami (alebo so samolepiacimi prúžkami), - obálky, ktorých lepiace chlopne sú už navlhčené a lepivé. Poznámka Pri tlači na obálky v systéme Windows sa zobrazí hlásenie informujúce o spôsobe ich vkladania. Ak začiarknete políčko Do not show this message again., hlásenie sa nabudúce nezobrazí. 1. Pripravte obálky. Zatlačte na všetky štyri rohy a okraje obálok a vyrovnajte ich. Ak sú obálky zvlnené, chyťte ich za oba protiľahlé konce a jemne ich ohnite v opačnom smere. Ak je roh chlopne na obálke zložený, vyrovnajte ho. Pomocou pera pritlačte vstupný okraj obálky a vyrovnajte ohyb. Obrázky znázornené vyššie zobrazujú bočný pohľad na vstupný okraj obálky. Dôležité Ak nie sú obálky ploché alebo ak ich okraje nie sú zarovnané, môžu sa v zariadení zaseknúť. Skontrolujte, či zvlnenia ani bubliny nepresahujú 0,1 palca/3 mm. 2. Vložte obálky. (1) Otvorte podperu papiera. Nezdvíhajte podperu papiera. Vkladanie obálok Strana 48 z celkového počtu 684 (2) Opatrne otvorte výstupný zásobník papiera a potom aj jeho vysúvaciu časť. (3) Posunutím roztvorte vodiace lišty papiera (A) a vložte obálky do stredu zadného zásobníka tak, aby STRANA S ADRESOU SMEROVALA K VÁM. Prehnutá chlopňa obálky bude na ľavej strane smerovať nadol. Naraz možno vložiť maximálne 10 obálok. (4) Posunutím zarovnajte vodiace lišty papiera (A) s bočnými hranami obálok. Vodiace lišty papiera neposúvajte príliš veľkou silou. Obálky by sa nemuseli správne podávať. (B) Zadná strana (C) Strana s adresou 3. V ovládači tlačiarne zadajte nastavenia. (1) V ponuke Commonly Used Settings na karte Quick Setup vyberte položku Envelope. (2) V okne Envelope Size Setting vyberte položku DL Env. alebo Comm. Env. #10. (3) V ponuke Orientation vyberte položku Landscape. (1) V ponuke Media Type vyberte položku Envelope. (2) V ponuke Paper Size vyberte položku DL Envelope alebo #10 Envelope. (3) V ponuke Orientation vyberte orientáciu na šírku. Dôležité Vkladanie obálok Strana 49 z celkového počtu 684 Ak správne nenastavíte veľkosť obálky alebo orientáciu , adresa sa vytlačí hore nohami alebo sa otočí o 90 stupňov. Poznámka Zariadenie môže pri podávaní obálok vydávať prevádzkový hluk. Ak je v systéme Windows výsledok tlače obrátený hore nohami, otvorte okno nastavenia ovládača tlačiarne a v ponuke Commonly Used Settings vyberte možnosť Envelope. Potom v ponuke Additional Features začiarknite políčko Rotate 180 degrees. Podrobné informácie o nastaveniach ovládača tlačiarne nájdete v časti Tlač dokumentov (Windows) alebo Tlač dokumentov (Macintosh) . Na začiatok strany Použiteľné typy médií Strana 50 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Vkladanie papiera a originálov > Vkladanie papiera > Použiteľné typy médií Použiteľné typy médií Ak chcete dosiahnuť najlepšie výsledky tlače, vyberte papier vhodný na danú tlač. Spoločnosť Canon ponúka rôzne typy papiera, ktoré umocňujú zábavu pri tlači (napríklad nálepky), ako aj papier na tlač fotografií a dokumentov. Na tlač dôležitých fotografií odporúčame používať originálny papier od spoločnosti Canon. Typy médií Komerčne dostupný papier Názov papiera <číslo modelu> *1 Obyčajný papier Limit vkladania pre výstupný zásobník papiera Limit vkladania papiera pre zadný zásobník Nastavenia v ovládači tlačiarne: Media Type Približne 100 hárkov Približne 50 hárkov Plain Paper 10 obálok *4 Envelope (recyklovaný papier)*2 *3 Obálky Originálny papier od spoločnosti Canon Názov papiera <číslo modelu> *1 Limit vkladania papiera pre zadný zásobník Limit vkladania pre výstupný zásobník papiera Nastavenia v ovládači tlačiarne: Media Type Na tlač fotografií: Photo Paper Pro Platinum <PT-101>*5 Photo Paper Pro II A4, Letter, 5" x 7"/13 x 18 cm a 8" x 10"/20 x 25 cm: 10 hárkov 4" x 6"/10 x 15 cm: 20 hárkov *4 Photo Paper Pro Platinum Photo Paper Pro II <PR-201>*5 Glossy Photo Paper „ na každodenné použitie“ Glossy Photo Paper <GP-501>*3 *5 Photo Paper Glossy Glossy Photo Paper <GP-502>*3 *5 Photo Paper Plus Glossy II Photo Paper Plus Glossy II <PP-201> *3 *5 Photo Paper Plus Semigloss Photo Paper Plus Semigloss <SG-201>*3 *5 Matte Photo Paper <MP-101> Na tlač obchodných dokumentov: Matte Photo Paper Použiteľné typy médií High Resolution Paper 80 hárkov Strana 51 z celkového počtu 684 50 hárkov High Resolution Paper *4 T-Shirt Transfers <HR-101N> Na vytváranie vlastných výtlačkov: T-Shirt Transfers 1 hárok <TR-301> Photo Stickers Glossy Photo Paper <PS-101> *6 *1 Papier označený číslom modelu je originálny papier od spoločnosti Canon. Podrobné informácie o strane určenej na tlač a poznámky k manipulácii s papierom nájdete v príručke dodanej s papierom. Informácie o dostupných veľkostiach papiera pre každý originálny papier Canon nájdete na našej webovej stránke. Niektoré originálne papiere spoločnosti Canon nemožno zakúpiť vo všetkých krajinách alebo oblastiach. V USA sa papier nepredáva podľa čísla modelu. Papier kupujte podľa názvu. *2 V závislosti od typu papiera či okolitých podmienok (vysoká, nízka teplota alebo vlhkosť) môže byť vkladanie maximálneho množstva papiera problematické. V takých prípadoch znížte počet hárkov vkladaného papiera na menej ako polovicu (možno použiť 100-percentne recyklovaný papier). *3 Papier, ktorý môžete použiť na vytváranie kópií po výbere typu média pomocou tlačidla Papier (Paper) na ovládacom paneli. Môžete vybrať iba obyčajný papier veľkosti A4 alebo Letter, fotografický papier veľkosti A4 alebo Letter a fotografický papier veľkosti 4" x 6"/10 x 15 cm. *4 Odporúča sa, aby ste pred nepretržitou tlačou odstránili z výstupného zásobníka papiera predchádzajúci potlačený hárok, čím predídete rozmazaniu a strate farby. *5 Pri vkladaní balíkov papiera sa počas podávania môže strana určená na tlač označiť alebo sa papier nemusí správne podávať. V takom prípade vkladajte hárky jednotlivo. *6 Pomocou softvéru Easy-PhotoPrint EX, ktorý sa dodáva na disku Inštalačný disk CD-ROM (Setup CDROM), môžete ľahko zadávať nastavenia tlače na papier s nálepkami. Nainštalujte ho v počítači. Poznámka Podrobné informácie o nastaveniach veľkosti strany a typu média pri tlači zo zariadenia kompatibilného so štandardom PictBridge nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka (len pre zariadenie MP270 series). Veľkosti strán Môžete používať nasledujúce veľkosti strán. Poznámka V počítačoch Macintosh nie sú k dispozícii veľkosti Choukei 3 a Choukei 4. Štandardné veľkosti: Letter (8,50 x 11,00 palca/215,9 x 279,4 mm) Legal (8,50 x 14,00 palca/215,9 x 355,6 mm) A5 (5,83 x 8,27 palca/148,0 x 210,0 mm) A4 (8,27 x 11,69 palca/210,0 x 297,0 mm) B5 (7,17 x 10,12 palca/182,0 x 257,0 mm) 4" x 6" (4,00 x 6,00 palca/10 x 15 cm) 4" x 8" (4,00 x 8,00 palca/101,6 x 203,2 mm) 5" x 7" (5,00 x 7,00 palca/13 x 18 cm) 8" x 10" (8,00 x 10,00 palca/20 x 25 cm) Použiteľné typy médií Strana 52 z celkového počtu 684 L (3,50 x 5,00 palca/89,0 x 127,0 mm) 2L (5,00 x 7,01 palca/127,0 x 178,0 mm) Hagaki (3,94 x 5,83 palca/100,0 x 148,0 mm) Hagaki 2 (7,87 x 5,83 palca/200,0 x 148,0 mm) Comm. Env. #10 (4,12 x 9,50 palca/104,6 x 241,3 mm) DL Env. (4,33 x 8,66 palca/110,0 x 220,0 mm) Choukei 3 (4,72 x 9,25 palca/120,0 x 235,0 mm) Choukei 4 (3,54 x 8,07 palca/90,0 x 205,0 mm) Youkei 4 (4,13 x 9,25 palca/105,0 x 235,0 mm) Youkei 6 (3,86 x 7,48 palca/98,0 x 190,0 mm) Card (2,16 x 3,58 palca/55,0 x 91,0 mm) Wide (4,00 x 7,10 palca/101,6 x 180,6 mm) Neštandardné veľkosti: Môžete tiež zadať vlastnú veľkosť z nasledujúceho rozsahu. Minimálna veľkosť: 2,17 x 3,58 palca/55,0 x 91,0 mm Maximálna veľkosť: 8,50 x 26,61 palca/215,9 x 676,0 mm Hmotnosť papiera 17 až 28 lb/64 až 105 g/m2 (okrem originálneho papiera od spoločnosti Canon) Nepoužívajte ťažší ani ľahší papier (s výnimkou originálneho papiera od spoločnosti Canon), pretože sa môže zaseknúť v zariadení. Poznámky ku skladovaniu papiera Tesne pred tlačou vyberte z balenia len potrebný počet hárkov papiera. Pokiaľ netlačíte, vložte nepoužitý papier späť do balenia a skladujte ho na rovnom povrchu, aby sa nezvlnil. Skladujte ho na mieste, ktoré je chránené pred teplom, vlhkosťou a priamym slnečným svetlom. Poznámky k papieru určenému na tlač na celú stranu bez okrajov Na tlač na celú stranu bez okrajov nemôžete použiť papier veľkosti A5, B5 a Legal ani obálky. Tlačiť na celú stranu bez okrajov na obyčajný papier môžete len pri tlači z počítača. Môže to však viesť k zníženej kvalite tlače. Pri skúšobnej tlači sa odporúča používať obyčajný papier. Na začiatok strany Nevhodné typy médií Strana 53 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Vkladanie papiera a originálov > Vkladanie papiera > Nevhodné typy médií Nevhodné typy médií Nepoužívajte nasledujúce typy papiera. Používanie týchto typov papiera môže spôsobiť nielen nedostatočnú kvalitu tlače, ale aj zaseknutie papiera alebo poruchu zariadenia. Poskladaný, zvlnený alebo pokrčený papier, vlhký papier, príliš tenký papier (s hmotnosťou do 17 lb/64 g/m 2), príliš hrubý papier (s hmotnosťou viac ako 28 lb/105 g/m 2, okrem originálneho papiera od spoločnosti Canon), papier tenší ako pohľadnica vrátane obyčajného papiera alebo poznámkového papiera orezaného na malú veľkosť (pri tlači na papier menšej veľkosti ako A5), obrázkové pohľadnice, pohľadnice s prilepenými fotografiami alebo nálepkami, obálky s dvojitými chlopňami (alebo so samolepiacimi prúžkami), obálky s reliéfnym alebo upraveným povrchom, obálky, ktorých lepiace chlopne sú už navlhčené a lepivé. akýkoľvek typ papiera s otvormi, papier, ktorý nie je obdĺžnikového tvaru, papier spojený svorkami alebo lepidlom, papier s lepivými látkami, papier zdobený leskom atď. Na začiatok strany Umiestnenie originálov Strana 54 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Vkladanie papiera a originálov > Umiestnenie originálov Umiestnenie originálov Umiestnenie originálov Originály, ktoré možno použiť Umiestnenie originálov Originály na kopírovanie alebo skenovanie vkladajte na ploché predlohové sklo. Dôležité Po položení originálu a pred začatím kopírovania alebo skenovania zatvorte kryt dokumentov. Pri skenovaní z počítača pomocou softvérovej aplikácie musíte originál umiestniť iným spôsobom. Podrobné informácie nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka . 1. Položte originál na ploché predlohové sklo. (1) Otvorte kryt dokumentov. Dôležité Na kryt dokumentov neklaďte žiadne predmety. Po otvorení krytu dokumentov spadnú do zadného zásobníka a spôsobia poruchu zariadenia. (2) Na ploché predlohové sklo položte originál tak, ABY STRANA URČENÁ NA KOPÍROVANIE ALEBO SKENOVANIE SMEROVALA NADOL. Roh originálu zarovnajte so značkou zarovnania . Dôležité Na ploché predlohové sklo neumiestňujte predmety, ktorých hmotnosť presahuje 4,4 lb/2,0 kg. Na originál netlačte silou ani naň neukladajte záťaž, ktorá prevyšuje 4,4 lb/2,0 kg. Mohlo by to spôsobiť poruchu skenera alebo prasknutie plochého predlohového skla. Zariadenie nedokáže skenovať šrafovanú oblasť (A) (0,04 palca/1 mm od okrajov plochého predlohového skla). Umiestnenie originálov 2. Strana 55 z celkového počtu 684 Opatrne zatvorte kryt dokumentov. Na začiatok strany Originály, ktoré možno použiť Strana 56 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Vkladanie papiera a originálov > Umiestnenie originálov > Originály, ktoré možno použiť Originály, ktoré možno použiť Kopírovať alebo skenovať možno nasledujúce originály. Typy originálov: Textový dokument, časopis alebo noviny Vytlačená fotografia, pohľadnica, vizitka alebo disk DVD/CD Veľkosť (š x d): Max. 8,5 x 11,7 palca/216 x 297 mm Poznámka Hrubé originály, napríklad knihy, môžete na ploché predlohové sklo vložiť po odobratí krytu dokumentov zo zariadenia. Podrobné informácie o spôsobe odobratia a nasadenia krytu dokumentov nájdete v príručke onscreen manual Rozšírená príručka . Na začiatok strany Bežná údržba Strana 57 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Bežná údržba Bežná údržba Táto časť opisuje, ako čistiť zariadenie pri nejasných výsledkoch tlače, ako vymieňať kazety FINE, v ktorých sa minul atrament, alebo aké opatrenia treba vykonať, keď sa papier nepodáva správne. Keď je tlač nejasná alebo sa tlačia nesprávne farby Tlač vzorky na kontrolu dýz Prezeranie vzorky na kontrolu dýz Čistenie tlačovej hlavy Hĺbkové čistenie tlačovej hlavy Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy Výmena kazety FINE Postup výmeny Kontrola stavu atramentu Čistenie zariadenia Čistenie valčeka podávača papiera Čistenie vnútra zariadenia (čistenie spodnej platne) Čistenie výčnelkov vnútri zariadenia Na začiatok strany Keď je tlač nejasná alebo sa tlačia nesprávne farby Strana 58 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Bežná údržba > Keď je tlač nejasná alebo sa tlačia nesprávne farby Keď je tlač nejasná alebo sa tlačia nesprávne farby Ak sú výsledky tlače rozmazané alebo sa farby netlačia správne, pravdepodobne budú upchaté dýzy tlačovej hlavy (kazety FINE). Podľa nasledujúceho postupu vytlačte vzorku na kontrolu dýz, skontrolujte stav dýz tlačovej hlavy a potom vyčistite tlačovú hlavu. Ak sa rovné čiary vytlačia nezarovnané alebo ak je výsledok tlače neuspokojivý, zarovnaním tlačovej hlavy môžete zlepšiť kvalitu tlače. Dôležité Kazety FINE nevyplachujte ani neutierajte. Môžete tým spôsobiť problémy s kazetami FINE. Poznámka Pred vykonaním údržby Skontrolujte, či v kazete FINE ostal atrament. Pozrite si časť Kontrola stavu atramentu . Skontrolujte, či sú kazety FINE správne vložené. Pozrite si časť Postup výmeny . Skontrolujte, či je zo spodnej časti kazety FINE odstránená oranžová ochranná páska. Pozrite si časť Postup výmeny . Ak indikátor Alarm svieti alebo bliká na oranžovo, pozrite si časť Riešenie problémov v príručke onscreen manual Rozšírená príručka . Zvýšením kvality tlače v nastaveniach ovládača tlačiarne môžete zlepšiť výsledky tlače. Podrobné informácie nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka . Ak sú výsledky tlače rozmazané alebo nerovnomerné: Krok č. 1 Pozrite si časť Tlač vzorky na kontrolu dýz . Pozrite si časť Prezeranie vzorky na kontrolu dýz . Ak na vzorke chýbajú čiary alebo vzorka obsahuje vodorovné biele pruhy: Krok č. 2 Pozrite si časť Čistenie tlačovej hlavy . Ak sa problém nevyriešil ani po dvojnásobnom čistení tlačovej hlavy: Krok č. 3 Pozrite si časť Hĺbkové čistenie tlačovej hlavy . Ak sa problém nevyriešil, vypnite zariadenie a po 24 hodinách vykonajte nové hĺbkové čistenie tlačovej hlavy. Ak sa problém stále nevyriešil: Krok č. 4 Pozrite si časť Výmena kazety FINE. Poznámka Po vyčistení tlačovej hlavy vytlačte a skontrolujte vzorku na kontrolu dýz. Keď je tlač nejasná alebo sa tlačia nesprávne farby Strana 59 z celkového počtu 684 Ak sa problém nevyriešil ani po výmene kazety FINE, obráťte sa na servisné stredisko. Ak výsledky tlače nie sú rovnomerné, napríklad rovné čiary nie sú zarovnané: Pozrite si časť Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy. Poznámka Operácie údržby môžete vykonávať aj z počítača. Podrobné informácie nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka . Na začiatok strany Tlač vzorky na kontrolu dýz Strana 60 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Bežná údržba > Keď je tlač nejasná alebo sa tlačia nesprávne farby > Tlač vzorky na kontrolu dýz Tlač vzorky na kontrolu dýz Vytlačením vzorky na kontrolu dýz zistíte, či sa z dýz tlačovej hlavy správne vystrekuje atrament. Poznámka Ak je v kazete nedostatok atramentu, vzorka na kontrolu dýz sa nevytlačí správne. Vymeňte kazety FINE, v ktorých je nedostatok atramentu. Pozrite si časť Výmena kazety FINE. Musíte si pripraviť: hárok obyčajného papiera veľkosti A4 alebo Letter 1. Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie zapnuté. 2. Do zadného zásobníka vložte obyčajný papier veľkosti A4 alebo Letter. 3. Opatrne otvorte výstupný zásobník papiera a potom aj jeho vysúvaciu časť. 4. Vytlačte vzorku na kontrolu dýz. (1) Opakovane stláčajte tlačidlo (Údržba), kým sa nezobrazí písmeno A. (2) Stlačte tlačidlo Čiernobielo (Black) alebo Farebne (Color) . Vytlačí sa vzorka na kontrolu dýz. 5. Prezrite vzorku na kontrolu dýz. Pozrite si časť Prezeranie vzorky na kontrolu dýz . Na začiatok strany Prezeranie vzorky na kontrolu dýz Strana 61 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Bežná údržba > Keď je tlač nejasná alebo sa tlačia nesprávne farby > Prezeranie vzorky na kontrolu dýz Prezeranie vzorky na kontrolu dýz Prezrite si vzorku na kontrolu dýz a v prípade potreby vyčistite tlačovú hlavu. 1. Skontrolujte, či na vzorke (1) nechýbajú čiary alebo či vzorka (2) neobsahuje vodorovné biele pruhy. (1) Skontrolujte, či na vzorke nechýbajú čiary. Ak áno, vyžaduje sa čistenie. Pozrite si časť Čistenie tlačovej hlavy . (A) Správne (B) Nesprávne (chýbajú čiary) (2) Skontrolujte, či vzorka neobsahuje vodorovné biele pruhy. Ak áno, vyžaduje sa čistenie. Pozrite si časť Čistenie tlačovej hlavy . (A) Správne (B) Nesprávne (obsahuje vodorovné biele pruhy) Na začiatok strany Čistenie tlačovej hlavy Strana 62 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Bežná údržba > Keď je tlač nejasná alebo sa tlačia nesprávne farby > Čistenie tlačovej hlavy Čistenie tlačovej hlavy Ak na vytlačenej vzorke na kontrolu dýz chýbajú čiary alebo ak obsahuje vodorovné biele pruhy, vyčistite tlačovú hlavu. Vyčistením tlačovej hlavy odstránite upchatie dýz a obnovíte stav tlačovej hlavy. Pri čistení tlačovej hlavy sa míňa atrament, preto ju čistite iba v prípade potreby. 1. Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie zapnuté. 2. Vyčistite tlačovú hlavu. (1) Opakovane stláčajte tlačidlo (Údržba), kým sa nezobrazí písmeno H. (2) Stlačte tlačidlo Čiernobielo (Black) alebo Farebne (Color) . Zariadenie začne čistiť tlačovú hlavu. Kým zariadenie neskončí čistenie tlačovej hlavy, nevykonávajte iné činnosti. Potrvá to približne 1 až 2 minúty. 3. Skontrolujte stav tlačovej hlavy. Po dokončení čistenia sa displej LED prepne do pohotovostného režimu kopírovania. Stav tlačovej hlavy skontrolujte vytlačením vzorky na kontrolu dýz. Pozrite si časť Tlač vzorky na kontrolu dýz . Poznámka Ak sa problém nevyrieši ani po dvojnásobnom čistení tlačovej hlavy, vykonajte hĺbkové čistenie tlačovej hlavy. Pozrite si časť Hĺbkové čistenie tlačovej hlavy . Na začiatok strany Hĺbkové čistenie tlačovej hlavy Strana 63 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Bežná údržba > Keď je tlač nejasná alebo sa tlačia nesprávne farby > Hĺbkové čistenie tlačovej hlavy Hĺbkové čistenie tlačovej hlavy Ak sa kvalita tlače nezlepší po bežnom čistení tlačovej hlavy, vykonajte jej hĺbkové čistenie. Pri hĺbkovom čistení tlačovej hlavy sa spotrebúva viac atramentu než pri bežnom čistení tlačovej hlavy, preto hĺbkové čistenie používajte len v nevyhnutnom prípade. 1. Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie zapnuté. 2. Hĺbkovo vyčistite tlačovú hlavu. (1) Opakovane stláčajte tlačidlo (Údržba), kým sa nezobrazí písmeno y. (2) Stlačte tlačidlo Čiernobielo (Black) alebo Farebne (Color) . Zariadenie začne hĺbkovo čistiť tlačovú hlavu. Kým zariadenie neskončí hĺbkové čistenie tlačovej hlavy, nevykonávajte iné činnosti. Potrvá to približne 2 minúty. 3. Skontrolujte stav tlačovej hlavy. Po dokončení hĺbkového čistenia sa displej LED prepne do pohotovostného režimu kopírovania. Stav tlačovej hlavy skontrolujte vytlačením vzorky na kontrolu dýz. Pozrite si časť Tlač vzorky na kontrolu dýz . Ak sa problém nevyriešil, vypnite zariadenie a po 24 hodinách vykonajte nové hĺbkové čistenie tlačovej hlavy. Ak sa problém nevyriešil, vymeňte kazetu FINE za novú. Pozrite si časť Výmena kazety FINE. Ak sa problém nevyriešil ani po výmene kazety FINE, obráťte sa na servisné stredisko. Na začiatok strany Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy Strana 64 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Bežná údržba > Keď je tlač nejasná alebo sa tlačia nesprávne farby > Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy Ak sa rovné čiary vytlačia nezarovnané alebo ak je výsledok tlače neuspokojivý, upravte polohu tlačovej hlavy. Poznámka Ak je v kazete nedostatok atramentu, hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy sa nevytlačí správne. Vymeňte kazety FINE, v ktorých je nedostatok atramentu. Pozrite si časť Výmena kazety FINE. Musíte si pripraviť: hárok obyčajného papiera veľkosti A4 alebo Letter* * Použite biely papier, ktorý je čistý na obidvoch stranách. 1. Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie zapnuté. 2. Do zadného zásobníka vložte obyčajný papier veľkosti A4 alebo Letter. 3. Opatrne otvorte výstupný zásobník papiera a potom aj jeho vysúvaciu časť. 4. Vytlačte hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy. (1) Opakovane stláčajte tlačidlo (Údržba), kým sa nezobrazí malé písmeno u. (2) Stlačte tlačidlo Čiernobielo (Black) alebo Farebne (Color) . Vytlačí sa hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy. Dôležité Na hárku na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy sa nedotýkajte vytlačených častí. Dajte pozor, aby ste nezašpinili hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy. Ak sa hárok zašpiní alebo pokrčí, nemusí sa správne naskenovať. Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy 5. Strana 65 z celkového počtu 684 Naskenovaním hárka na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy upravte polohu tlačovej hlavy. (1) Hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy položte na ploché predlohové sklo. Hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy položte VYTLAČENOU STRANOU SMEROM NADOL a značku ľavom hornom rohu zarovnajte so značkou zarovnania v jeho . (2) Opatrne zatvorte kryt dokumentov a skontrolujte, či sa na displeji LED zobrazilo veľké písmeno U. Potom stlačte tlačidlo Čiernobielo (Black) alebo Farebne (Color) . Zariadenie začne skenovať hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy a automaticky upraví polohu tlačovej hlavy. Po úprave polohy tlačovej hlavy sa displej LED prepne do pohotovostného režimu kopírovania. Odstráňte hárok z plochého predlohového skla. Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy Strana 66 z celkového počtu 684 Dôležité Kým sa úprava polohy tlačovej hlavy nedokončí, neotvárajte kryt dokumentov ani nepremiestňujte vložený hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy. Ak sa úprava polohy tlačovej hlavy nepodarila, na displeji LED sa zobrazí kód chyby. Chybu zrušte stlačením tlačidla Stop/Reset a skontrolujte nasledujúce skutočnosti. - Ploché predlohové sklo a hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy nie sú znečistené. - Hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy je položený správne, vytlačenou stranou smerom nadol. Bližšie informácie nájdete v časti Riešenie problémov v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka . Poznámka Ak ani po nastavení polohy tlačovej hlavy podľa uvedeného postupu nie sú výsledky tlače uspokojivé, nastavte polohu tlačovej hlavy manuálne prostredníctvom počítača. Podrobné informácie nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka . Ak chcete vytlačiť a skontrolovať hodnoty aktuálneho nastavenia polohy tlačovej hlavy, na displeji LED zobrazte písmeno L a potom stlačte tlačidlo Čiernobielo (Black) alebo Farebne (Color) . Na začiatok strany Výmena kazety FINE Strana 67 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Bežná údržba > Výmena kazety FINE Výmena kazety FINE Ak sa počas tlače minie atrament, na displeji LED sa zobrazí kód chyby E, 1, 6. Rozsvieti sa indikátor Alarm a začne blikať indikátor Atrament (Ink) . Skontrolujte, v ktorej kazete FINE sa minul atrament, a vymeňte ju za novú. Poznámka Informácie o kompatibilných kazetách FINE nájdete v tlačenej príručke Prvé spustenie . Postup výmeny Pokiaľ sa v kazetách FINE minie atrament, vymeňte ich podľa nasledujúceho postupu. Dôležité Manipulácia s kazetami FINE Nedotýkajte sa elektrických kontaktov (A) ani dýz tlačovej hlavy (B) na kazete FINE. Ak sa jej dotknete, zariadenie nemusí správne tlačiť. Na zabezpečenie optimálnej kvality tlače odporúčame používať kazety FINE od spoločnosti Canon. Neodporúča sa dopĺňanie atramentu. Vybratú kazetu FINE okamžite vymeňte za novú. Nenechávajte zariadenie bez kaziet FINE. Kazety FINE vymieňajte len za nové kazety. Po vložení použitej kazety FINE sa môžu upchať dýzy. Okrem toho pri použití takýchto kaziet nebude zariadenie schopné správne informovať, kedy ich treba vymeniť. Kazetu FINE po vložení nevyberajte zo zariadenia a nenechávajte ju vonku. Spôsobí to vyschnutie kazety FINE a pri jej opätovnom vložení nemusí zariadenie správne fungovať. Ak chcete zabezpečiť optimálnu kvalitu tlače, spotrebujte kazetu FINE do šiestich mesiacov odo dňa prvého použitia. Poznámka Ak sa v kazete FINE minie atrament, určitý čas môžete tlačiť s farebnou alebo čiernou kazetou FINE, v ktorej ostal atrament. V porovnaní s tlačou s oboma kazetami sa však môže znížiť kvalita tlače. Na dosiahnutie optimálnej kvality odporúčame používať nové kazety FINE. Aj pri tlači len použitím jedného atramentu nechajte prázdnu kazetu FINE vloženú. Ak farebná alebo čierna kazeta FINE nebude vložená, dôjde k chybe a zariadenie nebude môcť tlačiť. Informácie o konfigurácii tohto nastavenia nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka . Farebný atrament sa môže spotrebúvať aj pri tlači čiernobielych dokumentov alebo pri zadaní čiernobielej tlače. Farebný aj čierny atrament sa spotrebúvajú aj pri bežnom a hĺbkovom čistení tlačovej hlavy, ktoré sa môžu vyžadovať na zachovanie výkonu zariadenia. Keď sa v kazete FINE minie atrament, okamžite ju vymeňte za novú. 1. Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie zapnuté, a otvorte výstupný zásobník papiera. Výmena kazety FINE 2. Strana 68 z celkového počtu 684 Zdvihnite skenovaciu jednotku (kryt) a pomocou podpery skenovacej jednotky (C) ju pridržte otvorenú. Držiak kazety FINE sa posunie na miesto vyhradené na výmenu. Upozornenie Násilne nezastavujte ani neposúvajte držiak kazety FINE. Nedotýkajte sa držiaka kazety FINE, kým sa úplne nezastaví. Dôležité Vnútro zariadenia môže byť znečistené atramentom. Pri výmene kaziet FINE dávajte pozor, aby ste si nezašpinili ruky ani oblečenie. Atrament môžete z vnútra zariadenia poľahky zotrieť pomocou toaletného papiera alebo podobného materiálu. Podrobné informácie o čistení nájdete v tlačenej príručke Prvé spustenie . Na kryt dokumentov neklaďte žiadne predmety. Po otvorení krytu dokumentov spadnú do zadného zásobníka a spôsobia poruchu zariadenia. Pri otváraní skenovacej jednotky (krytu) nechajte kryt dokumentov zatvorený. Nedotýkajte sa kovových ani iných častí vnútri zariadenia. Ak skenovaciu jednotku (kryt) necháte otvorenú, držiak kazety FINE sa posunie doprava. V takom prípade zatvorte a znovu otvorte skenovaciu jednotku (kryt). 3. Vyberte prázdnu kazetu FINE. (1) Stlačte úchytky a otvorte zaisťovací kryt kazety s atramentom. (2) Vyberte kazetu FINE. Dôležité S kazetami FINE zaobchádzajte opatrne, aby ste predišli zašpineniu oblečenia alebo okolia. Prázdne kazety FINE znehodnoťte v súlade s miestnymi zákonmi a predpismi týkajúcimi sa znehodnocovania spotrebného materiálu. Výmena kazety FINE 4. Strana 69 z celkového počtu 684 Pripravte novú kazetu FINE. (1) Vyberte kazetu FINE z obalu a opatrne odstráňte oranžovú ochrannú pásku (D). Dôležité Ak budete kazetou FINE triasť, môže sa z nej vyliať atrament a zašpiniť vaše ruky a okolie. S kazetou FINE zaobchádzajte opatrne. Dávajte pozor, aby ste svoje ruky a okolie nezašpinili atramentom nachádzajúcim sa na odstránenej ochrannej páske. Ochrannú pásku po odstránení opätovne nenasadzujte. Znehodnoťte ju v súlade s miestnymi zákonmi a predpismi týkajúcimi sa znehodnocovania spotrebného materiálu. Nedotýkajte sa elektrických kontaktov ani dýz tlačovej hlavy na kazete FINE. Ak sa jej dotknete, zariadenie nemusí správne tlačiť. 5. Vložte kazetu FINE. (1) Do držiaka na kazetu FINE vložte novú kazetu FINE. Farebná kazeta FINE sa vkladá do ľavej zásuvky a čierna kazeta FINE do pravej zásuvky. (2) Zatvorením zaisťovacieho krytu kazety s atramentom zaistite kazetu FINE na mieste. Stláčajte zaisťovací kryt kazety s atramentom, kým s kliknutím nezapadne na miesto. (3) Skontrolujte, či je zaisťovací kryt kazety s atramentom správne zatvorený. Poznámka Ak zaisťovací kryt kazety s atramentom nie je správne zatvorený, tlačte naň, kým s kliknutím nezapadne na miesto. Výmena kazety FINE Strana 70 z celkového počtu 684 (E) Správne zatvorený (F) Nesprávne zatvorený (kryt je naklonený) Dôležité Zariadenie nemôže tlačiť, ak nie sú vložené farebná aj čierna kazeta FINE. Vždy vložte obe kazety FINE. 6. Čiastočne nadvihnite skenovaciu jednotku (kryt), aby sa podpera skenovacej jednotky vrátila do pôvodnej polohy, a potom jemne zatvorte skenovaciu jednotku (kryt). Upozornenie Pri nastavovaní podpery skenovacej jednotky do pôvodnej polohy dbajte na to, aby ste skenovaciu jednotku (kryt) držali pevne, a dávajte pozor, aby ste si neprivreli prsty. Poznámka Ak po zatvorení skenovacej jednotky (krytu) indikátor Alarm svieti alebo bliká na oranžovo, pozrite si časť Riešenie problémov v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka . Keď po výmene kazety FINE začnete tlačiť, zariadenie automaticky spustí čistenie tlačovej hlavy. Kým zariadenie neskončí čistenie tlačovej hlavy, nevykonávajte iné činnosti. Ak sa rovné čiary vytlačia nezarovnané alebo nie je zarovnaná poloha tlačovej hlavy, upravte polohu tlačovej hlavy. Pozrite si časť Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy. Na začiatok strany Kontrola stavu atramentu Strana 71 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Bežná údržba > Výmena kazety FINE > Kontrola stavu atramentu Kontrola stavu atramentu Stav atramentu môžete skontrolovať pomocou indikátorov Atrament (Ink) na ovládacom paneli alebo pomocou obrazovky počítača. Poznámka V zariadení je namontovaný detektor hladiny atramentu, ktorý zisťuje zvyšnú hladinu atramentu. Pri vložení novej kazety FINE považuje zariadenie túto kazetu za plnú atramentu a na základe toho začne zisťovať zvyšnú hladinu atramentu. Ak vložíte použitú kazetu FINE, nemusí sa indikovať správna hladina atramentu. V takom prípade považujte informácie o hladine atramentu len za pomocné. Pomocou indikátorov na ovládacom paneli Skontrolujte, či je displej LED v pohotovostnom režime kopírovania. Stav atramentu môžete skontrolovať pomocou indikátorov Ink (Atrament) . (1) Indikátor Alarm (2) Indikátor Farebný atrament (Color Ink) (3) Indikátor Čierny atrament (Black Ink) Svieti indikátor Farebný atrament (Color Ink) alebo Čierny atrament (Black Ink) Hladina atramentu je nízka. Môžete ešte chvíľu pokračovať v tlači, no odporúčame, aby ste mali k dispozícii novú kazetu FINE. Bliká indikátor Farebný atrament (Color Ink) alebo Čierny atrament (Black Ink) a svieti indikátor Alarm Ak sa na displeji LED zobrazuje kód E, 1, 6, minul sa atrament. Informácie nájdete v časti Riešenie problémov v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka . Ak sa na displeji LED zobrazuje kód E, 1, 3, možno sa minul atrament. Informácie nájdete v časti Riešenie problémov v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka . Bliká indikátor Farebný atrament (Color Ink) alebo Čierny atrament (Black Ink) a nesvieti indikátor Alarm Funkcia zisťovania zostávajúcej hladiny atramentu je vypnutá. Pomocou obrazovky počítača Stav atramentu môžete skontrolovať v monitore stavu tlačiarne (Windows) alebo v aplikácii Canon IJ Printer Utility (Macintosh). Kontrola stavu atramentu Strana 72 z celkového počtu 684 (A) Skontrolujte, či sa na obrazovke nezobrazil nejaký symbol. (nízka hladina atramentu) sa míňa. Môžete ešte chvíľu Atrament označený symbolom pokračovať v tlači, no odporúčame, aby ste mali k dispozícii novú kazetu FINE. Poznámka Počas tlače sa môže zobraziť chybové hlásenie. Skontrolujte hlásenie a vykonajte príslušné opatrenia. Podľa nasledujúceho postupu otvorte jednotlivé obrazovky s potvrdením. 1. Z ponuky Ovládací panel (Control Panel) otvorte okno nastavenia ovládača tlačiarne. Informácie nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka . 2. Na karte Maintenance kliknite na možnosť View Printer Status. Kliknutím na ponuku Ink Details skontrolujte informácie o kazete FINE. Poznámka Monitor stavu tlačiarne môžete zobraziť aj kliknutím na položku Canon XXX Printer (kde XXX označuje názov zariadenia), ktorá sa počas tlače zobrazí na paneli úloh. 1. Otvorte aplikáciu Canon IJ Printer Utility. Informácie nájdete v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka . 2. V rozbaľovacej ponuke vyberte položku Ink Level Information. Kliknutím na ponuku Ink Details skontrolujte informácie o kazete FINE. Na začiatok strany Čistenie zariadenia Strana 73 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Bežná údržba > Čistenie zariadenia Čistenie zariadenia Táto časť opisuje postup pri čistení vnútra zariadenia. Čistenie valčeka podávača papiera Čistenie vnútra zariadenia (čistenie spodnej platne) Čistenie výčnelkov vnútri zariadenia Na začiatok strany Čistenie valčeka podávača papiera Strana 74 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Bežná údržba > Čistenie zariadenia > Čistenie valčeka podávača papiera Čistenie valčeka podávača papiera Ak je valček podávača papiera znečistený alebo sa naň prilepí prach z papiera, papier sa nemusí správne podávať. V takom prípade valček podávača papiera vyčistite. Čistením sa valček podávača papiera opotrebúva, preto ho čistite len v prípade potreby. Musíte si pripraviť: tri hárky obyčajného papiera veľkosti A4 alebo Letter 1. Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie zapnuté, a potom zo zadného zásobníka vyberte všetok papier. 2. Opatrne otvorte výstupný zásobník papiera a potom aj jeho vysúvaciu časť. 3. Vyčistite valček podávača papiera. (1) Opakovane stláčajte tlačidlo (Údržba), kým sa nezobrazí písmeno b. (2) Stlačte tlačidlo Čiernobielo (Black) alebo Farebne (Color) . Valček podávača papiera sa bude pri čistení otáčať. 4. Pomocou papiera vyčistite valček podávača papiera. (1) Skontrolujte, či sa valček podávača papiera prestal točiť, a potom do zadného zásobníka vložte tri hárky obyčajného papiera veľkosti A4 alebo Letter. (2) Skontrolujte, či sa na displeji LED zobrazilo písmeno b, a potom stlačte tlačidlo Čiernobielo (Black) alebo Farebne (Color) . Zariadenie spustí čistenie. Čistenie sa dokončí po vysunutí papiera. Ak sa po čistení valčeka podávača papiera problém nevyrieši, obráťte sa na servisné stredisko. Poznámka Po dokončení čistenia stlačte tlačidlo Stop/Reset , čím displej LED prepnete do pohotovostného režimu kopírovania. Na začiatok strany Čistenie vnútra zariadenia (čistenie spodnej platne) Strana 75 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Bežná údržba > Čistenie zariadenia > Čistenie vnútra zariadenia (čistenie spodnej platne) Čistenie vnútra zariadenia (čistenie spodnej platne) Odstráňte škvrny zvnútra zariadenia. Ak sa zašpiní vnútro zariadenia, môže sa zašpiniť aj vytlačený papier, preto sa odporúča pravidelné čistenie. Dôležité Počas čistenia spodnej platne nevykonávajte iné činnosti. Musíte si pripraviť: hárok obyčajného papiera veľkosti A4 alebo Letter 1. Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie zapnuté, a potom zo zadného zásobníka vyberte všetok papier. 2. Opatrne otvorte výstupný zásobník papiera a potom aj jeho vysúvaciu časť. 3. Preložte hárok obyčajného papiera veľkosti A4 alebo Letter po šírke na polovicu a potom ho znovu rozložte. 4. Vložte iba tento hárok papiera do zadného zásobníka otvorenou stranou smerom k vám. 5. Vyčistite vnútro zariadenia. (1) Opakovane stláčajte tlačidlo (Údržba), kým sa nezobrazí písmeno J. Čistenie vnútra zariadenia (čistenie spodnej platne) Strana 76 z celkového počtu 684 (2) Stlačte tlačidlo Čiernobielo (Black) alebo Farebne (Color) . Papier pri prechádzaní zariadením vyčistí jeho vnútro. Skontrolujte zloženú oblasť vysunutého papiera. Ak je špinavá od atramentu, opätovne vykonajte čistenie spodnej platne. Ak sa ani po dvojnásobnom čistení spodnej platne problém nevyrieši, môžu byť znečistené výčnelky vnútri zariadenia. Vyčistite ich podľa pokynov v časti Čistenie výčnelkov vnútri zariadenia . Poznámka Pri opätovnom čistení spodnej platne použite nový hárok papiera. Na začiatok strany Čistenie výčnelkov vnútri zariadenia Strana 77 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Bežná údržba > Čistenie zariadenia > Čistenie výčnelkov vnútri zariadenia Čistenie výčnelkov vnútri zariadenia Upozornenie Pred čistením vždy vypnite zariadenie a vytiahnite zástrčku napájacieho kábla z elektrickej siete. Ak sú výčnelky vnútri zariadenia znečistené, vatovým tampónom alebo podobným materiálom z nich zotrite atrament. Na začiatok strany Príloha Strana 78 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Príloha Príloha Zákonné obmedzenia týkajúce sa používania výrobku a obrázkov Rady týkajúce sa používania zariadenia Na začiatok strany Zákonné obmedzenia týkajúce sa používania výrobku a obrázkov Rozšírená príručka Strana 79 z celkového počtu 684 Riešenie problémov Obsah > Príloha > Zákonné obmedzenia týkajúce sa používania výrobku a obrázkov Zákonné obmedzenia týkajúce sa používania výrobku a obrázkov Kopírovanie, skenovanie, tlač alebo používanie reprodukcií nasledujúcich dokumentov môže byť protizákonné. Uvedený zoznam nie je úplný. Ak máte akékoľvek pochybnosti, obráťte sa na právneho zástupcu vo vašom súdnom obvode. Bankovky Príkazy na úhradu Vkladové certifikáty Poštové známky (znehodnotené alebo nepoužité) Identifikačné symboly a insígnie Vojenské alebo povolávacie dokumenty Šeky alebo platobné príkazy vydané orgánmi štátnej správy Technické preukazy pre motorové vozidlá a vlastnícke certifikáty Cestovné šeky Stravné lístky Pasy Imigračné doklady Interné kolky (znehodnotené alebo nepoužité) Obligácie alebo iné krátkodobé dlžobné úpisy Akciové certifikáty Práce alebo diela chránené autorskými právami bez súhlasu majiteľa autorských práv Na začiatok strany Rady týkajúce sa používania zariadenia Strana 80 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka Riešenie problémov Obsah > Príloha > Rady týkajúce sa používania zariadenia Rady týkajúce sa používania zariadenia Táto časť obsahuje rady týkajúce sa používania zariadenia a tlače v optimálnej kvalite. Atrament sa používa na rôzne účely. Na aké rôzne účely okrem tlače sa atrament používa? Atrament sa môže používať na iné účely než tlač. Atrament sa nepoužíva len na tlač, ale aj na čistenie tlačovej hlavy, čím sa zachováva optimálna kvalita tlače. Zariadenie je vybavené funkciou automatického čistenia atramentových dýz, aby sa zabránilo ich upchatiu. Pri čistení sa z dýz pumpuje atrament. Pri čistení dýz sa spotrebuje iba malé množstvo atramentu. Používa sa pri čiernobielej tlači farebný atrament? V závislosti od typu papiera určeného na tlač alebo nastavení ovládača tlačiarne sa pri čiernobielej tlači môže spotrebovávať farebný atrament. Farebný atrament sa teda spotrebúva aj vtedy, keď tlačíte čiernobielo. Tlač na špeciálny papier: Ako tlačiť v optimálnej kvalite? Tip: Pred tlačou skontrolujte stav zariadenia. Je tlačová hlava v poriadku? Ak sú dýzy tlačovej hlavy upchaté, tlač bude nejasná a papier sa znehodnotí. Podľa vzorky vytlačenej na kontrolu dýz skontrolujte tlačovú hlavu. Pozrite si časť Keď je tlač nejasná alebo sa tlačia nesprávne farby . Neznečistilo sa vnútro zariadenia atramentom? Po tlači na veľké množstvo papiera alebo tlači bez okrajov sa oblasť, cez ktorú sa podáva papier, môže znečistiť atramentom. Vyčistite vnútro zariadenia použitím funkcie čistenia spodnej platne. Pozrite si časť Čistenie vnútra zariadenia (čistenie spodnej platne) . Tip: Overte si spôsob správneho vkladania papiera. Je vložený papier správne otočený? Do zadného zásobníka vkladajte papier tak, aby strana určená na tlač smerovala k vám. Nie je papier zvlnený? Zvlnenie spôsobí zaseknutie papiera. Zvlnený papier vyrovnajte a potom ho znova vložte. Informácie nájdete v časti Riešenie problémov v príručke on-screen manual Rozšírená príručka . Rady týkajúce sa používania zariadenia Strana 81 z celkového počtu 684 Tip: Po vložení papiera nezabudnite zadať nastavenia papiera. Po vložení papiera vyberte jeho typ v ponuke Media Type v ovládači tlačiarne alebo pomocou tlačidla Papier (Paper) na ovládacom paneli. Ak nevyberiete typ papiera, nemusíte dosiahnuť uspokojivý výsledok tlače. Pozrite si časti Kopírovanie , Tlač z počítača a Použiteľné typy médií . Existujú rôzne typy papiera: papier so špeciálnou vrstvou na povrchu určený na tlač fotografií v optimálnej kvalite alebo papier vhodný na tlač dokumentov. Ponuka Media Type v ovládači tlačiarne obsahuje odlišné predvolené nastavenia pre každý typ papiera (napríklad používanie atramentu, vystrekovanie atramentu alebo vzdialenosť od dýz), takže optimálnu kvalitu obrazu môžete dosiahnuť pri tlači na všetky typy papiera. Tlačidlo Papier (Paper) na ovládacom paneli používané na vytváranie kópií umožňuje vybrať podobné nastavenia ako pomocou ponuky Media Type v ovládači tlačiarne. Pomocou ponuky Media Type v ovládači tlačiarne alebo tlačidla Papier (Paper) na ovládacom paneli môžete tlačiť pri rôznych nastaveniach, ktoré sú vhodné pre každý typ vloženého papiera. Na zrušenie tlače používajte tlačidlo Stop/Reset. Tip: Nikdy nestláčajte tlačidlo ZAP. (ON). Ak práve prebieha tlač a stlačíte tlačidlo ZAP. (ON), tlačové údaje odoslané z počítača sa zaradia do frontu v zariadení a možno nebudete môcť pokračovať v tlači. Ak chcete zrušiť tlač, stlačte tlačidlo Stop/Reset. Poznámka Ak pri tlači z počítača nemožno tlač zrušiť stlačením tlačidla Stop/Reset , otvorte okno nastavenia ovládača tlačiarne a odstráňte nepotrebné tlačové úlohy z monitora stavu tlačiarne (Windows). Musí sa s používaným alebo prenášaným zariadením zaobchádzať opatrne? Tip: Zariadenie nepoužívajte ani neprenášajte vo vertikálnej ani naklonenej polohe. Ak budete zariadenie používať alebo prenášať vo vertikálnej alebo naklonenej polohe, môže sa poškodiť a môže z neho vytiecť atrament. Dbajte na to, aby ste zariadenie nepoužívali ani neprenášali vo vertikálnej ani naklonenej polohe. Tip: Na kryt dokumentov neklaďte predmety. Na kryt dokumentov neklaďte žiadne predmety. Po otvorení krytu dokumentov spadnú do zadného zásobníka a spôsobia poruchu zariadenia. Navyše, zariadenie umiestnite na miesto, kde naň nebudú padať predmety. Rady týkajúce sa používania zariadenia Strana 82 z celkového počtu 684 Tip: Miesto na umiestnenie zariadenia si dôkladne vyberte. Zariadenie umiestnite minimálne 5,91 palca/15 cm od iných elektrických spotrebičov, napríklad žiariviek. Ak sa zariadenie umiestni bližšie k týmto spotrebičom, z dôvodu rušenia žiarivkami nemusí správne fungovať. Ako zabezpečiť optimálnu kvalitu tlače? Kľúčom pri tlači v optimálnej kvalite je zabránenie vyschnutiu a upchatiu tlačovej hlavy. Na zabezpečenie optimálnej kvality tlače vždy postupujte podľa nasledujúcich krokov. Zástrčku napájacieho kábla vytiahnite podľa nasledujúceho postupu. 1. Stlačením tlačidla ZAP. (ON) na zariadení vypnite zariadenie. 2. Presvedčte sa, že nesvieti indikátor Napájanie (Power) . 3. Vytiahnite zástrčku napájacieho kábla z nástennej zásuvky alebo vypnite konektor predlžovacieho kábla. Ak zariadenie vypnete pomocou tlačidla ZAP. (ON), zariadenie automaticky nasadí na tlačovú hlavu (dýzy) ochranné viečko, aby ju chránilo pred vyschnutím. Ak vytiahnete zástrčku napájacieho kábla z nástennej zásuvky alebo vypnete konektor predlžovacieho kábla ešte pred zhasnutím indikátora Napájanie (Power) , na tlačovú hlavu sa ochranné viečko nenasadí správne, čo spôsobí jej vyschnutie alebo upchatie. Pri vyťahovaní zástrčky napájacieho kábla vždy dodržiavajte tento postup. Tlačte pravidelne. Tak ako vyschne a znehodnotí sa hrot zvýrazňovača, ktorý sa dlhší čas nepoužíva, dokonca aj keď je zakrytý, rovnako môže vyschnúť alebo sa upchať tlačová hlava, ak sa zariadenie dlhší čas nepoužíva. Odporúčame, aby ste zariadenie používali aspoň raz za mesiac. Poznámka Ak sa s vytlačenou oblasťou dostane do kontaktu voda alebo pot, alebo potriete vytlačenú oblasť zvýrazňovačom alebo farbou, v závislosti od typu papiera sa atrament môže rozmazať. Farby sú nerovnomerné a výsledky tlače rozmazané. Tip: Podľa vytlačenej vzorky na kontrolu dýz skontrolujte, či nie sú upchaté dýzy. Ak sú dýzy upchaté, farby môžu byť nerovnomerné alebo sa môžu rozmazať výsledky tlače. Rady týkajúce sa používania zariadenia Strana 83 z celkového počtu 684 V takom prípade Vytlačte vzorku na kontrolu dýz. Na vytlačenej vzorke na kontrolu dýz skontrolujte, či nie sú dýzy upchaté. Pozrite si časť Keď je tlač nejasná alebo sa tlačia nesprávne farby . Na začiatok strany MP270 series / MP250 series Rozšírená príručka Strana 84 z celkového počtu 684 MC-3809-V1.00 Základná príručka Tlač Skenovanie Kopírovanie Tlač Tlač z počítača Tlač pomocou dodaného aplikačného softvéru Čo je program Easy-PhotoPrint EX? Riešenie problémov Ako používať túto príručku Tlač fotografií Spustenie programu Easy-PhotoPrint EX Výber fotografie Tlač tejto príručky Výber papiera Údržba Tlač Zmena nastavení zariadenia Príloha Keď zobrazíte túto príručku on- screen manual v inom ako anglickom jazykovom prostredí, niektoré opisy sa môžu zobraziť v angličtine. Vytvorenie albumu Spustenie programu Easy-PhotoPrint EX Výber papiera a rozloženia Výber fotografie Úpravy Tlač Tlač kalendárov Spustenie programu Easy-PhotoPrint EX Výber papiera a rozloženia Výber fotografie Úpravy Tlač Tlač nálepiek Spustenie programu Easy-PhotoPrint EX Výber papiera a rozloženia Výber fotografie Úpravy Tlač Rozloženie tlače Spustenie programu Easy-PhotoPrint EX Výber papiera a rozloženia Výber fotografie Úpravy Tlač Oprava a zlepšenie fotografií Používanie funkcie Automatická oprava fotografií Používanie funkcie Korekcia efektu červených očí Používanie funkcie Zjasnenie tváre MP270 series / MP250 series Rozšírená príručka Strana 85 z celkového počtu 684 Používanie funkcie Zaostrenie tváre Používanie funkcie Digitálne vyhladenie tváre Používanie funkcie Odstránenie znamienok Úprava obrázkov Oprava/zlepšenie obrázkov (Correct/Enhance Images) Otázky a odpovede Ako možno presunúť (alebo skopírovať) uložený súbor? Z ktorej strany zobrazeného obrázka začína tlač? Ako možno tlačiť s rovnakými okrajmi? Čo znamená označenie „C1“ alebo „C4“? Nastavenia tlače fotografií Tlač živých fotografií Redukcia šumu na fotografiách Orezanie fotografií (funkcia Tlač fotografií) Tlač dátumov na fotografie (funkcia Tlač fotografií) Tlač viacerých fotografií na jednu stranu Tlač zoznamu Tlač fotografií na doklady (funkcia ID Photo Print) Tlač informácií o fotografiách Ukladanie fotografií Otvorenie uložených súborov Ďalšie nastavenia Zmena rozloženia Zmena pozadia Pridanie fotografií Zámena polohy fotografií Nahradenie fotografií Zmena polohy, otočenia a veľkosti fotografií Orezanie fotografií Orámovanie fotografií Tlač dátumov na fotografiách Pridanie poznámok k fotografiám Pridanie textu k fotografiám Ukladanie Nastavenie sviatkov Nastavenie zobrazenia kalendára Otvorenie uložených súborov Tlač pomocou iného aplikačného softvéru Rôzne spôsoby tlače Tlač pomocou inštalačného letáka Nastavenie veľkosti a orientácie strany Nastavenie počtu kópií a poradia tlače Nastavenie okraja na zošitie Tlač bez okrajov Tlač s prispôsobením na stranu MP270 series / MP250 series Rozšírená príručka Strana 86 z celkového počtu 684 Tlač so zmenou rozmeru Tlač rozloženia strany Tlač plagátov Tlač brožúr Obojstranná tlač Tlač pečiatky alebo pozadia Uloženie pečiatky Uloženie obrazových údajov, ktoré sa majú použiť ako pozadie Tlač obálok Zobrazenie výsledkov tlače ešte pred tlačou Nastavenie rozmerov papiera (vlastná veľkosť) Zmena kvality tlače a korekcia obrazových údajov Výber kombinácie úrovne kvality tlače a spôsobu poltónovania Tlač farebného dokumentu v monochromatickom režime Nastavenie korekcie farieb Optimálna tlač obrazových údajov fotografií Úprava farieb pomocou ovládača tlačiarne Tlač pomocou profilov ICC Úprava vyváženia farieb Úprava jasu Úprava intenzity Úprava kontrastu Simulácia ilustrácie Zobrazenie obrazových údajov pomocou jednej farby Zobrazenie obrazových údajov v živých farbách Vyhladenie zúbkovaných obrysov Zmena vlastností farieb na vylepšenie sfarbenia Redukcia šumu na fotografiách Prehľad ovládača tlačiarne Používanie ovládača tlačiarne Ovládač tlačiarne Canon IJ Ako otvoriť okno nastavenia ovládača tlačiarne Karta Údržba (Maintenance) Canon IJ Status Monitor Canon IJ Preview Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) Informácie o nastaveniach tlače pomocou štandardu PictBridge (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) Nastavenia v zariadení kompatibilnom so štandardom PictBridge MP270 series / MP250 series Rozšírená príručka Strana 87 z celkového počtu 684 Skenovanie Skenovanie Skenovanie obrázkov Skenovanie obrázkov Pred skenovaním Umiestnenie dokumentov Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia Príloha: Rôzne nastavenia skenovania Výber odpovede na príkazy z ovládacieho panela použitím programu MP Navigator EX Skenovanie pomocou dodaného aplikačného softvéru Čo je to MP Navigator EX (dodaný softvér skenera)? Skúsme skenovať Spustenie programu MP Navigator EX Skenovanie fotografií a dokumentov Skenovanie viacerých dokumentov naraz Skenovanie obrázkov väčších ako ploché predlohové sklo (funkcia Pomoc pri spájaní (Stitch Assist)) Jednoduché skenovanie jedným kliknutím Užitočné funkcie programu MP Navigator EX Automatická oprava a vylepšenie obrázkov Manuálna oprava a vylepšenie obrázkov Úprava obrázkov Vyhľadávanie obrázkov Triedenie obrázkov do kategórií Používanie obrázkov v programe MP Navigator EX Ukladanie Ukladanie súborov PDF Vytváranie a úprava súborov PDF Tlač dokumentov Tlač fotografií Odosielanie prostredníctvom e-mailu Úprava súborov Nastavenie hesiel pre súbory PDF Otváranie a úprava súborov PDF chránených heslom Obrazovky programu MP Navigator EX Obrazovka Navigačný režim (Navigation Mode) Karta Naskenovať alebo importovať dokumenty alebo obrázky (Scan/Import Documents or Images) Karta Zobraziť a použiť obrázky v počítači (View & Use Images on your Computer) Karta Vlastné skenovanie jedným kliknutím (Custom Scan with One-click) Obrazovka Fotografie alebo dokumenty (sklo) (Photos/Documents (Platen)) (okno Naskenovať MP270 series / MP250 series Rozšírená príručka Strana 88 z celkového počtu 684 alebo importovať (Scan/Import)) Dialógové okno Nastavenie skenovania (Scan Settings) (Fotografie alebo dokumenty (Photos/ Documents)) Dialógové okno Uložiť (Save) Dialógové okno Uložiť ako súbor PDF (Save as PDF file) Dialógové okno Nastavenia súborov PDF (PDF Settings) Okno Zobraziť a použiť (View & Use) Okno Vytvoriť alebo upraviť súbor PDF (Create/Edit PDF file) Dialógové okno Tlač dokumentu (Print Document) Dialógové okno Tlač fotografie (Print Photo) Dialógové okno Odoslať prostredníctvom e-mailu (Send via E-mail) Oprava/zlepšenie obrázkov (Correct/Enhance Images) Obrazovka Režim jedného kliknutia (One-click Mode) Dialógové okno Automatické skenovanie (Auto Scan) Dialógové okno Uložiť (Save) (obrazovka Režim jedného kliknutia (One-click Mode)) Dialógové okno Nastavenia skenovania (Scan Settings) Dialógové okno Uložiť (Save) Dialógové okno Nastavenie normy Exif (Exif Settings) Dialógové okno PDF Dialógové okno Uložiť ako súbor PDF (Save as PDF file) Dialógové okno Pošta (Mail) Dialógové okno OCR Dialógové okno Vlastné (Custom) Dialógové okno Predvoľby (Preferences) Karta Všeobecné (General) Karta Nastavenia tlačidla skenera (Scanner Button Settings) (okno Uložiť (Save)) Príloha: Otváranie iných súborov než naskenovaných obrázkov Otváranie obrázkov uložených v počítači Skenovanie pomocou iného aplikačného softvéru Čo je to ScanGear (ovládač skenera)? Skenovanie s rozšírenými nastaveniami pomocou programu ScanGear (ovládača skenera) Spustenie programu ScanGear (ovládača skenera) Skenovanie v základnom režime Skenovanie v rozšírenom režime Skenovanie v režime automatického skenovania Skenovanie viacerých dokumentov naraz pomocou programu ScanGear (ovládača skenera) Oprava obrázkov a úprava farieb pomocou programu ScanGear (ovládača skenera) MP270 series / MP250 series Rozšírená príručka Strana 89 z celkového počtu 684 Oprava obrázkov (funkcie Neostrá maska (Unsharp Mask), Zníženie množstva prachu a škrabancov (Reduce Dust and Scratches), Úprava vyblednutia (Fading Correction) a pod.) Úprava farieb pomocou vzorky farieb Úprava sýtosti a vyváženia farieb Úprava jasu a kontrastu Úprava histogramu Úprava krivky odtieňov Nastavenie hraničnej hodnoty Obrazovky programu ScanGear (ovládača skenera) Karta Základný režim (Basic Mode) Karta Rozšírený režim (Advanced Mode) Nastavenia vstupu Nastavenia výstupu Nastavenia obrázkov Tlačidlá úpravy farieb Karta Režim automatického skenovania (Auto Scan Mode) Dialógové okno Predvoľby (Preferences) Karta Skener (Scanner) Karta Ukážka (Preview) Karta Skenovanie (Scan) Karta Nastavenia farieb (Color Settings) Príloha: Užitočné informácie o skenovaní Úprava rámov orezania Rozlíšenie Formáty súborov Farebná zhoda Ďalšie skenovacie postupy Skenovanie pomocou ovládača WIA Skenovanie pomocou ovládacieho panela (iba pre systém Windows XP) Kopírovanie Tlač pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia Kopírovanie Vytváranie kópií Zmenšenie alebo zväčšenie kópie Používanie užitočných funkcií kopírovania Prepínanie medzi veľkosťami papiera A4 a Letter Kopírovanie bez okrajov (Borderless Copy) Riešenie problémov Riešenie problémov Ak sa objaví chyba Zariadenie sa nedá zapnúť MP270 series / MP250 series Rozšírená príručka Strana 90 z celkového počtu 684 Na displeji LED sa zobrazuje kód chyby Indikátor Alarm svieti na oranžovo Indikátory tlačiarne striedavo blikajú – indikátor Napájanie (Power) na zeleno a indikátor Alarm na oranžovo Na displeji LED nie je nič zobrazené Nedajú sa nainštalovať ovládače MP Drivers Nedá sa správne pripojiť k počítaču Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé Nedá sa tlačiť do konca tlačovej úlohy Žiadne výsledky tlače/Tlač je rozmazaná/Farby sú skreslené/Biele pruhy Farby sú nejasné Čiary nie sú zarovnané Vytlačený papier sa zvlnil alebo obsahuje atramentové škvrny Na papieri sú šmuhy/Vytlačený povrch je poškriabaný Na rube papiera sú šmuhy Po stranách výtlačku sú vytlačené zvislé čiary Farby nie sú rovnomerné alebo majú pruhy Tlač sa nespustí Kopírovanie alebo tlač sa zastaví ešte pred dokončením Zariadenie pracuje, ale atrament sa nevystrekuje Rýchlosť tlače nie je taká, ako by sa očakávalo Držiak kazety FINE sa neposúva na miesto vyhradené na výmenu Papier sa správne nepodáva Zaseknutý papier Papier sa zasekol v otvore na výstup papiera alebo v zadnom zásobníku V iných prípadoch Na obrazovke počítača sa zobrazuje hlásenie Zobrazuje sa chyba č. B200 – Vyskytla sa chyba tlačiarne. Vypnite tlačiareň a odpojte jej napájací kábel od napájacieho zdroja. Potom sa obráťte na servisné stredisko. (B200 A printer error has occurred. Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord of the printer from the power supply. Then contact the service center.) Zobrazuje sa chyba č. **** – Vyskytla sa chyba tlačiarne. Vypnite a znovu zapnite tlačiareň. Ak sa tým chyba neodstráni, pozrite si bližšie informácie v užívateľskej príručke. (**** A printer error has occurred. Turn the printer off and then on again. If this doesn't clear the error, see the user's guide for more detail.) Chyba zápisu/Chyba výstupu/Chyba komunikácie Zobrazuje sa chyba č.: 300 Zobrazuje sa chyba č.: 1700 Zobrazujú sa informácie o atramente č.: 1688 Zobrazujú sa informácie o atramente č.: 1686 Zobrazuje sa chyba č.: 2001 (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) Zobrazuje sa chyba č.: 2002 (len pre zariadenie MP270 MP270 series / MP250 series Rozšírená príručka Strana 91 z celkového počtu 684 series) Iné chybové hlásenia Zobrazuje sa obrazovka Program rozšíreného prieskumu používania atramentových tlačiarní, skenerov alebo faxov (Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program) Zobrazuje sa ikona Program rozšíreného prieskumu používania atramentových tlačiarní, skenerov alebo faxov (Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program) Pre používateľov systému Windows Nezobrazuje sa monitor stavu tlačiarne Na zariadení kompatibilnom so štandardom PictBridge sa zobrazuje chybové hlásenie (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) Problémy pri skenovaní Nefunguje skener Nespúšťa sa program ScanGear (ovládač skenera) Zobrazuje sa chybové hlásenie a nezobrazuje sa obrazovka programu ScanGear (ovládača skenera) Kvalita skenovania (obrázka zobrazeného na monitore) je slabá Okolo naskenovaného obrázka sa nachádzajú nadbytočné biele oblasti Nemožno skenovať viacero dokumentov naraz Nedá sa správne skenovať v režime automatického skenovania Nízka rýchlosť skenovania Zobrazuje sa hlásenie Nedostatok pamäte. (There is not enough memory.) Počítač prestáva počas skenovania pracovať Po aktualizácii systému Windows nefunguje skener Problémy so softvérom E-mailový softvérový program, ktorý chcete používať, sa nezobrazuje na obrazovke výberu e-mailového softvérového programu Naskenovaný obrázok sa tlačí zväčšený alebo zmenšený Naskenovaný obrázok je zväčšený alebo zmenšený na monitore počítača Naskenovaný obrázok sa nedá otvoriť Problémy s programom MP Navigator EX Nedá sa skenovať so správnou veľkosťou Pri skenovaní pomocou ovládacieho panela sa nedá správne zistiť umiestnenie alebo veľkosť obrázka Dokument je umiestnený správne, no naskenovaný obrázok je zošikmený Dokument je umiestnený správne, no mení sa orientácia naskenovaného obrázka Ak problém nemožno vyriešiť Často kladené otázky Pokyny na používanie (ovládač tlačiarne) Všeobecné poznámky (ovládač skenera) Používanie programu Easy-PhotoPrint EX Používanie programu MP Navigator EX MP270 series / MP250 series Rozšírená príručka Informácie o ponuke Solution Menu Strana 92 z celkového počtu 684 Ako používať túto príručku Strana 93 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Ako používať túto príručku Ako používať túto príručku Používanie tably Obsah (Contents) Používanie okna Vysvetlenie Tlač tejto príručky Vyhľadávanie dokumentov pomocou kľúčových slov Zaregistrovanie dokumentov v Príručke Symboly použité v tomto dokumente Ochranné známky Na začiatok strany Používanie tably Obsah (Contents) Strana 94 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Ako používať túto príručku > Používanie tably Obsah (Contents) Používanie tably Obsah (Contents) Keď kliknete na názov dokumentu zobrazený na table s obsahom v ľavej časti príručky on-screen manual, v okne s vysvetlením na pravej strane sa zobrazia dokumenty s týmto názvom. Keď kliknete na ikonu úrovniach. , ktorá sa nachádza naľavo od ikony , zobrazia sa názvy dokumentov na nižších Poznámka Kliknutím na tlačidlo zatvoríte alebo zobrazíte tablu s obsahom. Na začiatok strany Používanie okna Vysvetlenie Strana 95 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Ako používať túto príručku > Používanie okna Vysvetlenie Používanie okna Vysvetlenie (1) Kliknutím na zelené znaky prejdete na príslušný dokument. (2) Kurzor sa presunie na začiatok tohto dokumentu. Poznámka Schémy a obrazovky počítača použité v tejto príručke sa týkajú zariadenia MP270 series. Ak nie je uvedené inak, úkony sú úplne rovnaké ako pre zariadenie MP250 series. Niektoré modely nemožno zakúpiť vo všetkých oblastiach. Na začiatok strany Tlač tejto príručky Strana 96 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Ako používať túto príručku > Tlač tejto príručky Tlač tejto príručky Kliknutím na tlačidlo zobrazíte panel tlače na ľavej strane príručky on-screen manual. Poznámka Kliknutím na tlačidlo zatvoríte alebo zobrazíte panel tlače. Po kliknutí na tlačidlo a následnom kliknutí na položku Nastavenie strany (Page Setup) sa zobrazí dialógové okno Nastavenie strany (Page Setup). Potom môžete jednoducho nastaviť papier, ktorý sa použije na tlač. Kliknutím na tlačidlo a následným kliknutím na položku Nastavenia tlače (Print Settings) zobrazíte dialógové okno Tlačiť (Print). Po zobrazení dialógového okna vyberte tlačiareň, ktorá sa použije na tlač. Tlačiareň, ktorú chcete použiť, môžete vybrať aj na karte Nastav. tlače (Print Setup). Po výbere tlačiarne, ktorú chcete použiť, kliknite na tlačidlo Vlastnosti... (Properties...) a zadajte nastavenia tlače. Kliknite na tlačidlo a následným kliknutím na položku Nastavenia možností (Option Settings) zobrazte dialógové okno Nastavenia možností (Option Settings). Potom môžete nastaviť operáciu tlače. Vytlačiť názov dokumentu a číslo strany (Print document title and page number) Ak je začiarknuté toto políčko, v hlavičke (vo vrchnej časti dokumentu) sa vytlačí názov príručky a číslo strany. Vytlačiť farbu pozadia a obrázky (Print background color and images) Ak je začiarknuté toto políčko, vytlačí sa farba pozadia a obrázky. Niektoré obrázky sa vytlačia bez ohľadu na stav začiarknutia tohto políčka. Pred tlačou skontrolovať počet strán na tlač (Check number of pages to be printed before printing) Ak je začiarknuté toto políčko, pred začatím tlače sa zobrazí dialógové okno Počet strán na tlač – potvrdenie (Print Page Count Confirmation). V tomto dialógovom okne môžete zistiť, koľko strán sa vytlačí. Na karte Výber dokumentu (Document Selection) vyberte spôsob tlače dokumentu. K dispozícii sú nasledujúce štyri spôsoby tlače: Tlač tejto príručky Strana 97 z celkového počtu 684 Tlač aktuálneho dokumentu Tlač vybratých dokumentov Tlač Príručky Tlač všetkých dokumentov Poznámka Môžete vybrať typ tlače a potom na karte Nastav. tlače (Print Setup) jednoducho zadať nastavenia tlače. Tlač aktuálneho dokumentu Môžete vytlačiť aktuálne zobrazený dokument. 1. Vo výberovom zozname Cieľový dokument (Select Target) vyberte možnosť Aktuálny dokument (Current Document). Názov aktuálne zobrazeného dokumentu sa zobrazí v zozname Dokumenty na tlač (Documents to Be Printed). Poznámka Výberom možnosti Vytlačiť prepojené dokumenty (Print linked documents) môžete vytlačiť aj dokumenty, ktoré sú prepojené s aktuálnym dokumentom. Prepojené dokumenty sa pridajú do zoznamu Dokumenty na tlač (Documents to Be Printed). Kliknutím na položku Ukážka pred tlačou (Print Preview) môžete zobraziť a skontrolovať vzhľad výsledku tlače pred samotnou tlačou dokumentu. 2. Kliknite na kartu Nastav. tlače (Print Setup). Na karte Nastavenie strany (Page Setup) vyberte tlačiareň, ktorú chcete použiť, a podľa potreby zadajte jednoduché nastavenia tlače. 3. Kliknite na položku Spustiť tlač (Start Printing). Zobrazí sa hlásenie potvrdzujúce počet strán určených na tlač. 4. Spustite tlač. Potvrďte počet strán, ktoré chcete vytlačiť, a potom kliknite na voľbu Áno (Yes). Vytlačia sa aktuálne zobrazené dokumenty. Tlač vybratých dokumentov Môžete vybrať a vytlačiť požadované dokumenty. 1. Vo výberovom zozname Cieľový dokument (Select Target) vyberte možnosť Vybraté dokumenty (Selected Documents). Názvy všetkých dokumentov sa zobrazia v zozname Dokumenty na tlač (Documents to Be Printed). 2. Vyberte dokumenty, ktoré chcete vytlačiť. V zozname Dokumenty na tlač (Documents to Be Printed) začiarknite políčka vedľa názvov dokumentov, ktoré chcete vytlačiť. Poznámka Ak začiarknete políčko Automaticky vybrať dokumenty v nižších hierarchiách (Automatically select documents in lower hierarchies), začiarknu sa všetky políčka vedľa názvov dokumentov v nižších hierarchiách. Ak chcete začiarknuť všetky políčka vedľa názvov dokumentov, kliknite na možnosť Vybrať všetky (Select All). Tlač tejto príručky Strana 98 z celkového počtu 684 Ak chcete zrušiť začiarknutie všetkých políčok vedľa názvov dokumentov, kliknite na možnosť Vymazať všetky (Clear All). Kliknutím na položku Ukážka pred tlačou (Print Preview) môžete zobraziť a skontrolovať vzhľad výsledku tlače pred samotnou tlačou dokumentu. 3. Kliknite na kartu Nastav. tlače (Print Setup). Na karte Nastavenie strany (Page Setup) vyberte tlačiareň, ktorú chcete použiť, a podľa potreby zadajte jednoduché nastavenia tlače. 4. Kliknite na položku Spustiť tlač (Start Printing). Zobrazí sa hlásenie potvrdzujúce počet strán určených na tlač. 5. Spustite tlač. Potvrďte počet strán, ktoré chcete vytlačiť, a potom kliknite na voľbu Áno (Yes). Vytlačia sa všetky dokumenty so začiarknutými políčkami. Tlač Príručky Môžete vybrať a vytlačiť dokumenty zaregistrované v Príručke. Podrobnosti o Príručke nájdete v časti Zaregistrovanie dokumentov v Príručke . 1. Vo výberovom zozname Cieľový dokument (Select Target) vyberte možnosť Príručka (My Manual). Názvy dokumentov zaregistrovaných v Príručke sa zobrazia v zozname Dokumenty na tlač (Documents to Be Printed). 2. Vyberte dokumenty, ktoré chcete vytlačiť. V zozname Dokumenty na tlač (Documents to Be Printed) začiarknite políčka vedľa názvov dokumentov, ktoré chcete vytlačiť. Poznámka Ak chcete začiarknuť všetky políčka vedľa názvov dokumentov, kliknite na možnosť Vybrať všetky (Select All). Ak chcete zrušiť začiarknutie všetkých políčok vedľa názvov dokumentov, kliknite na možnosť Vymazať všetky (Clear All). Kliknutím na položku Ukážka pred tlačou (Print Preview) môžete zobraziť a skontrolovať vzhľad výsledku tlače pred samotnou tlačou dokumentu. 3. Kliknite na kartu Nastav. tlače (Print Setup). Na karte Nastavenie strany (Page Setup) vyberte tlačiareň, ktorú chcete použiť, a podľa potreby zadajte jednoduché nastavenia tlače. 4. Kliknite na položku Spustiť tlač (Start Printing). Zobrazí sa hlásenie potvrdzujúce počet strán určených na tlač. 5. Spustite tlač. Potvrďte počet strán, ktoré chcete vytlačiť, a potom kliknite na voľbu Áno (Yes). Vytlačia sa všetky dokumenty so začiarknutými políčkami. Tlač všetkých dokumentov Môžete vytlačiť všetky dokumenty príručky on-screen manual. 1. Vo výberovom zozname Cieľový dokument (Select Target) vyberte možnosť Všetky Tlač tejto príručky Strana 99 z celkového počtu 684 dokumenty (All Documents). Názvy všetkých dokumentov sa zobrazia v zozname Dokumenty na tlač (Documents to Be Printed) a ich políčka sa automaticky začiarknu. Poznámka Ak zrušíte začiarknutie políčka vedľa názvu dokumentu, daný dokument sa nevytlačí. Ak chcete začiarknuť všetky políčka vedľa názvov dokumentov, kliknite na možnosť Vybrať všetky (Select All). Ak chcete zrušiť začiarknutie všetkých políčok vedľa názvov dokumentov, kliknite na možnosť Vymazať všetky (Clear All). Kliknutím na položku Ukážka pred tlačou (Print Preview) môžete zobraziť a skontrolovať vzhľad výsledku tlače pred samotnou tlačou dokumentu. 2. Kliknite na kartu Nastav. tlače (Print Setup). Na karte Nastavenie strany (Page Setup) vyberte tlačiareň, ktorú chcete použiť, a podľa potreby zadajte jednoduché nastavenia tlače. 3. Kliknite na položku Spustiť tlač (Start Printing). Zobrazí sa hlásenie potvrdzujúce počet strán určených na tlač. 4. Spustite tlač. Potvrďte počet strán, ktoré chcete vytlačiť, a potom kliknite na voľbu Áno (Yes). Vytlačia sa všetky dokumenty. Dôležité Na vytlačenie všetkých dokumentov budete potrebovať veľké množstvo papiera. Pred tlačou potvrďte počet strán určených na tlač zobrazený v dialógovom okne Počet strán na tlač – potvrdenie (Print Page Count Confirmation). V dialógovom okne Ukážka pred tlačou (Print Preview) môžete tlač zmenšiť podľa šírky papiera alebo nastaviť pomer zväčšenia. Ak však z dôvodu nového pomeru zväčšenia tlačové údaje presiahnu papier, časť dokumentu sa na papier nevytlačí. Na začiatok strany Vyhľadávanie dokumentov pomocou kľúčových slov Strana 100 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Ako používať túto príručku > Vyhľadávanie dokumentov pomocou kľúčových slov Vyhľadávanie dokumentov pomocou kľúčových slov Cieľový dokument môžete vyhľadať zadaním kľúčového slova. Prehľadajú sa všetky dokumenty aktuálne zobrazenej príručky on-screen manual. 1. Kliknite na tlačidlo . Na ľavej strane príručky on-screen manual sa zobrazí tabla hľadania. Poznámka Kliknutím na tlačidlo zatvoríte alebo zobrazíte tablu hľadania. 2. Zadajte kľúčové slovo. Do poľa Kľúčové slovo (Keyword) zadajte kľúčové slovo pre položku, ktorú chcete skontrolovať. Ak chcete zadať viac kľúčových slov, oddeľte ich medzerou. Poznámka Môžete zadať najviac 10 kľúčových slov alebo 255 znakov určených na vyhľadanie. Nerozlišujú sa veľké a malé písmená. Program dokáže vyhľadávať aj kľúčové slová, ktoré obsahujú medzery. Ak chcete pohodlne a rýchlo vyhľadávať dokumenty, ktoré si chcete prečítať, zadávajte kľúčové slová podľa nasledujúcich pokynov. Ak sa chcete dozvedieť, ako pracuje funkcia, ktorú používate: Zadajte názov ponuky zobrazený na ovládacom paneli zariadenia alebo v počítači (napríklad kopírovanie s vymazaním rámu). Ak chcete nájsť vysvetlenie postupu s konkrétnym účelom: Zadajte funkciu a objekt, ktorý chcete vytlačiť (napríklad tlačiť kalendár). 3. Kliknite na položku Spustiť hľadanie (Start Searching). Vyhľadávanie dokumentov pomocou kľúčových slov Strana 101 z celkového počtu 684 Spustí sa vyhľadávanie a v zozname s výsledkami vyhľadávania sa zobrazia názvy dokumentov, ktoré obsahujú kľúčové slovo. Pri vyhľadávaní pomocou viacerých kľúčových slov sa výsledky vyhľadávania zobrazia nasledujúcim spôsobom. [Dokumenty s dokonalou zhodou] ([Documents Containing Perfect Match]) Dokumenty obsahujúce celý vyhľadávaný reťazec (vrátane medzier) presne v podobe, ako bol zadaný (dokonalá zhoda). [Dokumenty so všetkými kľúčovými slovami] ([Documents Containing All Keywords]) Dokumenty, ktoré obsahujú všetky zadané kľúčové slová. [Dokumenty obsahujúce ľubovoľné kľúčové slovo] ([Documents Containing Any Keyword]) Dokumenty, ktoré obsahujú aspoň jedno zo zadaných kľúčových slov. 4. Zobrazte dokument, ktorý si chcete prečítať. V zozname výsledkov vyhľadávania dvakrát kliknite na názov dokumentu, ktorý si chcete prečítať (alebo ho vyberte a stlačte kláves Enter). Keď sa zobrazia dokumenty zodpovedajúce tomuto názvu, nájdené kľúčové slová v týchto dokumentoch sa zvýraznia. Poznámka Aj keď zadáte iné kľúčové slová a spustíte ďalšie vyhľadávania, história vyhľadávania sa zachová. Ak napravo od poľa Kľúčové slovo chcete históriu vyhľadávania vymazať, kliknite na tlačidlo (Keyword) a po zobrazení vyberte položku Vymazať históriu (Clear History). Na začiatok strany Zaregistrovanie dokumentov v Príručke Strana 102 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Ako používať túto príručku > Zaregistrovanie dokumentov v Príručke Zaregistrovanie dokumentov v Príručke Ako dokumenty Príručky si zaregistrujte dokumenty, ktoré často čítate, aby ste ich mohli kedykoľvek jednoducho vyhľadať. 1. Zobrazte dokument. Zobrazte dokument, ktorý chcete pridať do Príručky. 2. Kliknite na tlačidlo . Na ľavej strane príručky on-screen manual sa zobrazí tabla Príručka (My Manual). Poznámka Kliknutím na tlačidlo zatvoríte alebo zobrazíte tablu Príručka (My Manual). 3. Zaregistrujte dokument v Príručke. Kliknite na tlačidlo Pridať (Add). Názov aktuálne zobrazeného dokumentu sa pridá do zoznamu Zoznam Príručky (List of My Manual). Poznámka Dokumenty môžete do Príručky pridať aj nasledujúcimi spôsobmi. Ak dokument pridáte do Príručky, na table s obsahom sa na ikone dokumentu zobrazí značka . V zozname Naposledy zobrazené dokumenty (Recently Displayed Documents) dvakrát kliknite na názov dokumentu, ktorý chcete pridať do Príručky (alebo vyberte požadovaný dokument a stlačte kláves Enter), čím ho zobrazíte. Potom kliknite na tlačidlo Pridať (Add). Pravým tlačidlom myši kliknite na názov dokumentu zobrazený na table s obsahom alebo pravým tlačidlom myši kliknite na okno s vysvetlením a v zobrazenej ponuke vyberte položku Pridať do Príručky (Add to My Manual). Na table s obsahom vyberte názov dokumentu, ktorý chcete pridať do Príručky, a potom v pravej dolnej časti tably kliknite na tlačidlo Pridať do Príručky (Add to My Manual). Zaregistrovanie dokumentov v Príručke Strana 103 z celkového počtu 684 4. Zobrazte Príručku. Keď dvakrát kliknete na názov dokumentu zobrazený v zozname Zoznam Príručky (List of My Manual) (alebo dokument vyberiete a stlačíte kláves Enter), daný dokument sa zobrazí v okne s vysvetlením. Poznámka Ak chcete dokument odstrániť zo zoznamu Zoznam Príručky (List of My Manual), vyberte jeho názov v zozname a kliknite na tlačidlo Vymazať (Delete) (alebo stlačte kláves Delete). Na začiatok strany Symboly použité v tomto dokumente Strana 104 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Ako používať túto príručku > Symboly použité v tomto dokumente Symboly použité v tomto dokumente Varovanie Nedodržanie týchto pokynov môže spôsobiť smrť alebo vážne poranenie spôsobené nesprávnou prevádzkou zariadenia. Tieto pokyny musíte dodržiavať kvôli bezpečnej prevádzke. Upozornenie Nedodržanie týchto pokynov môže spôsobiť poranenie alebo materiálne škody spôsobené nesprávnou prevádzkou zariadenia. Tieto pokyny musíte dodržiavať kvôli bezpečnej prevádzke. Dôležité Pokyny obsahujúce dôležité informácie. Tieto informácie si určite prečítajte. Poznámka Pokyny v podobe poznámok k obsluhe alebo dodatočné vysvetlenia. Označuje pracovné postupy v systéme Windows. Označuje pracovné postupy v počítačoch Macintosh. Na začiatok strany Ochranné známky Strana 105 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Ako používať túto príručku > Ochranné známky Ochranné známky „Microsoft“ je registrovaná ochranná známka spoločnosti Microsoft Corporation. „Windows“ je ochranná známka alebo registrovaná ochranná známka spoločnosti Microsoft Corporation v USA a iných krajinách. „Windows Vista“ je ochranná známka alebo registrovaná ochranná známka spoločnosti Microsoft Corporation v USA a iných krajinách. „Internet Explorer“ je ochranná známka alebo registrovaná ochranná známka spoločnosti Microsoft Corporation v USA a iných krajinách. „Macintosh“ a „Mac“ sú ochranné známky spoločnosti Apple Inc., registrované v USA a iných krajinách. „Bonjour“ je ochranná známka spoločnosti Apple Inc., registrovaná v USA a iných krajinách. „Adobe“, „Adobe Photoshop“, „Adobe RGB“ a „Adobe RGB (1998)“ sú registrované ochranné známky alebo ochranné známky spoločnosti Adobe Systems Incorporated v USA a iných krajinách. Exif Print Toto zariadenie podporuje štandard Exif Print. Exif Print je štandard na vylepšenie komunikácie medzi digitálnymi fotoaparátmi a tlačiarňami. Po pripojení digitálneho fotoaparátu kompatibilného so štandardom Exif Print sa použijú a optimalizujú obrazové údaje uložené vo fotoaparáte v čase snímania, výsledkom čoho sú výtlačky s veľmi vysokou kvalitou. Na začiatok strany Tlač z počítača Strana 106 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Tlač z počítača Tlač z počítača Tlač pomocou dodaného aplikačného softvéru Tlač pomocou iného aplikačného softvéru Na začiatok strany Tlač pomocou dodaného aplikačného softvéru Strana 107 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Tlač z počítača > Tlač pomocou dodaného aplikačného softvéru Tlač pomocou dodaného aplikačného softvéru Čo je program Easy-PhotoPrint EX? Tlač fotografií Vytvorenie albumu Tlač kalendárov Tlač nálepiek Rozloženie tlače Oprava a zlepšenie fotografií Otázky a odpovede Nastavenia tlače fotografií Ďalšie nastavenia Na začiatok strany What Is Easy-PhotoPrint EX? Strana 108 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > What Is Easy-PhotoPrint EX? What Is Easy-PhotoPrint EX? Easy-PhotoPrint EX allows you to create albums, calendars and stickers easily using photos taken with digital cameras. You can also print borderless photos easily. Important Easy-PhotoPrint EX does not support Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, or Windows NT4. Easy-PhotoPrint EX can only be used with Canon inkjet printers. It does not support some printers, including Canon compact printers (SELPHY CP series). If a printer that supports Easy-PhotoPrint EX is not installed, you cannot print items you create. If Easy-PhotoPrint EX is installed on a computer that already has Easy-LayoutPrint installed, EasyLayoutPrint will be replaced by Easy-PhotoPrint EX. Note Printing on paper larger than A4 is available with supported printers only. See your printer manual for details. See Help of Easy-PhotoPrint EX for descriptions of Easy-PhotoPrint EX screens. Click Help in a screen or dialog box, or select Easy-PhotoPrint EX Help... from the Help menu. Help appears. About Exif Print Easy-PhotoPrint EX supports "Exif Print." Exif Print is a standard for enhancing the communication between digital cameras and printers. By connecting to an Exif Print-compliant digital camera, the image data at the time of shooting is used and optimized, yielding extremely high quality prints. Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX from Other Applications What Is Easy-PhotoPrint EX? Strana 109 z celkového počtu 684 Easy-PhotoPrint EX can be started from other applications. See the application's manual for details on the procedure for starting. The Photo Print function is available with the following applications: MP Navigator EX Ver.1.00 or later ZoomBrowser EX Ver.6.0 or later Digital Photo Professional Ver.3.2 or later Important Easy-PhotoPrint EX is subject to the following restrictions when started from Digital Photo Professional: - Menu does not appear in the step button area on the left side of the screen. - Images cannot be corrected/enhanced. - Image display order cannot be changed. - Edited images cannot be saved. - Options other than Enable ICC Profile cannot be selected for Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box. Therefore, you cannot use the Vivid Photo and Photo Noise Reduction functions. The Album function is available with the following applications: MP Navigator EX Ver.1.00 or later ZoomBrowser EX Ver.5.8 or later Supported Image File Formats (Extensions) BMP (.bmp) JPEG (.jpg, .jpeg) TIFF (.tif, .tiff) PICT (.pict, .pct) Easy-PhotoPrint image files (.epp) Important When selecting an image, if there is a TIFF file in the selected folder, the image may not be displayed correctly or Easy-PhotoPrint EX may shut down depending on the TIFF format. In such cases, move the TIFF file to another folder or recreate the file in a different file format, and then select the folder again. Note (Question Mark). The thumbnails of files in unsupported formats are displayed as When Easy-PhotoPrint EX is started from Digital Photo Professional, all image files supported by Digital Photo Professional will be displayed. File Formats (Extensions) Supported by Easy-PhotoPrint EX Easy-PhotoPrint EX Photo Print file (.el6) Easy-PhotoPrint EX Album file (.el1) Easy-PhotoPrint EX Stickers file (.el2) Easy-PhotoPrint EX Calendar file (.el4) Easy-PhotoPrint EX Layout file (.el5) Page top Printing Photos Strana 110 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Photos Printing Photos Easy-PhotoPrint EX allows you to print your favorite photos in a variety of layouts. You can also create borderless photos easily. Corrections suitable for photos will be applied automatically when printing. Steps 1. Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX 2. Selecting a Photo 3. Selecting the Paper 4. Printing Try This Correcting and Enhancing Photos Printing Vivid Photos Reducing Photo Noise Cropping Photos (Photo Print) Printing Dates on Photos (Photo Print) Printing Multiple Photos on One Page Printing an Index Printing ID Photos (ID Photo Print) Printing Photo Information Saving Photos Opening Saved Files Questions and Answers How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File? Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from? How Do I Print with Even Margins? Printing Photos Strana 111 z celkového počtu 684 Page top Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX Strana 112 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Photos > Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX 1. From the Start menu, select (All) Programs > Canon Utilities > Easy-PhotoPrint EX > Easy-PhotoPrint EX. Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears. Page top Selecting a Photo Strana 113 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Photos > Selecting a Photo Selecting a Photo 1. Click Photo Print from Menu. The Select Images screen appears. Important The thumbnails (reduced images) displayed in the screen may appear as follows: - A black line appears along an edge of the image. - An edge of the image appears cropped. However, such images will be displayed normally when enlarged or previewed, and print results will not be affected. 2. Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area. The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails (miniatures). Important If Easy-PhotoPrint EX is started from another application (MP Navigator EX, ZoomBrowser EX or Digital Photo Professional), the folder tree area will not be displayed. The images opened in the application will be displayed as thumbnails. 3. Click the image you want to print. The number of copies appears as "1" below the clicked image, while the selected image itself will appear in the selected image area. Note To delete an image in the selected image area, select the image you want to delete and click Selecting a Photo Strana 114 z celkového počtu 684 (Delete Imported Image). To delete all images from the selected image area, click To print two or more copies of an image, click (Delete All Imported Images). (Up arrow) until the number of copies you want is reached. To reduce the number of copies shown in the box, click (Down arrow). You can change the order of photos using the list located at the top right corner of the screen. You can select the printing order from Sort by Date and Sort by Name. Note You can correct or enhance the selected image before printing. Correcting and Enhancing Photos See Help for details on the Select Images screen. Page top Selecting the Paper Strana 115 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Photos > Selecting the Paper Selecting the Paper 1. Click Select Paper. The Select Paper screen appears. 2. Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used: Printer Paper Source Paper Size Media Type Note The paper sizes and media types may vary depending on the printer. See Help for details. The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type. Note You can print photos with more vivid colors or you can reduce the photo noise. Printing Vivid Photos Reducing Photo Noise See Help for details on the Select Paper screen. Page top Printing Strana 116 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Photos > Printing Printing 1. Click Layout/Print. The Layout/Print screen appears. Important The thumbnails (reduced images) displayed in the screen may appear as follows: - A black line appears along an edge of the image. - An edge of the image appears cropped. However, such images will be displayed normally when enlarged or previewed, and print results will not be affected. 2. Select a layout you want to use. Click a borderless layout to print borderless photos. Note The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the printer, paper size, and media type. 3. Click Print. Important When you print on large size paper such as A3/A3+, some computers cannot print properly if you print more than one page or copy at a time. It is recommended that you print page by page when you print on such paper. While printing on paper larger than A4 or printing high-resolution images, data may be printed only to the middle if many images are printed at one time. In such cases, select the Spool print job page by page checkbox in the Preferences dialog box, and then print again. Printing To display the Preferences dialog box, click Strana 117 z celkového počtu 684 (Settings) or select Preferences... from the File menu. The photo print settings will be discarded if you exit Easy-PhotoPrint EX without saving the settings. It is recommended that you save the printed image if you want to print it again. Saving Photos When you print on a bordered layout, the margins on the left and right or the top and bottom may become wider than the other. How Do I Print with Even Margins? Note You can crop images or print dates on photos. Cropping Photos (Photo Print) Printing Dates on Photos (Photo Print) You can correct or enhance the selected image before printing. Correcting and Enhancing Photos You can specify advanced Photo Print settings (number of copies, print quality, etc.) in the Preferences dialog box. To display the Preferences dialog box, click (Settings) or select Preferences... from the File menu. See Help for details on the Layout/Print screen. Page top Creating an Album Strana 118 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating an Album Creating an Album Easy-PhotoPrint EX allows you to create your own personalized photo album. Steps 1. Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX 2. Selecting the Paper and Layout 3. Selecting a Photo 4. Editing 5. Printing Try This Correcting and Enhancing Photos Changing Layout Changing Background Adding Photos Swapping Positions of Photos Replacing Photos Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos Cropping Photos Framing Photos Printing Dates on Photos Attaching Comments to Photos Adding Text to Photos Saving Opening Saved Files Questions and Answers Creating an Album Strana 119 z celkového počtu 684 How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File? What Is "C1" or "C4"? Page top Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX Strana 120 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating an Album > Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX 1. From the Start menu, select (All) Programs > Canon Utilities > Easy-PhotoPrint EX > Easy-PhotoPrint EX. Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears. Page top Selecting the Paper and Layout Strana 121 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating an Album > Selecting the Paper and Layout Selecting the Paper and Layout 1. Click Album from Menu. The Page Setup screen appears. 2. Set the following items in the General Settings section: Paper Size Orientation Cover Double page album Page number Note See Help on the paper size that can be selected. You can select whether to display images on the inside of the front and back covers in the Cover Options dialog box. To display the Cover Options dialog box, select Front or Front & Back for Cover and click Options.... Select the Double page album checkbox to enable the spread page layout (consisting of twopage master). In a double-page album, you can arrange an image across the left and right pages. You can customize the page numbers (position, font size, etc.) in the Page Number Settings dialog box. To display the Page Number Settings dialog box, select the Page number checkbox and click Settings.... You can customize the margins of the front cover, inside pages and back cover in the Margin Settings dialog box. To display the Margin Settings dialog box, click Margins.... 3. Select the theme you want to use from Theme in Sample Layout. Selecting the Paper and Layout Strana 122 z celkového počtu 684 4. If you want to change the layout, click Layout.... The Change Layout dialog box appears. In the Change Layout dialog box, you can change the layout or select whether to print the date (on which the picture was taken) on the photo. Note The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size, Orientation, Double page album, or the type of page selected (front cover, inside pages or back cover). You can customize the date (position, size, color, etc.) in the Date Settings dialog box. To display the Date Settings dialog box, select the Print date checkbox in the Change Layout dialog box and click Date Settings.... 5. If you want to change the background, click Background.... The Change Background dialog box appears. In the Change Background dialog box, you can paint the background in a single color or paste an image file to it. Note See Help for details on the Page Setup screen. Page top Selecting a Photo Strana 123 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating an Album > Selecting a Photo Selecting a Photo 1. Click Select Images. The Select Images screen appears. 2. Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area. The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails (miniatures). Important If Easy-PhotoPrint EX is started from another application (MP Navigator EX or ZoomBrowser EX), the folder tree area will not be displayed. The images opened in the application will be displayed as thumbnails. 3. Select the image(s) you want to print, and click one of the buttons below. To print on the front cover, click To print on the inside pages, click To print on the back cover, click (Import to Front Cover). (Import to Inside Pages). (Import to Back Cover). The selected image(s) are displayed in the selected image area. You can also select the image(s) you want to print by dragging them into the selected image area. Note To delete an image in the selected image area, select the image you want to delete and click (Delete Imported Image). Selecting a Photo To delete all images from the selected image area, click Strana 124 z celkového počtu 684 (Delete All Imported Images). Note See Help for details on the Select Images screen. Page top Editing Strana 125 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating an Album > Editing Editing 1. Click Edit. The Edit screen appears. 2. Edit your album if necessary. Changing Layout Changing Background Adding Photos Swapping Positions of Photos Replacing Photos Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos Cropping Photos Framing Photos Printing Dates on Photos Attaching Comments to Photos Adding Text to Photos Important The edit information will be discarded if you exit Easy-PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited album. It is recommended that you save the item if you want to edit it again. The page numbers on the front and back covers of the album are displayed as follows: C1: Front cover C2: Inside the front cover C3: Inside the back cover Editing Strana 126 z celkového počtu 684 C4: Back cover Saving Note See Help for details on the Edit screen. Page top Printing Strana 127 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating an Album > Printing Printing 1. Click Print Settings. The Print Settings screen appears. 2. Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used: Printer Media Type Copies Paper Source Print Quality Borderless Printing Note The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size. Duplex Printing appears if the selected printer and media type support duplex printing. Select this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper. Automatic appears if you select the Duplex Printing checkbox after selecting a printer that supports automatic duplex printing and media type that supports duplex printing. Select this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper automatically. The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type. You can set a custom print quality level in the Print Quality Settings dialog box. To display the Print Quality Settings dialog box, select Custom for Print Quality and click Quality Settings.... Select the Borderless Printing checkbox to print borderless photos. You can specify the print range and the amount of extension for borderless printing in the Print Settings dialog box. To display the Print Settings dialog box, click Advanced.... Printing Strana 128 z celkového počtu 684 3. Click Print. Note See Help for details on the Print Settings screen. Page top Printing Calendars Strana 129 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Calendars Printing Calendars Easy-PhotoPrint EX allows you to create your own calendar using your favorite photos. Steps 1. Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX 2. Selecting the Paper and Layout 3. Selecting a Photo 4. Editing 5. Printing Try This Correcting and Enhancing Photos Changing Layout Changing Background Adding Photos Swapping Positions of Photos Replacing Photos Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos Cropping Photos Framing Photos Printing Dates on Photos Adding Text to Photos Setting Calendar Display Setting Holidays Saving Opening Saved Files Printing Calendars Strana 130 z celkového počtu 684 Questions and Answers How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File? Page top Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX Strana 131 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Calendars > Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX 1. From the Start menu, select (All) Programs > Canon Utilities > Easy-PhotoPrint EX > Easy-PhotoPrint EX. Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears. Page top Selecting the Paper and Layout Strana 132 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Calendars > Selecting the Paper and Layout Selecting the Paper and Layout 1. Click Calendar from Menu. The Page Setup screen appears. 2. Set the following items in the General Settings section: Paper Size Orientation Start from Period Note See Help on the paper size that can be selected. You can add holidays to your calendar. Setting Holidays 3. Select a layout for Design. If necessary, make advanced settings on the calendar and set the background. Note You can customize the calendar display (font colors of the dates and days of the week, position and size of the calendar, etc.). Setting Calendar Display You can paint the background in a single color or paste an image file to it in the Change Background dialog box. To display the Change Background dialog box, click Background.... Note Selecting the Paper and Layout Strana 133 z celkového počtu 684 See Help for details on the Page Setup screen. Page top Selecting a Photo Strana 134 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Calendars > Selecting a Photo Selecting a Photo 1. Click Select Images. The Select Images screen appears. 2. Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area. The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails (miniatures). 3. Select the image(s) you want to print and click (Import to Inside Pages). The selected image(s) are displayed in the selected image area. You can also select the image(s) you want to print by dragging them into the selected image area. Note To delete an image in the selected image area, select the image you want to delete and click (Delete Imported Image). To delete all images from the selected image area, click (Delete All Imported Images). Note See Help for details on the Select Images screen. Page top Editing Strana 135 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Calendars > Editing Editing 1. Click Edit. The Edit screen appears. 2. Edit the calendar if necessary. Changing Layout Changing Background Adding Photos Swapping Positions of Photos Replacing Photos Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos Cropping Photos Framing Photos Printing Dates on Photos Adding Text to Photos Setting Calendar Display Setting Holidays Important The edit information will be discarded if you exit Easy-PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited calendar. It is recommended that you save the item if you want to edit it again. Saving Note Editing Strana 136 z celkového počtu 684 See Help for details on the Edit screen. Page top Printing Strana 137 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Calendars > Printing Printing 1. Click Print Settings. The Print Settings screen appears. 2. Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used: Printer Media Type Copies Paper Source Print Quality Borderless Printing Note The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size. Duplex Printing appears if the selected printer and media type support duplex printing. Select this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper. Automatic appears if you select the Duplex Printing checkbox after selecting a printer that supports automatic duplex printing and media type that supports duplex printing. Select this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper automatically. The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type. You can set a custom print quality level in the Print Quality Settings dialog box. To display the Print Quality Settings dialog box, select Custom for Print Quality and click Quality Settings.... You can specify the print range and the amount of extension for borderless printing in the Print Settings dialog box. To display the Print Settings dialog box, click Advanced.... 3. Click Print. Printing Strana 138 z celkového počtu 684 Note See Help for details on the Print Settings screen. Page top Printing Stickers Strana 139 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Stickers Printing Stickers You can print your favorite photos on compatible sticker sheets. Steps 1. Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX 2. Selecting the Paper and Layout 3. Selecting a Photo 4. Editing 5. Printing Try This Correcting and Enhancing Photos Adding Photos Swapping Positions of Photos Replacing Photos Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos Cropping Photos Framing Photos Adding Text to Photos Saving Opening Saved Files Questions and Answers How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File? Page top Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX Strana 140 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Stickers > Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX 1. From the Start menu, select (All) Programs > Canon Utilities > Easy-PhotoPrint EX > Easy-PhotoPrint EX. Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears. Page top Selecting the Paper and Layout Strana 141 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Stickers > Selecting the Paper and Layout Selecting the Paper and Layout 1. Click Stickers from Menu. The Page Setup screen appears. 2. Set the following items in the General Settings section: Paper Size Orientation Print date Use the same image in all frames Note Paper sizes other than Photo Stickers cannot be selected. Select the Use the same image in all frames checkbox to use the same image in all the frames on the page. You can customize the date (position, size, color, etc.) in the Date Settings dialog box. To display the Date Settings dialog box, select the Print date checkbox and click Date Settings.... Note See Help for details on the Page Setup screen. Page top Selecting a Photo Strana 142 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Stickers > Selecting a Photo Selecting a Photo 1. Click Select Images. The Select Images screen appears. 2. Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area. The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails (miniatures). 3. Select the image(s) you want to print and click (Import to Inside Pages). The selected image(s) are displayed in the selected image area. You can also select the image(s) you want to print by dragging them into the selected image area. Note To delete an image in the selected image area, select the image you want to delete and click (Delete Imported Image). To delete all images from the selected image area, click (Delete All Imported Images). Note See Help for details on the Select Images screen. Page top Editing Strana 143 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Stickers > Editing Editing 1. Click Edit. The Edit screen appears. 2. Edit the stickers if necessary. Adding Photos Swapping Positions of Photos Replacing Photos Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos Cropping Photos Printing Dates on Photos Adding Text to Photos Important The edit information will be discarded if you exit Easy-PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited stickers. It is recommended that you save the item if you want to edit it again. Saving Note See Help for details on the Edit screen. Page top Printing Strana 144 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Stickers > Printing Printing 1. Click Print Settings. The Print Settings screen appears. 2. Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used: Printer Media Type Copies Paper Source Print Quality Borderless Printing Note The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size. The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type. You can set a custom print quality level in the Print Quality Settings dialog box. To display the Print Quality Settings dialog box, select Custom for Print Quality and click Quality Settings.... You can adjust the printing position in the Adjust Print Position dialog box. To display the Adjust Print Position dialog box, click Print Position.... You can specify the print range and the amount of extension for borderless printing in the Print Settings dialog box. To display the Print Settings dialog box, click Advanced.... 3. Click Print. Note See Help for details on the Print Settings screen. Printing Strana 145 z celkového počtu 684 Page top Printing Layout Strana 146 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Layout Printing Layout You can add text to your favorite photos and print them in a variety of layouts. Steps 1. Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX 2. Selecting the Paper and Layout 3. Selecting a Photo 4. Editing 5. Printing Try This Correcting and Enhancing Photos Changing Layout Adding Photos Swapping Positions of Photos Replacing Photos Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos Cropping Photos Printing Dates on Photos Adding Text to Photos Saving Opening Saved Files Questions and Answers How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File? Page top Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX Strana 147 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Layout > Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX 1. From the Start menu, select (All) Programs > Canon Utilities > Easy-PhotoPrint EX > Easy-PhotoPrint EX. Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears. Page top Selecting the Paper and Layout Strana 148 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Layout > Selecting the Paper and Layout Selecting the Paper and Layout 1. Click Layout Print from Menu. The Page Setup screen appears. 2. Set the following items in the General Settings section: Paper Size Orientation Print date Note See Help on the paper size that can be selected. You can customize the date (position, size, color, etc.) in the Date Settings dialog box. To display the Date Settings dialog box, select the Print date checkbox and click Date Settings.... 3. Select a layout from Layouts. Note The layouts may vary depending on the Orientation. Note See Help for details on the Page Setup screen. Page top Selecting a Photo Strana 149 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Layout > Selecting a Photo Selecting a Photo 1. Click Select Images. The Select Images screen appears. 2. Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area. The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails (miniatures). 3. Select the image(s) you want to print and click (Import to Inside Pages). The selected image(s) are displayed in the selected image area. You can also select the image(s) you want to print by dragging them into the selected image area. Note To delete an image in the selected image area, select the image you want to delete and click (Delete Imported Image). To delete all images from the selected image area, click (Delete All Imported Images). Note See Help for details on the Select Images screen. Page top Editing Strana 150 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Layout > Editing Editing 1. Click Edit. The Edit screen appears. 2. Edit the layout if necessary. Changing Layout Adding Photos Swapping Positions of Photos Replacing Photos Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos Cropping Photos Printing Dates on Photos Adding Text to Photos Important The edit information will be discarded if you exit Easy-PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited layout. It is recommended that you save the item if you want to edit it again. Saving Note See Help for details on the Edit screen. Page top Printing Strana 151 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Layout > Printing Printing 1. Click Print Settings. The Print Settings screen appears. 2. Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used: Printer Media Type Copies Paper Source Print Quality Borderless Printing Note The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size. Duplex Printing appears if the selected printer and media type support duplex printing. Select this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper. Automatic appears if you select the Duplex Printing checkbox after selecting a printer that supports automatic duplex printing and media type that supports duplex printing. Select this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper automatically. The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type. You can set a custom print quality level in the Print Quality Settings dialog box. To display the Print Quality Settings dialog box, select Custom for Print Quality and click Quality Settings.... Select the Borderless Printing checkbox to print borderless photos. You can specify the print range and the amount of extension for borderless printing in the Print Settings dialog box. To display the Print Settings dialog box, click Advanced.... 3. Click Print. Printing Strana 152 z celkového počtu 684 Note See Help for details on the Print Settings screen. Page top Correcting and Enhancing Photos Strana 153 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and Enhancing Photos Correcting and Enhancing Photos You can correct and enhance images. Click (Correct/Enhance Images) in the Select Images or Edit screen, or in the Layout/Print screen of Photo Print. You can make the following corrections and enhancements in the Correct/Enhance Images window. Important For Photo Print, if you select Enable ICC Profile in the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box, you cannot correct/enhance images. Note See "Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window. Auto Photo Fix This function will automatically analyze the captured scene and apply suitable corrections. Using the Auto Photo Fix Function Red-Eye Correction Function You can correct red eyes caused by a camera flash. Using the Red-Eye Correction Function Face Brightener Function You can brighten dark faces caused by bright background. Using the Face Brightener Function Face Sharpener Function You can sharpen out-of-focus faces in a photo. Using the Face Sharpener Function Digital Face Smoothing Function You can enhance skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles. Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Blemish Remover Function You can remove moles. Using the Blemish Remover Function Image Adjustment You can adjust brightness and contrast or sharpen the entire image. You can also blur the outline of the subjects or remove the base color. Correcting and Enhancing Photos Strana 154 z celkového počtu 684 Adjusting Images Page top Using the Auto Photo Fix Function Strana 155 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and Enhancing Photos > Using the Auto Photo Fix Function Using the Auto Photo Fix Function Apply optimum corrections automatically to the photos used for an album, calendar, etc. Important The Auto Photo Fix function is not available for Photo Print. Photo Print allows you to automatically apply suitable corrections to all photos when printing, by selecting Auto Photo Fix in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box. To display the Preferences dialog box, click (Settings) in the Layout/Print screen or select Preferences... from the File menu. Once image is corrected with Auto Photo Fix and saved, it cannot be corrected again with Auto Photo Fix. Also, Auto Photo Fix may not be available for images edited using an application, digital camera, etc. manufactured by other companies. 1. Select photos in the Select Images screen, then click Images). (Correct/Enhance The Correct/Enhance Images window appears. Note You can also display the Correct/Enhance Images window by clicking (Correct/Enhance Images) in the Layout/Print or Edit screen. In that case, only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected/enhanced. See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window. 2. Select the image you want to correct from the list displayed in the lower part of the Correct/Enhance Images window. The image appears in Preview. Using the Auto Photo Fix Function Strana 156 z celkového počtu 684 Note If only one image is selected, the thumbnail does not appear below Preview. 3. Make sure that Auto is selected. 4. Click Auto Photo Fix, then click OK. The entire photo is corrected automatically and the the upper left of the image. (Correction/Enhancement) mark appears on Note (Compare) to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that Click you can compare and check the result. Click Reset Selected Image to undo the correction operation. If you want to apply the correction to all the selected images at once, select the Apply to all images checkbox. Select the Prioritize Exif Info checkbox to apply corrections primarily based on the settings made at the time of shooting. Deselect this checkbox to apply corrections based on the image analysis results. It is recommended that you normally select this setting. 5. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images. You can save corrected images as new files. Note To save only the image you like, click Save Selected Image. To save all images, click Save All Corrected Images. Only JPEG/Exif file format is available for corrected images. 6. Click Exit. Important The corrections will be lost if you exit before saving corrected images. Page top Using the Red-Eye Correction Function Strana 157 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and Enhancing Photos > Using the Red-Eye Correction Function Using the Red-Eye Correction Function You can correct red eyes caused by a camera flash. You can perform the Red-Eye Correction function either automatically or manually. Note Photo Print allows you to automatically correct red eyes when printing. To correct automatically, select Enable Auto Photo Fix in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box and select the Enable Red-Eye Correction checkbox. 1. Select photos in the Select Images screen, then click (Correct/Enhance Images). The Correct/Enhance Images window appears. Note You can also display the Correct/Enhance Images window by clicking (Correct/Enhance Images) in the Layout/Print or Edit screen. In that case, only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected/enhanced. See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window. 2. Select the image you want to correct from the list displayed in the lower part of the Correct/Enhance Images window. The image appears in Preview. Note If only one image is selected, the thumbnail does not appear below Preview. Using the Red-Eye Correction Function Strana 158 z celkového počtu 684 Auto Correction 3. Make sure that Auto is selected. 4. Click Red-Eye Correction. 5. Click OK. Red eyes are corrected and the the image. (Correction/Enhancement) mark appears on the upper left of Important Areas other than the eyes may be corrected depending on the image. Note (Compare) to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that Click you can compare and check the result. Click Reset Selected Image to undo the correction operation. If you want to apply the correction to all the selected images at once, select the Apply to all images checkbox. Manual Correction 3. Click Manual, then click Correct/Enhance. 4. Click Red-Eye Correction. Note Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Red-Eye Correction. Move the cursor over the image. The shape of the cursor changes to (Paintbrush). 5. Drag to select the red area you want to correct, then click OK that appears over the image. Using the Red-Eye Correction Function Red eye is corrected and the Strana 159 z celkového počtu 684 (Correction/Enhancement) mark appears on the upper left of the image. Note Click Undo to undo the preceding correction operation. 6. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images. You can save corrected images as new files. Note To save only the image you like, click Save Selected Image. To save all images, click Save All Corrected Images. Only JPEG/Exif file format is available for corrected images. 7. Click Exit. Important The corrections will be lost if you exit before saving corrected images. Page top Using the Face Brightener Function Strana 160 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and Enhancing Photos > Using the Face Brightener Function Using the Face Brightener Function You can brighten dark faces caused by bright background. Note You can brighten dark photos caused by bright background automatically by selecting Auto Photo Fix. If the correction had not been made sufficiently, applying Face Brightener function is recommended. Using the Auto Photo Fix Function 1. Select photos in the Select Images screen, then click Images). (Correct/Enhance The Correct/Enhance Images window appears. Note You can also display the Correct/Enhance Images window by clicking (Correct/Enhance Images) in the Layout/Print or Edit screen. In that case, only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected/enhanced. See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window. 2. Select the image you want to correct from the list displayed in the lower part of the Correct/Enhance Images window. The image appears in Preview. Note If only one image is selected, the thumbnail does not appear below Preview. 3. Click Manual, then click Correct/Enhance. Using the Face Brightener Function Strana 161 z celkového počtu 684 4. Click Face Brightener. Note Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Face Brightener. Move the cursor over the image. The shape of the cursor changes to (Cross). 5. Drag to select the area you want to correct, then click OK that appears over the image. The entire image is corrected so that the selected area containing the face becomes brighter, and the (Correction/Enhancement) mark appears on the upper left of the image. Note You can also drag to rotate the selected area. Click Undo to undo the preceding correction operation. 6. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images. You can save corrected images as new files. Note To save only the image you like, click Save Selected Image. To save all images, click Save All Corrected Images. Only JPEG/Exif file format is available for corrected images. 7. Click Exit. Important The corrections will be lost if you exit before saving corrected images. Page top Using the Face Sharpener Function Strana 162 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and Enhancing Photos > Using the Face Sharpener Function Using the Face Sharpener Function You can sharpen out-of-focus faces in a photo. You can perform the Face Sharpener function either automatically or manually. 1. Select photos in the Select Images screen, then click Images). (Correct/Enhance The Correct/Enhance Images window appears. Note You can also display the Correct/Enhance Images window by clicking (Correct/Enhance Images) in the Layout/Print or Edit screen. In that case, only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected/enhanced. See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window. 2. Select the image you want to correct from the list displayed in the lower part of the Correct/Enhance Images window. The image appears in Preview. Note If only one image is selected, the thumbnail does not appear below Preview. Auto Correction 3. Make sure that Auto is selected. Using the Face Sharpener Function Strana 163 z celkového počtu 684 4. Click Face Sharpener. Note Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Face Sharpener. 5. Click OK. The face is sharpened and the (Correction/Enhancement) mark appears on the upper left of the image. Note (Compare) to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that Click you can compare and check the result. Click Reset Selected Image to undo the correction operation. If you want to apply the correction to all the selected images at once, select the Apply to all images checkbox. Manual Correction 3. Click Manual, then click Correct/Enhance. 4. Click Face Sharpener. Note Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Face Sharpener. Move the cursor over the image. The shape of the cursor changes to (Cross). 5. Drag to select the area you want to correct, then click OK that appears over the image. Using the Face Sharpener Function The facial area in and around the selected area is sharpened and the Enhancement) mark appears on the upper left of the image. Strana 164 z celkového počtu 684 (Correction/ Note You can also drag to rotate the selected area. Click Undo to undo the preceding correction operation. 6. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images. You can save corrected images as new files. Note To save only the image you like, click Save Selected Image. To save all images, click Save All Corrected Images. Only JPEG/Exif file format is available for corrected images. 7. Click Exit. Important The corrections will be lost if you exit before saving corrected images. Page top Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Strana 165 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and Enhancing Photos > Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function You can enhance skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles. You can perform the Digital Face Smoothing function either automatically or manually. 1. Select photos in the Select Images screen, then click Images). (Correct/Enhance The Correct/Enhance Images window appears. Note You can also display the Correct/Enhance Images window by clicking (Correct/Enhance Images) in the Layout/Print or Edit screen. In that case, only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected/enhanced. See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window. 2. Select the image you want to enhance from the list displayed in the lower part of the Correct/Enhance Images window. The image appears in Preview. Note If only one image is selected, the thumbnail does not appear below Preview. Auto Enhancement 3. Make sure that Auto is selected. Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Strana 166 z celkového počtu 684 4. Click Digital Face Smoothing. Note Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Digital Face Smoothing. 5. Click OK. Skin is enhanced beautifully and the of the image. (Correction/Enhancement) mark appears on the upper left Note (Compare) to display the images before and after the enhancement side by side so Click that you can compare and check the result. Click Reset Selected Image to undo the enhancement operation. If you want to apply the enhancement to all the selected images at once, select the Apply to all images checkbox. Manual Enhancement 3. Click Manual, then click Correct/Enhance. 4. Click Digital Face Smoothing. Note Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Digital Face Smoothing. Move the cursor over the image. The shape of the cursor changes to (Cross). 5. Drag to select the area you want to enhance, then click OK that appears over the image. Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Skin in and around the selected area is enhanced beautifully and the mark appears on the upper left of the image. Strana 167 z celkového počtu 684 (Correction/Enhancement) Note You can also drag to rotate the selected area. Click Undo to undo the preceding enhancement operation. 6. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images. You can save enhanced images as new files. Note To save only the image you like, click Save Selected Image. To save all images, click Save All Corrected Images. Only JPEG/Exif file format is available for enhanced images. 7. Click Exit. Important The enhancements will be lost if you exit before saving enhanced images. Page top Using the Blemish Remover Function Strana 168 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and Enhancing Photos > Using the Blemish Remover Function Using the Blemish Remover Function You can remove moles. 1. Select photos in the Select Images screen, then click Images). (Correct/Enhance The Correct/Enhance Images window appears. Note You can also display the Correct/Enhance Images window by clicking (Correct/Enhance Images) in the Layout/Print or Edit screen. In that case, only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected/enhanced. See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window. 2. Select the image you want to enhance from the list displayed in the lower part of the Correct/Enhance Images window. The image appears in Preview. Note If only one image is selected, the thumbnail does not appear below Preview. 3. Click Manual, then click Correct/Enhance. 4. Click Blemish Remover. Using the Blemish Remover Function Strana 169 z celkového počtu 684 Note Move the cursor over the image. The shape of the cursor changes to (Cross). 5. Drag to select the area you want to enhance, then click OK that appears over the image. Moles in and around the selected area are removed and the appears on the upper left of the image. (Correction/Enhancement) mark Note Click Undo to undo the preceding enhancement operation. 6. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images. You can save enhanced images as new files. Note To save only the image you like, click Save Selected Image. To save all images, click Save All Corrected Images. Only JPEG/Exif file format is available for enhanced images. 7. Click Exit. Important The enhancements will be lost if you exit before saving enhanced images. Page top Adjusting Images Strana 170 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and Enhancing Photos > Adjusting Images Adjusting Images You can make fine adjustments to the overall brightness, contrast, etc. of images. 1. Select photos in the Select Images screen, then click Images). (Correct/Enhance The Correct/Enhance Images window appears. Note You can also display the Correct/Enhance Images window by clicking (Correct/Enhance Images) in the Layout/Print or Edit screen. In that case, only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected/enhanced. See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window. 2. Select the image you want to adjust from the list displayed in the lower part of the Correct/Enhance Images window. The image appears in Preview. Note If only one image is selected, the thumbnail does not appear below Preview. 3. Click Manual, then click Adjust. 4. Move the slider of the item you want to adjust and set the effect level. The following adjustments are available: Brightness Contrast Adjusting Images Strana 171 z celkového počtu 684 Sharpness Blur Show-through Removal Note Click Defaults to reset all adjustments. 5. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images. You can save adjusted images as new files. Note To save only the image you like, click Save Selected Image. To save all images, click Save All Corrected Images. Only JPEG/Exif file format is available for adjusted images. 6. Click Exit. Important The adjustments will be lost if you exit before saving adjusted images. Page top Correct/Enhance Images Window Strana 172 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and Enhancing Photos > Correct/Enhance Images Window Correct/Enhance Images Window You can correct/enhance images in this window. To display the Correct/Enhance Images window, click (Correct/Enhance Images) in the Select Images or Edit screen, or in the Layout/Print screen of Photo Print. (1)Toolbar Toolbar (Zoom In/Zoom Out) Displays the enlarged or reduced preview of the page. (Full Screen) Displays the entire image in Preview. (Compare) Displays the Compare Images window. You can compare the images before and after the correction/ enhancement side by side. The image before the correction/enhancement is displayed on the left, and the image after the correction/enhancement is displayed on the right. Correct/Enhance Images Window Strana 173 z celkového počtu 684 (2)Task Area Available tasks and settings may vary between the Auto and Manual tabs. Click Auto or Manual to display the corresponding tab. Auto Tab Select to correct automatically. Auto Photo Fix Applies automatic corrections suitable for photos. Important The Auto Photo Fix function is not available for Photo Print. Photo Print allows you to automatically apply suitable corrections to all photos when printing. Select this option in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box. To display the Preferences dialog box, click from the File menu. (Settings) in the Layout/Print screen or select Preferences... Prioritize Exif Info Select this checkbox to apply corrections primarily based on the settings made at the time of Correct/Enhance Images Window Strana 174 z celkového počtu 684 shooting. Deselect this checkbox to apply corrections based on the image analysis results. It is recommended that you normally select this setting. Note Exif is a standard format for embedding various shooting data in digital camera images (JPEG). For Photo Print, you can apply suitable corrections based on Exif information automatically by selecting Enable Auto Photo Fix in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box and selecting the Prioritize Exif Info checkbox. Red-Eye Correction Corrects red eyes. Note For Photo Print, you can also correct red eyes by selecting Enable Auto Photo Fix in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box and selecting the Enable Red-Eye Correction checkbox. Face Sharpener Sharpens out-of-focus faces. You can adjust the effect level using the slider. Digital Face Smoothing Enhances skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles. You can adjust the effect level using the slider. Apply to all images Automatically corrects all the images displayed in the list. OK Applies the selected effect to the selected image or all images. Reset Selected Image Cancels all corrections and enhancements applied to the selected image. Save Selected Image Saves the selected image in the list that applied corrections and enhancements. Save All Corrected Images Saves all the images that applied corrections and enhancements displayed in the list. Exit Click to close the Correct/Enhance Images window. Manual Tab Select to correct manually. Use Adjust to adjust brightness and contrast, or to sharpen the entire image. Use Correct/Enhance to correct/enhance specific areas. Adjust Correct/Enhance Images Window Strana 175 z celkového počtu 684 Brightness Adjusts the overall image brightness. Move the slider to the left to darken and right to brighten the image. Contrast Adjusts the contrast of the image. Adjust the contrast when the image is flat due to lack of contrast. Move the slider to the left to decrease and right to increase the contrast of the image. Sharpness Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image. Adjust the sharpness when the photo is out of focus or text is blurred. Move the slider to the right to sharpen the image. Blur Blurs the outline of the subjects to soften the image. Move the slider to the right to soften the image. Show-through Removal Removes show-through of text from the reverse side or removes the base color. Adjust the showthrough level to prevent text on the reverse side of thin document or the base color of the document from appearing on the image. Move the slider to the right to increase the show-through removal effect. Defaults Resets each adjustment (brightness, contrast, sharpness, blur, and show-through removal). Reset Selected Image Cancels all adjustments applied to the selected image. Save Selected Image Saves the selected image in the list that applied adjustments. Save All Corrected Images Saves all the images that applied adjustments displayed in the list. Exit Click to close the Correct/Enhance Images window. Correct/Enhance Correct/Enhance Images Window Strana 176 z celkového počtu 684 Red-Eye Correction Corrects red eyes. You can specify the area you want to apply the effect to. You can adjust the effect level using the slider. Note For Photo Print, red eyes are automatically corrected when Enable Auto Photo Fix is selected in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box and the Enable Red-Eye Correction checkbox is selected. To disable the automatic correction, deselect the checkbox. Face Brightener Corrects the entire image so that the selected facial area is brightened. You can adjust the effect level using the slider. Face Sharpener Sharpens out-of-focus faces. You can specify the area you want to apply the effect to. You can adjust the effect level using the slider. Digital Face Smoothing Enhances skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles. You can specify the area you want to apply the effect to. You can adjust the effect level using the slider. Blemish Remover Removes moles. You can specify the area you want to apply the effect to. OK Applies the selected effect to the specified area. Undo Cancels the latest correction/enhancement. Reset Selected Image Cancels all corrections and enhancements applied to the selected image. Save Selected Image Saves the selected image in the list that applied corrections and enhancements. Save All Corrected Images Saves all the images that applied corrections and enhancements displayed in the list. Correct/Enhance Images Window Strana 177 z celkového počtu 684 Exit Click to close the Correct/Enhance Images window. Page top Questions and Answers Strana 178 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Questions and Answers Questions and Answers How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File? Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from? How Do I Print with Even Margins? What Is "C1" or "C4"? Page top How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File? Strana 179 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Questions and Answers > How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File? How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File? If you want to move (or copy) a file created and saved with Easy-PhotoPrint EX from one folder to another, you need to move (or copy) the folder that was automatically created when originally saving that file as well. For example, when you save a file named "MyAlbum.el1," a folder named "MyAlbum.el1.Data" is automatically created in the same folder that contains the "MyAlbum.el1" file. If you want to move (or copy) the "MyAlbum.el1" file to another folder, move (or copy) the "MyAlbum.el1.Data" folder as well. The "MyAlbum.el1.Data" folder contains the photos used in the album. Note The icons may vary depending on the items. Important Do not change the Data folder name; otherwise you will not be able to display the photos you edited with Easy-PhotoPrint EX. Page top Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from? Strana 180 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Questions and Answers > Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from? Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from? As shown below, printing starts from the left side of the image displayed in the Layout/Print screen. Outputs the paper in the direction as the arrow indicates. See your printer manual for details on how to load paper (to print on the front/back, etc.). Page top How Do I Print with Even Margins? Strana 181 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Questions and Answers > How Do I Print with Even Margins? How Do I Print with Even Margins? When you print on a bordered layout, the margins on the left and right or the top and bottom may become wider than the other, depending on the image and printer. To always print with even margins, select the Always crop images when selecting a layout with margins checkbox on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box. To display the Preferences dialog box, click Preferences... from the File menu. (Settings) in the Layout/Print screen or select Crop the photo to apply even margins individually. Cropping Photos (Photo Print) Note This setting is available for Photo Print only. Page top What Is "C1" or "C4"? Strana 182 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Questions and Answers > What Is "C1" or "C4"? What Is "C1" or "C4"? When an album is printed, labels such as "C1" and "C4" are printed as page numbers. The "C1" and "C4" represent the front cover and back cover, respectively. C1: Front cover C2: Inside the front cover C3: Inside the back cover C4: Back cover Page top Photo Print Settings Strana 183 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings Photo Print Settings Printing Vivid Photos Reducing Photo Noise Cropping Photos (Photo Print) Printing Dates on Photos (Photo Print) Printing Multiple Photos on One Page Printing an Index Printing ID Photos (ID Photo Print) Printing Photo Information Saving Photos Opening Saved Files Page top Printing Vivid Photos Strana 184 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings > Printing Vivid Photos Printing Vivid Photos Select the Vivid Photo checkbox in the Select Paper screen to boost the colors in a photo before printing. Important This function is available only with a printer that supports Vivid Photo. This function is not available when Enable ICC Profile is selected on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box. Note Even if you select the Vivid Photo checkbox, this effect applies only to the print result. The original image or preview image will not be affected. Page top Reducing Photo Noise Strana 185 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings > Reducing Photo Noise Reducing Photo Noise When a photo is taken in a dark location such as night scene using digital camera, noise may appear in the image. Select the Photo Noise Reduction checkbox in the Select Paper screen to reduce noise in the image and make the printed photos more vivid. Important This function is not available when Enable ICC Profile is selected on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box. Note When the noise is severe, change Normal to Strong. The noise reduction effect applies only to the print result. The original image or preview image will not be affected. Page top Cropping Photos (Photo Print) Strana 186 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings > Cropping Photos (Photo Print) Cropping Photos (Photo Print) Cropping a photo is the act of removing the unnecessary portions of the photo by selecting the necessary portions. Click (Crop Image) in the Layout/Print screen or double-click the preview image. Move the white frame to the portion to print and click OK. Note To move the cropping area, place the cursor within the white frame and drag it. Drag the white lines to enlarge/reduce the cropping area. Select the The Rule of Thirds checkbox to display white broken lines. To create a balanced composition, drag any of the intersecting points (white squares) or white broken lines over the main subject of the photo. Cropping Photos (Photo Print) Strana 187 z celkového počtu 684 The cropping effect applies only to the print result. The original image will not be cropped. See Help for details on the Crop window. Page top Printing Dates on Photos (Photo Print) Strana 188 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings > Printing Dates on Photos (Photo Print) Printing Dates on Photos (Photo Print) To print the date the photo was taken on the photo, click (Date Settings) in the Layout/Print screen, then select the Print date checkbox in the Date Settings dialog box. Note The date is displayed in the short date format (mm/dd/yyyy, etc.) specified in your operating system. See Help for details on setting dates. Page top Printing Multiple Photos on One Page Strana 189 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings > Printing Multiple Photos on One Page Printing Multiple Photos on One Page You can print multiple photos on one page by selecting a multiple-photo layout in the Layout/Print screen. Note See the following section for details on how to select photos. Selecting a Photo The available number of photos and layout may vary depending on the media type. Photos are arranged in the following order. Example: Borderless (x4) You can change the printing order in Printing Order on the Print tab of the Preferences dialog box. You can select the printing order from By Date, By Name and By Selection. To display the Preferences dialog box, click (Settings) or select Preferences... from the File menu. Page top Printing an Index Strana 190 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings > Printing an Index Printing an Index You can print an index of selected photos. An index print shows the thumbnails of the photos in one page. It is convenient for managing your photos. To print an index, select Index from the layouts in the Layout/Print screen. Important Index print will be disabled if you select any of the following paper sizes. - Credit Card You can print up to 80 images on one page. Note See the following section for details on how to select photos. Selecting a Photo Photos are arranged in the following order. Example: Index (x20) You can change the printing order in Printing Order on the Print tab of the Preferences dialog box. You can select the printing order from By Date, By Name, and By Selection. To display the Preferences dialog box, click menu. (Settings) or select Preferences... from the File Printing an Index Strana 191 z celkového počtu 684 Page top Printing ID Photos (ID Photo Print) Strana 192 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings > Printing ID Photos (ID Photo Print) Printing ID Photos (ID Photo Print) You can print a variety of ID photos. Important The photo may not qualify as an official ID photo depending on its use. For details, contact the party to whom you will be submitting the photo. To print ID photos, select 4"x6" 10x15cm for Paper Size in the Select Paper screen, and select a layout of the ID photo from the layouts in the Layout/Print screen. Note See the following section for details on how to select photos. Selecting a Photo Photos are arranged in the following order. Example: ID Photo 3.5x4.5cm You can change the printing order in Printing Order on the Print tab of the Preferences dialog box. You can select the printing order from By Date, By Name, and By Selection. To display the Preferences dialog box, click (Settings) or select Preferences... from the File menu. ID photos can only be printed on 4"x6" 10x15cm paper. Printing ID Photos (ID Photo Print) Strana 193 z celkového počtu 684 Page top Printing Photo Information Strana 194 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings > Printing Photo Information Printing Photo Information You can print the photo and the Exif information side by side. To print them, select Letter 8.5"x11" or A4 for Paper Size in the Select Paper screen, and select Captured Info from the layouts in the Layout/Print screen. Note See the following section for details on how to select photos. Selecting a Photo This function is available only on paper sizes Letter 8.5"x11" and A4. Page top Saving Photos Strana 195 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings > Saving Photos Saving Photos You can save edited photos. The information of cropping and layout can be saved. Click Save in the Layout/Print screen. When the Save As dialog box appears, specify the save location and file name, then click Save. Important If you edit a saved file and save it again, the file will be overwritten. To save a file again with a new name or to a different location, select Save As... from the File menu and save. Note Save will not be displayed in the Select Images or Select Paper screen. Page top Opening Saved Files Strana 196 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings > Opening Saved Files Opening Saved Files You can open files created with Easy-PhotoPrint EX. 1. Click Library from Menu. The Open dialog box appears. You can check files created and saved with Easy-PhotoPrint EX by icon view (only for Windows Vista) or thumbnail view. Important When using 64bit Edition of Windows Vista or Windows XP, the contents of files cannot be displayed on Explorer. 2. Select the file you want to open and click Open. The Layout/Print screen appears. Note Easy-PhotoPrint EX supports the following file format (extension). - Easy-PhotoPrint EX Photo Print file (.el6) 3. Edit the file if necessary. Note You can open files created with Easy-PhotoPrint EX with the following methods, besides from Library in Menu. - Double-click or click the file. - From the File menu, click Open..., then select the file you want to edit. Opening Saved Files Strana 197 z celkového počtu 684 You can also open a recently used file by clicking the file name shown in the File menu. Page top Other Settings Strana 198 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings Other Settings Changing Layout Changing Background Adding Photos Swapping Positions of Photos Replacing Photos Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos Cropping Photos Framing Photos Printing Dates on Photos Attaching Comments to Photos Adding Text to Photos Saving Setting Holidays Setting Calendar Display Opening Saved Files Page top Changing Layout Strana 199 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Changing Layout Changing Layout You can change the layout of each page separately. Select the page you want to change the layout of in the Edit screen, then click (Change Layout). Select the layout you want to use in the Change Layout dialog box and click OK. Album Important If the new layout has a different number of frames per page from the current layout, the following will happen: : Images will move from the subsequent pages to fill all the frames If the number of layout in the new layout. frames is increased : Pages with the new layout will be added until all the images on the If the number of layout pages with the current layout can be fitted. frames is decreased If you change the current layout for the front or back cover to one that has fewer layout frames, any image that does not fit in the new layout will be deleted, starting with the last image that was added to the former layout page. Note The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size, Orientation, or the type of page selected (front cover, inside pages or back cover). Select the Apply to all pages checkbox to change the layouts of all pages to the one you newly selected. Calendar Changing Layout Strana 200 z celkového počtu 684 Important The layouts of all pages are changed to the selected layout. All images that do not fit in the new layout will be collected on the last page. Note The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size and Orientation. Layout Print Important If the new layout has a different number of frames per page from the current layout, the following will happen: : Images will move from the subsequent pages to fill all the frames If the number of layout in the new layout. frames is increased If the number of layout frames is decreased : Pages with the new layout will be added until all the images on the pages with the current layout can be fitted. Note The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size and Orientation. Select the Apply to all pages checkbox to change the layouts of all pages to the one you newly selected. Page top Changing Background Strana 201 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Changing Background Changing Background You can change the background of each page. Important You cannot change the background of the Photo Print, Stickers, and Layout Print. Click Background... in the Page Setup screen or select the page you want to change the background of in the Edit screen, then click (Change Background). Note The screens for Album printing are used as examples in the following descriptions. The screens may vary depending on what you create. Select the type of background you want to use in the Change Background dialog box. When Select from samples is Selected Select the image you want to use from Samples and click OK. Note Select from samples will be displayed only if Album has been selected. Various backgrounds are available on our website besides those saved in the application. Changing Background Strana 202 z celkového počtu 684 Click Search backgrounds... to access the Canon website from which you can download additional materials for free. Internet connection is required to access the website. Internet connection fees apply. This function may not be available in some regions. Exit Easy-PhotoPrint EX before installing backgrounds. When Single color is Selected Select the color you want to use from Standard color or Custom color and click OK. When Image file is Selected Set Image File Path and Image Layout, then click OK. Changing Background Strana 203 z celkového počtu 684 Note See Help for details on how to set the background in the Change Background dialog box. Page top Adding Photos Strana 204 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Adding Photos Adding Photos You can add images to pages. Select the page you want to add photos in the Edit screen, then click (Add Image). Note The screens for Album printing are used as examples in the following descriptions. The screens may vary depending on what you create. Select the folder containing the image you want to add from the folder tree area on the left of the Add Image dialog box, and select the image you want to add from the thumbnail window on the right. Note Click an image to select it (background turns blue) or deselect it (background turns white). You can also select multiple images. Select an option for Add to and click OK. Important You can add up to 20 images at one time to a single page. Up to 99 of the same images can be added to all pages combined. You cannot add two or more of the same image at one time. Add it one at a time. When the number of pages increases due to added images, you cannot add images beyond page 400. Note In the Add Image dialog box, you can select all images at one time or change the display size and order of the thumbnails. See Help for details. Page top Swapping Positions of Photos Strana 205 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Swapping Positions of Photos Swapping Positions of Photos You can swap the positions of images. Click (Swap Image Positions) in the Edit screen. Note The screens for Album printing are used as examples in the following descriptions. The screens may vary depending on what you create. Select the target and source images you want to swap, then click Swap. When you finish swapping all images you want to swap, click Back to Edit. Page top Replacing Photos Strana 206 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Replacing Photos Replacing Photos You can replace an image with another image. Select the image you want to replace in the Edit screen, then click (Replace Selected Image). Select the folder containing the image you want to replace with from the folder tree area on the left of the Replace Image dialog box. Select the image you want to replace with from the thumbnail window on the right of the screen and click OK. If you want to select from the images already imported, click the Imported Images tab and select the image you want to replace with from the thumbnail window and click OK. Important You cannot select multiple images in the Replace Image dialog box. Note If you select multiple images in the Edit screen and use the replacement function, all the images selected in the Edit screen will be replaced with the image selected in the Replace Image dialog box. When images are replaced, the following settings of the old image are inherited to the new image. - Position - Size - Frame - Position and size of the date The cropping information and image orientation are not inherited. In the Replace Image dialog box, you can change the display size and order of the thumbnails. See Help for details. Page top Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos Strana 207 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos You can adjust the position, angle and size of images. Select the image of which you want to change the position or size in the Edit screen and click Image) or double-click the image. (Edit Set the Center Position, Rotation and Size, then click OK. Note You can also change the position and size of an image by dragging it in the Edit screen. Select an image in the Edit screen, then click (Free Rotate) and drag a corner of the image to rotate it. See Help for details on the position and size of images. Page top Cropping Photos Strana 208 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Cropping Photos Cropping Photos Cropping an image is the act of removing the unnecessary portions of the image by selecting the necessary portions. Select the image you want to crop in the Edit screen and click image. (Edit Image) or double-click the Click the Crop tab in the Edit Image dialog box. Drag the white squares on the image to change the area to be cropped and click OK. Note See Help for details on cropping. Page top Framing Photos Strana 209 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Framing Photos Framing Photos You can add frames to images. Important You cannot add frames to images in Photo Print, Stickers, and Layout Print. Select the image you want to frame in the Edit screen and click image. (Edit Image) or double-click the Click the Frame tab in the Edit Image dialog box. Select the frame you want to use from Frames and click OK. Important You cannot print dates on framed photos. Note Select the Apply to all images in the page checkbox to add the same frame to all the images on a Framing Photos Strana 210 z celkového počtu 684 selected page at one time. Various frames are available on our website besides those saved in the application. Click Search frames... to access the Canon website from which you can download additional materials for free. Internet connection is required to access the website. Internet connection fees apply. This function may not be available in some regions. Exit Easy-PhotoPrint EX before installing frames. Search frames... will be displayed only if Album has been selected. See Help for details on frames. Page top Printing Dates on Photos Strana 211 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Printing Dates on Photos Printing Dates on Photos You can print dates on images. Select the image you want to print the date in the Edit screen and click the image. (Edit Image) or double-click Click the Date tab in the Edit Image dialog box. Select the Show date checkbox. Set the Text Orientation, Position, Font Size and Color, then click OK. Important You cannot print dates on framed images. Note The date is displayed in the short date format (mm/dd/yyyy, etc.) specified in your operating system. See Help for details on setting dates. Printing Dates on Photos Strana 212 z celkového počtu 684 Page top Attaching Comments to Photos Strana 213 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Attaching Comments to Photos Attaching Comments to Photos You can attach comments to images and display them in your album. The photo name, shooting date and comments are displayed (from top to bottom) in a comment box. Important You cannot attach comments to Photo Print, Calendar, Stickers, and Layout Print. Select the image you want to attach comments to in the Edit screen and click double-click the image. Click the Comments tab in the Edit Image dialog box. (Edit Image) or Attaching Comments to Photos Strana 214 z celkového počtu 684 Select the Show comment box checkbox. Select the checkboxes of the items you want to display, and enter comments. Set the size and color of font, and position of the comments, etc., then click OK. Note See Help for details on comments. Page top Adding Text to Photos Strana 215 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Adding Text to Photos Adding Text to Photos You can add text to photos. Click (Add Text) in the Edit screen and drag the mouse over the area in which you want to add text. Note The screens for Album printing are used as examples in the following descriptions. The screens may vary depending on what you create. Select the Text tab in the Edit Text Box dialog box and enter text. Note In the Edit Text Box dialog box, you can change the position, angle and size of the text. You can also set the color and line of the text box. See Help for details. To change the entered text, select it and click appears. You can change the text. (Edit Text Box). The Edit Text Box dialog box Page top Saving Strana 216 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Saving Saving You can save edited items. Click Save in the Edit or Print Settings screen. Note The screens for Album printing are used as examples in the following descriptions. The screens may vary depending on what you create. When the Save As dialog box appears, specify the save location and file name, then click Save. Important If you edit a saved file and save it again, the file will be overwritten. To save a file again with a new name or to a different location, select Save As... from the File menu and save. Note Save will not be displayed in the Page Setup or Select Images screen. Page top Setting Holidays Strana 217 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Setting Holidays Setting Holidays You can add holidays to your calendar. (Setup Period/Holiday) in the Click Set Holidays... in the Page Setup screen of Calendar, or click Edit screen and click Set Holidays... in the Calendar General Settings dialog box to display the Holiday Settings dialog box. To add a holiday, click Add.... The Add/Edit Holiday dialog box appears. To edit a saved holiday, select it and click Edit.... To delete a holiday, select it and click Delete. To delete all the saved holidays within your calendar period, click Clear. Setting Holidays Strana 218 z celkového počtu 684 Enter the name in Holiday Name and specify the date. Select the Set as Holiday checkbox to display that day as a holiday in your calendar. Note See Help for details on each dialog box. Page top Setting Calendar Display Strana 219 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Setting Calendar Display Setting Calendar Display You can customize the calendar display (fonts, lines, colors, position, size, etc.). Click Settings... in the Page Setup screen of Calendar, or select a calendar in the Edit screen and click (Setup Calendar) to display the Calendar Settings dialog box. Important The Position & Size tab is displayed only when the Calendar Settings dialog box is displayed from the Edit screen. Note See Help for details on the Calendar Settings dialog box. Page top Opening Saved Files Strana 220 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Opening Saved Files Opening Saved Files You can open files created with Easy-PhotoPrint EX. 1. Click Library from Menu. The Open dialog box appears. You can check files created and saved with Easy-PhotoPrint EX by icon view (only for Windows Vista) or thumbnail view. Important When using 64bit Edition of Windows Vista or Windows XP, the contents of files cannot be displayed on Explorer. 2. Select the file you want to open and click Open. The Edit screen appears. Note Easy-PhotoPrint EX supports the following file formats (extensions). - Easy-PhotoPrint EX Album file (.el1) - Easy-PhotoPrint EX Stickers file (.el2) - Easy-PhotoPrint EX Calendar file (.el4) - Easy-PhotoPrint EX Layout file (.el5) 3. Edit the file if necessary. Note See the following sections for details on the editing procedures. Opening Saved Files Strana 221 z celkového počtu 684 Editing Album Editing Calendar Editing Stickers Editing Layout Print Note You can open files created with Easy-PhotoPrint EX with the following methods, besides from Library in Menu. - Double-click or click the file. - From the File menu, click Open..., then select the file you want to edit. You can also open a recently used file by clicking the file name shown in the File menu. Page top Tlač pomocou iného aplikačného softvéru Strana 222 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Tlač z počítača > Tlač pomocou iného aplikačného softvéru Tlač pomocou iného aplikačného softvéru Rôzne spôsoby tlače Zmena kvality tlače a korekcia obrazových údajov Prehľad ovládača tlačiarne Na začiatok strany Various Printing Methods Strana 223 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods Various Printing Methods Printing with Easy Setup Setting a Page Size and Orientation Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Setting the Stapling Margin Borderless Printing Fit-to-Page Printing Scaled Printing Page Layout Printing Poster Printing Booklet Printing Duplex Printing Stamp/Background Printing Registering a Stamp Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Printing an Envelope Displaying the Print Results before Printing Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size) Page top Printing with Easy Setup Strana 224 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Printing with Easy Setup Printing with Easy Setup The simple setup procedure for carrying out appropriate printing on this machine, is as follows: 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Select a frequently used profile In Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab, select a printing profile suited for the purpose. When you select a printing profile, the Additional Features, Media Type, and Printer Paper Size settings are automatically switched to the values that were preset. 3. Select the print quality Select High, Standard, or Fast that matches your purpose for Print Quality. 4. Complete the setup Click OK. When you execute print, the document is printed with settings that matches your purpose. Important When you check the Always Print with Current Settings check box, all settings on the Quick Setup, Main, Page Setup, and Effects tabs are saved, and you can print with the same settings from the next time as well. Click Save... to register the specified settings. For instructions on registering settings, see " Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile." Page top Setting a Page Size and Orientation Strana 225 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Setting a Page Size and Orientation Setting a Page Size and Orientation The paper size and orientation are essentially determined by the application. When the page size and orientation set for Page Size and Orientation on the Page Setup tab are same as those set with the application, you do not need to select them on the Page Setup tab. When you are not able to specify them with the application, the procedure for selecting a page size and orientation is as follows: You can also set page size and Orientation on the Quick Setup tab. 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Select the paper size Select a page size from the Page Size list on the Page Setup tab. 3. Set Orientation Select Portrait or Landscape for Orientation. Check Rotate 180 degrees check box when you want to perform printing with the original being rotated 180 degrees. 4. Complete the setup Click OK. When you execute print, the document will be printed with the selected page size and the orientation. Page top Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Strana 226 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Default Setting Print from Last Page Collate Print from Last Page + Collate The procedure for specifying the number of copies and printing order is as follows: You can also set the number of copies on the Quick Setup tab. 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Specify the number of copies to be printed For Copies on the Page Setup tab, specify the number of copies to be printed. 3. Specify the print order Check the Print from Last Page check box when you want to print from the last page in order. When you do this, you do not need to sort pages into their correct order after printing. 4. Set up collated printing when you specify multiple copies in the Copies box Check the Collate check box when you are specifying multiple copy together. Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Strana 227 z celkového počtu 684 Uncheck this check box to print all pages with the same page number together. 5. Complete the setup Click OK. The specified number of copies will be printed with the specified printing order. Important When the application software that you used to create the document has the same function, give priority to the printer driver settings. However, if the print results are not acceptable, specify the function settings on the application software. When you specify the number of copies and the printing order with both the application and this printer driver, the number of copies may be multiplied numbers of the two settings or the specified printing order may not be enabled. Print from Last Page and Collate appear grayed out and are unavailable when Booklet is selected for Page Layout. Print from Last Page appears grayed out and is unavailable when Poster is selected for Page Layout. Note By setting both Print from Last Page and Collate, you can perform printing so that papers are collated one by one starting from the last page. These settings can be used in combination with Borderless, Normal-size, Fit-to-Page, Scaled, Page Layout, and Duplex Printing. Page top Setting the Stapling Margin Strana 228 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Setting the Stapling Margin Setting the Stapling Margin The procedure for setting the staple side and the margin width is as follows: 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Specify the side to be stapled Check the position of the stapling margin from Staple Side on the Page Setup tab. The printer analyzes the Orientation and Page Layout settings, and automatically selects the best staple position. When you want to change the setting, select from the list. 3. Set the margin width If necessary, click Specify Margin... and set the margin width, and then click OK. Setting the Stapling Margin Strana 229 z celkového počtu 684 4. Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab. When you execute print, the data is printed with the specified staple side and margin width. Important Staple Side and Specify Margin... appear grayed out and are unavailable when: Borderless, Poster, or Booklet is selected for Page Layout. Scaled is selected for Page Layout (When Duplex Printing is also selected, only Staple Side is selectable). Page top Borderless Printing Strana 230 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Borderless Printing Borderless Printing The borderless printing function allows you to print data without any margin by enlarging the data so that it extends slightly off the paper. Without the borderless printing function, a margin is provided around the printed data. When you want to print data such as a photo without providing any margin around it, select borderless printing. The procedure for performing borderless printing is as follows: You can also set borderless printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab. Setting Borderless Printing 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Set borderless printing Select Borderless from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab. Click OK when the confirmation message appears. When a message prompting you to change the media type appears, select a media type from the list and click OK. 3. Check the paper size Borderless Printing Strana 231 z celkového počtu 684 Check the Page Size list. When you want to change, select another page size from the list. The list displays only sizes that can be used for borderless printing. 4. Adjust the amount of extension from the paper If necessary, adjust the amount of extension using the Amount of Extension slider. Moving the slider to the right makes the amount larger and moving the slider to the left makes the amount smaller. It is recommended to set the slider at the second position from the right for most cases. Important When you set the slider at the rightmost position, the back side of the paper may become smudged. 5. Complete the setup Click OK. The data will be printed without any margins on the paper. Important When a page size that cannot be used for borderless printing is selected, the size is automatically changed to the valid page sizes for borderless printing. When High Resolution Paper, T-Shirt Transfers, or Envelope is selected from the Media Type list on the Main tab, you cannot perform borderless printing. When Borderless is selected, the Printer Paper Size, Staple Side (when Duplex Printing is not selected) settings, and the Stamp/Background... button on the Page Setup tab appear grayed out and are unavailable. Print quality may deteriorate or the sheet may be stained at the top and bottom depending on the type of the media used. When the ratio of the height to the width differs from the image data, a portion of the image may not be printed depending on the size of the media used. In this case, crop the image data with an application software according to the paper size. Note When Plain Paper is selected for Media Type on the Main tab, borderless printing is not recommended, and therefore the dialog box for media selection appears. When you are using plain paper for test printing, select Plain Paper, and click OK. Expanding the Range of the Document to Print Specifying a large amount of extension allows you to perform borderless printing with no problems. However, the portion of the document that extends off the paper range will not be printed. Subjects around the perimeter of a photo may not be printed. Try borderless printing once. If you are not satisfied with the result of borderless printing, reduce the amount of extension. The extension amount becomes shorter as the Amount of Extension slider is moved to the left. Important When the amount of extension is shortened, an unexpected margin may be produced on the print, depending on the size of the paper. Note When the Amount of Extension slider is set to the leftmost position, image data will be printed in the full size. When Preview before printing is checked on the Main tab, you can confirm before printing whether there will be no border. Borderless Printing Strana 232 z celkového počtu 684 Page top Fit-to-Page Printing Strana 233 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Fitto-Page Printing Fit-to-Page Printing The procedure for printing a document that is automatically enlarged or reduced to fit the page size to be used is as follows: 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Set fit-to-page printing Select Fit-to-Page from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab. 3. Select the paper size for the data Using Page Size, select the page size that is set with your application. 4. Select the print paper size Select the size of the paper loaded in the machine from the Printer Paper Size list. When the Printer Paper Size is smaller than the Page Size, the page image will be reduced. When the Printer Paper Size is larger than the Page Size, the page image will be enlarged. The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver. Fit-to-Page Printing Strana 234 z celkového počtu 684 5. Complete the setup Click OK. When you execute print, the document will be enlarged or reduced to fit to the page size. Page top Scaled Printing Strana 235 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Scaled Printing Scaled Printing The procedure for printing a document with pages enlarged or reduced is as follows: 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Set scaled printing Select Scaled from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab. 3. Select the paper size for the data Using Page Size, select the page size that is set with your application. 4. Set the scaling rate by using one of the following methods: Select a Printer Paper Size When the printer paper size is smaller than the Page Size, the page image will be reduced. When the printer paper size is larger than the page size, the page image will be enlarged. Scaled Printing Strana 236 z celkového počtu 684 Specify a scaling factor Directly type in a value into the Scaling box. The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver. 5. Complete the setup Click OK. When you execute print, the document will be printed with the specified scale. Important When the application software with which you created the original has the scaled printing function, configure the settings on your application software. You do not need to configure the same setting in the printer driver. When Scaled is selected, the Staple Side list box appears grayed out and is unavailable (when Duplex Printing is not selected). Note Scaled Printing Strana 237 z celkového počtu 684 Selecting Scaled changes the printable area of the document. Page top Page Layout Printing Strana 238 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Page Layout Printing Page Layout Printing The page layout printing function allows you to print more than one page image on a single sheet of paper. The procedure for performing page layout printing is as follows: 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Set page layout printing Select Page Layout from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab. The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver. 3. Select the print paper size Select the size of the paper loaded in the machine from the Printer Paper Size list. Setting the layout of two pages of the document from left to right is complete. 4. Set the number of pages to be printed on one sheet and the page order If necessary, click Specify..., specify the following settings in the Page Layout Printing dialog box, and click OK. Page Layout Printing Strana 239 z celkového počtu 684 Pages To increase the number of pages to be included on a single sheet of paper, select a desired number of pages from the list. You can also set 2-Page Print or 4-Page Print on the Quick Setup tab. Page Order To change the page arrangement order, select an icon from the list to change the page placement order. Page Border To print a page border around each document page, check this check box. 5. Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab. When you execute print, the specified number of pages will be arranged on each sheet of paper in the specified order. Page top Poster Printing Strana 240 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Poster Printing Poster Printing The poster printing function allows you to enlarge image data, divide it into several pages, and print these pages on separate sheets of paper. When the pages are pasted together, they form a large print like a poster. The procedure for performing poster printing is as follows: Setting Poster Printing 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Set poster printing Select Poster from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab. The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver. 3. Select the print paper size Select the size of the paper loaded in the machine from the Printer Paper Size list. Setting 2 by 2-page poster printing is complete. Poster Printing Strana 241 z celkového počtu 684 4. Set the number of image divisions and the pages to be printed If necessary, click Specify..., specify the following settings in the Poster Printing dialog box, and then click OK. Image Divisions Select the number of divisions (vertical x horizontal). As the number of divisions increases, the number of sheets used for printing increases, allowing you to create a larger poster. Print "Cut/Paste" in margins To leave out words "Cut" and "Paste", uncheck this check box. Important This feature is unavailable when the 64-bit printer driver is used. Print "Cut/Paste" lines in margins To leave out cut lines, uncheck this check box. Pages To reprint only specific pages, enter the page number you want to print. To print multiple pages, specify by separating the pages with commas or entering a hyphen between the page numbers. Note You can also specify the print range by clicking the pages in the settings preview. 5. Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab. When you execute print, the document will be divided into several pages during printing. After all poster pages have been printed, paste the pages together to create a poster. Printing Only Specific Pages If ink becomes faint or runs out during printing, you can reprint specific pages by following the procedure below: 1. Set the print range In the settings preview on the left of the Page Setup tab, click the pages that do not need to be printed. The pages that were clicked are deleted, and only the pages to be printed are displayed. Poster Printing Strana 242 z celkového počtu 684 Note Click the deleted pages to display them again. Right-click the settings preview to select Print all pages or Delete all pages. 2. Complete the setup After completing the page selection, click OK. When you execute print, only specified pages will be printed. Important When Poster is selected, the Duplex Printing, Staple Side and Print from Last Page appear grayed out and are unavailable. Since poster printing enlarges the document when printing it, the print results may become coarse. Page top Booklet Printing Strana 243 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Booklet Printing Booklet Printing The booklet printing function allows you to print data for a booklet. Data is printed on both sides of the paper. This type of printing ensures that pages can be collated properly, in page number order, when the printed sheets are folded and stapled at the center. The procedure for performing booklet printing is as follows: 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Set booklet printing Select Booklet from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab. The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the window. 3. Select the print paper size Select the size of the paper loaded in the machine from the Printer Paper Size list. 4. Set the margin for stapling and the margin width Click Specify... and specify the following settings in the Booklet Printing dialog box, and then click OK. Booklet Printing Strana 244 z celkového počtu 684 Margin for stapling Select which side should the stapling margin be on when the booklet is completed. Insert blank page To leave one side of a sheet blank, check the check box, and select the page to be left blank. Margin Enter the margin width. The specified width from the center of the sheet becomes the margin width for one page. Page Border To print a page border around each document page, check the check box. 5. Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab. When you execute print, the document will be printed on one side of a sheet of paper. When the printing of one side is complete, set the paper correctly by following the message and click OK. When the printing of the other side is complete, fold the paper at the center of the margin and make a booklet. Important Booklet cannot be selected when a media type other than Plain Paper is selected for Media Type. When Booklet is selected, Duplex Printing, Staple Side, Print from Last Page, and Collate appear grayed out and are unavailable. Note The stamp and background are not printed on blank sheets inserted with the Insert blank page function of Booklet Printing. Page top Duplex Printing Strana 245 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Duplex Printing Duplex Printing The procedure for printing data on both sides of a sheet of paper is as follows: You can also set duplex printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab. 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Set duplex printing Check the Duplex Printing check box on the Page Setup tab. 3. Select the layout Select Normal-size (or Fit-to-Page, Scaled, or Page Layout) from the Page Layout list. 4. Specify the side to be stapled The printer analyzes the Orientation and Page Layout settings, and automatically selects the best Staple Side. When you want to change the setting, select another value from the list. 5. Set the margin width If necessary, click Specify Margin... and set the margin width, and then click OK. 6. Complete the setup Duplex Printing Strana 246 z celkového počtu 684 Click OK on the Page Setup tab. When you execute print, the document will be printed on one side of a sheet of paper. When the printing of one side is complete, load the paper correctly by following the message and click OK. The document will be printed on the opposite side. Important Duplex Printing appears grayed out and is unavailable when: A media type other than Plain Paper is selected from the Media Type list. Poster is selected from the Page Layout list. When Booklet is selected from the Page Layout list, Duplex Printing and Staple Side appear grayed out and are unavailable. Note When you select borderless printing during duplex printing, a dialog box for media type selection may appear. If that happens, select Plain Paper. If the back side of the paper becomes smudged during duplex printing, perform Bottom Plate Cleaning in the Maintenance tab. Page top Stamp/Background Printing Strana 247 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Stamp/Background Printing Stamp/Background Printing This feature is unavailable when the 64-bit printer driver is used. The Stamp function allows you to print a stamp text or a bitmap over or behind document data. It also allows you to print date, time and user name. The Background function allows you to print a light illustration behind the document data. The procedure for performing stamp/background printing is as follows: Printing a Stamp "CONFIDENTIAL," "IMPORTANT," and other stamps that are used often in companies are pre-registered. 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Click Stamp/Background... on the Page Setup tab The Stamp/Background dialog box opens. 3. Select a stamp Check the Stamp check box, and select a desired stamp from the list. Stamp/Background Printing Strana 248 z celkového počtu 684 The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the Page Setup tab. 4. Set the stamp details If necessary, specify the following settings, and then click OK. Place stamp over text To print the stamp on the front of the document, check this check box. Note The stamp is given priority because the stamp is printed over the document data in the sections where the stamp and the document data overlap. When this check box is unchecked, the stamp is printed behind the document data and may be hidden in the overlapping sections depending on the application used. Stamp first page only To print the stamp only on the first page, check this check box. Define Stamp... button To change the stamp text, bitmap, or position, click this (refer to Registering a Stamp ). 5. Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab. When you execute print, the data is printed with the specified stamp. Printing a Background Two bitmap files are pre-registered as samples. 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Click Stamp/Background... on the Page Setup tab The Stamp/Background dialog box opens. 3. Select the background Check the Background check box, and select a desired background from the list. The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the Page Setup tab. 4. Set the background details If necessary, complete the following settings, and then click OK. Background first page only To print the background only on the first page, check this check box. Select Background... button To use another background or change the layout or density of a background, click this (refer to Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background ). 5. Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab. When you execute print, the data is printed with the specified background. Important When Borderless is selected, the Stamp/Background... button appears grayed out and is unavailable. Note The stamp and background are not printed on blank sheets inserted with the Insert blank page Stamp/Background Printing Strana 249 z celkového počtu 684 function of Booklet Printing. Related Topics Registering a Stamp Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Page top Registering a Stamp Strana 250 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Stamp/Background Printing > Registering a Stamp Registering a Stamp This feature is unavailable when the 64-bit printer driver is used. You can create and register a new stamp. You can also change and register some of the settings of an existing stamp. Unnecessary stamps can be deleted at any time. The procedure for registering a new stamp is as follows: Registering a New Stamp 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Click Stamp/Background... on the Page Setup tab The Stamp/Background dialog box opens. 3. Click Define Stamp... The Stamp Settings dialog box opens. Registering a Stamp Strana 251 z celkového počtu 684 4. Configure the stamp while viewing the preview window Stamp tab Select Text, Bitmap, or Date/Time/User Name that matches your purpose for Stamp Type. For Text registration, the characters must already be entered in Stamp Text. If necessary, change the TrueType Font, Style, Size, and Outline settings. You can select the color of the stamp by clicking Select Color.... For Bitmap, click Select File... and select the bitmap file (.bmp) to be used. If necessary, change the settings of the Size and Transparent white area. For Date/Time/User Name, the creation date/time and user name of the printed object are displayed in Stamp Text. If necessary, change the settings of TrueType Font, Style, Size, and Outline. You can select the color of the stamp by clicking Select Color.... Important Stamp Text appears grayed out and is unavailable when Date/Time/User Name is selected. Placement tab Select the stamp position from the Position list. You can also select Custom from the Position list and specify coordinates for X-Position and Y-Position. You can also change the stamp position by dragging the stamp in the preview window. To change the stamp position angle, type a value in the Orientation box directly. 5. Save the stamp Click the Save settings tab and enter a title in the Title box, and then click Save. Click OK when the confirmation message appears. 6. Complete the setup Click OK. The Stamp/Background dialog box opens again. The registered title appears in the Stamp list. Changing and Registering Some of Stamp Settings 1. Select the stamp for which the settings are to be changed Check the Stamp check box in the Stamp/Background dialog box, and then select the title of the stamp to be changed from the Stamp list. Registering a Stamp Strana 252 z celkového počtu 684 2. Click Define Stamp... The Stamp Settings dialog box opens. 3. Configure the stamp while viewing the preview window 4. Overwrite save the stamp Click Save overwrite on the Save settings tab. When you want to save the stamp with a different title, type a new title in the Title box and click Save. Click OK when the confirmation message appears. 5. Complete the setup Click OK. The Stamp/Background dialog box opens again. The registered title appears in the Stamp list. Deleting an Unnecessary Stamp 1. Click Define Stamp... in the Stamp/Background dialog box The Stamp Settings dialog box opens. 2. Select the stamp to be deleted Select the title of the stamp you want to delete from the Stamps list on the Save settings tab. Then click Delete. Click OK when the confirmation message appears. 3. Complete the setup Click OK. The Stamp/Background dialog box opens again. Page top Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Strana 253 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Stamp/Background Printing > Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background This feature is unavailable when the 64-bit printer driver is used. You can select a bitmap file (.bmp) and register it as a new background. You can also change and register some of the settings of an existing background. An unnecessary background can be deleted at any time. The procedure for registering image data to be used as a background is as follows: Registering New Background 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Click Stamp/Background... on the Page Setup tab The Stamp/Background dialog box opens. 3. Click Select Background... The Background Settings dialog box opens. Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Strana 254 z celkového počtu 684 4. Select the image data to be registered to the background Click Select File.... Select the target bitmap file (.bmp), and then click Open. 5. Specify the following settings while viewing the preview window Layout Method Select how the background image data is to be placed. When Custom is selected, you can set coordinates for X-Position and Y-Position. You can also change the background position by dragging the image in the preview window. Intensity Set the intensity of the background image data with the Intensity slider. To lighten the background, move the slider to the left. To darken the background, move the slider to the right. To print the background at the original bitmap intensity, move the slider to the rightmost position. 6. Save the background Click the Save settings tab and enter a title in the Title box, and then click Save. Click OK when the confirmation message appears. 7. Complete the setup Click OK. The Stamp/Background dialog box opens again. The registered title appears in the Background list. Changing and Registering Some Background Settings 1. Select the background for which the settings are to be changed Check the Background check box in the Stamp/Background dialog box, and then select the title of the background you want to change from the Background list. 2. Click Select Background... The Background Settings dialog box opens. 3. Specify the items on the Background tab while viewing the preview window. 4. Save the background Click Save overwrite on the Save settings tab. When you want to save the background with a different title, enter a new title in the Title box and click Save. Click OK when the confirmation message appears. Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Strana 255 z celkového počtu 684 5. Complete the setup Click OK. The Stamp/Background dialog box opens again. The registered title appears in the Background list. Deleting an Unnecessary Background 1. Click Select Background... in the Stamp/Background dialog box The Background Settings dialog box opens. 2. Select the background to be deleted Select the title of the background you want to delete from the Backgrounds list on the Save settings tab, and then click Delete. Click OK when the confirmation message appears. 3. Complete the setup Click OK. The Stamp/Background dialog box opens again. Page top Printing an Envelope Strana 256 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Printing an Envelope Printing an Envelope For details on how to load an envelope into the machine, refer to "Loading Paper in the Rear Tray" in the manual: Basic Guide. The procedure for performing envelope printing is as follows: 1. Fold down the paper support 2. Load an envelope into the machine Fold down the envelope flap. Orient the envelope so that the flap is on the left and the folded surface is facing down, and load in the rear tray. 3. Open the printer driver setup window 4. Select the media type Select Envelope from Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab. Printing an Envelope Strana 257 z celkového počtu 684 5. Select the paper size Select Youkei 4, Youkei 6, Comm.Env. #10, or DL Env. in the Envelope Size Setting dialog box, and then click OK. 6. Set the orientation To print the addressee horizontally, select Landscape for Orientation. 7. Select the print quality Select High or Standard that matches your purpose for Print Quality. 8. Complete the setup Click OK. When you execute print, the information is printed on the envelope. Page top Displaying the Print Results before Printing Strana 258 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Displaying the Print Results before Printing Displaying the Print Results before Printing You can display and check the print result before printing. The procedure for displaying the print result before printing is as follows: You can also set the print results display on the Quick Setup tab. 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Set the preview Check the Preview before printing check box on the Main tab. 3. Complete the setup Click OK. The Canon IJ Preview will start and the print result will be displayed before printing. Related Topic Canon IJ Preview Page top Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size) Strana 259 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size) Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size) You can specify the height and width of paper when its size cannot be selected from the Page Size. Such a paper size is called a custom size. The procedure for specifying a custom size is as follows: You can also set a custom size in Printer Paper Size on the Quick Setup tab. 1. Set the custom size in the application software On your application's paper size feature, specify the custom size. Important When the application software that created the document has a function for specifying the height and width values, use the application software to set the values. When the application software does not have such a function or if the document does not print correctly, use the printer driver to set the values. 2. Open the printer driver setup window 3. Select the paper size Select Custom... for Page Size on the Page Setup tab. The Custom Paper Size dialog box opens. Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size) Strana 260 z celkového počtu 684 4. Set the custom paper size Specify Units, and enter the Width and Height of the paper to be used. Then click OK. 5. Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab. When you execute print, the data is printed with the specified paper size. Page top Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Strana 261 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Specifying Color Correction Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Printing with ICC Profiles Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast Simulating an Illustration Representing Image Data with a Single Color Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors Smoothing Jagged Outlines Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration Reducing Photo Noise Page top Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning... Strana 262 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method You can individually set the combined representation method for the print quality level and the halftoning method. The procedure for setting the print quality level and the halftoning method is as follows: 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Select the print quality Select Custom for Print Quality on the Main tab, and click Set.... The Custom dialog box opens. Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning... Strana 263 z celkového počtu 684 3. Setting the print quality and halftone expression method Move the Quality slider to select the quality level. Select the expression method in Halftoning and click OK. Note Halftones refer to color shades between the darkest color and the brightest color. The printer replaces the color shades with a collection of small dots to express the halftones. Dither arranges the dots according to fixed rules to express the halftones. Diffusion places the dots randomly to express the halftones. When you select Auto, the data is printed with the optimal halftoning method for the selected print quality. 4. Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab. When you execute print, the data is printed with the specified quality level and halftoning method. Important Certain print quality levels and halftoning methods cannot be selected depending on the settings of Media Type. Note When the part of the object is not printed, selecting Diffusion for Halftoning may solve the problem. Related Topics Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast Page top Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Strana 264 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Printing a Color Document in Monochrome The procedure for printing a color document in monochrome is as follows: You can also set a grayscale printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab. 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Set grayscale printing Check the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab. 3. Complete the setup Click OK. When you execute print, the document is converted to grayscale data. It allows you to print the color document in monochrome. Important When the Grayscale Printing check box is checked, the printer driver processes image data as sRGB data. In this case, actual colors printed may differ from those in the original image data. When using the grayscale printing function to print Adobe RGB data, convert the data to sRGB data using an application software. Note Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Strana 265 z celkového počtu 684 During Grayscale Printing, color inks may be used as well as black ink. Page top Specifying Color Correction Strana 266 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Specifying Color Correction Specifying Color Correction You can specify the color correction method suited to the type of document to be printed. Normally, the printer driver adjusts the colors by using Canon Digital Photo Color so that data is printed with color tints that most people prefer. This method is suitable for printing sRGB data. When you want to print by using the color space (Adobe RGB or sRGB) of the image data effectively, select ICM. When you want to use an application software to specify a printing ICC profile, select None. The procedure for specifying color correction is as follows: You can also set color correction on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used Settings, and then choosing Color/Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features. 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Select the manual color adjustment On the Main tab, select Manual for Color/Intensity, and click Set.... The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens. 3. Select color correction Click Matching tab, select Color Correction setting that matches your purpose from the following, and click OK. Specifying Color Correction Strana 267 z celkového počtu 684 Driver Matching By using Canon Digital Photo Color, you can print sRGB data with color tints that most people prefer. Driver Matching is the default setting for Color Correction. ICM You can print by using the color space (Adobe RGB or sRGB) of the image data effectively. None The printer driver does not perform color correction. Select this value when you are specifying an individually created printing ICC profile or a printing ICC profile for special Canon paper in an application software to print data. 4. Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab. When you execute print, the data is printed with the specified color correction method. Important When ICM is disabled in the application software, ICM is unavailable for Color Correction and the printer may not be able to print the image data properly. When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked, Color Correction appears grayed out and is unavailable. Related Topics Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Printing with ICC Profiles Page top Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data Strana 268 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Specifying Color Correction > Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data When people print images taken with digital cameras, they sometimes feel that the printed color tones differ from those of actual image or those displayed on the monitor. To get the print results as close as possible to the desired color tones, you must select a printing method that is best suited to the application software used or to your purpose. Color Management Devices such as digital cameras, scanners, monitors, and printers handle color differently. Color management (color matching) is a method that manages device-dependent "colors" as a common color space. For Windows, a color management system called "ICM" is built into the operating system. Adobe RGB and sRGB are popularly used as common color spaces. Adobe RGB has a wider color space than sRGB. ICC profiles convert device-dependent "colors" into a common color space. By using an ICC profile and carrying out color management, you can draw out the color space of the image data within the color reproduction area that the printer can express. Selecting a Printing Method Suited to the Image Data The recommended printing method depends on the color space (Adobe RGB or sRGB) of the image data or the application software to be used. There are two typical printing methods. Check the color space (Adobe RGB or sRGB) of the image data and the application software to be used, and then select the printing method suited to your purpose. Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Describes the procedure for printing sRGB data by using the color correction function of the printer driver. To print using Canon Digital Photo Color The printer prints data with color tints that most people prefer, reproducing colors of the original image data and producing three-dimensional effects and high, sharp contrasts. To print by directly applying editing and touch-up results of an application software When printing the data, the printer brings out subtle color difference between dark and light areas, while leaving the darkest and lightest areas intact. When printing the data, the printer applies fine adjustment results, such as brightness adjustments made with an application software. Printing with ICC Profiles Describes the procedure for printing by using the color space of Adobe RGB or sRGB effectively. You can print with a common color space by setting up the application software and the printer driver so that the color management matches the input ICC profile of the image data. The method for setting up the printer driver differs depending on the application software to be used. Page top Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Strana 269 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Specifying Color Correction > Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver You can specify the color correction function of the printer driver to print sRGB data with color tints that most people prefer through the use of Canon Digital Photo Color. When printing from an application software that can identify ICC profiles and allows you to specify them, use a printing ICC profile in the application software, and select settings for color management. The procedure for adjusting colors with the printer driver is as follows: 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Select the media type Select the type of paper loaded in the machine from the Media Type list on the Main tab. 3. Select the print quality Select High, Standard, or Fast that matches your purpose for Print Quality. 4. Select the manual color adjustment Select Manual for Color/Intensity, and click Set.... The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens. 5. Select color correction Click Matching tab, and select Driver Matching for Color Correction. Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Strana 270 z celkového počtu 684 6. Set the other items If necessary, click Color Adjustment tab, and adjust the color balance of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and adjust Brightness, Intensity, and Contrast settings, and then click OK. 7. Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab. When you execute print, the printer driver adjusts the colors when printing the data. Related Topics Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast Page top Printing with ICC Profiles Strana 271 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Specifying Color Correction > Printing with ICC Profiles Printing with ICC Profiles When the image data has a specified input ICC profile, you can print by using the color space (Adobe RGB or sRGB) of the data effectively. The printer driver setting procedure varies depending on the application software used to print. Specify an ICC Profile from the Application Software and Print the Data When you print the editing and touch-up results of Adobe Photoshop, Canon Digital Photo Professional, or any application software that allows you to specify input and printing ICC profiles, you print by effectively using the color space of the input ICC profile specified in the image data. To use this printing method, use your application software to select color management items and specify an input ICC profile and a printing ICC profile in the image data. Even if you print using a printing ICC profile that you created yourself or one for special Canon paper from your application software, be sure to select color management items from your application software. For instructions, refer to the manual of the application software you are using. 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Select the media type Select the type of paper loaded in the machine from the Media Type list on the Main tab. 3. Select the print quality Select High, Standard, or Fast that matches your purpose for Print Quality. 4. Select the manual color adjustment Select Manual for Color/Intensity, and click Set.... The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens. 5. Select color correction Printing with ICC Profiles Strana 272 z celkového počtu 684 Click Matching tab, and select None for Color Correction. 6. Set the other items If necessary, click Color Adjustment tab, and adjust the color balance of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and adjust Brightness, Intensity, and Contrast settings, and then click OK. 7. Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab. When you execute print, the printer uses the color space of the image data. Specify an ICC Profile with the Printer Driver, and then Print Print from a program that cannot identity input ICC profiles or does allow you to specify one by specifying input ICC profiles from printer profiles of the printer driver. When printing Adobe RGB data, you can print the data with the Adobe RGB color space even if the application software does not support Adobe RGB. 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Select the media type Select the type of paper loaded in the machine from the Media Type list on the Main tab. Printing with ICC Profiles 3. Select the print quality Select High, Standard, or Fast that matches your purpose for Print Quality. 4. Select the manual color adjustment Select Manual for Color/Intensity, and click Set.... Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens. 5. Select color correction Click Matching tab, and select ICM for Color Correction. 6. Select the input profile Select an Input Profile that matches the color space of the image data. For sRGB data or data without an input ICC profile: Select Standard. For Adobe RGB data: Strana 273 z celkového počtu 684 Printing with ICC Profiles Strana 274 z celkového počtu 684 Select Adobe RGB (1998). Important When the application software specifies an input profile, the input profile setting of the printer driver becomes invalid. When no input ICC profiles are installed on your computer, Adobe RGB (1998) is not displayed. You can install ICC profiles from the Setup CD-ROM that accompanies the machine. 7. Set the other items If necessary, click Color Adjustment tab, and adjust the color balance of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and adjust Brightness, Intensity, and Contrast settings, and then click OK. 8. Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab. When you execute print, the data is printed with the color space of the selected image data. Related Topics Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast Page top Adjusting Color Balance Strana 275 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Color Balance You can adjust the color tints when printing. Since this function adjusts color balance of the output by changing the ink ratios of each color, it changes the total color balance of the document. Use the application software if you want to change the color balance significantly. Use the printer driver only when you want to adjust the color balance slightly. The following sample shows the case when color balance is used to intensify cyan and to diminish yellow so that the overall colors are more uniform. No adjustment Adjust Color Balance The procedure for adjusting color balance is as follows: You can also set color balance on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used Settings, and then choosing Color/Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features. 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Select the manual color adjustment On the Main tab, select Manual for Color/Intensity, and click Set.... The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens. 3. Adjust color balance There are individual sliders for Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow. Each color becomes stronger when the corresponding slider is moved to the right, and becomes weaker when the corresponding slider is Adjusting Color Balance Strana 276 z celkového počtu 684 moved to the left. For example, when cyan becomes weaker, the color red becomes stronger. You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider. Enter a value in the range from -50 to 50. After adjusting each color, click OK. Important Adjust the slider gradually. 4. Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab. When you execute print, the document is printed with the adjusted color balance. Important When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked, Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow appear grayed out and are unavailable. Related Topics Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast Page top Adjusting Brightness Strana 277 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Brightness You can change the brightness of the overall image data during printing. This function does not change pure white or pure black but it changes the brightness of the intermediate colors. The following sample shows the print result when the brightness specification is changed. Light is selected Normal is selected Dark is selected The procedure for adjusting brightness is as follows: You can also set brightness on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used Settings, and then choosing Color/Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features. 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Select the manual color adjustment On the Main tab, select Manual for Color/Intensity, and click Set.... The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens. 3. Specify the brightness Select Light, Normal, or Dark for Brightness, and click OK. Adjusting Brightness Strana 278 z celkového počtu 684 4. Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab. When you execute print, the data is printed at the specified brightness. Related Topics Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast Page top Adjusting Intensity Strana 279 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Intensity You can dilute (brighten) or intensify (darken) the colors of the overall image data during printing. When you want to sharpen the print results, you should intensify the colors. The following sample shows the case when the intensity is increased so that all colors become more intense when the image data is printed. No adjustment Higher Intensity The procedure for adjusting intensity is as follows: You can also set intensity on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used Settings, and then choosing Color/Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features. 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Select the manual color adjustment Select Manual for Color/Intensity on the Main tab, and click Set.... The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens. 3. Adjust intensity Moving the Intensity slider to the right intensifies (darkens) the colors. Moving the slider to the left dilutes (brightens) the colors. You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider. Enter a value in the range from -50 to 50. After adjusting each color, click OK. Adjusting Intensity Strana 280 z celkového počtu 684 Important Adjust the slider gradually. 4. Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab. When you execute print, the image data is printed with the adjusted intensity. Related Topics Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Contrast Page top Adjusting Contrast Strana 281 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Adjusting Contrast Adjusting Contrast You can adjust the image contrast during printing. To make the differences between the light and dark portions of images greater and more distinct, increase the contrast. On the other hand, to make the differences between the light and dark portions of images smaller and less distinct, reduce the contrast. No adjustment Adjust the contrast The procedure for adjusting contrast is as follows: You can also set contrast on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used Settings, and then choosing Color/Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features. 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Select the manual color adjustment On the Main tab, select Manual for Color/Intensity, and click Set.... The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens. 3. Adjust the contrast Moving the Contrast slider to the right increases the contrast, and moving it to the left decreases the contrast. You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider. Enter a value in the range from -50 to 50. After adjusting each color, click OK. Adjusting Contrast Strana 282 z celkového počtu 684 Important Adjust the slider gradually. 4. Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab. When you execute print, the image is printed with the adjusted contrast. Related Topics Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Page top Simulating an Illustration Strana 283 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Simulating an Illustration Simulating an Illustration With the Simulate Illustration function, you can print full-color or 256-color image data so that it looks like a hand-drawn illustration. This function adds different effects to the original profile and colors. The procedure for performing Simulate Illustration is as follows: 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Set the Simulate Illustration If necessary, check the Simulate Illustration check box on the Effects tab, and adjust the Contrast. Moving the slider to the right lightens the image data and moving the slider to the left darkens the image data. The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver. 3. Complete the setup Click OK. When you execute print, the image will be printed so that it looks hand-drawn. Page top Representing Image Data with a Single Color Strana 284 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Representing Image Data with a Single Color Representing Image Data with a Single Color With the Monochrome Effects function, you can benefit from coloring effects such as changing a photograph to a sepia tone image. The procedure for performing Monochrome Effects is as follows: 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Set Monochrome Effects Check the Monochrome Effects check box on the Effects tab and select your desired color. When you use Select Color, move the Color slider to specify the color you want. The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver. 3. Complete the setup Click OK. When you execute print, the image will be printed with a single color. Important When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked, Monochrome Effects appears Representing Image Data with a Single Color Strana 285 z celkového počtu 684 grayed out and is unavailable. Page top Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors Strana 286 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors The Vivid Photo function allows you to print image data with vivid colors. The vivid photo function emphasizes the colors in background sceneries while maintaining the human skin color natural. By using this function, you can make vivid hues appear even more vivid. The procedure for performing Vivid Photo is as follows: You can also set vivid photos on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used Settings, and then choosing Additional Features. 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Set Vivid Photo Check the Vivid Photo check box on the Effects tab. 3. Complete the setup Click OK. When you execute print, the image will be printed with vivid colors. Page top Smoothing Jagged Outlines Strana 287 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Smoothing Jagged Outlines Smoothing Jagged Outlines The Image Optimizer function allows you to smooth jagged outlines in photos and graphics that have been enlarged with your application. This feature is especially useful when printing low-resolution images from Web pages. The procedure for performing Image Optimizer is as follows: 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Set Image Optimizer Check the Image Optimizer check box on the Effects tab. 3. Complete the setup Click OK. The photos and graphics will be printed with jagged outlines smoothed. Note Depending on application software or resolution of image data, the Image Optimizer may have no discernible effects. It may take longer to complete printing when the Image Optimizer is used. Smoothing Jagged Outlines Strana 288 z celkového počtu 684 Page top Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration Strana 289 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration The Photo Optimizer PRO function corrects colors of digital camera images or scanned images. It is specially designed to compensate for color shift, overexposure, and underexposure. The procedure for performing Photo Optimizer PRO is as follows: 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Set Photo Optimizer PRO Check the Photo Optimizer PRO check box on the Effects tab. Normally there is no need to check the Apply Throughout Page check box. Images within each page are optimized on an image-by-image basis. Note Check the Apply Throughout Page check box when printing image data that has been processed, such as being cropped or rotated. In this case the entire page will be treated as a single image to be optimized. 3. Complete the setup Click OK. When you execute print, the images will be printed with color compensation. Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration Strana 290 z celkového počtu 684 Important Photo Optimizer PRO does not function when: Background is set in the Stamp/Background dialog box on the Page Setup tab. Define Stamp... is selected in the Stamp/Background dialog box on the Page Setup tab, and the bitmapped stamp is configured. Note Depending on images, the Photo Optimizer PRO may have no discernible effect. Page top Reducing Photo Noise Strana 291 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Reducing Photo Noise Reducing Photo Noise With the Photo Noise Reduction function, you can reduce the digital camera noise and improve the image quality of the digital print. The procedure for performing Photo Noise Reduction is as follows: 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Set Photo Noise Reduction Check the Photo Noise Reduction check box on the Effects tab and select Normal or Strong for the level. 3. Complete the setup Click OK. When you execute print, the image will be printed with the digital camera noise being reduced. Note It is recommended to select Normal for most cases. Select Strong if you have selected Normal and the noise still bothers you. Reducing Photo Noise Strana 292 z celkového počtu 684 Depending on application software or resolution of image data, effects of digital camera noise reduction may not be obvious. When this function is used for other than photos taken by digital cameras, image may be distorted. Page top Overview of the Printer Driver Strana 293 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver Overview of the Printer Driver Printer Driver Operations Canon IJ Printer Driver How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window Maintenance Tab Canon IJ Status Monitor Canon IJ Preview Page top Printer Driver Operations Strana 294 z celkového počtu 684 MA-5385-V1.00 | Instructions for Use (Printer Driver) | How to Use This Manual | Printing This Manual | Various Printing Methods Printing with Easy Setup Setting a Page Size and Orientation Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer Changing the Print Options Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Setting the Ink Cartridge Setting the Stapling Margin Managing the Machine Power Borderless Printing Reducing the Machine Noise Fit-to-Page Printing Changing the Machine Operation Mode Scaled Printing Page Layout Printing Poster Printing Performing Maintenance from a Computer Cleaning the Print Heads Booklet Printing Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Duplex Printing Aligning the Print Head Position Stamp/Background Printing Checking the Print Head Nozzles Printing an Envelope Cleaning Inside the Machine Displaying the Print Results before Printing Overview of the Printer Driver Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size) Canon IJ Printer Driver Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Canon IJ Status Monitor Maintenance Tab Canon IJ Preview Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Specifying Color Correction Updating the MP Drivers Adjusting Color Balance Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers Adjusting Brightness Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers Adjusting Intensity Before Installing the MP Drivers Adjusting Contrast Installing the MP Drivers Simulating an Illustration Representing Image Data with a Single Color Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors Smoothing Jagged Outlines Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration Reducing Photo Noise Appendix Deleting the Undesired Print Job Sharing the Printer on a Network Canon IJ Printer Driver Strana 295 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver > Canon IJ Printer Driver Canon IJ Printer Driver The Canon IJ printer driver is software that is installed on your computer for printing data on this machine. The Canon IJ printer driver converts the print data created by your Windows application into data that your printer can understand and sends the converted data to the printer. Because different models support different print data formats, you need a Canon IJ printer driver for the specific model you are using. How to Use Printer Driver Help You can display the Help describing the driver setting items through the printing preferences screen of the Canon IJ printer driver. To view all descriptions of a tab... Click the Help button on each tab. A dialog box opens, displaying a description of each item on the tab. You can also click the link found in the description of an item to display a description of the linked dialog box. To see a description for each item... Right-click the item you want to learn about and then click Help. Alternatively, when the Help button is found at the right end of the title bar, click that button, and then click the item you want to learn about. A description of the item is displayed. Related Topic How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window Page top How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window Strana 296 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver > Canon IJ Printer Driver > How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window The printer driver setup window can be displayed through the application software in use or the Start menu of the Windows. Note This guide mainly describes operations on the Windows Vista. Operations may differ depending on versions of the Windows. Open the Printer Driver Setup Window through the Application Software Follow the procedure below to configure printing profile when printing. 1. Select the command you perform printing on the application software in use In general, select Print on the File menu to open the Print dialog box. 2. Select your model name and click Preferences (or Properties) The printer driver setup window appears. Note Depending on application software you use, command names or menu names may vary and there may be more steps. For details, refer to the user's manual of your application software. Open the Printer Driver Setup Window through the Start Menu Follow the procedure below to perform maintenance operations such as print head cleaning, or to configure printing profile that are common for all application software. 1. Select items from the Start menu as shown below: In Windows Vista, select the Start menu -> Control Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Printers. In Windows XP, select the Start menu -> Control Panel -> Printers and Other Hardware -> Printers and Faxes. In Windows 2000, select the Start menu -> Settings -> Printers. 2. Right-click your model name icon, and then select Printing Preferences... from the displayed menu The printer driver setup window appears. Important Opening the printer driver setup window through Properties displays such tabs regarding the Windows functions as the Ports (or Advanced) tab. Those tabs do not appear when opening through Printing Preferences... or application software. For tabs regarding Windows functions, refer to the user's manual for the Windows. Page top Maintenance Tab Strana 297 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver > Canon IJ Printer Driver > Maintenance Tab Maintenance Tab The Maintenance tab allows you to perform machine maintenance or change the settings of the machine. Features Cleaning the Print Heads Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Aligning the Print Head Position Checking the Print Head Nozzles Cleaning Inside the Machine Setting the Ink Cartridge Managing the Machine Power Related Features Reducing the Machine Noise Changing the Machine Operation Mode Page top Canon IJ Status Monitor Strana 298 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver > Canon IJ Status Monitor Canon IJ Status Monitor The Canon IJ Status Monitor is an application software that shows the status of the printer and the progress of printing on the Windows screen. You will know the status of the printer with graphics, icons, and messages. Launching the Canon IJ Status Monitor The Canon IJ Status Monitor launches automatically when data is sent to the printer. When launched, the Canon IJ Status Monitor appears as a button on the task bar. Click the status monitor button displayed on the task bar. The Canon IJ Status Monitor appears. Note To open the Canon IJ Status Monitor when the printer is not printing, open the printer driver setup window and click View Printer Status... on the Maintenance tab. When Errors Occur The Canon IJ Status Monitor is automatically displayed if an error occurs (e.g., if the printer runs out of paper or if the ink is low). In such cases, take the appropriate action as described. Page top Canon IJ Preview Strana 299 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver > Canon IJ Preview Canon IJ Preview The Canon IJ Preview is an application software that displays what the print result will look like before a document is actually printed. The preview reflects the information that is set within the printer driver and allows you to check the document layout, print order, and number of pages. You can also change the media type settings. When you want to display a preview before printing, open the printer driver setup window , click the Quick Setup tab or the Main tab, and check the Preview before printing check box. When you do not want to display a preview before printing, uncheck the check box. Related Topic Displaying the Print Results before Printing Page top Tlač pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia Strana 300 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Tlač pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia Tlač pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia Kopírovanie Na začiatok strany Kopírovanie Strana 301 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Tlač pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia > Kopírovanie Kopírovanie Vytváranie kópií Používanie užitočných funkcií kopírovania Na začiatok strany Vytváranie kópií Strana 302 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Tlač pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia > Kopírovanie > Vytváranie kópií Vytváranie kópií Základný postup vytvárania kópií nájdete v časti Kopírovanie . Zmenšenie alebo zväčšenie kópie Používanie užitočných funkcií kopírovania Na začiatok strany Zmenšenie alebo zväčšenie kópie Strana 303 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Tlač pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia > Kopírovanie > Vytváranie kópií > Zmenšenie alebo zväčšenie kópie Zmenšenie alebo zväčšenie kópie 1. Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie zapnuté. 2. Vložte obyčajný papier do zadného zásobníka. 3. Umiestnite originál na ploché predlohové sklo. 4. Stláčaním tlačidla Papier (Paper) vyberte typ Plain Paper a veľkosť A4 alebo 8,5" x 11". Poznámka Môžete prepínať medzi veľkosťami A4 a Letter papiera vloženého v zadnom zásobníku. Prepínanie medzi veľkosťami papiera A4 a Letter 5. Stlačte tlačidlo Prispôsobiť strane (Fit to Page) . Rozsvieti sa indikátor Prispôsobiť strane (Fit to Page) . Ak chcete zrušiť kopírovanie s prispôsobením strane, znovu stlačte tlačidlo Prispôsobiť strane (Fit to Page) . Poznámka Tlačidlo Prispôsobiť strane (Fit to Page) sa môže používať len s funkciou kopírovania. Kopírované obrázky sa automaticky zväčšia alebo zmenšia po dĺžke alebo po šírke tak, aby sa prispôsobili vybratej veľkosti strany. 6. Opakovaným stláčaním tlačidla + zadajte počet kópií. Poznámka Pri opakovanom stláčaní tlačidla + sa na displeji LED zobrazí písmeno F. Počet kópií sa nastaví na hodnotu 20. Ak chcete urobiť 10 až 19 kópií, nastavte požadovaný počet kópií a potom vložte rovnaký počet hárkov papiera. V takomto prípade zariadenie zastaví kopírovanie so stavom chyby. Chybu zrušte stlačením tlačidla Stop/Reset . Stlačením tlačidla Stop/Reset obnovíte počet kópií na hodnotu 1. 7. Stlačením tlačidla Farebne (Color) nastavte farebné kopírovanie, stlačením tlačidla Čiernobielo (Black) čiernobiele kopírovanie. Zariadenie spustí kopírovanie s prispôsobením strane. Po dokončení kopírovania odstráňte originál z plochého predlohového skla. Rýchle kopírovanie 1. Stlačte a minimálne dve sekundy podržte tlačidlo Farebne (Color) alebo Čiernobielo (Black). Displej LED raz zabliká. 2. Uvoľnite tlačidlo. Zariadenie spustí rýchle kopírovanie. Dôležité Neotvárajte kryt dokumentov ani neodstraňujte originál z predlohového skla, kým sa Zmenšenie alebo zväčšenie kópie Strana 304 z celkového počtu 684 kopírovanie nedokončí. Poznámka Rýchle kopírovanie je vhodné na tlač dokumentov, ktoré obsahujú iba text, na obyčajný papier. Ak sa nedosiahne očakávaná kvalita, skúste normálne kopírovanie. Ak chcete urobiť 10 až 19 kópií, nastavte požadovaný počet kópií a potom vložte rovnaký počet hárkov papiera. V takomto prípade zariadenie zastaví kopírovanie so stavom chyby. Chybu zrušte stlačením tlačidla Stop/Reset . Ak chcete zrušiť kopírovanie, stlačte tlačidlo Stop/Reset . Na začiatok strany Používanie užitočných funkcií kopírovania Strana 305 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Tlač pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia > Kopírovanie > Používanie užitočných funkcií kopírovania Používanie užitočných funkcií kopírovania Borderless copy Obrázky môžete kopírovať tak, že vyplnia celú stranu bez okrajov. Kopírovanie bez okrajov (Borderless Copy) Na začiatok strany Prepínanie medzi veľkosťami papiera A4 a Letter Strana 306 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Tlač pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia > Kopírovanie > Používanie užitočných funkcií kopírovania > Prepínanie medzi veľkosťami papiera A4 a Letter Prepínanie medzi veľkosťami papiera A4 a Letter Môžete prepínať medzi veľkosťami A4 a Letter papiera vloženého v zadnom zásobníku. 1. Opakovane stláčajte tlačidlo Údržba (Maintenance) , kým sa nezobrazí písmeno d. 2. Stlačením tlačidla Čiernobielo (Black) vyberte veľkosť A4, stlačením tlačidla Farebne (Color) vyberte veľkosť Letter. Poznámka Keď je zariadenie zapnuté, môžete prepínať medzi veľkosťami A4 a Letter papiera vloženého v zadnom zásobníku. Na začiatok strany Kopírovanie bez okrajov (Borderless Copy) Strana 307 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Tlač pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia > Kopírovanie > Používanie užitočných funkcií kopírovania > Kopírovanie bez okrajov (Borderless Copy) Kopírovanie bez okrajov (Borderless Copy) Obrázky môžete kopírovať tak, že vyplnia celú stranu bez okrajov. 1. Vložte fotografický papier do zadného zásobníka. 2. Stláčaním tlačidla Papier (Paper) vyberte veľkosť strany papiera vloženého v zadnom zásobníku. Poznámka Môžete prepínať medzi veľkosťami A4 a Letter papiera vloženého v zadnom zásobníku. Prepínanie medzi veľkosťami papiera A4 a Letter Ak je vybratý typ Plain Paper a veľkosť A4 alebo 8,5" x 11", kopírovanie bez okrajov nie je k dispozícii. 3. Stlačte tlačidlo Prispôsobiť strane (Fit to Page) . Rozsvieti sa indikátor Prispôsobiť strane (Fit to Page) . Ak chcete zrušiť kopírovanie bez okrajov, znovu stlačte tlačidlo Prispôsobiť strane (Fit to Page) . Poznámka Tlačidlo Prispôsobiť strane (Fit to Page) sa môže používať len s funkciou kopírovania. Kopírované obrázky sa automaticky zväčšia alebo zmenšia, aby sa prispôsobili veľkosti strany vybratej na kopírovanie bez okrajov. 4. Opakovaným stláčaním tlačidla + zadajte počet kópií. Poznámka Pri opakovanom stláčaní tlačidla + sa na displeji LED zobrazí písmeno F. Počet kópií sa nastaví na hodnotu 20. Ak chcete urobiť 10 až 19 kópií, nastavte požadovaný počet kópií a potom vložte rovnaký počet hárkov papiera. V takomto prípade zariadenie zastaví kopírovanie so stavom chyby. Chybu zrušte stlačením tlačidla Stop/Reset . Stlačením tlačidla Stop/Reset obnovíte počet kópií na hodnotu 1. 5. Stlačením tlačidla Farebne (Color) nastavte farebné kopírovanie, stlačením tlačidla Čiernobielo (Black) čiernobiele kopírovanie. Zariadenie spustí kopírovanie bez okrajov. Dôležité Neotvárajte kryt dokumentov ani neodstraňujte originál z predlohového skla, kým sa kopírovanie nedokončí. Poznámka Keďže sa kopírovaný obrázok zväčší tak, aby vyplnil celú stranu, na okrajoch môže dôjsť k jemnému Kopírovanie bez okrajov (Borderless Copy) Strana 308 z celkového počtu 684 orezaniu. Ak chcete zrušiť kopírovanie, stlačte tlačidlo Stop/Reset . Na začiatok strany Skenovanie Strana 309 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Skenovanie Skenovanie Skenovanie obrázkov Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia Skenovanie pomocou dodaného aplikačného softvéru Skenovanie pomocou iného aplikačného softvéru Ďalšie skenovacie postupy Na začiatok strany Skenovanie obrázkov Strana 310 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Skenovanie > Skenovanie obrázkov Skenovanie obrázkov Skenovanie obrázkov Pred skenovaním Umiestnenie dokumentov Na začiatok strany Skenovanie obrázkov Strana 311 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Skenovanie > Skenovanie obrázkov > Skenovanie obrázkov Skenovanie obrázkov Obrázky môžete naskenovať zo zariadenia do počítača bez ich tlače a uložiť ich v obľúbených formátoch súborov, akými sú JPEG, TIFF, bitová mapa alebo PDF. Vyberte si vhodný skenovací postup. Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia Skenovanie pomocou dodaného aplikačného softvéru Skenovanie pomocou iného aplikačného softvéru Na začiatok strany Pred skenovaním Strana 312 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Skenovanie > Skenovanie obrázkov > Pred skenovaním Pred skenovaním Pred skenovaním obrázkov skontrolujte, či je splnená nasledujúca podmienka: Vyhovuje originál určený na skenovanie požiadavkám na originály ukladané na ploché predlohové sklo? Požiadavky a informácie o umiestňovaní originálov na ploché predlohové sklo nájdete v časti Umiestnenie dokumentov . Na začiatok strany Placing Documents Strana 313 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning Images > Placing Documents Placing Documents Learn how to place documents on the machine's Platen. Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned. Otherwise, documents may not be scanned correctly. Important Do not place objects on the Document Cover. The objects may fall into the machine when the Document Cover is opened. This may damage the machine. Placing Documents Place documents as described below to allow the machine to detect the document type or size automatically. Important When scanning by specifying the document type or size in MP Navigator EX or ScanGear (scanner driver), align an upper corner of the document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen. Photos that have been cut to various shapes and documents smaller than 1.18 inches (3 cm) square cannot be cropped accurately when scanning. Reflective CD/DVD labels may not be scanned properly. Close the Document Cover when scanning. When Scanning Photos, Postcards, Business Cards or CD/DVD When Scanning Magazines, Newspapers or Text Documents Placing a Single Document Place the document face-down on the Platen and align an upper corner of the document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen. Portions placed on the diagonally striped area cannot be scanned. Place the document face-down on the Platen, with 3/8 inches (1 cm) or more space between the edges of the Platen and the document. Portions placed on the diagonally striped area cannot be scanned. Important Large documents (such as A4 size photos) Placing Documents Strana 314 z celkového počtu 684 that cannot be placed away from the edges/ arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen may be saved as PDF files. To save in a format other than PDF, scan by specifying the file format. Placing Multiple Documents Allow 3/8 inches (1 cm) or more space between the edges of the Platen and documents, and between documents. Portions placed on the diagonally striped area cannot be scanned. Note You can place up to 12 documents. Positions of slanted documents (10 degrees or less) are corrected automatically. Page top Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači pomocou ovládacieho ... Strana 315 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Skenovanie > Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia Príloha: Rôzne nastavenia skenovania Na začiatok strany Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači pomocou ovládacieho ... Strana 316 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Skenovanie > Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia > Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia Naskenované údaje môžete ukladať v počítači pomocou ovládacieho panela zariadenia. Pred ukladaním naskenovaných údajov v počítači skontrolujte, či sú splnené nasledujúce podmienky: Nainštalovaný je potrebný aplikačný softvér (ovládače MP Drivers a program MP Navigator EX). Ak ste ešte aplikačný softvér (ovládače MP Drivers a program MP Navigator EX) nenainštalovali, do diskovej jednotky počítača vložte Inštalačný disk CD-ROM (Setup CD-ROM) , spustite inštaláciu Custom Install a vyberte položky MP Drivers a MP Navigator EX. Zariadenie je správne pripojené k počítaču. Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie správne pripojené k počítaču. Pri skenovaní obrázkov pomocou zariadenia, alebo keď je počítač v režime spánku alebo pohotovostnom režime, nezapájajte ani neodpájajte kábel USB. Postup po naskenovaní originálu je nastavený v programe MP Navigator EX. V programe MP Navigator EX možno nastaviť odpoveď na stlačenie tlačidla SKENOVAŤ (SCAN) na zariadení. Môžete nastaviť odpoveď pre každú udalosť zvlášť. Podrobné informácie nájdete v časti Výber odpovede na príkazy z ovládacieho panela použitím programu MP Navigator EX . 1. Nastavte úvodnú aplikáciu. Ak používate systém Mac OS X v.10.5.x alebo Mac OS X v.10.4.x: Toto nastavenie nie je potrebné. Ak používate systém Mac OS X v.10.3.9: Program MP Navigator EX musíte nastaviť ako úvodnú softvérovú aplikáciu aplikácie Image Capture v ponuke Aplikácie (Applications) systému Mac OS X. V ponuke Prejsť (Go) vyberte položku Aplikácie (Applications) a potom dvakrát kliknite na ikonu Image Capture. V ľavom dolnom rohu okna skenera kliknite na tlačidlo Možnosti (Options), v zozname Aplikácia, ktorá sa spustí pri stlačení tlačidla skenera: (Application to launch when the scanner button is pressed:) vyberte možnosť MP Navigator EX 3 a potom kliknite na tlačidlo OK. Ak chcete ukončiť aplikáciu Image Capture, v ponuke Image Capture vyberte možnosť Ukončiť aplikáciu Image Capture (Quit Image Capture). Dôležité Ak sa tlačidlo Možnosti (Options) nezobrazí, v ponuke Image Capture vyberte položku Predvoľby (Preferences), kliknite na položku Skener (Scanner) a potom kliknutím na možnosť Vždy, keď je to možné, použiť softvér TWAIN (Use TWAIN software whenever possible) zrušte túto možnosť. Potom ukončite a reštartujte aplikáciu Image Capture. 2. Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie zapnuté. 3. Umiestnite originál na ploché predlohové sklo. Poznámka Informácie o vkladaní originálov na ploché predlohové sklo nájdete v časti Umiestnenie dokumentov . Ukladanie naskenovaných údajov v počítači pomocou ovládacieho ... Strana 317 z celkového počtu 684 4. Stlačte tlačidlo SKENOVAŤ (SCAN). Pri skenovaní sa použijú nastavenia nakonfigurované programom MP Navigator EX. 5. Nastavenie programu MP Navigator EX 3.0 Ak používate systém Windows Vista: Po stlačení tlačidla SKENOVAŤ (SCAN) sa môže zobraziť obrazovka výberu programu. V takom prípade vyberte program MP Navigator EX Ver3.0 a kliknite na tlačidlo OK. Program MP Navigator EX môžete nastaviť, aby sa spúšťal po každom stlačení tlačidla SKENOVAŤ (SCAN). Podrobné informácie nájdete v časti Pre používateľov systému Windows . Ak používate systém Windows XP: Po prvom stlačení tlačidla SKENOVAŤ (SCAN) sa môže zobraziť obrazovka výberu programu. V takom prípade vyberte program MP Navigator EX Ver3.0 ako aplikačný softvér, ktorý chcete použiť. Potom vyberte príkaz Pre túto akciu vždy použiť tento program (Always use this program for this action) a kliknite na tlačidlo OK. Odteraz sa bude program MP Navigator EX spúšťať automaticky. Dôležité Ak sa poloha alebo veľkosť obrázka pre niektoré typy pôvodných dokumentov nenaskenuje správne, postupujte podľa časti Skenovanie fotografií a dokumentov a v programe MP Navigator EX zmeňte nastavenia Document Type a Document Size tak, aby sa zhodovali so skenovaným pôvodným dokumentom. Úprava alebo tlač naskenovaných obrázkov Program MP Navigator EX umožňuje upravovať naskenované obrázky, umožňuje ich napríklad optimalizovať alebo orezať. Na úpravu a tlač naskenovaných obrázkov môžete v programe MP Navigator EX spustiť aj niektorú zo softvérových aplikácií. Skúsme skenovať Skenovanie pôvodných dokumentov s použitím rozšírených nastavení Program ScanGear umožňuje skenovať pôvodné dokumenty s použitím rozšírených nastavení, ako je napríklad rozlíšenie. Skenovanie s rozšírenými nastaveniami pomocou programu ScanGear (ovládača skenera) Poznámka Na skenovanie pôvodných dokumentov v zariadení môžete použiť aj softvérové aplikácie kompatibilné so štandardmi TWAIN alebo WIA (iba systémy Windows Vista a Windows XP) a s Ovládacím panelom (Control Panel) (iba systémy Windows Vista a Windows XP). Podrobné informácie nájdete v časti Ďalšie skenovacie postupy . Na začiatok strany Appendix: Various Scan Settings Strana 318 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Saving Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Appendix: Various Scan Settings Appendix: Various Scan Settings Specifying how to respond when scanning using the Operation Panel of the machine Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using MP Navigator EX Page top Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Usin... Strana 319 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Saving Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Appendix: Various Scan Settings > Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using MP Navigator EX Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using MP Navigator EX MP Navigator EX enables you to specify the response resulting from pressing a button for scanning on the Operation Panel of the machine. You can specify the response individually for each event. 1. Start MP Navigator EX. Starting MP Navigator EX 2. Click Preferences. The Preferences dialog box opens. Note The Preferences dialog box can also be opened by clicking Preferences in the One-click Mode screen. 3. On the Scanner Button Settings tab, specify Actions. Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Usin... Strana 320 z celkového počtu 684 Note See the section below for details. Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save) 4. Click OK. The operation will be performed according to the settings when you press the SCAN button on the machine. Page top Skenovanie pomocou dodaného aplikačného softvéru Strana 321 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Skenovanie > Skenovanie pomocou dodaného aplikačného softvéru Skenovanie pomocou dodaného aplikačného softvéru Čo je to MP Navigator EX (dodaný softvér skenera)? Skúsme skenovať Užitočné funkcie programu MP Navigator EX Používanie obrázkov v programe MP Navigator EX Obrazovky programu MP Navigator EX Príloha: Otváranie iných súborov než naskenovaných obrázkov Na začiatok strany What Is MP Navigator EX (Supplied Scanner Software)? Strana 322 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > What Is MP Navigator EX (Supplied Scanner Software)? What Is MP Navigator EX (Supplied Scanner Software)? MP Navigator EX is an application that enables you to easily scan photos and documents. It is suitable even for beginners. Important MP Navigator EX may not start from the Operation Panel of the machine. In that case, restart the computer. Use the default display font size of the OS. Otherwise, software screens may not appear correctly. What You Can Do with This Software This software allows you to scan multiple documents at one time, or scan images larger than the Platen. You can also save scanned images, attach them to e-mail or print them using the supplied applications. Screens Main Menus There are two types of MP Navigator EX Main Menu: Navigation Mode screen and One-click Mode screen. Navigation Mode Screen You can start various tasks from the Navigation Mode screen, including simple scanning, scanning using ScanGear (scanner driver), and enhancing/correcting images. One-click Mode Screen You can complete from scanning to saving, etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon in the One-click Mode screen. What Is MP Navigator EX (Supplied Scanner Software)? Strana 323 z celkového počtu 684 Scan/Import Window Use the Scan/Import window to scan photos and documents. View & Use Window Use the View & Use window to select what you want to do with the scanned images. Page top Let's Try Scanning Strana 324 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Try Scanning Let's Try Scanning Try scanning using MP Navigator EX. Starting MP Navigator EX Starting MP Navigator EX Scanning documents, photos, magazines, etc. from the Platen Scanning Photos and Documents Scanning two or more photos (small documents) at one time Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time Scanning images larger than the Platen Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist) Scanning easily according to purpose (scan and save, attach to e-mail, etc.) Easy Scanning with One-click Page top Starting MP Navigator EX Strana 325 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Try Scanning > Starting MP Navigator EX Starting MP Navigator EX Starting MP Navigator EX 1. Double-click Canon MP Navigator EX 3.0 icon on the desktop. MP Navigator EX starts. Note Alternatively, from the Start menu, select (All) Programs > Canon Utilities > MP Navigator EX 3.0 > MP Navigator EX 3.0. Starting One-click Mode 1. Click (Switch Mode) at the bottom left of the screen. The One-click Mode screen appears. Starting MP Navigator EX Strana 326 z celkového počtu 684 Note Select the Show this window at startup checkbox in the Navigation Mode screen to always open the Navigation Mode screen at startup. If this checkbox is not selected, the last used screen appears at startup. Page top Scanning Photos and Documents Strana 327 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Try Scanning > Scanning Photos and Documents Scanning Photos and Documents Scan photos and documents placed on the Platen. 1. Start MP Navigator EX and open the Navigation Mode screen. Starting MP Navigator EX 2. Point to Scan/Import and click Photos/Documents (Platen). 3. Place the document on the Platen, then select Document Type. Placing Documents Note When you select Magazine(Color), the Descreen function will be enabled and scanning takes longer than usual. To disable the Descreen function, deselect the Descreen checkbox in the Scanning Photos and Documents Strana 328 z celkového počtu 684 Scan Settings dialog box. Select Text(OCR) to extract the text in the image and convert to editable text data using MP Navigator EX. Color scanning is not available for Text(OCR). To scan in color, use OCR in One-click and scan with Color Mode set to Color. 4. Click Specify... to set the document size and scanning resolution as required. When setting is completed, click OK. Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents) Important When scanning a large document (such as an A4 size photo), align its corner with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the platen and specify the document size in the Scan Settings dialog box. 5. Click Scan. Scanning starts. When scanning is completed, the Scan Complete dialog box opens. Select Scan or Exit. Select Scan to scan the next document, or select Exit to end. The scanned images appear in the Thumbnail window. Scanning Photos and Documents Strana 329 z celkového počtu 684 6. Edit the scanned images as required. Use Edit Tools to rotate images, select a part of an image, etc. See the Edit Tools in "Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) " for details. Note First select images to edit. (Selected images are outlined in orange.) Drag the mouse or use Shift + arrow keys to select multiple images. 7. Save the scanned images. Saving Saving as PDF Files Page top Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time Strana 330 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Try Scanning > Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time You can scan two or more photos (small documents) at one time by setting Document Size to Auto Detect (Multiple Documents) in the Scan Settings dialog box of MP Navigator EX. Important The following types of documents may not be cropped correctly. In that case, start ScanGear (scanner driver), then adjust the cropping frames (scan areas) in whole image view and scan again. - Photos that have a whitish border - Documents printed on white paper, hand-written text, business cards, etc. - Thin documents - Thick documents Scanning Multiple Documents in Whole Image View 1. Place the document on the Platen. Placing Documents 2. Start MP Navigator EX and open the Navigation Mode screen. Starting MP Navigator EX 3. Point to Scan/Import and click Photos/Documents (Platen). 4. Select Document Type according to the document to be scanned. Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time 5. Click Specify.... Select Auto Detect (Multiple Documents) for Document Size. When setting is completed, click OK. Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents) 6. Click Scan. Strana 331 z celkového počtu 684 Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time Strana 332 z celkového počtu 684 Multiple documents are scanned at one time. When scanning is completed, the Scan Complete dialog box opens. Select Scan or Exit. Select Scan to scan the next document, or select Exit to end. The scanned images appear in the Thumbnail window. 7. Edit the scanned images as required. Use Edit Tools to rotate images, select a part of an image, etc. See the Edit Tools in "Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) " for details. Note First select images to edit. (Selected images are outlined in orange.) Drag the mouse or use Shift + arrow keys to select multiple images. 8. Save the scanned images. Saving Saving as PDF Files Note If you want to preview the images before scanning, use ScanGear (scanner driver). Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Page top Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist) Strana 333 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Try Scanning > Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist) Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist) Stitch Assist allows you to scan the left and right halves of a large document separately and combine the scanned images back into one image. You can scan documents that are up to twice as large as the Platen. 1. Start MP Navigator EX and open the Navigation Mode screen. Starting MP Navigator EX Note You can complete from scanning to saving, etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon in the One-click Mode screen. Stitch Assist is available from the One-click Mode screen as well, by changing the document size. Click the corresponding icon and select Stitch Assist for Document Size. Then skip ahead to Step 5. 2. Point to Scan/Import and click Photos/Documents (Platen). 3. Select Document Type according to the document to be scanned. Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist) Strana 334 z celkového počtu 684 4. Click Specify.... Select Stitch Assist for Document Size, then specify the scanning resolution as required. When setting is completed, click OK. Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents) 5. Click Scan. Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist) Strana 335 z celkového počtu 684 The Stitch-assist window opens. 6. Place the left half of the document face-down on the Platen. 7. Click Scan. The left half of the document is scanned and appears in the Stitch-assist window. 8. Place the right half of the document face-down on the Platen. 9. Click Scan. The right half of the document is scanned. 10. Adjust the scanned image as required. Use the icons to swap the left and right halves, rotate the image 180 degrees or enlarge/reduce the image. Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist) Strana 336 z celkového počtu 684 (Swap Left & Right) Swaps the left and right halves. Important This function is not available while the image is enlarged/reduced. Rotate 180° Rotates right half of the image 180 degrees. Important This function is not available while the image is enlarged/reduced. (Enlarge) Enlarges the displayed image. (Reduce) Reduces the displayed image. (Full-screen) Enlarges/reduces the image to display it full-screen. Note Enlarge/Reduce does not affect the actual size of the scanned image. When the document is scanned upside down, the image displayed in the Stitch-assist window will also be upside down. Click Rotate 180° to rotate the image to the correct orientation. You can drag the right half of the image from right to left or up and down to adjust the position. If the left and right halves do not match due to a slanted document, place the document correctly and click Back, then scan again. 11. Click Next. 12. Drag the mouse to specify the area to be saved, then click OK. Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist) Strana 337 z celkového počtu 684 The combined image appears in the Thumbnail window. When scanning is completed, the Scan Complete dialog box opens. Select Scan or Exit. Select Scan to scan the next document, or select Exit to end. 13. Save the scanned images. Saving Saving as PDF Files Page top Easy Scanning with One-click Strana 338 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Try Scanning > Easy Scanning with One-click Easy Scanning with One-click You can complete from scanning to saving, etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon. 1. Place the document on the Platen. Placing Documents 2. Start MP Navigator EX. Starting MP Navigator EX The MP Navigator EX Navigation Mode screen or One-click Mode screen appears. Navigation Mode Screen One-click Mode Screen Note Skip ahead to Step 4 if One-click Mode screen is open. 3. Point to One-click. Easy Scanning with One-click Strana 339 z celkového počtu 684 4. Click the corresponding icon. Custom Scan with One-click Tab One-click Mode Screen 5. Select Document Type according to the document to be scanned. 6. Set the document size and scanning resolution as required. 7. Start scanning. Scanning starts. Page top Useful MP Navigator EX Functions Strana 340 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Useful MP Navigator EX Functions Useful MP Navigator EX Functions With MP Navigator EX, you can correct/enhance scanned images beautifully, and search saved images quickly. Correcting/enhancing images automatically Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically Correcting/enhancing images manually Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually Adjusting color characteristics such as brightness and contrast Adjusting Images Searching for lost images Searching Images Classifying and sorting images Classifying Images into Categories Page top Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically Strana 341 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Useful MP Navigator EX Functions > Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically MP Navigator EX will analyze and correct/enhance scanned images automatically. 1. Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them, then open the View & Use window from the Navigation Mode screen and select the photos you want to correct/ enhance. Note See " Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX. You can also select images saved on a computer. Opening Images Saved on a Computer 2. Click Edit/Convert, then click Fix photo images on the list. The Correct/Enhance Images window opens. Note The Correct/Enhance Images window can also be opened by clicking (Image Correction/ Enhancement) on the Toolbar or in the Zoom in dialog box. In that case, only the target image (outlined in orange) can be corrected/enhanced. See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window. 3. Select the image you want to correct/enhance from the thumbnail list. The selected image appears in Preview. Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically Strana 342 z celkového počtu 684 Note If you selected only one image in the View & Use window, the thumbnail list does not appear and only the preview image appears. 4. Make sure that Auto is selected. 5. Click Auto Photo Fix, Face Sharpener or Digital Face Smoothing. Important Once image is corrected with Auto Photo Fix and saved, it cannot be corrected again with Auto Photo Fix. Auto Photo Fix may not be available for images edited using an application, digital camera, etc. manufactured by other companies. Note The Face Sharpener and Digital Face Smoothing effect levels can be changed using the slider that appears by clicking the corresponding buttons. When you apply Auto Photo Fix, dark backlit photos will be corrected automatically. If the image is not corrected enough using Auto Photo Fix, it is recommended that you apply Face Brightener on the Manual tab. Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically Strana 343 z celkového počtu 684 6. Click OK. The entire image is corrected/enhanced automatically and upper left of the thumbnail and preview image. (Correct/Enhance) appears on the Note Click Reset Selected Image to undo the correction/enhancement. Select the Apply to all images checkbox to correct/enhance all selected images. 7. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images. You can save corrected/enhanced images as new files. Note To save only the images you like, select them and click Save Selected Image. To save all images, click Save All Corrected Images. The file format of corrected/enhanced images is JPEG/Exif. Adobe RGB images are saved as sRGB images. 8. Click Exit. Important The corrections/enhancements will be lost if you exit before saving corrected/enhanced images. Page top Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually Strana 344 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Useful MP Navigator EX Functions > Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually You can correct/enhance scanned images manually. 1. Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them, then open the View & Use window from the Navigation Mode screen and select the photos you want to correct/ enhance. Note See " Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX. You can also select images saved on a computer. Opening Images Saved on a Computer 2. Click Edit/Convert, then click Fix photo images on the list. The Correct/Enhance Images window opens. Note The Correct/Enhance Images window can also be opened by clicking (Image Correction/ Enhancement) on the Toolbar or in the Zoom in dialog box. In that case, only the target image (outlined in orange) can be corrected/enhanced. See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window. 3. Select the image you want to correct/enhance from the thumbnail list. The selected image appears in Preview. Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually Strana 345 z celkového počtu 684 Note If you selected only one image in the View & Use window, the thumbnail list does not appear and only the preview image appears. 4. Click Manual, then click Correct/Enhance. 5. Click Face Brightener, Face Sharpener, Digital Face Smoothing or Blemish Remover. Note The Face Brightener, Face Sharpener and Digital Face Smoothing effect levels can be changed using the slider that appears by clicking the corresponding buttons. Move the cursor over the image. The shape of the cursor changes to (Cross). 6. Drag to select the area you want to correct/enhance, then click OK that appears over the image. Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually The portion in and around the selected area is corrected/enhanced and appears on the upper left of the thumbnail and preview image. Strana 346 z celkového počtu 684 (Correct/Enhance) Note You can also drag to rotate the rectangle. Click Undo to undo the latest correction/enhancement. Click Reset Selected Image to cancel all corrections, enhancements and adjustments applied to the selected image. 7. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images. You can save corrected/enhanced images as new files. Note To save only the images you like, select them and click Save Selected Image. To save all images, click Save All Corrected Images. The file format of corrected/enhanced images is JPEG/Exif. 8. Click Exit. Important The corrections/enhancements will be lost if you exit before saving corrected/enhanced images. Page top Adjusting Images Strana 347 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Useful MP Navigator EX Functions > Adjusting Images Adjusting Images You can make fine adjustments to the overall brightness, contrast, etc. of images. 1. Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them, then open the View & Use window from the Navigation Mode screen and select the photos you want to adjust. Note See " Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX. You can also select images saved on a computer. Opening Images Saved on a Computer 2. Click Edit/Convert, then click Fix photo images on the list. The Correct/Enhance Images window opens. Note The Correct/Enhance Images window can also be opened by clicking (Image Correction/ Enhancement) on the Toolbar or in the Zoom in dialog box. In that case, only the target image (outlined in orange) can be corrected/enhanced. See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window. 3. Select the image you want to adjust from the thumbnail list. The selected image appears in Preview. Adjusting Images Strana 348 z celkového počtu 684 Note If you selected only one image in the View & Use window, the thumbnail list does not appear and only the preview image appears. 4. Click Manual, then click Adjust. 5. Move the slider of the item you want to adjust and set the effect level. When you move a slider, preview image. (Correct/Enhance) appears on the upper left of the thumbnail and Note Click Defaults to reset all adjustments. Click Reset Selected Image to cancel all corrections, enhancements and adjustments applied to the selected image. 6. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images. You can save adjusted images as new files. Note To save only the images you like, select them and click Save Selected Image. To save all images, click Save All Corrected Images. Adjusting Images Strana 349 z celkového počtu 684 The file format of adjusted images is JPEG/Exif. 7. Click Exit. Important The adjustments will be lost if you exit before saving adjusted images. Page top Searching Images Strana 350 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Useful MP Navigator EX Functions > Searching Images Searching Images In the View & Use window of the Navigation Mode screen, you can search images saved on your computer and open them in MP Navigator EX. Opened images can be printed, edited, etc. Note Search images in My Box (Scanned/Imported Images), Recently Saved Images or a selected folder and its subfolders. You can also specify folder and search in Specify Folder. See "Starting MP Navigator EX" to start MP Navigator EX. Quick Search In (Text box) on the Toolbar, enter a word or phrase included in the file name, Exif information or PDF text of the image you want to search for, then click (Search button). For Exif information, text in Maker, Model, Description and User Comment is searched. Advanced Search Click Search on the left of the screen to open search options. Enter information of the image you want to search for, then click Start Search. Searching Images Strana 351 z celkového počtu 684 Search in If you know where to look for, select the drive, folder or network from Specify Folder. File Name If you know the file name, enter it. A word or phrase in the file Enter a word or phrase included in the items selected in More Advanced Options. Important For PDF files, you can only search for those created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot search PDF files created or edited in other applications. Also, searching PDF files is available only when keyword search is set. For details of creating PDF files that enables keyword search, see " PDF Settings Dialog Box ." Password-protected PDF files cannot be searched. Category You can search for images by category. Modified Date To search for images that have been updated in a specific time period, enter the first and last dates of the period. Shooting Date To search for images captured in a specific time period, enter the first and last dates of the period. Note Captured date is the date and time of data creation, which are included in the document's Exif information. More Advanced Options A word or phrase in the file In A word or phrase in the file, select the items to search. If you select the Exif information Searching Images Strana 352 z celkového počtu 684 checkbox, text in Maker, Model, Description and User Comment is searched. If you select the PDF text checkbox, text in PDF files is searched. Important Text in password-protected PDF files cannot be searched. Search subfolders Select this checkbox to search subfolders. Case sensitive Select this checkbox to match case. Match all criteria Searches for files that meet all the specified criteria. Match any criteria Searches for files that meet any of the specified criteria. Start Search Starts search. Related Topic View & Use Window Page top Classifying Images into Categories Strana 353 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Useful MP Navigator EX Functions > Classifying Images into Categories Classifying Images into Categories Display images scanned with MP Navigator EX by category. You can classify unclassified images automatically, and also create custom categories. You can drag and drop an image to move it from one category to another. Note If you have classified the images in MP Navigator EX 2.0 or later and then upgrade MP Navigator EX to the latest version, the classification information on the second latest version is transferred upon initial startup. After the initial startup, the classification information cannot be transferred. 1. Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them, then open the View & Use window from the Navigation Mode screen. Note See " Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX. You can also select images saved on a computer. Opening Images Saved on a Computer 2. In (Sort by), select Categories. Images are automatically sorted by category and appear in the Thumbnail window. Classifying Images into Categories Strana 354 z celkového počtu 684 Images are sorted into the following categories. Photos: Portrait, Others Documents: Business Card, Postcard, Standard Size, PDF File, Others Custom categories: Displays your custom categories. To create custom categories, see " Creating Custom Categories ." Unclassified: Displays images that have not yet been classified. Note Click Classify Images to classify images displayed in Unclassified automatically. Click Cancel to stop. Classification may take time if there are many images to classify. Important Even if you classify images saved in removable media such as USB flash drive and external hard disk, the classification information will be deleted once you remove the media. From the next time, the images are classified to Unclassified. Images cannot be classified when Recently Saved Images is selected in the View & Use window. Note Some images may not be detected correctly and thus may be classified into wrong categories. In that case, drag and drop the image to the correct category. Images saved in network folders may not be classified. You can search for images by category. See " Searching Images " for details. Creating Custom Categories 1. In the View & Use window, sort images by category and click Edit Custom Categories. The Edit Custom Categories dialog box opens. 2. Click Add to List. The Add Category dialog box opens. 3. Enter Category name and click OK. Note You can create up to 20 custom categories. Up to 50 single-byte characters can be used for a category name. Double-click a created category to open the Change Category Name dialog box in which you can change the category name. Select a custom category and click Delete to delete it. Classifying Images into Categories Strana 355 z celkového počtu 684 Related Topic View & Use Window Page top Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX Strana 356 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX You can scan images using MP Navigator EX and edit or print the saved images. See the corresponding sections below for details on saving scanned images. Saving scanned images to computer Saving Saving scanned image as PDF Files Saving as PDF Files See the corresponding sections below for details on using images/files. Creating/editing PDF files from scanned images Creating/Editing PDF Files Printing multiple scanned images at one time or printing at specific size, quality, etc. Printing Documents Printing scanned photos Printing Photos Sending scanned images via e-mail Sending via E-mail Correcting/enhancing scanned images or converting them to text Editing Files Setting passwords for created PDF files Setting Passwords for PDF Files Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files Page top Saving Strana 357 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX > Saving Saving Save images scanned with MP Navigator EX to a computer. 1. Select the checkboxes of the images you want to save, then click Save. 2. In the Save dialog box, specify the save settings. Specify the destination folder, file name and file type. Save Dialog Box Important You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Document Type is Text(OCR). Note By default, the following folders are specified as the destination folders. Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Saving Strana 358 z celkového počtu 684 3. Click Save. Scanned images are saved according to the settings. To further use/edit the scanned images on MP Navigator EX, click Open saved location in the Save Complete dialog box. Creating/Editing PDF Files Printing Documents Printing Photos Sending via E-mail Editing Files Page top Saving as PDF Files Strana 359 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX > Saving as PDF Files Saving as PDF Files Save images scanned with MP Navigator EX as PDF files. 1. Select the checkboxes of the images you want to save, then click Save as PDF file. 2. In the Save as PDF file dialog box, specify the save settings. Specify the file type, file name and destination folder. Save as PDF file Dialog Box Select from the following PDF file types: PDF Saving as PDF Files Strana 360 z celkového počtu 684 Save each of the selected images as a separate PDF file. PDF(Multiple Pages) Save multiple images in one PDF file. Note PDF(Multiple Pages) is displayed when multiple images are selected. PDF(Add Page) Add the scanned images to a PDF file. The images are added to the end of the PDF file. You cannot rearrange the pages of the PDF file to which the images are added. Important Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot specify PDF files created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be specified as well. If a password-protected PDF file is edited, the passwords will be deleted. Reset the passwords. Note By default, the following folders are specified as the destination folders. Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder You can set passwords for PDF files. Setting Passwords for PDF Files 3. Click Save. Scanned images are saved according to the settings. To further use/edit the scanned images on MP Navigator EX, click Open saved location in the Save Complete dialog box. Creating/Editing PDF Files Printing Documents Printing Photos Sending via E-mail Editing Files Page top Creating/Editing PDF Files Strana 361 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX > Creating/Editing PDF Files Creating/Editing PDF Files Create/edit PDF files using MP Navigator EX. After scanning documents and saving them, open the View & Use window to create PDF files and add/delete pages, rearrange the page order, etc. Important You can create or edit up to 99 pages using MP Navigator EX. Note See "Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX. You can also select images saved on a computer. Opening Images Saved on a Computer Creating/Editing PDF Files with MP Navigator EX 1. Select images and click PDF. Note You can select PDF, JPEG, TIFF and BMP files. 2. Click Create/Edit PDF file on the list. Important For PDF files, you can only edit those created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot edit PDF files created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be edited as well. Note Creating/Editing PDF Files Strana 362 z celkového počtu 684 If a password-protected PDF file is selected, you will be prompted to enter the password. Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files 3. Add/delete pages as required. To add an existing file, click Add Page and select the file. To delete a page, select it and click Delete Selected Pages. Note You can add PDF, JPEG, TIFF and BMP files. When adding a password-protected PDF file, you will be prompted to enter the password. 4. Rearrange the page order as required. Use the icons to rearrange the order. Alternatively, drag and drop the thumbnail to the target location. Note See " Create/Edit PDF file Window " for details on the Create/Edit PDF file window. 5. Click Save Selected Pages or Save All Pages. The Save as PDF file dialog box opens. Save as PDF file Dialog Box Important You cannot save images scanned at 10501 pixels or more in the vertical and horizontal directions. If a password-protected PDF file is edited, the passwords will be deleted. Reset the passwords in the Save as PDF file dialog box. Setting Passwords for PDF Files 6. Specify the save settings in the Save as PDF file dialog box, then click Save. Images are saved according to the settings. Opening PDF Files in an Application You can open PDF files created with MP Navigator EX in an associated application and edit or print them. 1. Select PDF files and click PDF. Important For PDF files, you can only select those created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot select PDF files created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be selected Creating/Editing PDF Files Strana 363 z celkového počtu 684 as well. 2. Click Open PDF file on the list. The application associated with the .pdf file extension by the operating system starts. Important Password-protected PDF files cannot be opened in applications not supporting PDF security. Files may not open if an application that can be associated with PDF files is not installed. 3. Use the application to edit/print the file. For details, refer to the application's manual. Important In some applications, the commands (print, edit, etc.) restricted by Permissions Password may differ from those in MP Navigator EX. Page top Printing Documents Strana 364 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX > Printing Documents Printing Documents You can print multiple scanned images at one time, print at specific quality, etc. using MP Navigator EX. 1. Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them, then open the View & Use window from the Navigation Mode screen and select images. Note See " Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX. You can also select images saved on a computer. Opening Images Saved on a Computer 2. Click Print, then click Print Document on the list. Important If a password-protected PDF file is selected, you will be prompted to enter the password. Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files 3. Specify print settings as required. In the displayed dialog box, specify print count, quality, scale, etc. Print Document Dialog Box Printing Documents Strana 365 z celkového počtu 684 Important At normal-size (100%), some images may be printed small or with some portions cropped. In that case, select Auto to resize the print in proportion to the paper size. 4. Click Print. Printing starts. Note When printing a multiple-page PDF file via Print Document, printing may take time depending on your computer. In that case, follow these steps and change settings. 1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel. 2. Click Printers. 3. Right-click the icon of your printer and click Properties. The printer properties dialog box opens. 4. Click the Advanced tab. 5. Select Spool print documents so program finishes printing faster. 6. Select Start printing after last page is spooled. 7. After printing, return the setting on the Advanced tab to Start printing immediately. To cancel while spooling, click Cancel. To cancel while printing, click Cancel Printing in the confirmation window for the printer status. To open a confirmation window for the printer status, click printer icon on the taskbar. Page top Printing Photos Strana 366 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX > Printing Photos Printing Photos You can print photos using MP Navigator EX or an application that accompanies the machine. After scanning documents and saving them, open the View & Use window to select how you want to print the photos. Note See "Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX. You can also select images saved on a computer. Opening Images Saved on a Computer When Printing Photos Using Easy-PhotoPrint EX You can use Easy-PhotoPrint EX to print scanned photos at high quality or to layout and print images. 1. Select images and click Print. 2. Click Print Photo or Print Album on the list. Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts. See " Printing Photos " for details. Note If Easy-PhotoPrint EX is not installed, print with MP Navigator EX. When Printing Photos Using MP Navigator EX 1. Select images and click Print. 2. Click Print Photo on the list. Printing Photos Strana 367 z celkového počtu 684 3. Specify print settings as required. In the displayed dialog box, specify paper size, print count, etc. Print Photo Dialog Box 4. Click Print. Printing starts. Note To cancel while spooling, click Cancel. To cancel while printing, click Cancel Printing in the confirmation window for the printer status. To open a confirmation window for the printer status, click printer icon on the taskbar. Page top Sending via E-mail Strana 368 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX > Sending via E-mail Sending via E-mail Send scanned images via e-mail. Important MP Navigator EX is compatible with the following e-mail software programs: - Windows Mail (Windows Vista) - Outlook Express (Windows XP/Windows 2000) - Microsoft Outlook (If an e-mail software program does not operate properly, check that the program's MAPI is enabled. To enable MAPI, refer to the manual of the e-mail software program.) 1. Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them, then open the View & Use window from the Navigation Mode screen and select images. Note See " Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX. You can also select images saved on a computer. Opening Images Saved on a Computer 2. Click Send, then click Attach to E-mail on the list. 3. Set save options as required. Specify the destination folder and file name. Send via E-mail Dialog Box Sending via E-mail Strana 369 z celkového počtu 684 Note You can select a compression type when sending JPEG images via e-mail. Click Set... to open a dialog box and select a compression type from High(Low Compression), Standard or Low(High Compression). 4. Click OK. Files are saved according to the settings, and the e-mail software program starts. 5. Specify the recipient, enter the subject and message, then send e-mail. For details, refer to the manual of the e-mail software program. Page top Editing Files Strana 370 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX > Editing Files Editing Files You can edit images or convert them to text using MP Navigator EX or an application that accompanies the machine. After scanning documents and saving them, open the View & Use window to select what you want to do with the images. Note See "Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX. You can also select images saved on a computer. Opening Images Saved on a Computer Correcting Photo Images You can correct/enhance images in the Correct/Enhance Images window. 1. Select images and click Edit/Convert. 2. Click Fix photo images on the list. The Correct/Enhance Images window opens. 3. Correct/enhance images in the Correct/Enhance Images window. Note See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window. See the corresponding sections below for correcting/enhancing images. Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually Editing Files Strana 371 z celkového počtu 684 Converting Documents to Text Scan text in scanned magazines and newspapers and display it in Notepad (included with Windows). Important PDF files cannot be converted to text. 1. Select images and click Edit/Convert. 2. Click Convert to text file on the list. Notepad (included with Windows) starts and editable text appears. Note Only text written in languages that can be selected on the General tab can be extracted to Notepad (included with Windows). Click Set... on the General tab and specify the language according to the language of the document to be scanned. When scanning multiple documents, you can collect the extracted text into one file. General Tab Text displayed in Notepad (included with Windows) is for guidance only. Text in the image of the following types of documents may not be detected correctly. - Documents containing text with font size outside the range of 8 points to 40 points (at 300 dpi) - Slanted documents - Documents placed upside down or documents with text in the wrong orientation (rotated characters) - Documents containing special fonts, effects, italics, or hand-written text - Documents with narrow line spacing - Documents with colors in the background of text - Documents containing multiple languages Page top Setting Passwords for PDF Files Strana 372 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX > Setting Passwords for PDF Files Setting Passwords for PDF Files Set passwords for opening, editing and printing PDF files. You can set two passwords: one for opening the file and one for editing/printing it. Important In Windows 2000, Internet Explorer 5.5 Service Pack 2 or later is required to use this function. You will not be able to open/edit the file if you forget the password. Record your passwords in a safe place for future reference. Password-protected PDF files cannot be opened in applications not supporting PDF security. In some applications, the commands (print, edit, etc.) restricted by Permissions Password may differ from those in MP Navigator EX. Password-protected PDF files cannot be searched by text from the View & Use Window . 1. Scan documents into MP Navigator EX, then click Save as PDF file. Alternatively, edit existing files in the Create/Edit PDF file window, then click Save Selected Pages or Save All Pages. The Save as PDF file dialog box opens. Important Passwords cannot be set when images are automatically saved after scanning, such as when scanning from the One-click Mode screen or scanning using the Operation Panel of the machine. Note See " Let's Try Scanning" to scan images. See " Creating/Editing PDF Files " to create PDF files from existing images or to edit files. 2. Select the Password security settings checkbox. Setting Passwords for PDF Files Strana 373 z celkového počtu 684 The Password Security -Settings dialog box opens. Note You can also open the Password Security -Settings dialog box by clicking Set..., then selecting Password Security for Security in the PDF Settings dialog box. 3. Select the Require a password to open the document or Use a password to restrict printing and editing of the document and its security settings checkbox, then enter a password. Important Up to 32 single-byte alphanumeric characters can be used for the password. Passwords are case sensitive. Select both checkboxes to set both Document Open Password and Permissions Password. You cannot use the same password for both. 4. Click OK. The Confirm Document Open Password or Confirm Permissions Password dialog box opens. Setting Passwords for PDF Files Strana 374 z celkového počtu 684 Document Open Password Permissions Password 5. Re-enter the password and click OK. The Save as PDF file dialog box returns. Important If you close the Save as PDF file dialog box without clicking Save, the settings in the Password Security -Settings dialog box will be deleted. Passwords are deleted once the file is edited. Reset the passwords when saving edited files. Note If you set the passwords via the PDF Settings dialog box, the PDF Settings dialog box returns. Click OK. The Save as PDF file dialog box returns. 6. Click Save. Files are saved according to the settings. Related Topic Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files Page top Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files Strana 375 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX > Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files Enter a password to open or edit/print password-protected PDF files. Password entry method varies by operation. The following procedures are examples only. Important You can open, edit or print only PDF files whose passwords were set with MP Navigator EX. You cannot edit PDF files edited in other applications or whose passwords were set with other applications. Only MP Navigator EX version 1.1 and 2.0 or later supports opening, editing and printing password-protected PDF files. In Windows 2000, Internet Explorer 5.5 Service Pack 2 or later is required to open, edit or print password-protected PDF files. Passwords are case sensitive. You can create or edit up to 99 pages using MP Navigator EX. Entering a Password to Open a File 1. In the View & Use window, select the PDF file you want to open and click Zoom in. Alternatively, double-click the PDF file. Note Only the Document Open Password will be required. The Permissions Password will not be required. If the Zoom in dialog box with a lock icon opens, click Enter Password. Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files 2. The Password dialog box opens. Enter the password and click OK. The PDF file opens in the Zoom in dialog box. Note To reopen the file after closing the Zoom in dialog box, re-enter the password. Entering a Password (Permissions Password) to Edit or Print a File 1. In the View & Use window, select PDF files and click PDF or Print. Strana 376 z celkového počtu 684 Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files Strana 377 z celkového počtu 684 2. To create a PDF file or edit the file, select Create/Edit PDF file on the list. To print the file, click Print Document. In the Password dialog box, you will be prompted to enter a password. Note If the Document Open Password is set as well, the Document Open Password will be required, then the Permissions Password will be required. 3. Enter the password and click OK. The corresponding dialog box opens. Important If a password-protected PDF file is edited, the passwords will be deleted. Reset the passwords. Setting Passwords for PDF Files Related Topic Setting Passwords for PDF Files Page top MP Navigator EX Screens Strana 378 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens MP Navigator EX Screens Learn about the screens and functions of MP Navigator EX. Scan/Import Documents or Images Tab Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents) Save Dialog Box Save as PDF file Dialog Box View & Use Images on your Computer Tab View & Use Window Create/Edit PDF file Window Print Document Dialog Box Print Photo Dialog Box Send via E-mail Dialog Box Correct/Enhance Images Window Custom Scan with One-click Tab / One-click Mode Screen Auto Scan Dialog Box Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen) PDF Dialog Box Mail Dialog Box OCR Dialog Box Custom Dialog Box Preferences Dialog Box General Tab Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save) Page top Navigation Mode Screen Strana 379 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Navigation Mode Screen Navigation Mode Screen This is one of the startup screens of MP Navigator EX. Point to the icon at the top of the screen to display each tab. Use each tab depending on what you want to do. Scan/Import Scan Photos and Documents. Scan/Import Documents or Images Tab View & Use You can open images saved on a computer and print them or attach them to e-mail. You can also edit them using an application that accompanies the machine. View & Use Images on your Computer Tab One-click You can complete from scanning to saving, etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon. Custom Scan with One-click Tab (Switch Mode) Switches to One-click Mode screen. In the One-click Mode screen, you can complete from scanning to saving, etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon. One-click Mode Screen Show this window at startup Select this checkbox to open the Main Menu at startup. If this checkbox is not selected, the last used screen appears. Preferences The Preferences dialog box opens. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to MP Navigator EX functions. Preferences Dialog Box (Guide) Opens this guide. Page top Scan/Import Documents or Images Tab Strana 380 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Scan/ Import Documents or Images Tab Scan/Import Documents or Images Tab Point to Scan/Import in the Navigation Mode screen to display the Scan/Import Documents or Images tab. Scan Photos and Documents. Photos/Documents (Platen) Opens the Scan/Import window. Scan photos and documents placed on the Platen. Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) (Switch Mode) Switches to One-click Mode screen. In the One-click Mode screen, you can complete from scanning to saving, etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon. One-click Mode Screen Show this window at startup Select this checkbox to open the Main Menu at startup. If this checkbox is not selected, the last used screen appears. Preferences The Preferences dialog box opens. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to MP Navigator EX functions. Preferences Dialog Box (Guide) Opens this guide. Page top View Use Images on your Computer Tab Strana 381 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > View & Use Images on your Computer Tab View & Use Images on your Computer Tab Point to View & Use in the Navigation Mode screen to display the View & Use Images on your Computer tab. You can open images saved on a computer and print them or attach them to e-mail. You can also edit them using an application that accompanies the machine. My Box (Scanned/Imported Images) Opens the View & Use window with My Box (Scanned/Imported Images) selected. You can open and use images saved in My Box. My Box is a specific folder for saving images scanned with MP Navigator EX. Note The following folders are specified by default. Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Specify Folder Opens the View & Use window with Specify Folder selected. You can open and use images saved in specific folders. Recently Saved Images Opens the View & Use window with Recently Saved Images selected. You can open and use "Scanned/Imported Images" and images that have been "Attached to E-mail" or "Sent to Application" recently. View & Use Window (Switch Mode) Switches to One-click Mode screen. In the One-click Mode screen, you can complete from scanning to saving, etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon. One-click Mode Screen Show this window at startup Select this checkbox to open the Main Menu at startup. If this checkbox is not selected, the last used screen appears. Preferences View Use Images on your Computer Tab Strana 382 z celkového počtu 684 The Preferences dialog box opens. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to MP Navigator EX functions. Preferences Dialog Box (Guide) Opens this guide. Related Topic Opening Images Saved on a Computer Page top Custom Scan with One-click Tab Strana 383 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Custom Scan with One-click Tab Custom Scan with One-click Tab Point to One-click in the Navigation Mode screen to display the Custom Scan with One-click tab. You can complete from scanning to saving, etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon. Auto Scan Scan documents by automatically detecting the document type. File format is automatically set. Files are saved to a computer. You can apply Auto Photo Fix as required. When you click this icon, the Auto Scan dialog box opens and you can specify the save settings. Auto Scan Dialog Box Save to PC Scan documents or photos and save them to a computer. The document type can be detected automatically. When you click this icon, the Save dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save settings. Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen) Save as PDF file Scan documents and save them as PDF files. When you click this icon, the PDF dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save and application settings. PDF Dialog Box Attach to E-mail Scan documents or photos and attach them to e-mail. When you click this icon, the Mail dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save and e-mail software program settings. Mail Dialog Box OCR Scan text documents then extract text in the image and display it in Notepad (included with Windows). When you click this icon, the OCR dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save settings. OCR Dialog Box Note For further procedures, refer to the application's manual. Custom Scan documents and open them in a specified application. Document type is automatically detected. Custom Scan with One-click Tab Strana 384 z celkového počtu 684 When you click this icon, the Custom dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save and application settings. Custom Dialog Box Note For further procedures, refer to the application's manual. Start scanning by clicking the button Select this checkbox and click an icon to start scanning immediately. (Switch Mode) Switches to One-click Mode. The One-click Mode screen appears. One-click Mode Screen Show this window at startup Select this checkbox to open the Main Menu at startup. If this checkbox is not selected, the last used screen appears. Preferences The Preferences dialog box opens. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to MP Navigator EX functions. Preferences Dialog Box (Guide) Opens this guide. Important The following restrictions apply when you scan with Document Type set to Auto Mode in the Save or Custom dialog box. When you want to convert text in the scanned image to text data, specify Document Type (do not select Auto Mode). Related Topic Easy Scanning with One-click Page top Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) Strana 385 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Photos/ Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) Point to Scan/Import in the Navigation Mode screen and click Photos/Documents (Platen) to open the Photos/Documents (Platen) screen (Scan/Import window). Open this window to scan documents from the Platen. (1) Settings and Operation Buttons (2) Toolbar (3) Thumbnail Window (4) Selected Images Area Settings and Operation Buttons (View & Use) Click this when you want to open images and PDF files saved on your computer. The View & Use window opens. View & Use Window Photos/Documents (Platen) Displays the screen for scanning photos, documents, magazines and other printed materials. Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned. Scanning photos: Color Photo or Black and White Photo Scanning text documents: Color Document, Black and White Document or Text(OCR) Scanning magazines: Magazine(Color) Important You cannot select Document Type if the Use the scanner driver checkbox is selected. Specify... Specify the document size, resolution, and other advanced scan settings. Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) Strana 386 z celkového počtu 684 Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents) Important Specify... is not available if the Use the scanner driver checkbox is selected. Use the scanner driver Select this checkbox when you want to scan with ScanGear (scanner driver). Use ScanGear (scanner driver) to correct images and adjust colors when scanning. Scan Scanning starts. Note This button changes to Open Scanner Driver when you select the Use the scanner driver checkbox. Open Scanner Driver ScanGear (scanner driver) starts. See "ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens " for details on ScanGear (scanner driver) screens. Note This button changes to Scan when you deselect the Use the scanner driver checkbox. Clear Delete all images in the Thumbnail window. Note Images not saved on a computer will be deleted. To keep important images, use Save or other methods to save them to a computer before clicking Clear. Save Save the selected images. Click to open the Save dialog box and specify the save settings. Save Dialog Box Save as PDF file Save the selected images as PDF files. Click to open the Save as PDF file dialog box and specify the save settings. Save as PDF file Dialog Box Jump to Main Menu Jumps to the Main Menu. Toolbar Preferences The Preferences dialog box opens. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to MP Navigator EX functions. Preferences Dialog Box (Guide) Opens this guide. Edit Tools (Select All) Selects all images in the Thumbnail window. (Cancel All) Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) Strana 387 z celkového počtu 684 Cancels all image selections in the Thumbnail window. (Rotate Left) Rotates the target image (outlined in orange) 90 degrees counter-clockwise. (Rotate Right) Rotates the target image (outlined in orange) 90 degrees clockwise. (Invert) Inverts the target image (outlined in orange) horizontally. (Trimming) Trims the target image (outlined in orange) in the Thumbnail window. Trimming is the act of selecting the area you want to keep in a photo and discarding the rest. Click this button to open the Crop window and specify the trimming frame. Zoom in Enlarges the target image (outlined in orange). You can also enlarge the image by doubleclicking it. (Display Size) Changes the size of images in the Thumbnail window. (Sort by) Sorts the images in the Thumbnail window by category or by date (ascending or descending). Thumbnail Window Thumbnail Window Scanned images are displayed. When you select the checkbox of an image, the image appears in the Selected Images area. Note Thumbnails may appear as "?" when there is not enough memory to display the images. When Images are Sorted by Categories Close All / Open All Close All Hides all images. Open All Displays all images. Note Click Close All to change to Open All. Selected Images Area (Cancel All) Cancels the selection of all images in the Selected Images area. (Cancel Selection) Cancels the selection of the target image (outlined in orange) in the Selected Images area. Selected Images Area Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) Strana 388 z celkového počtu 684 Images selected in the Thumbnail window are displayed. Related Topic Scanning Photos and Documents Page top Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents) Strana 389 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents) Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents) The Scan Settings dialog box opens when you click Specify... in the Scan/Import window. In the Scan Settings dialog box, you can make advanced scan settings. Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned. Scanning photos: Color Photo or Black and White Photo Scanning text documents: Color Document, Black and White Document or Text(OCR) Scanning magazines: Magazine(Color) Important To scan correctly, select a document type that matches the document to be scanned. Document Size Select the size of the document to be scanned. When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the document size appears. Select a Units, then enter the Width and Height and click OK. Important When you select Auto Detect, the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size. In that case, change the size to the actual document size (A4, Letter, etc.) and align a corner of the document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen. You cannot select Auto Detect (Multiple Documents) or Auto Detect when Document Type is Text(OCR). Scanning Resolution Select the resolution at which to scan documents. Resolution Note Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents) Strana 390 z celkového počtu 684 The following scanning resolutions can be specified when Document Type is Text(OCR). 300 dpi / 400 dpi Descreen Select this checkbox to reduce moire patterns. Printed photos and pictures are displayed as a collection of fine dots. "Moire" is a phenomenon where uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots are scanned. Descreen is the function for reducing this moire effect. Important You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Color Photo, Black and White Photo or Text(OCR). Note Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Descreen. Reduce Show-through Select this checkbox to sharpen text in a document or reduce show-through in newspapers. Important You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Color Photo, Black and White Photo or Text(OCR). Note Select this checkbox when Document Type is text document and show-through is apparent in the scanned image. Unsharp Mask Select this checkbox to emphasize the outline of the subjects and sharpen the image. Important You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Text(OCR). Remove gutter shadow Select this checkbox to correct shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets. Important You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Auto Detect, Auto Detect (Multiple Documents) or Stitch Assist. Align the document correctly with the alignment mark on the Platen. Note Use ScanGear's Advanced Mode tab to correct gutter shadows when scanning non-standard size documents or when custom cropping frames are set. For details, see Gutter Shadow Correction in " Image Settings " (ScanGear's Advanced Mode tab). Correct slanted document Select this checkbox to detect the scanned text and correct the angle (within -0.1 to -10 degrees or +0.1 to +10 degrees) of the document. Important You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Color Photo or Black and White Photo. You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist. The inclination of the following types of documents may not be corrected, as the text cannot be detected correctly. - Documents in which the text lines are inclined more than 10 degrees or the angles vary by line - Documents containing both vertical and horizontal text - Documents with extremely large or small fonts Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents) Strana 391 z celkového počtu 684 - Documents with small amount of text - Documents containing figures/images or hand-written text - Documents containing both vertical and horizontal lines (tables) Note Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Correct slanted document. Detect the orientation of text documents and rotate images Select this checkbox to detect the orientation of the document from the scanned text and rotate the scanned image to the correct orientation. Select the language of the document to be scanned in Document Language. Important You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Color Photo or Black and White Photo. You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist. This function may not work properly depending on the document language. Only text documents written in languages that can be selected from Document Language are supported. The orientation of the following types of documents may not be corrected, as the text cannot be detected correctly. In that case, select the scanned image in the Thumbnail window of the " Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) " and rotate it with Edit Tools. - Resolution is outside the range of 300 dpi to 600 dpi - Font size is outside the range of 8 points to 48 points - Documents containing special fonts, effects, italics, or hand-written text - Documents with patterned backgrounds Note Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Detect the orientation of text documents and rotate images. Document Language Select the language of the document to be scanned. Important You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Color Photo or Black and White Photo. You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist. Defaults Restores the default settings. Page top Save Dialog Box Strana 392 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Save Dialog Box Save Dialog Box The Save dialog box opens when you click Save in the Scan/Import window. In the Save dialog box, you can make settings for saving images to a computer. Save in Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... to specify another one. The following folders are specified by default. Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder File name Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4 digits are appended to each file name. Save as type Select a file type to save the scanned images. Select JPEG/Exif, TIFF or BMP. Important You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Document Type is Text(OCR). Set... When Save as type is JPEG/Exif You can specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or Low(High Compression). Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2009_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be created. If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in. Page top Save as PDF file Dialog Box Strana 393 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Save as PDF file Dialog Box Save as PDF file Dialog Box In the Save as PDF file dialog box, you can make advanced settings for saving scanned images as PDF files. You can save multiple documents as one PDF file or add pages to a PDF file created with MP Navigator EX. Important You cannot save images scanned at 10501 pixels or more in the vertical and horizontal directions. Dialog box that opens when Save as PDF file in the Scan/Import window is clicked Dialog box that opens when Save Selected Pages or Save All Pages is clicked in the Create/Edit PDF file window Save as type Select a PDF file type to save the scanned images. Save as PDF file Dialog Box Strana 394 z celkového počtu 684 PDF Save each of the selected images as a separate PDF file. PDF(Multiple Pages) Save multiple images in one PDF file. Note PDF(Multiple Pages) is displayed when multiple images are selected. PDF(Add Page) Add the scanned images to a PDF file. The images are added to the end of the PDF file. You cannot rearrange the pages of the PDF file to which the images are added. Important Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot specify PDF files created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be specified as well. If a password-protected PDF file is edited, the passwords will be deleted. Reset the passwords. Setting Passwords for PDF Files Set... Make advanced settings for creating PDF files. See " PDF Settings Dialog Box " for details. Password security settings Select this checkbox to open the Password Security -Settings dialog box in which you can set passwords for opening, editing and printing created PDF files. Setting Passwords for PDF Files Add to This is displayed when you select PDF(Add Page) for Save as type and specify the PDF file to which images are added. To change the file, click Browse... to specify another one. Important Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot specify PDF files created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be specified as well. File name Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4 digits are appended to each file name. Save in Displays the folder in which to save the PDF files. To change the folder, click Browse... to specify another one. The following folders are specified by default. Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2009_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be created. If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in. Page top PDF Settings Dialog Box Strana 395 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > PDF Settings Dialog Box PDF Settings Dialog Box In the PDF Settings dialog box, you can specify the PDF compression type and other advanced settings for creating PDF files. Enable keyword search Select this checkbox to convert characters in a document to text data. This will enable an easy search by keyword. Document Language Select the language of the document to be scanned. Detect the orientation of text documents and rotate images Select this checkbox to detect the orientation of the document from the scanned text and rotate the scanned image to the correct orientation. Important This function may not work properly depending on the document language. Only text documents written in languages that can be selected from Document Language are supported. The orientation of the following types of documents may not be corrected, as the text cannot be detected correctly. - Resolution is outside the range of 300 dpi to 600 dpi - Font size is outside the range of 8 points to 48 points - Documents containing special fonts, effects, italics, or hand-written text - Documents with patterned backgrounds Correct slanted document Select this checkbox to detect the scanned text and correct the angle (within -0.1 to -10 degrees or +0.1 to +10 degrees) of the document. Important The inclination of the following types of documents may not be corrected, as the text cannot be detected correctly. - Documents in which the text lines are inclined more than 10 degrees or the angles vary by line - Documents containing both vertical and horizontal text - Documents with extremely large or small fonts - Documents with small amount of text - Documents containing figures/images or hand-written text - Documents containing both vertical and horizontal lines (tables) PDF Compression Select a compression type for saving. PDF Settings Dialog Box Strana 396 z celkového počtu 684 Standard It is recommended that you normally select this setting. High Compresses the file size when saving, allowing you to reduce the load on your network/server. Important Highly compressed PDF images may degrade if you repeatedly save them with high compression. Note The following images can be compressed with high efficiency. - Images with resolutions within the range of 75 dpi to 600 dpi. Security Set passwords for opening, editing and printing the created PDF files. Important In Windows 2000, Internet Explorer 5.5 Service Pack 2 or later is required to use this function. This function is not available when images are automatically saved after scanning, such as when scanning from the One-click Mode screen or scanning using the Operation Panel of the machine. Note Select Password Security and set passwords in the Password Security -Settings dialog box. Setting Passwords for PDF Files Page top View Use Window Strana 397 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > View & Use Window View & Use Window Point to View & Use in the Navigation Mode screen and click My Box (Scanned/Imported Images), Specify Folder or Recently Saved Images to open the View & Use window. Open this window to display or use scanned images or images saved on a computer. Important For PDF files, only those created with MP Navigator EX are displayed. You cannot display PDF files created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be displayed as well. (1) Display Setting Items (2) Image Handling Buttons (3) Toolbar (4) Thumbnail Window (5) Selected Images Area Display Setting Items (Scan/Import) Click this when you want to scan photos, documents, magazines and other printed materials. The View Use Window Strana 398 z celkového počtu 684 Scan/Import window opens. Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) My Box (Scanned/Imported Images) Displays folders of images (grouped by year, year/month and year/month/date) in My Box in tree view. Select a folder to display its contents in the Thumbnail window to the right. Image date is the scanned, captured or updated date. Specify Folder Displays all hard disks and folders in tree view. Select a folder to display images in the Thumbnail window to the right. Selecting a folder and clicking it highlights the folder name, allowing you to rename it. Recently Saved Images "Scanned/Imported Images" and images that have been "Attached to E-mail" or "Sent to Application" recently are displayed in tree view by date. Select a Month/Date/Year folder to display images by date in the Thumbnail window to the right. Image date is the scanned or sent date. Search The advanced search options opens. Searching Images Jump to Main Menu Jumps to the Main Menu. Image Handling Buttons Image Handling Buttons Specify what to do with the selected images. See the corresponding sections below for details on each button. Creating/Editing PDF Files Printing Documents Printing Photos Sending via E-mail Editing Files Note The buttons in Image Handling Buttons are displayed when the corresponding applications are installed. Toolbar Preferences The Preferences dialog box opens. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to MP Navigator EX functions. Preferences Dialog Box (Guide) Opens this guide. Edit Tools (Select All) Selects all images in the Thumbnail window. (Cancel All) Cancels all image selections in the Thumbnail window. View Use Window Strana 399 z celkového počtu 684 (Image Correction/Enhancement) Allows you to correct the target image (outlined in orange). Click this button to open the Correct/ Enhance Images window in which you can correct/enhance images and also adjust the brightness, contrast, etc. Correct/Enhance Images Window Important Image correction/enhancement cannot be applied to PDF files or black and white binary files. Zoom in Enlarges the target image (outlined in orange). You can also enlarge the image by doubleclicking it. You can check all pages when you select a PDF file. You can also check file information such as file name, date, size and security setting. A lock icon appears for PDF files with Document Open Password set. Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files (Search) Enter a word or phrase included in the file name, Exif information or PDF text of the image you (Search button). For Exif information, text in Maker, Model, want to search for, then click Description and User Comment is searched. Note Search images in My Box (Scanned/Imported Images), Recently Saved Images or a selected folder and its subfolders. (Refresh) Refreshes the Thumbnail window contents. (Display Size) Changes the size of images in the Thumbnail window. (Sort by) Sorts the images in the Thumbnail window by category, date (ascending or descending) or name (ascending or descending). Images can be sorted by category only when My Box (Scanned/Imported Images) or Specify Folder is displayed. Thumbnail Window Thumbnail Window Scanned images are displayed. When you select the checkbox of an image, the image appears in the Selected Images area. Selecting an image and clicking the file name highlights the file name, allowing you to rename it. Drag and drop an image to do the following things. - Move from one category to another within the Thumbnail window - Move to a category folder displayed in My Box (Scanned/Imported Images) - Copy to a folder displayed in Specify Folder Important In Windows 2000, Internet Explorer 5.5 Service Pack 2 or later is required to open passwordprotected PDF files. You cannot change the extension (.jpg, .pdf, etc.) when renaming a file. You cannot move or copy images to the date folders displayed in tree view in My Box (Scanned/ Imported Images) or Recently Saved Images. View Use Window Strana 400 z celkového počtu 684 Note A lock icon appears for PDF files with Document Open Password set. Thumbnails may appear as "?" in the following cases. - Opening unsupported images - File size is too large and there is not enough memory to display the image - The file is corrupted When Images are Sorted by Categories Scanned images are displayed by category. Note Some images may not be detected correctly and thus may be classified into wrong categories. In that case, drag and drop an image and move it from one category to another. Category name Images: N (Selected: n) Category name The following categories are provided. Photos: Portrait, Others Documents: Business Card, Postcard, Standard Size, PDF File, Others Custom categories: Displays your custom categories. Unclassified: Displays images that have not yet been classified. Images: N The number of images classified into the category is displayed. (Selected: n) The number of images with the checkbox selected is displayed. Note This portion is displayed only when one or more images are selected. Close All / Open All Close All Hides all images. Open All Displays all images. Note Immediately after opening the View & Use window or sorting images, all images appear and Close All is displayed. Click Close All to change to Open All. Specific Categories / All Categories You can narrow down the categories to display only those containing images. If you narrow down the categories, more images are displayed in the Thumbnail List area, allowing you to find or move images easily. This button is displayed only when My Box (Scanned/Imported Images) or Specify Folder is displayed. Specific Categories Displays categories containing images, along with the contained images. View Use Window Strana 401 z celkového počtu 684 All Categories Displays all categories and images. Note Click Specific Categories to change to All Categories. Edit Custom Categories When My Box (Scanned/Imported Images) or Specify Folder is displayed, the Edit Custom Categories dialog box opens. In the Edit Custom Categories dialog box, you can add/delete categories displayed in Custom Categories. See "Classifying Images into Categories " for details. Classify Images Images imported from hard disks appear in Unclassified. Click Classify Images to classify them automatically. This button is displayed only when My Box (Scanned/Imported Images) or Specify Folder is displayed. Note Classification may take time if there are many images to classify. Selected Images Area (Cancel All) Cancels the selection of all images in the Selected Images area. (Cancel Selection) Cancels the selection of the target image (outlined in orange) in the Selected Images area. Selected Images Area Images selected in the Thumbnail window are displayed. Related Topic Opening Images Saved on a Computer Page top Create/Edit PDF file Window Strana 402 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Create/ Edit PDF file Window Create/Edit PDF file Window Click PDF in the View & Use window, then click Create/Edit PDF file on the list to open the Create/Edit PDF file window. In the Create/Edit PDF file window, you can add/delete pages and rearrange the page order of PDF files created with MP Navigator EX. Important You cannot save images scanned at 10501 pixels or more in the vertical and horizontal directions. If a password-protected PDF file is edited, the passwords will be deleted. Reset the passwords. Setting Passwords for PDF Files You can create or edit up to 99 pages using MP Navigator EX. Rearrange Pages You can move the selected image (outlined in orange). Moves the selected image to the top. Moves the selected image up one page. Moves the selected image down one page. Moves the selected image to the end. Note You can also drag and drop the image to rearrange the order. Delete Selected Pages Deletes the selected image. Create/Edit PDF file Window Strana 403 z celkového počtu 684 Add Page Allows you to select and add an existing PDF file. Note A password will be required to add a password-protected PDF file. Undo Cancels the latest change made. Reset Cancels all the changes made. Save Selected Pages Opens the Save as PDF file dialog box. Specify the save settings. Only the selected page is saved. Note When multiple pages are selected, a multiple-page PDF file is created. See "Save as PDF file Dialog Box " for details on the Save as PDF file dialog box. Save All Pages Opens the Save as PDF file dialog box. Specify the save settings. All PDF files in the list will be saved as one PDF file. Finish Closes the Create/Edit PDF file window. Toolbar (Rotate Left) Rotates the page 90 degrees counter-clockwise. (Rotate Right) Rotates the page 90 degrees clockwise. (Preview Mode) Switches to Preview Mode. The selected file appears in Preview. (Enlarge) Enlarges the image displayed in Preview. (Reduce) Reduces the image displayed in Preview. Create/Edit PDF file Window Strana 404 z celkového počtu 684 (Full-screen) Enlarges/reduces the image to display it fully in Preview. (Thumbnail Mode) Switches to Thumbnail Mode. Thumbnails of files are displayed. Page top Print Document Dialog Box Strana 405 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Print Document Dialog Box Print Document Dialog Box Click Print in the View & Use window, then click Print Document on the list to open the Print Document dialog box. In the Print Document dialog box, you can make advanced settings for printing multiple scanned images at one time. Note The setting items in the Print Document dialog box vary by printer. Printer Select the printer to use. Paper Source Select paper source. Page Layout Select a print type. Normal-size Printing Print one image per sheet. Scaled Printing Print images at the selected scale (enlarged or reduced). Fit-to-Page Printing Print an image at the paper size (enlarged or reduced). Borderless Printing Print the image on an entire sheet of paper without margins. Page Layout Printing (2 on 1) Layout and print two images on a sheet of paper. Page Layout Printing (4 on 1) Layout and print four images on a sheet of paper. Enlarge/Reduce Enlarge or reduce images to print. Print Document Dialog Box Strana 406 z celkového počtu 684 (Enlarge/Reduce) Print a reduced or enlarged image by specifying a scale in increments of 1%. Auto Scale is adjusted automatically according to the detected paper width and the selected paper size. Image may be printed rotated 90 degrees depending on its size. Scale Select a scale from the list. Important At normal-size (100%), some images may be printed small or with some portions cropped. In that case, select Auto to resize the print in proportion to the paper size. Paper Size Select the size of paper for printing. Match the size to the size of the paper set in the machine. Note Selectable paper sizes depend on the selected printer. Media Type Select the type of paper for printing. Print quality may be fixed depending on the paper type. Note Selectable paper types depend on the selected printer. Print Quality Select the print quality. Density Click (Density adjustment) to select the print density. Copies Click (Copy setting) to select the number of copies to be printed. Grayscale Printing Select this checkbox to print the document in black and white. Preview before printing Select this checkbox to display the print result before printing. Defaults Restores the default settings. Print Start printing with the specified settings. Note To cancel while spooling, click Cancel. To cancel while printing, click Cancel Printing in the confirmation window for the printer status. To open a confirmation window for the printer status, click printer icon on the taskbar. Page top Print Photo Dialog Box Strana 407 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Print Photo Dialog Box Print Photo Dialog Box Click Print in the View & Use window, then click Print Photo on the list to open the Print Photo dialog box. Important The Print Photo dialog box will not open if Easy-PhotoPrint EX is installed. Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts instead. PDF files cannot be printed. Note Double-click an image to display it in a different window. Printer Select the printer to use. Properties... Displays the selected printer's advanced setting screen. Paper Size Select the size of paper for printing. Match the size to the size of the paper set in the machine. Media Type Select the type of paper for printing. Print quality may be fixed depending on the paper type. Page Layout Select a print type. Normal-size Printing Print one image per sheet. Fit-to-Page Printing Print an image at the paper size (enlarged or reduced). Borderless Printing Print Photo Dialog Box Strana 408 z celkového počtu 684 Select this checkbox to print the image on an entire sheet of paper without margins. Important Page Layout setting will be disabled when you select Borderless Printing. This setting is only available with printers that support borderless printing. Orientation Specify the print orientation. Important This setting is available only when Page Layout is Normal-size Printing. For others, the image is automatically rotated according to the aspect ratio of the paper. Copies Specify the number of copies to print. Vivid Photo Select this checkbox to print the image in vivid colors. Preview before printing Select this checkbox to display the print result before printing. Print Starts printing. Note Only the images in the Thumbnail window with the checkbox selected are printed. Close Closes the dialog box without printing the photo. Page top Send via E-mail Dialog Box Strana 409 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Send via E-mail Dialog Box Send via E-mail Dialog Box Click Send in the View & Use window, then click Attach to E-mail on the list to open the Send via E-mail dialog box. In the Send via E-mail dialog box, you can make advanced settings for attaching images to e-mail. Important MP Navigator EX is compatible with the following e-mail software programs: - Windows Mail (Windows Vista) - Outlook Express (Windows XP/Windows 2000) - Microsoft Outlook (If an e-mail software program does not operate properly, check that the program's MAPI is enabled. To enable MAPI, refer to the manual of the e-mail software program.) Mail Program The e-mail software program set up via Preferences in the Navigation Mode screen is displayed. Select the e-mail software program you want to use. Adjust attachment file size When Save as type is JPEG, selecting this checkbox allows you to resize the images. Select a size from Size. Save in Displays the folder in which to save the images. To change the folder, click Browse... to specify another one. If resized, the resized images are saved. The following folders are specified by default. Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder File name Enter the file name of the image to be attached (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4 digits are appended to each file name. Set... You can specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or Low(High Compression). Page top Correct/Enhance Images Window Strana 410 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Correct/ Enhance Images Window Correct/Enhance Images Window Click (Image Correction/Enhancement) in the View & Use window or click Fix photo images in the Task Button area to open the Correct/Enhance Images window. In the Correct/Enhance Images window, you can make advanced settings including image correction/ enhancement and brightness/contrast adjustment. You can also display the source image and corrected image side by side for comparison. Important Image correction/enhancement cannot be applied to PDF files or black and white binary files. Note The Correct/Enhance Images window can also be opened by clicking Enhancement) in the Zoom in dialog box. It may take a while to correct large images. See "View & Use Window" for details on the View & Use window. (Image Correction/ (1) Task Area (2) Toolbar Task Area Available tasks and settings vary between the Auto and Manual tabs. Click Auto or Manual to open the corresponding tab. Auto Tab Use the functions in the Auto tab to apply corrections and enhancements to the entire image. See "Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically " for details. Correct/Enhance Images Window Strana 411 z celkového počtu 684 Auto Photo Fix Applies automatic corrections suitable for photos. Prioritize Exif Info Select this checkbox to apply corrections primarily based on the settings made at the time of shooting. Deselect this checkbox to apply corrections based on the image analysis results. It is recommended that you normally select this setting. Note Exif is a standard format for embedding various shooting data in digital camera images (JPEG). Face Sharpener Sharpens out-of-focus faces. You can adjust the effect level using the slider. Digital Face Smoothing Enhances skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles. You can adjust the effect level using the slider. Apply to all images Applies the correction to all images displayed in the thumbnail list. OK Applies the selected effect to the selected image or all images. Reset Selected Image Cancels all corrections and enhancements applied to the selected image. Save Selected Image Saves the corrected images selected. Save All Corrected Images Saves all the corrected images displayed in the thumbnail list. Exit Closes the Correct/Enhance Images window. Manual Tab Use Adjust to adjust brightness and contrast, or to sharpen the entire image. Use Correct/Enhance to correct/enhance specific areas. See "Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually " for details. Correct/Enhance Images Window Strana 412 z celkového počtu 684 Adjustment Brightness Adjusts the overall image brightness. Move the slider to the left to darken and right to brighten the image. Contrast Adjusts the contrast of the image. Adjust the contrast when the image is flat due to lack of contrast. Move the slider to the left to decrease and right to increase the contrast of the image. Sharpness Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image. Adjust the sharpness when the photo is out of focus or text is blurred. Move the slider to the right to sharpen the image. Blur Blurs the outline of the subjects to soften the image. Move the slider to the right to soften the image. Show-through Removal Removes show-through of text from the reverse side or removes the base color. Adjust the showthrough level to prevent text on the reverse side of thin document or the base color of the document from appearing on the image. Move the slider to the right to increase the show-through removal effect. Defaults Resets all adjustments (brightness, contrast, sharpness, blur, and show-through removal). Reset Selected Image Cancels all corrections, enhancements and adjustments applied to the selected image. Save Selected Image Saves the corrected images selected. Save All Corrected Images Saves all the corrected images displayed in the thumbnail list. Exit Closes the Correct/Enhance Images window. Correction/Enhancement Correct/Enhance Images Window Strana 413 z celkového počtu 684 Face Brightener Corrects the entire image so that the selected facial area is brightened. You can adjust the effect level using the slider. Face Sharpener Corrects the entire image to sharpen the face. You can specify the area you want to apply the effect to. You can adjust the effect level using the slider. Digital Face Smoothing Enhances skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles. You can specify the area you want to apply the effect to. You can adjust the effect level using the slider. Blemish Remover Removes moles. You can specify the area you want to apply the effect to. OK Applies the selected effect to the specified area. Undo Cancels the latest correction. Reset Selected Image Cancels all corrections, enhancements and adjustments applied to the selected image. Save Selected Image Saves the corrected images selected. Save All Corrected Images Saves all the corrected images displayed in the thumbnail list. Exit Closes the Correct/Enhance Images window. Toolbar Toolbar (Rotate Left) Rotates the image 90 degrees counter-clockwise. (Rotate Right) Rotates the image 90 degrees clockwise. Correct/Enhance Images Window Strana 414 z celkového počtu 684 (Invert) Inverts the image horizontally. (Trimming) Trimming is the act of selecting the area you want to keep in a photo and discarding the rest. In the displayed window, drag the white frame to specify the trimming area. Move the cursor inside the white frame and drag to move the trimming area. Note Place the main subjects along the broken white lines or at the intersections to create a balanced image. (Enlarge) Enlarges the displayed image. (Reduce) Reduces the displayed image. (Full-screen) Enlarges/reduces the image to display it full-screen. (Compare) Opens the source image for comparison. The source image appears on the left and the corrected image appears on the right. Page top One-click Mode Screen Strana 415 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > One-click Mode Screen One-click Mode Screen Click (Switch Mode) at the bottom left of the Navigation Mode screen to display the One-click Mode screen. You can complete from scanning to saving, etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon. Auto Scan documents by automatically detecting the document type. File format is automatically set. Files are saved to a computer. You can apply Auto Photo Fix as required. When you click this icon, the Auto Scan dialog box opens and you can specify the save settings. Auto Scan Dialog Box Save Scan documents or photos and save them to a computer. The document type can be detected automatically. When you click this icon, the Save dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save settings. Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen) PDF Scan documents and save them as PDF files. When you click this icon, the PDF dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save and application settings. PDF Dialog Box Mail Scan documents or photos and attach them to e-mail. When you click this icon, the Mail dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save and e-mail software program settings. Mail Dialog Box OCR Scan text documents then extract text in the image and display it in Notepad (included with Windows). When you click this icon, the OCR dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save settings. OCR Dialog Box Note For further procedures, refer to the application's manual. Custom Scan documents and open them in a specified application. Document type is automatically detected. When you click this icon, the Custom dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save and application settings. Custom Dialog Box Note For further procedures, refer to the application's manual. (Switch Mode) One-click Mode Screen Strana 416 z celkového počtu 684 Switches to Navigation Mode. The Navigation Mode screen appears. Custom Scan with One-click Tab Preferences The Preferences dialog box opens. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to MP Navigator EX functions. Preferences Dialog Box (Guide) Opens this guide. Important The following restrictions apply when you scan with Document Type set to Auto Mode in the Save or Custom dialog box. When you want to convert text in the scanned image to text data, specify Document Type (do not select Auto Mode). Related Topic Easy Scanning with One-click Page top Auto Scan Dialog Box Strana 417 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Auto Scan Dialog Box Auto Scan Dialog Box Click Auto Scan on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or click Auto in the One-click Mode screen to open the Auto Scan dialog box. Important The following types of documents cannot be scanned correctly. In that case, click another icon in One-click Mode or on the Custom Scan with One-click tab and specify the document type or size. - Documents other than photos, postcards, business cards, magazines, newspapers, text documents and CD/DVD - A4 size photos - Text documents smaller than 2L (5 inches x 7 inches) (127 mm x 178 mm), such as paperback pages with the spine cut off - Documents printed on thin white paper - Long narrow documents such as panoramic photos Reflective CD/DVD labels may not be scanned properly. Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned. Otherwise, documents may not be scanned correctly. See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents. Note To reduce moire, click another icon in One-click Mode or on the Custom Scan with One-click tab and set Document Type to Magazine. Scan Settings Enable Auto Photo Fix Select this checkbox to analyze the photo image and apply suitable corrections automatically. This function is available when Auto or JPEG/Exif is selected for Save as type in Save Settings. Important When Save as type is Auto, the base color tone of the following types of documents may change from the source since they are corrected as photos. In that case, deselect the checkbox and scan. - Postcards and business cards Auto Scan Dialog Box Strana 418 z celkového počtu 684 Text documents may not be scanned correctly since they may be corrected as photos depending on how you place the document. In that case, deselect the checkbox and scan. Note If you select a format other than JPEG/Exif for Save as type and then select this checkbox, a message appears and Save as type will be set to Auto. Save Settings File name Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4 digits are appended to each file name. Save as type Select a file type to save the scanned images. Select Auto, JPEG/Exif, TIFF, BMP or PDF. Important When Save as type is Auto, the file format may differ depending on how you place the document. See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents. Large documents (such as A4 size photos) that cannot be placed away from the edges/arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen may not be saved in the correct file format when Save as type is Auto. In that case, select a file format suitable for the document to be scanned. Images cannot be added to password-protected PDF files. Note When Auto is selected, files are saved in the following formats according to the document type. Photos, postcards, CD/DVD and business cards: JPEG Magazines, newspapers and text documents: PDF You can change the file format from Set.... Set... When Save as type is Auto You can specify the file format in which to save images. Select a file format for Document and Photo each. When Save as type is JPEG/Exif You can specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or Low(High Compression). When Save as type is PDF Make advanced settings for creating PDF files. See " PDF Settings Dialog Box " for details. Save in Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... to specify another one. The following folders are specified by default. Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2009_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be created. If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in. Start scanning by clicking the one-click button Auto Scan Dialog Box Strana 419 z celkového počtu 684 Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon. Apply Saves and applies the specified settings. Click Cancel instead of Apply to cancel the specified settings. Cancel Cancels the specified settings. The current screen closes. Defaults Returns all settings in the screen to their defaults. Scan Scans and saves documents with the specified settings. When Save as type is Auto, a confirmation appears. Click Open Manual to open this guide (if it is installed). Page top Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen) Strana 420 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen) Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen) Click Save to PC on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or click Save in the One-click Mode screen to open the Save dialog box. Scan Settings Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned. When Auto Mode is selected, the document type is automatically detected. In that case, Color Mode, Document Size and Resolution are automatically set as well. Important The following types of documents cannot be scanned correctly with Auto Mode. In that case, specify the document type or size. - Documents other than photos, postcards, business cards, magazines, newspapers, text documents and CD/DVD - A4 size photos - Text documents smaller than 2L (5 inches x 7 inches) (127 mm x 178 mm), such as paperback pages with the spine cut off - Documents printed on thin white paper - Long narrow documents such as panoramic photos Reflective CD/DVD labels may not be scanned properly. Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned. Otherwise, documents may not be scanned correctly. See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents. Note Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen) Strana 421 z celkového počtu 684 To reduce moire, set Document Type to Magazine. Color Mode Select how to scan the document. Document Size Select the size of the document to be scanned. When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the document size appears. Select a Units, then enter the Width and Height and click OK. Important When you select Auto Detect, the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size. In that case, change the size to the actual document size (A4, Letter, etc.) and align a corner of the document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen. Resolution Select the resolution at which to scan documents. Resolution Use the scanner driver Select this checkbox to display the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen and make advanced scan settings. Color Mode, Document Size, Resolution and other settings in the Save dialog box will be disabled. Specify these settings in the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen. Specify... Click to open the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings. Scan Settings Dialog Box Save Settings Automatically save the image to your computer after scanning it Select this to save the images to your computer as specified after scanning them. The File name, Save as type and Save in settings will be displayed. Important If you select this function, you will not be able to set passwords for PDF files. File name Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4 digits are appended to each file name. Save as type Select a file type to save the scanned images. Select Auto, JPEG/Exif, TIFF or BMP. Auto is displayed when Document Type is Auto Mode. When saving as PDF files, select PDF, PDF(Multiple Pages) or PDF(Add Page). Important When Document Type is Auto Mode and Save as type is Auto, the file format may differ depending on how you place the document. See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents. Large documents (such as A4 size photos) that cannot be placed away from the edges/arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen may not be saved in the correct file format when Save as type is Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen) Strana 422 z celkového počtu 684 Auto. In that case, select a file format suitable for the document to be scanned. Images cannot be added to password-protected PDF files. You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White. Note When Auto is selected, files are saved in the following formats according to the document type. Photos, postcards, CD/DVD and business cards: JPEG Magazines, newspapers and text documents: PDF You can change the file format from Set.... Images saved as PDF files may not open depending on the application. In that case, select an option other than Auto in Save as type. If you select JPEG/Exif when Document Type is not Auto Mode , the Save the JPEG/Exif file in AdobeRGB checkbox will be selectable. Set... When Save as type is Auto You can specify the file format in which to save images. Select a file format for Document and Photo each. When Save as type is JPEG/Exif You can specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or Low(High Compression). When Save as type is PDF, PDF(Multiple Pages) or PDF(Add Page) Make advanced settings for creating PDF files. See " PDF Settings Dialog Box " for details. Save in Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... to specify another one. The following folders are specified by default. Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2009_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be created. If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in. Save the JPEG/Exif file in AdobeRGB Select this checkbox to save the images in colors that correspond to Adobe RGB. Important This function is available only when Save as type is JPEG/Exif and Document Type is not Auto Mode. This function is not available if the Adobe RGB profile is not installed. Note You cannot select this setting if the Use the scanner driver checkbox is selected. When you save an image with the Save the JPEG/Exif file in AdobeRGB checkbox selected, an underscore is added to the beginning of the file name. (Example: _Image0001.jpg) Open the save dialog box after scanning the image (Input Exif information) Select this to open the Save dialog box after scanning the images and specify the save settings such as destination folder, file name and Exif information. Save Dialog Box Note To set passwords for PDF files, select Open the save dialog box after scanning the image Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen) Strana 423 z celkového počtu 684 (Input Exif information). After scanning, you can set the passwords in the Save dialog box. Setting Passwords for PDF Files Application Settings Open with You can select whether to open the View & Use window or Explorer after saving the images. Start scanning by clicking the one-click button Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon. Apply Saves and applies the specified settings. Click Cancel instead of Apply to cancel the specified settings. Cancel Cancels the specified settings. The current screen closes. Defaults Returns all settings in the screen to their defaults. Scan Scans and saves documents with the specified settings. When Save as type is Auto, a confirmation appears. Click Open Manual to open this guide (if it is installed). Page top Scan Settings Dialog Box Strana 424 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Scan Settings Dialog Box Scan Settings Dialog Box Make advanced settings for scanning with one-click or scanning using the Operation Panel of the machine. The Scan Settings dialog box opens when you click Specify... in a dialog box for making scan settings. Note The displayed items vary by document type and how the screen was opened. Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned. When Auto Mode or Auto Scan is selected, the document type is automatically detected. In that case, Color Mode, Document Size, etc. are automatically set as well. Important To scan correctly, select a document type that matches the document to be scanned. When opened from the Scanner Button Settings tab in the Preferences dialog box, the Document Type specified in the Scanner Button Settings tab is displayed and cannot be changed in this dialog box. Color Mode Select how to scan the document. Color This mode renders the image in 256 levels (8 bit) of R(ed), G(reen), and B(lue). Grayscale This mode renders the image in 256 levels (8 bit) of black and white. Black and White This mode renders the image in black and white. The contrast in the image is divided at certain levels (threshold level) into black and white and is rendered in two colors. Note Color Mode is not displayed in the Scan Settings dialog box opened from the Scanner Button Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box. Document Size Scan Settings Dialog Box Strana 425 z celkového počtu 684 Select the size of the document to be scanned. When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the document size appears. Select a Units, then enter the Width and Height and click OK. Important When you select Auto Detect, the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size. In that case, change the size to the actual document size (A4, Letter, etc.) and align a corner of the document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen. Scanning Resolution Select the resolution at which to scan documents. Resolution Descreen Select this checkbox to reduce moire patterns. Printed photos and pictures are displayed as a collection of fine dots. "Moire" is a phenomenon where uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots are scanned. Descreen is the function for reducing this moire effect. Note Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Descreen. Reduce Show-through Select this checkbox to sharpen text in a document or reduce show-through in newspapers. Note Select this checkbox when Document Type is text document and show-through is apparent in the scanned image. Unsharp Mask Select this checkbox to emphasize the outline of the subjects and sharpen the image. Remove gutter shadow Select this checkbox to correct shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets. Important You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Auto Detect, Auto Detect (Multiple Documents) or Stitch Assist. Align the document correctly with the alignment mark on the Platen. Note Use ScanGear's Advanced Mode tab to correct gutter shadows when scanning non-standard size documents or when custom cropping frames are set. For details, see Gutter Shadow Correction in " Image Settings " (ScanGear's Advanced Mode tab). Correct slanted document Select this checkbox to detect the scanned text and correct the angle (within -0.1 to -10 degrees or +0.1 to +10 degrees) of the document. Important You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist. The inclination of the following types of documents may not be corrected, as the text cannot be detected correctly. Scan Settings Dialog Box Strana 426 z celkového počtu 684 - Documents in which the text lines are inclined more than 10 degrees or the angles vary by line - Documents containing both vertical and horizontal text - Documents with extremely large or small fonts - Documents with small amount of text - Documents containing figures/images or hand-written text - Documents containing both vertical and horizontal lines (tables) Note Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Correct slanted document. Enable Auto Photo Fix (When scanning with Auto Scan using the Operation Panel) Select this checkbox to analyze the photo image and apply suitable corrections automatically. This function is available when Auto or JPEG/Exif is selected for Save as type in Save Settings on the Scanner Button Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box. Important When Save as type is Auto, the base color tone of the following types of documents may change from the source since they are corrected as photos. In that case, deselect the checkbox and scan. - Postcards and business cards Text documents may not be scanned correctly since they may be corrected as photos depending on how you place the document. In that case, deselect the checkbox and scan. Note If you select a format other than JPEG/Exif for Save as type and then select this checkbox, a message appears and Save as type will be set to Auto. Detect the orientation of text documents and rotate images Select this checkbox to detect the orientation of the document from the scanned text and rotate the scanned image to the correct orientation. Select the language of the document to be scanned in Document Language. Important You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist. This function may not work properly depending on the document language. Only text documents written in languages that can be selected from Document Language are supported. The orientation of the following types of documents may not be corrected, as the text cannot be detected correctly. - Resolution is outside the range of 300 dpi to 600 dpi - Font size is outside the range of 8 points to 48 points - Documents containing special fonts, effects, italics, or hand-written text - Documents with patterned backgrounds Note Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Detect the orientation of text documents and rotate images. Document Language Select the language of the document to be scanned. Important You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist. Defaults Restores the default settings. Page top Save Dialog Box Strana 427 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Save Dialog Box Save Dialog Box The Save dialog box opens when you scan from Save to PC on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or from Save in the One-click Mode screen after selecting Open the save dialog box after scanning the image (Input Exif information). You can specify the file type and destination while viewing the thumbnails. Save as type Select a file type to save the scanned images. Select JPEG/Exif, TIFF, BMP, PDF, PDF(Multiple Pages) or PDF(Add Page). PDF Save each of the selected images as a separate PDF file. PDF(Multiple Pages) Save multiple images in one PDF file. Note PDF(Multiple Pages) is displayed when multiple images are scanned. PDF(Add Page) Add the scanned images to a PDF file. The images are added to the end of the PDF file. You cannot rearrange the pages of the PDF file to which the images are added. Important Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot specify PDF files created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be specified as well. If a password-protected PDF file is edited, the passwords will be deleted. Reset the passwords. Setting Passwords for PDF Files Save Dialog Box Strana 428 z celkového počtu 684 Important PDF, PDF(Multiple Pages) and PDF(Add Page) cannot be selected for images scanned using the Operation Panel of the machine. You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White. Set... When Save as type is JPEG/Exif You can specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or Low(High Compression). When Save as type is PDF, PDF(Multiple Pages) or PDF(Add Page) Make advanced settings for creating PDF files. See " PDF Settings Dialog Box " for details. Exif Settings... When Save as type is JPEG/Exif, you can input Exif information into the file to be saved. Exif Settings Dialog Box Password security settings Select this checkbox to open the Password Security -Settings dialog box in which you can set passwords for opening, editing and printing created PDF files. Setting Passwords for PDF Files Note This function is available only when Save as type is PDF, PDF(Multiple Pages) or PDF(Add Page). Add to This is displayed when you select PDF(Add Page) for Save as type and specify the PDF file to which images are added. To change the file, click Browse... to specify another one. Important Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot specify PDF files created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be specified as well. Rotate Left 90°/Rotate Right 90° Rotates scanned images 90 degrees counter-clockwise or clockwise. Select the image you want to rotate and click Rotate Left 90° or Rotate Right 90°. File name Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4 digits are appended to each file name. Save in Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... to specify another one. The following folders are specified by default. Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2009_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be created. If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in. Page top Exif Settings Dialog Box Strana 429 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Exif Settings Dialog Box Exif Settings Dialog Box You can input Exif information into a file to be saved. Exif is a standard format for embedding various shooting data in digital camera images (JPEG). Embedding Exif information into scanned images allows you to organize and print them along with digital camera images. The Exif Settings dialog box can be opened when Save as type is JPEG/Exif. Basic Information Displays the information obtained automatically from the machine or software. Advanced Information Displays the information specified on the right side of the screen. Advanced Information Settings Area You can input Exif information such as the title and shooting data. Select the checkbox of the items you want to specify, and select or enter information. Apply the Same Setting of Input Items Automatically Select this checkbox to automatically display the information you specified for the previous image. Apply After specifying all the information you need, click Apply to embed it into the image. The information appears in Advanced Information. OK Embeds the specified information into the image and closes the screen. The specified information is saved. Cancel Cancels the settings and closes the screen. Information is embedded when Cancel is clicked after clicking Apply. Page top PDF Dialog Box Strana 430 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > PDF Dialog Box PDF Dialog Box Click Save as PDF file on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or click PDF in the One-click Mode screen to open the PDF dialog box. Scan Settings Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned. Color Mode Select how to scan the document. Document Size Select the size of the document to be scanned. When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the document size appears. Select a Units, then enter the Width and Height and click OK. Important When you select Auto Detect, the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size. In that case, change the size to the actual document size (A4, Letter, etc.) and align a corner of the PDF Dialog Box Strana 431 z celkového počtu 684 document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen. Resolution Select the resolution at which to scan documents. Resolution Specify... Click to open the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings. Scan Settings Dialog Box Save Settings Automatically save the image to your computer after scanning it Select this to save the images to your computer as specified after scanning them. The File name, Save as type and Save in settings will be displayed. Important If you select this function, you will not be able to set passwords for PDF files. File name Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4 digits are appended to each file name. Save as type Select a file type to save the scanned images. Select PDF, PDF(Multiple Pages) or PDF(Add Page). PDF Save each of the selected images as a separate PDF file. PDF(Multiple Pages) Save multiple images in one PDF file. PDF(Add Page) Add the scanned images to a PDF file. The images are added to the end of the PDF file. You cannot rearrange the pages of the PDF file to which the images are added. Important Images cannot be added to password-protected PDF files. Note Click Set... to open the PDF Settings dialog box in which you can specify the PDF compression type and other advanced settings for creating PDF files. PDF Settings Dialog Box See "Creating/Editing PDF Files " to delete or rearrange the pages of saved PDF files. Save in Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... to specify another one. The following folders are specified by default. Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2009_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be created. If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in. Open the save dialog box after scanning the image Select this to open the Save as PDF file dialog box after scanning the images and specify the save PDF Dialog Box Strana 432 z celkového počtu 684 settings such as destination folder and file name. Save as PDF file Dialog Box Note To set passwords for PDF files, select Open the save dialog box after scanning the image. After scanning, you can set the passwords in the Save as PDF file dialog box. Setting Passwords for PDF Files Application Settings Open with Specify an application with which to open scanned images. Drag and drop the icon of an application that supports the file format displayed in Save as type. The specified application starts after images are scanned. Important Depending on the specified application, the images may not appear correctly or the application may not start. Reset Cancels the application setting. Set... Allows you to select an application to start. Start scanning by clicking the one-click button Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon. Apply Saves and applies the specified settings. Click Cancel instead of Apply to cancel the specified settings. Cancel Cancels the specified settings. The current screen closes. Defaults Returns all settings in the screen to their defaults. Scan Scans and saves documents as PDF files with the specified settings. Page top Save as PDF file Dialog Box Strana 433 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Save as PDF file Dialog Box Save as PDF file Dialog Box The Save as PDF file dialog box opens when you scan from Save as PDF file on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or from PDF in the One-click Mode screen after selecting Open the save dialog box after scanning the image. In the Save as PDF file dialog box, you can make settings for saving images to a computer. Important You cannot save images scanned at 10501 pixels or more in the vertical and horizontal directions. Save as type Select a PDF file type to save the scanned images. PDF Save each of the selected images as a separate PDF file. PDF(Multiple Pages) Save multiple images in one PDF file. Note PDF(Multiple Pages) is displayed when multiple images are scanned. PDF(Add Page) Add the scanned images to a PDF file. The images are added to the end of the PDF file. You cannot rearrange the pages of the PDF file to which the images are added. Important Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot specify PDF files created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be specified as well. Save as PDF file Dialog Box Strana 434 z celkového počtu 684 PDF(Add Page) cannot be selected for images scanned using the Operation Panel of the machine. If a password-protected PDF file is edited, the passwords will be deleted. Reset the passwords. Setting Passwords for PDF Files Set... Make advanced settings for creating PDF files. See " PDF Settings Dialog Box " for details. Password security settings Select this checkbox to open the Password Security -Settings dialog box in which you can set passwords for opening, editing and printing created PDF files. Setting Passwords for PDF Files Rotate Left 90°/Rotate Right 90° Rotates scanned images 90 degrees counter-clockwise or clockwise. Select the image you want to rotate and click Rotate Left 90° or Rotate Right 90°. File name Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4 digits are appended to each file name. Save in Displays the folder in which to save the PDF files. To change the folder, click Browse... to specify another one. The following folders are specified by default. Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2009_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be created. If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in. Page top Mail Dialog Box Strana 435 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Mail Dialog Box Mail Dialog Box Click Attach to E-mail on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or click Mail in the One-click Mode screen to open the Mail dialog box. Scan Settings Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned. Color Mode Select how to scan the document. Document Size Select the size of the document to be scanned. When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the document size appears. Select a Units, then enter the Width and Height and click OK. Important When you select Auto Detect, the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size. In that case, change the size to the actual document size (A4, Letter, etc.) and align a corner of the document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen. Mail Dialog Box Strana 436 z celkového počtu 684 Resolution Select the resolution at which to scan documents. Resolution Use the scanner driver Select this checkbox to display the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen and make advanced scan settings. Color Mode, Document Size, Resolution and other settings in the Mail dialog box will be disabled. Specify these settings in the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen. Specify... Click to open the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings. Scan Settings Dialog Box Save Settings File Size Select a size from Small (fits in a 640 by 480 window), Medium (fits in a 800 by 600 window), Large (fits in a 1024 by 768 window) and Original. File name Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4 digits are appended to each file name. Save as type Select a file type to save the scanned images. Select JPEG/Exif, PDF or PDF(Multiple Pages). Important You cannot set passwords for PDF files. You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White. Set... When Save as type is JPEG/Exif You can specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or Low(High Compression). When Save as type is PDF or PDF(Multiple Pages). Make advanced settings for creating PDF files. See " PDF Settings Dialog Box " for details. Save in Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... to specify another one. The following folders are specified by default. Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2009_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be created. If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in. Attachment Settings Mail Program Specify an e-mail software program. Note Mail Dialog Box Strana 437 z celkového počtu 684 Select Add... to open the Select Mail Program dialog box in which you can select an e-mail software program. If the e-mail software program you want to use is not listed, click Add to List and select it. Start scanning by clicking the one-click button Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon. Apply Saves and applies the specified settings. Click Cancel instead of Apply to cancel the specified settings. Cancel Cancels the specified settings. The current screen closes. Defaults Returns all settings in the screen to their defaults. Scan Scans documents with the specified settings. When scanning is completed, the e-mail software program starts automatically and a new message screen appears with the image attached. Page top OCR Dialog Box Strana 438 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > OCR Dialog Box OCR Dialog Box Click OCR on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or in the One-click Mode screen to open the OCR dialog box. Scan Settings Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned. Color Mode Select how to scan the document. Document Size Select the size of the document to be scanned. When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the document size appears. Select a Units, then enter the Width and Height and click OK. Resolution Select the resolution at which to scan documents. Resolution Use the scanner driver Select this checkbox to display the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen and make advanced scan OCR Dialog Box Strana 439 z celkového počtu 684 settings. Color Mode, Document Size, Resolution and other settings in the OCR dialog box will be disabled. Specify these settings in the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen. Specify... Click to open the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings. Scan Settings Dialog Box Note When scanning slanted documents, select the Correct slanted document checkbox to improve the text recognition accuracy. Save Settings File name Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4 digits are appended to each file name. Save as type Select a file type to save the scanned images. Select JPEG/Exif, TIFF or BMP. Important You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White. Set... When Save as type is JPEG/Exif You can specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or Low(High Compression). Save in Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... to specify another one. The following folders are specified by default. Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2009_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be created. If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in. Application Settings OCR with Specify an OCR application. When MP Navigator EX is specified, after the image is scanned, the text in the image is extracted and appears in Notepad (included with Windows). Note Only text written in languages that can be selected on the General tab can be extracted to Notepad (included with Windows). Click Set... on the General tab and specify the language according to the language of the document to be scanned. When scanning multiple documents, you can collect the extracted text into one file. General Tab Text displayed in Notepad (included with Windows) is for guidance only. Text in the image of the following types of documents may not be detected correctly. - Documents containing text with font size outside the range of 8 points to 40 points (at 300 dpi) OCR Dialog Box Strana 440 z celkového počtu 684 - Slanted documents - Documents placed upside down or documents with text in the wrong orientation (rotated characters) - Documents containing special fonts, effects, italics, or hand-written text - Documents with narrow line spacing - Documents with colors in the background of text - Documents containing multiple languages Reset Cancels the application setting. Set... Allows you to select an application. Important Depending on the specified application, the text may not be extracted correctly or the application may not start. Start scanning by clicking the one-click button Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon. Apply Saves and applies the specified settings. Click Cancel instead of Apply to cancel the specified settings. Cancel Cancels the specified settings. The current screen closes. Defaults Returns all settings in the screen to their defaults. Scan Scans documents with the specified settings. Page top Custom Dialog Box Strana 441 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Custom Dialog Box Custom Dialog Box Click Custom on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or in the One-click Mode screen to open the Custom dialog box. Scan Settings Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned. When Auto Mode is selected, the document type is automatically detected. In that case, Color Mode, Document Size and Resolution are automatically set as well. Important The following types of documents cannot be scanned correctly with Auto Mode. In that case, specify the document type or size. - Documents other than photos, postcards, business cards, magazines, newspapers, text documents and CD/DVD - A4 size photos - Text documents smaller than 2L (5 inches x 7 inches) (127 mm x 178 mm), such as paperback pages with the spine cut off - Documents printed on thin white paper - Long narrow documents such as panoramic photos Reflective CD/DVD labels may not be scanned properly. Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned. Otherwise, documents may not be scanned correctly. See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents. Note Custom Dialog Box Strana 442 z celkového počtu 684 To reduce moire, set Document Type to Magazine. Color Mode Select how to scan the document. Document Size Select the size of the document to be scanned. When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the document size appears. Select a Units, then enter the Width and Height and click OK. Important When you select Auto Detect, the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size. In that case, change the size to the actual document size (A4, Letter, etc.) and align a corner of the document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen. Resolution Select the resolution at which to scan documents. Resolution Use the scanner driver Select this checkbox to display the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen and make advanced scan settings. Color Mode, Document Size, Resolution and other settings in the Custom dialog box will be disabled. Specify these settings in the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen. Specify... Click to open the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings. Scan Settings Dialog Box Save Settings Automatically save the image to your computer after scanning it Select this to save the images to your computer as specified after scanning them. The File name, Save as type and Save in settings will be displayed. Important If you select this function, you will not be able to set passwords for PDF files. Note If an application to start is specified in Application Settings, the scanned image opens in the specified application. File name Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4 digits are appended to each file name. Save as type Select a file type to save the scanned images. Select Auto, JPEG/Exif, TIFF or BMP. Auto is displayed and selected by default when Document Type is Auto Mode. Important When Document Type is Auto Mode and Save as type is Auto, the file format may differ Custom Dialog Box Strana 443 z celkového počtu 684 depending on how you place the document. See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents. Large documents (such as A4 size photos) that cannot be placed away from the edges/arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen may not be saved in the correct file format when Save as type is Auto. In that case, select a file format suitable for the document to be scanned. You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White. Note When Auto is selected, files are saved in the following formats according to the document type. Photos, postcards, CD/DVD and business cards: JPEG Magazines, newspapers and text documents: PDF You can change the file format from Set.... Images saved as PDF files may not open depending on the application. In that case, select an option other than Auto in Save as type. If you select JPEG/Exif when Document Type is not Auto Mode , the Save the JPEG/Exif file in AdobeRGB checkbox will be selectable. Set... When Save as type is Auto You can specify the file format in which to save images. Select a file format for Document and Photo each. When Save as type is JPEG/Exif You can specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or Low(High Compression). Save in Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... to specify another one. The following folders are specified by default. Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2009_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be created. If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in. Save the JPEG/Exif file in AdobeRGB Select this checkbox to save the images in colors that correspond to Adobe RGB. Important This function is available only when Save as type is JPEG/Exif and Document Type is not Auto Mode. This function is not available if the Adobe RGB profile is not installed. Note You cannot select this setting if the Use the scanner driver checkbox is selected. When you save an image with the Save the JPEG/Exif file in AdobeRGB checkbox selected, an underscore is added to the beginning of the file name. (Example: _Image0001.jpg) Open the save dialog box after scanning the image (Input Exif information) Select this to open the Save dialog box after scanning the images and specify the save settings such as destination folder, file name and Exif information. Save Dialog Box Application Settings Custom Dialog Box Strana 444 z celkového počtu 684 Open with Specify an application with which to open scanned images. Drag and drop the icon of an application that supports the file format displayed in Save as type. The specified application starts after images are scanned. Important Depending on the specified application, the images may not appear correctly or the application may not start. Reset Cancels the application setting. Set... Allows you to select an application to start. Start scanning by clicking the one-click button Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon. Apply Saves and applies the specified settings. Click Cancel instead of Apply to cancel the specified settings. Cancel Cancels the specified settings. The current screen closes. Defaults Returns all settings in the screen to their defaults. Scan Scans and saves documents with the specified settings. When Save as type is Auto, a confirmation appears. Click Open Manual to open this guide (if it is installed). Page top Preferences Dialog Box Strana 445 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Preferences Dialog Box Preferences Dialog Box Click Preferences to open the Preferences dialog box. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to MP Navigator EX functions via the General and Scanner Button Settings tabs. Note See the corresponding sections below for details on each tab. General Tab Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save) Page top General Tab Strana 446 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > General Tab General Tab On the General tab, you can specify general MP Navigator EX settings. Product Name Displays the product name of the machine that MP Navigator EX is currently configured to use. If the displayed product is not the one you want to use, select the desired product from the list. Save in (My Box) Displays the folder in which to save scanned documents. To change the folder, click Browse... to specify another one. The following folders are specified by default. Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Location of Temporary Files Displays the folder in which to save images temporarily. To change the folder, click Browse... to specify another one. Important An error may occur if you set the destination to the root directory of the drive on which the operating system is installed. Be sure to specify a folder. An error may occur if you set the destination to a network folder. Be sure to specify a local folder. Application to run Displays the applications that can be started via MP Navigator EX. Install the applications from the Setup CD-ROM that accompanies the machine. For Attach to E-mail, you can select an e-mail software program to start. For Open PDF file, the application associated with the .pdf file extension by the operating system is displayed. General Tab Strana 447 z celkového počtu 684 Important You can change which items are installed during installation from the Setup CD-ROM by selecting Custom Install. If you choose not to install some applications with Custom Install, the corresponding MP Navigator EX functions will be unavailable. To use those functions, install the corresponding applications. Note For Convert to text file, Notepad (included with Windows) is displayed. Click Set... to open a dialog box, then specify Document Language and how to scan multiple documents. Document Language Specify the language according to the language of the document to be scanned. Only text written in languages that can be selected in the Document Language can be extracted to Notepad. Combine multiple text conversion results When scanning multiple documents, select the checkbox to collect the conversion results (text) into one file. This checkbox is selected by default. When the checkbox is selected, you can scan up to 99 pages at one time. Deselect the checkbox to display each conversion result (text) in a separate file. When the checkbox is not selected, you can scan up to 10 pages at one time. Page top Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save) Strana 448 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save) Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save) On the Scanner Button Settings tab, you can specify the following settings. You can specify how to respond when scanning using the Operation Panel of the machine. Event Select Event Save to PC is set. Document Type Auto Scan is set. The document type is automatically detected. Important The following types of documents cannot be scanned correctly with Auto Scan. In that case, specify the document type or size in MP Navigator EX. See "Scanning Photos and Documents " to scan images using MP Navigator EX. - Documents other than photos, postcards, business cards, magazines, newspapers, text documents and CD/DVD - A4 size photos - Text documents smaller than 2L (5 inches x 7 inches) (127 mm x 178 mm), such as paperback pages with the spine cut off - Documents printed on thin white paper - Long narrow documents such as panoramic photos Reflective CD/DVD labels may not be scanned properly. Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned. Otherwise, documents may not be scanned correctly. See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents. Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save) Strana 449 z celkového počtu 684 Actions Scan Settings Document Size This setting is automatically set. Resolution This setting is automatically set. Specify... Click to open the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings. Scan Settings Dialog Box Save Settings Automatically save the image to your computer after scanning it Select this to save the images to your computer as specified after scanning them. The File Name, Save as type and Save in settings will be displayed. Important If you select this function, you will not be able to set passwords for PDF files. File Name Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). Save as type Select a file type to save the scanned images. Select Auto, JPEG/Exif, TIFF or BMP. Auto is displayed by default. Important When Document Type is Auto Scan and Save as type is Auto, the file format may differ depending on how you place the document. See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents. Large documents (such as A4 size photos) that cannot be placed away from the edges/ arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen may not be saved in the correct file format when Save as type is Auto. In that case, select a file format suitable for the document to be scanned. Note If you select the Enable Auto Photo Fix checkbox in the Scan Settings dialog box and then select a format other than JPEG/Exif for Save as type, a message appears and the Enable Auto Photo Fix checkbox will be deselected. When Auto is selected, files are saved in the following formats according to the document type. Photos, postcards, CD/DVD and business cards: JPEG Magazines, newspapers and text documents: PDF You can change the file format from Set.... Set... When Save as type is Auto You can specify the file format in which to save images. Select a file format for saving Document and Photo each. When Save as type is JPEG/Exif You can specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or Low(High Compression). Save in Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save) Strana 450 z celkového počtu 684 to specify another one. The following folders are specified by default. Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2009_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be created. If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in. Open the save dialog box after scanning the image Select this to open the save dialog box after scanning the images and specify the save settings such as destination folder, file name and Exif information. Note See "Save Dialog Box " for details. Page top Appendix: Opening Files Other than Scanned Images Strana 451 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Appendix: Opening Files Other than Scanned Images Appendix: Opening Files Other than Scanned Images You can save or print data other than scanned images using MP Navigator EX. Using images saved on a computer Opening Images Saved on a Computer Page top Opening Images Saved on a Computer Strana 452 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Appendix: Opening Files Other than Scanned Images > Opening Images Saved on a Computer Opening Images Saved on a Computer You can open images saved on a computer and print them or attach them to e-mail using MP Navigator EX. You can also edit them using an application that accompanies the machine. 1. Start MP Navigator EX and open the Navigation Mode screen. Starting MP Navigator EX 2. In the Navigation Mode screen, point to View & Use and click My Box (Scanned/ Imported Images), Specify Folder or Recently Saved Images. Click My Box (Scanned/Imported Images) to open images saved in My Box (Scanned/Imported Images), click Specify Folder to open images saved in a specific folder, or click Recently Saved Images to open recently saved images. Note If the Show this window at startup checkbox is not selected, the last used screen appears. If the Scan/Import window is displayed, click (View & Use) on the upper left of the screen. The View & Use window opens. See " View & Use Images on your Computer Tab " for details on the View & Use Images on your Computer tab. 3. Click the folder containing the images you want to open. Images saved in the folder appear in the Thumbnail window. Opening Images Saved on a Computer Strana 453 z celkového počtu 684 4. Select the images you want to use, then select what you want to do with them. See the corresponding sections below for details on using images. Creating/Editing PDF Files Printing Documents Printing Photos Sending via E-mail Editing Files Page top Skenovanie pomocou iného aplikačného softvéru Strana 454 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Skenovanie > Skenovanie pomocou iného aplikačného softvéru Skenovanie pomocou iného aplikačného softvéru Čo je to ScanGear (ovládač skenera)? Skenovanie s rozšírenými nastaveniami pomocou programu ScanGear (ovládača skenera) Oprava obrázkov a úprava farieb pomocou programu ScanGear (ovládača skenera) Obrazovky programu ScanGear (ovládača skenera) Príloha: Užitočné informácie o skenovaní Na začiatok strany What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)? Strana 455 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)? What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)? ScanGear (scanner driver) is software required for scanning documents. It enables you to specify the output size and make image corrections when scanning. ScanGear (scanner driver) can be started from MP Navigator EX or from other applications that are compatible with a standard interface called TWAIN. (ScanGear (scanner driver) is a TWAIN-compatible driver.) What You Can Do with This Software This software enables you to preview scan results or set document type and output size, etc. when scanning documents. It is useful when you want to scan in a specific color tone, as it allows you to make various corrections and adjust brightness, contrast, etc. Screens There are three modes: Basic Mode, Advanced Mode and Auto Scan Mode. Switch modes by clicking a tab on the upper right of the screen. Note ScanGear (scanner driver) starts in the last used mode. Settings are not retained when you switch between modes. Basic Mode Use Basic Mode to scan easily by following three simple on-screen steps ( , and ). Advanced Mode Use Advanced Mode to specify color mode, output resolution, image brightness, color tone, etc. when scanning. What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)? Strana 456 z celkového počtu 684 Auto Scan Mode Use Auto Scan Mode to scan easily by simply placing the document on the Platen and clicking Scan. Page top Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Strana 457 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Starting ScanGear (scanner driver) Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Scanning documents after making simple image corrections Scanning in Basic Mode Scanning documents after making advanced image corrections and brightness/color adjustments Scanning in Advanced Mode Scanning with a simple operation Scanning in Auto Scan Mode Scanning multiple documents at one time after making image corrections and color adjustments Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Page top Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Strana 458 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Use ScanGear (scanner driver) to make image corrections and color adjustments when scanning. ScanGear (scanner driver) can be started from MP Navigator EX or an application. Starting from MP Navigator EX Navigation Mode Screen Follow these steps to start ScanGear (scanner driver) from the Navigation Mode screen of MP Navigator EX. 1. Start MP Navigator EX and open the Navigation Mode screen. Starting MP Navigator EX 2. Point to Scan/Import and click Photos/Documents (Platen). The Scan/Import window opens. 3. Select the Use the scanner driver checkbox, then click Open Scanner Driver. The ScanGear (scanner driver) screen appears. One-click Mode Screen Follow these steps to start ScanGear (scanner driver) from the One-click Mode screen of MP Navigator EX. 1. Start MP Navigator EX and open the One-click Mode screen. Starting MP Navigator EX 2. Click the corresponding icon. The corresponding dialog box opens. Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Strana 459 z celkového počtu 684 3. Select the Use the scanner driver checkbox in Scan Settings, then click Scan. The ScanGear (scanner driver) screen appears. Important Use the scanner driver is not displayed in the PDF dialog box or Auto Scan dialog box. Starting from an Application Follow these steps (example) to start ScanGear (scanner driver) from an application. The procedure varies depending on the application. For details, refer to the application's manual. 1. Start the application. 2. On the File menu of the application, select Select Source and select the machine. 3. Select the command to scan a document (Scan/Import, Acquire image, etc.). The ScanGear (scanner driver) screen appears. Page top Scanning in Basic Mode Strana 460 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Scanning in Basic Mode Scanning in Basic Mode In Basic Mode, you can scan easily by following the on-screen steps. This section explains how to scan a single document. See "Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) " to scan multiple documents at one time. Important The following types of documents may not be cropped correctly. In that case, click on the Toolbar to switch to whole image view and scan. - Photos that have a whitish border - Documents printed on white paper, hand-written text, business cards, etc. - Thin documents - Thick documents The following types of documents cannot be cropped correctly. - Documents smaller than 1.18 inches (3 cm) square - Photos that have been cut to various shapes (Thumbnail) 1. Place the document on the Platen, then start ScanGear (scanner driver). Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Important Place the document face-down on the Platen and align an upper corner of the document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen. 2. Set Select Source according to the document placed on the Platen. Note To scan magazines containing many color photos, select Magazine(Color). Scanning in Basic Mode Strana 461 z celkového počtu 684 3. Click Preview. Preview image appears in the Preview area. Note Colors are adjusted based on the document type selected in Select Source. 4. Set Destination. 5. Set Output Size. Output size options vary by the items selected in Select Source and Destination. 6. Adjust the scan area (cropping frame) as required. Adjust the size and position of the cropping frame (scan area) on the preview image. Adjusting Cropping Frames 7. Set Image corrections as required. 8. Click Scan. Scanning starts. Note Click (Information) to open a dialog box in which you can check the current scan settings (document type, etc.). ScanGear's response after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box. Scan Tab Related Topic Basic Mode Tab Page top Scanning in Advanced Mode Strana 462 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Scanning in Advanced Mode Scanning in Advanced Mode In Advanced Mode, you can specify the color mode, output resolution, image brightness, color tone, etc. when scanning. This section explains how to scan a single document. See "Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) " to scan multiple documents at one time. Important The following types of documents may not be cropped correctly. In that case, click on the Toolbar to switch to whole image view and scan. - Photos that have a whitish border - Documents printed on white paper, hand-written text, business cards, etc. - Thin documents - Thick documents The following types of documents cannot be cropped correctly. - Documents smaller than 1.18 inches (3 cm) square - Photos that have been cut to various shapes (Thumbnail) 1. Place the document on the Platen, then start ScanGear (scanner driver). Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Important Place the document face-down on the Platen and align an upper corner of the document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen. 2. Click Advanced Mode. The Advanced Mode tab appears. Note Scanning in Advanced Mode Strana 463 z celkového počtu 684 Settings are not retained when you switch between modes. 3. Set Color Mode. Input Settings 4. Click Preview. Preview image appears in the Preview area. Note If you scan without preview, the show-through reduction function will be active. This function is useful when scanning magazines. However, when scanning photos, the color tone of the scanned image may differ from the source due to the show-through reduction function. In that case, use preview first. 5. Set Output Settings. Output Settings 6. Adjust the cropping frame (scan area), correct image and adjust colors as required. Adjusting Cropping Frames Image Settings Color Adjustment Buttons 7. Click Scan. Scanning starts. Note Click (Information) to open a dialog box in which you can check the current scan settings (document type, etc.). ScanGear's response after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box. Scan Tab Related Topic Advanced Mode Tab Scanning in Advanced Mode Strana 464 z celkového počtu 684 Page top Scanning in Auto Scan Mode Strana 465 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Scanning in Auto Scan Mode Scanning in Auto Scan Mode You can scan easily in Auto Scan Mode of ScanGear (scanner driver) by letting it automatically determine the type of document placed on the Platen. Note Supported document types are photos, postcards, business cards, magazines, newspapers, text documents and CD/DVD. To scan other documents, specify the document type on the Basic Mode tab or the Advanced Mode tab. Scanning in Basic Mode Scanning in Advanced Mode 1. Place the document on the Platen, then start ScanGear (scanner driver). Placing Documents Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver) 2. Click Auto Scan Mode. The Auto Scan Mode tab appears. 3. Click Scan. Scanning starts. Note ScanGear's response after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box. Scan Tab Related Topic Auto Scan Mode Tab Scanning in Auto Scan Mode Strana 466 z celkového počtu 684 Page top Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanne... Strana 467 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) You can scan two or more photos (small documents) on the Platen at one time in Basic Mode and Advanced Mode of ScanGear (scanner driver). This section explains how to scan multiple documents from the Basic Mode tab. Important To scan multiple documents as a single image, scan in whole image view. The following types of documents may not be cropped correctly. In that case, adjust the cropping frames (scan areas) in whole image view and scan. - Photos that have a whitish border - Documents printed on white paper, hand-written text, business cards, etc. - Thin documents - Thick documents Scanning Multiple Documents in Whole Image View The following types of documents cannot be cropped correctly. - Documents smaller than 1.18 inches (3 cm) square - Photos that have been cut to various shapes Note See "Scanning in Auto Scan Mode " to scan easily by automatically detecting the document type. You can also scan multiple documents at one time from the Advanced Mode tab. Use the Advanced Mode tab to make advanced scan settings such as the color mode, output resolution, image brightness and color tone. See the corresponding sections below for details on the Basic Mode tab and Advanced Mode tab. Basic Mode Tab Advanced Mode Tab 1. Place the document on the Platen, then start ScanGear (scanner driver). Placing Documents Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver) 2. Set Select Source according to the document placed on the Platen. Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanne... Strana 468 z celkového počtu 684 3. Click Preview. Thumbnails of the preview images appear in the Preview area. Images are cropped (scan areas are specified) automatically according to the document size. 4. Set Destination. 5. Set Output Size. 6. Adjust the scan areas (cropping frames) and set Image corrections as required. Note You can correct each image separately. Select the frame you want to correct. In thumbnail view, you can only create one cropping frame (scan area) per image. To create multiple cropping frames in an image, scan in whole image view. Scanning Multiple Documents in Whole Image View 7. Select the images you want to scan. Select the checkboxes of the images you want to scan. Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanne... Strana 469 z celkového počtu 684 8. Click Scan. Scanning Multiple Documents in Whole Image View Follow these steps if thumbnails are not displayed correctly when previewed or if you want to scan multiple documents as a single image. Note Positions of slanted documents are not corrected in whole image view. 1. After previewing images, click (Thumbnail) on the Toolbar. Switch to whole image view. Note When the whole image is displayed, the icon changes to (Whole Image). 2. Adjust the scan areas (cropping frames). Adjust the size and position of the cropping frame (scan area) on the preview image. You can also create two or more cropping frames. If an area is not specified, the document will be scanned at the document size (Auto Crop). If an area is specified, only the portion in the specified area will be scanned. Adjusting Cropping Frames 3. Set Destination. 4. Set Output Size. 5. Set Image corrections as required. 6. Click Scan. Areas framed by broken lines are scanned. Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanne... Strana 470 z celkového počtu 684 Note ScanGear's response after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box. Scan Tab Page top Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner D... Strana 471 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) The following sections provide you with tips and know-how on advanced scanning techniques involving color/brightness adjustment, etc. Sharpening out-of-focus photos, reducing dust and scratches, and correcting faded colors Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading Correction, etc.) Previewing and changing the color tone of the entire image to scan Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern Brightening colors that have faded with time or due to colorcast Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance Adjusting images that are too dark or bright, or too flat due to lack of contrast Adjusting Brightness and Contrast Adjusting the color tone using histogram (a graph showing brightness distribution) Adjusting Histogram Adjusting the image brightness using tone curve (a graph of brightness balance) Adjusting Tone Curve Sharpening characters in text documents or reducing show-through effects Setting Threshold Page top Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fa... Strana 472 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading Correction, etc.) Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading Correction, etc.) The Image Settings functions in Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear (scanner driver) allow you to enhance the outline of the subjects, reduce dust/scratches and correct faded colors when scanning images. Setting Items Click (Arrow) of a function and select an item from the pull-down menu. Important Do not apply these functions to images without moire, dust/scratches or faded colors. The color tone may be adversely affected. See "Image Settings " for details and precautions on each function. Note See "Scanning in Advanced Mode " to start ScanGear (scanner driver) in Advanced Mode tab and scan. Adjusting the image brightness and color tone Set Image Adjustment to Auto, Photo, Magazine, Newspaper or Document according to the document type. Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fa... None Strana 473 z celkového počtu 684 Auto Sharpening slightly out-of-focus images Set Unsharp Mask to ON. ON OFF Reducing gradations and stripe patterns Set Descreen to ON. ON OFF Note "Moire" is a phenomenon where uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots are scanned. Descreen is the function for reducing this moire effect. Reducing dust and scratches Set Reduce Dust and Scratches to Low, Medium or High according to the degree of dust and scratches. Medium None Correcting photos that have faded with time or due to colorcast Set Fading Correction to Low, Medium or High according to the degree of fading or colorcast. None Medium Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fa... Strana 474 z celkového počtu 684 Reducing graininess Set Grain Correction to Low, Medium or High according to the degree of graininess. None Medium Correcting backlit images Set Backlight Correction to Low, Medium or High according to the degree of backlight. None Medium Correcting shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets Set Gutter Shadow Correction to Low, Medium or High according to the degree of shadows. None Medium Page top Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern Strana 475 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern You can preview color changes and reproduce natural colors by using the Color Pattern function in ScanGear's Basic Mode tab. Color Adjustment Correct colors that have faded with time or due to colorcast. Colorcast is a phenomenon where a specific color affects the entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors. Click an arrow in Color Adjustment to emphasize the corresponding color. Cyan & red, magenta & green and yellow & blue are complementary color pairs (each pair produces a shade of gray when mixed). You can reproduce the natural colors of the scene by reducing the cast color and increasing the complementary color. Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern Strana 476 z celkového počtu 684 It is recommended that you find a portion in the image where it should be white, and adjust the colors so that the portion turns white. Preview image appears in the center. Preview image colors change as you adjust them. Below is an example of correcting a bluish image. Since Blue and Green are too strong, click the Yellow and Magenta arrows to correct. Before After Note Color adjustments are applied only to the scan area (cropping frame) or the frame selected in thumbnail view. You can select multiple frames or cropping frames by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key. You can also select a color tone from the color pattern displayed on the left of the Color Pattern screen. You can also use this function to add a specific tint to an image. Increase the magenta to add a warm tint, and increase the blue to add a cool tint. Page top Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance Strana 477 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance In ScanGear's Advanced Mode tab, click (Saturation/Color Balance). Note Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window. Saturation Adjust the image's saturation (vividness). You can brighten colors that have faded with time, etc. Move (slider) under Saturation to the left to decrease the saturation (darken the image), and to the right to increase the saturation (brighten the image). You can also enter a value (-127 to 127). Saturation decreased Original image Saturation increased Note The natural color tone of the original image may be lost if you increase saturation too much. Color Balance Adjust images that have a colorcast. Colorcast is a phenomenon where a specific color affects the entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors. Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance Move Strana 478 z celkového počtu 684 (slider) under Color Balance to the left or right to emphasize the corresponding color. Cyan & Red Magenta & Green Yellow & Blue These are complementary color pairs (each pair produces a shade of gray when mixed). You can reproduce the natural colors of the scene by reducing the cast color and increasing the complementary color. It is usually difficult to correct the image completely by adjusting only one color pair. It is recommended that you find a portion in the image where it should be white, and adjust all three color pairs so that the portion turns white. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127). Below is an example of an image in which the "Cyan & Red" pair has been adjusted. Cyan is increased Red is increased Page top Adjusting Brightness and Contrast Strana 479 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Adjusting Brightness and Contrast Adjusting Brightness and Contrast In ScanGear's Advanced Mode tab, click (Brightness/Contrast). Note Click (Down arrow) to switch to detailed view. Click (Up arrow) to return to the previous view. Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window. Channel Each dot of an image is a mixture of Red, Green and Blue in various proportions (gradation). These colors can be adjusted individually as a "channel." Master Adjust the Red, Green and Blue combined. Red Adjust the Red channel. Green Adjust the Green channel. Blue Adjust the Blue channel. Adjusting Brightness and Contrast Strana 480 z celkového počtu 684 Note Only Grayscale will be displayed in Channel when Color Mode is Grayscale. Brightness Adjust the image brightness. Move (slider) under Brightness to the left to darken and right to brighten the image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127). Darkened Original image Brightened Note Highlights may be lost if you brighten the image too much, and shadows may be lost if you darken the image too much. Contrast "Contrast" is the degree of difference between the brighter and darker parts of an image. Increasing contrast will increase the difference, thus sharpening the image. Decreasing contrast will decrease the difference, thus softening the image. Move (slider) under Contrast to the left to decrease and right to increase the contrast of the image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127). Decreased contrast Original image Increased contrast Note Increasing the contrast is effective in adding a three-dimensional feel to soft images. However, shadows and highlights may be lost if you increase the contrast too much. Page top Adjusting Histogram Strana 481 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Adjusting Histogram Adjusting Histogram In ScanGear's Advanced Mode tab, click (Histogram). Note Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window. Channel Each dot of an image is a mixture of Red, Green and Blue in various proportions (gradation). These colors can be adjusted individually as a "channel." Master Adjust the Red, Green and Blue combined. Red Adjust the Red channel. Green Adjust the Green channel. Blue Adjust the Blue channel. Note Only Grayscale will be displayed in Channel when Color Mode is Grayscale. Reading Histograms You can open Histogram of a specified area for each Channel. The higher the Histogram peak, the more data is distributed to that level. Adjusting Histogram Strana 482 z celkového počtu 684 (1) Bright area (2) Dark area (3) Whole image More data is distributed to the highlight side. More data is distributed to the Data is widely distributed between the highlight and shadow. shadow side. Adjusting Histograms (Using the Slider) Select a Channel, then move set as the shadow or highlight. - All parts to the left of - The parts at (Black-point Slider) or (White-point Slider) to specify the level to be (Black-point Slider) will be black (level 0). (Mid-point Slider) will turn to the color exactly between the black-point and white-point. - All parts to the right of (White-point Slider) will turn white (level 255). Image Adjustment is Auto by default. Adjustments shown below are automatically performed. Moving the Black-point and White-point Sliders Move the Black-point Slider or White-point Slider to adjust brightness. Images with more data distributed to the highlight side Move the Black-point Slider toward the highlight side. Images with more data distributed to the shadow side Move the White-point Slider toward the shadow side. Images with widely distributed data Move the Black-point Slider toward the highlight side, and White-point Slider toward the shadow side. Adjusting Histogram Strana 483 z celkového počtu 684 Moving the Mid-point Slider Move the Mid-point Slider to specify the level to be set as the middle of the tonal range. Images with more data distributed to the highlight side Move the Mid-point Slider toward the highlight side. Images with more data distributed to the shadow side Move the Mid-point Slider toward the shadow side. Adjusting Histograms (Using the Droppers) When you select a Channel and click the Black-point, Mid-point or White-point Dropper, the mouse pointer on the preview image changes to a dropper. Click a Dropper displayed below the histogram to change the setting. - The point clicked with to 245). (Black-point Dropper) will be the darkest point. You can also enter a value (0 - The point clicked with a value (5 to 250). (Mid-point Dropper) will be the middle of the tonal range. You can also enter - The point clicked with (10 to 255). (White-point Dropper) will be the brightest point. You can also enter a value - Click (Dropper) for Gray Balance and click the area you want to adjust the color in the preview image. The clicked point will be set as the achromatic color reference, and the rest of the image is adjusted accordingly. For instance, if snow in a photo appears bluish, click the bluish part to adjust the whole image and reproduce natural colors. Page top Adjusting Tone Curve Strana 484 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Adjusting Tone Curve Adjusting Tone Curve In ScanGear's Advanced Mode tab, click (Tone Curve Settings). Note Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window. Channel Each dot of an image is a mixture of Red, Green and Blue in various proportions (gradation). These colors can be adjusted individually as a "channel." Master Adjust the Red, Green and Blue combined. Red Adjust the Red channel. Green Adjust the Green channel. Blue Adjust the Blue channel. Note Only Grayscale will be displayed in Channel when Color Mode is Grayscale. Reading Tone Curves With ScanGear (scanner driver), scanning images via a scanner is the input, and displaying to a monitor is the output. "Tone Curve" shows the balance of tone input and output for each Channel. Adjusting Tone Curve Strana 485 z celkového počtu 684 Adjusting Tone Curve In Select Tone Curve, select a tone curve from No correction, Overexposure, Underexposure, High contrast, Reverse the negative/positive image and Edit custom curve. No correction (No adjustment) Overexposure (Convex curve) The midtone data of the input side is stretched toward the highlight of the output side, resulting in a bright-toned image when viewed on a monitor. Underexposure (Concave curve) The midtone data of the input side is stretched toward the shadow of the output side, resulting in a darktoned image when viewed on a monitor. High contrast (S curve) The highlight and shadow of the input side are enhanced, resulting in a high-contrast image. Reverse the negative/positive image (Downward-sloping line) The input and output sides are reversed, resulting in a negative-positive inverted image. Adjusting Tone Curve Strana 486 z celkového počtu 684 Edit custom curve You can drag specific points on the Tone Curve to freely adjust the brightness of the corresponding areas. Page top Setting Threshold Strana 487 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Setting Threshold Setting Threshold The brightness of color and grayscale images is expressed in a value between 0 and 255. However, in creating black and white images, all colors are mapped to either black (0) or white (255). "Threshold" is the borderline value that determines a color as black or white. By adjusting the threshold level, you can sharpen text in a document or reduce show-through in newspapers. This function is available when Color Mode is Black and White. In ScanGear's Advanced Mode tab, click (Threshold). Note Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window. Adjusting Threshold Move (slider) to the right to increase the threshold value and thus increase the black areas. Move the slider to the left to decrease the value and thus increase the white areas. You can also enter a value (0 to 255). Page top ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens Strana 488 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens The following sections describe ScanGear's screens and functions, and how to use ScanGear (scanner driver). Basic Mode Tab Advanced Mode Tab Input Settings Output Settings Image Settings Color Adjustment Buttons Auto Scan Mode Tab Preferences Dialog Box Scanner Tab Preview Tab Scan Tab Color Settings Tab Page top Basic Mode Tab Strana 489 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Basic Mode Tab Basic Mode Tab This mode allows you to scan easily by following the on-screen steps. This section describes the settings and functions available in Basic Mode. (1) Settings and Operation Buttons (2) Toolbar (3) Preview Area Note The displayed items vary by document type and how the screen was opened. Settings and Operation Buttons Select Source Photo(Color) Scan color photos. Magazine(Color) Scan color magazines. Newspaper(Grayscale) Scan text and line drawings in black and white. Document(Grayscale) Scan documents and photos in black and white. Select this mode to create high-resolution black and white images. Note When you select a document type, colors are adjusted based on the Unsharp Mask function or document type. If you select Magazine(Color), the Descreen function will be active. Display Preview Image Basic Mode Tab Strana 490 z celkového počtu 684 Preview Performs a trial scan. Note When using the machine for the first time, scanner calibration starts automatically. Wait a while until the preview image appears. Destination Select what you want to do with the scanned image. Print Select this to print the scanned image on a printer. Image display Select this to view the scanned image on a monitor. OCR Select this to use the scanned image with OCR software. OCR software is software that converts text scanned as an image into text data that can be edited in word processors and other programs. Output Size Select an output size. Output size options vary by the item selected in Destination. Flexible Allows you to freely adjust the cropping frames. In thumbnail view Drag the mouse over a thumbnail to display a cropping frame. When a cropping frame is displayed, the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned. When no cropping frame is displayed, each frame is scanned individually. In whole image view When no cropping frame is displayed, the entire Preview area will be scanned. When a cropping frame is displayed, the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned. Paper Size (L, A4, etc.) Select an output paper size. The portion within the cropping frame will be scanned at the size of the selected paper size. You can drag the cropping frame to enlarge/reduce it while maintaining the aspect ratio. Monitor Size (1024 x 768 pixels, etc.) Select an output size in pixels. Basic Mode Tab Strana 491 z celkového počtu 684 A cropping frame of the selected monitor size will be displayed and the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned. You can drag the cropping frame to enlarge/reduce it while maintaining the aspect ratio. Add/Delete... Opens the Add/Delete the Output Size dialog box, in which you can specify custom output sizes. You can select this option when Destination is Print or Image display. In the Add/Delete the Output Size dialog box, you can specify multiple output sizes and save them at one time. Saved items will be registered to the Output Size list and can be selected, along with the predefined items. Add To add a size, enter Output Size Name, Width and Height, then click Add. For Unit, you can select mm or inches when Destination is Print but you can only select pixels when Destination is Image display. The name of the added size appears in Output Size List. Click Save to save the items listed in Output Size List. Delete To delete an item, select it in Output Size List and click Delete. Click Save to save the items listed in Output Size List. Important You cannot delete predefined output sizes such as A4 and 1024 x 768 pixels. Note Save up to 10 items. An error message appears when you enter a value outside the setting range. Enter a value within the setting range. Note Whether or how the cropping frame is initially displayed on a preview image can be specified on the Preview tab of the Preferences dialog box. See Cropping Frame on Previewed Images in "Preview Tab ." Invert aspect ratio This button is available when Output Size is set to anything but Flexible. Click this button to rotate the cropping frame. Click again to return it to the original orientation. Adjust cropping frames You can adjust the scan area within the Preview area. If an area is not specified, the document will be scanned at the document size (Auto Crop). If an area is specified, only the portion in the cropping frame will be scanned. Adjusting Cropping Frames Basic Mode Tab Strana 492 z celkového počtu 684 Image corrections Fading correction Corrects and scans photos that have faded with time or have a colorcast. Backlight correction Corrects photos that have been shot against light. Gutter shadow correction Corrects shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets. Important For precautions on using this function, see Gutter Shadow Correction in " Image Settings " (Advanced Mode tab). Color Pattern... Allows you to adjust the image's overall color. You can correct colors that have faded due to colorcast, etc. and reproduce natural colors while previewing color changes. Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern Perform Scan Scan Scanning starts. Note When scanning starts, the progress will be displayed. Click Cancel to cancel the scan. Preferences... The Preferences dialog box opens and you can make scan/preview settings. Preferences Dialog Box Close Closes ScanGear (scanner driver). Toolbar Toolbar You can adjust or rotate preview images. The buttons displayed on the Toolbar vary by view. In thumbnail view In whole image view Basic Mode Tab Strana 493 z celkového počtu 684 (Thumbnail)/ (Whole image view) Switches the view in the Preview area. Preview Area (Rotate Left) Rotates the preview image 90 degrees counter-clockwise. - The result will be reflected in the scanned image. - The image returns to its original state when you preview again. (Rotate Right) Rotates the preview image 90 degrees clockwise. - The result will be reflected in the scanned image. - The image returns to its original state when you preview again. (Auto Crop) Displays and adjusts the cropping frame automatically to the size of the document displayed in the Preview area. The scan area is reduced every time you click this button if there are cropping area within the cropping frame. (Check All Frames) This button is available when two or more frames are displayed. Selects the checkbox of the image in thumbnail view. (Uncheck All Frames) This button is available when two or more frames are displayed. Deselects the checkbox of the image in thumbnail view. (Select All Frames) This button is available when two or more frames are displayed. Selects the image in thumbnail view and the image will be outlined in blue. (Select All Cropping Frames) This button is available when there are two or more cropping frames. All cropping frames will be displayed in thick broken lines. The settings will be applied to all the cropping frames. (Remove Cropping Frame) Removes the selected cropping frame. (Information) Displays the version of ScanGear (scanner driver) and the current scan settings (document type, etc.). (Open Guide) This page appears. Preview Area Preview Area This is where a trial image is displayed after you click Preview. You can also check the results of the settings (image corrections, color adjustments, etc.) made in " Settings and Operation Buttons ." When (Thumbnail) is displayed on the Toolbar Thumbnails of images cropped to the document size are displayed. Only the images with the Basic Mode Tab Strana 494 z celkového počtu 684 checkbox selected will be scanned. Note When multiple images are previewed, different outlines indicate different selection status. - Focus Frame (thick blue outline): The displayed settings will be applied. - Selected Frame (thin blue outline): The settings will be applied to the Focus Frame and Selected Frames simultaneously. You can select multiple images by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key. - Unselected (no outline): The settings will not be applied. (Frame Advance) at the bottom of Double-click a frame to zoom in on the image. Click the screen to display the previous or next frame. Double-click the frame again to return the display to its non-magnified state. When (Whole Image) is displayed on the Toolbar Items on the Platen are displayed as a single image. All portions in the cropping frames will be scanned. Note You can specify the scan area (cropping frame) on the displayed image. In thumbnail view, you can only create one cropping frame per image. In whole image view, you can create multiple cropping frames. Adjusting Cropping Frames Related Topic Basic Mode Tab Strana 495 z celkového počtu 684 Scanning in Basic Mode Page top Advanced Mode Tab Strana 496 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Advanced Mode Tab Advanced Mode Tab This mode allows you to make advanced scan settings such as the color mode, output resolution, image brightness and color tone. This section describes the settings and functions available in Advanced Mode. (1) Settings and Operation Buttons (2) Toolbar (3) Preview Area Note The displayed items vary by document type and how the screen was opened. Settings and Operation Buttons Favorite Settings You can name and save a group of settings (Input Settings, Output Settings, Image Settings and Color Adjustment Buttons) on Advanced Mode tab, and load it as required. It is convenient to save a group of settings if you will be using it repeatedly. You can also use this to reload the default settings. Select Add/Delete... from the pull-down menu and the Add/Delete Favorite Settings dialog box opens. Advanced Mode Tab Strana 497 z celkového počtu 684 Enter Setting Name and click Add. The name appears in Favorite Settings List. When you click Save, the item appears in the Favorite Settings list and can be selected, along with the predefined items. To delete an item, select it in Favorite Settings List and click Delete. Click Save to save settings displayed in Favorite Settings List. Note You can set Add/Delete... in Favorite Settings after preview. Save up to 10 items. Input Settings Specify the input settings such as the document type and size. Input Settings Output Settings Specify the output settings such as the output resolution and size. Output Settings Image Settings Enable/disable various image correction functions. Image Settings Color Adjustment Buttons These buttons can be used to make fine corrections to the image brightness and color tones. You can adjust the image's overall brightness or contrast, and adjust its highlight and shadow values (histogram) or balance (tone curve). Color Adjustment Buttons Zoom Zooms in on an image or the portion within the cropping frame. When the image is zoomed in, Zoom changes to Undo. Click Undo to return the display to its non-magnified state. In thumbnail view Zooms in on the selected image. Click display the previous or next frame. (Frame Advance) at the bottom of the screen to Note You can also zoom in on an image by double-clicking the frame. Double-click the frame again to return the display to its non-magnified state. In whole image view Rescans the portion within the cropping frame at higher magnification. Note Zoom rescans the image and displays high-resolution image in Preview. (Enlarge/Reduce) on the Toolbar zooms in on the preview image quickly. However, the resolution of the displayed image will be low. Preview Advanced Mode Tab Strana 498 z celkového počtu 684 Performs a trial scan. Scan Starts scanning. Note When scanning starts, the progress will be displayed. Click Cancel to cancel the scan. When scanning is completed, a dialog box prompting you to select the next action may open. Follow the prompt to complete. For details, see Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning in " Scan Tab" (Preferences dialog box). It will take time to process the images if the total size of the scanned images exceeds a certain size. In that case, a warning message appears. It is recommended that you reduce the total size. To continue, scan in whole image view. Preferences... The Preferences dialog box opens and you can make scan/preview settings. Preferences Dialog Box Close Closes ScanGear (scanner driver). Toolbar Toolbar You can adjust or rotate preview images. The buttons displayed on the Toolbar vary by view. In thumbnail view In whole image view (Thumbnail)/ (Whole image view) Advanced Mode Tab Strana 499 z celkového počtu 684 Switches the view in the Preview area. Preview Area (Clear) Click this button to delete the preview image. It also resets the Toolbar and color adjustment settings. (Crop) Allows you to specify the scan area by dragging the mouse. (Move Image) If an enlarged image is too large to fit in the Preview area, you can click this button and drag the image across the screen until the part you want to see is displayed. You can also move the image using the scroll bars. (Enlarge/Reduce) Click this button then click on the image to enlarge it (zoom in). Right-click on the image to reduce it (zoom out). (Rotate Left) Rotates the preview image 90 degrees counter-clockwise. - The result will be reflected in the scanned image. - The image returns to its original state when you preview again. (Rotate Right) Rotates the preview image 90 degrees clockwise. - The result will be reflected in the scanned image. - The image returns to its original state when you preview again. (Auto Crop) Displays and adjusts the cropping frame automatically to the size of the document displayed in the Preview area. The scan area is reduced every time you click this button if there are cropping area within the cropping frame. (Check All Frames) This button is available when two or more frames are displayed. Selects the checkbox of the image in thumbnail view. (Uncheck All Frames) This button is available when two or more frames are displayed. Deselects the checkbox of the image in thumbnail view. (Select All Frames) This button is available when two or more frames are displayed. Selects the image in thumbnail view and the image will be outlined in blue. (Select All Cropping Frames) This button is available when there are two or more cropping frames. All cropping frames will be displayed in thick broken lines. The settings will be applied to all the cropping frames. (Remove Cropping Frame) Removes the selected cropping frame. (Information) Advanced Mode Tab Strana 500 z celkového počtu 684 Displays the version of ScanGear (scanner driver) and the current scan settings (document type, etc.). (Open Guide) This page appears. Preview Area Preview Area This is where a trial image is displayed after you click Preview. You can also check the results of the settings (image corrections, color adjustments, etc.) made in " Settings and Operation Buttons ." When (Thumbnail) is displayed on the Toolbar Thumbnails of images cropped to the document size are displayed. Only the images with the checkbox selected will be scanned. Note When multiple images are previewed, different outlines indicate different selection status. - Focus Frame (thick blue outline): The displayed settings will be applied. - Selected Frame (thin blue outline): The settings will be applied to the Focus Frame and Selected Frames simultaneously. You can select multiple images by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key. - Unselected (no outline): The settings will not be applied. When (Whole Image) is displayed on the Toolbar Items on the Platen are displayed as a single image. All portions in the cropping frames will be scanned. Advanced Mode Tab Strana 501 z celkového počtu 684 Note You can specify the scan area (cropping frame) on the displayed image. In thumbnail view, you can only create one cropping frame per image. In whole image view, you can create multiple cropping frames. Adjusting Cropping Frames Related Topic Scanning in Advanced Mode Page top Input Settings Strana 502 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Input Settings Input Settings Input Settings allows you to set the following items: Select Source The type of document to be scanned is displayed. Paper Size Select the size of the document to be scanned. This setting is available in whole film image view only. When you select a size, the Preview area size changes accordingly. Important Some applications have a limit to the amount of scan data they can receive. ScanGear (scanner driver) can scan data that is of: - 21000 pixels x 30000 pixels or less If you change Paper Size after previewing, the preview image will be deleted. Note If you are not sure which size you should select for Paper Size, set Paper Size to Full Platen, then measure the size of the document and enter the values into (Width) and (Height). Color Mode Select how to scan the document. Color Select this mode to scan color documents or to create color images. This mode renders the image in 256 levels (8 bit) of R(ed), G(reen), and B(lue). Grayscale Select this mode to scan black and white photos, or to create black and white images. This mode Input Settings Strana 503 z celkového počtu 684 renders the image in 256 levels (8 bit) of black and white. Black and White Select this mode to scan photos and documents in black and white. This mode renders the image in black and white. The contrast in the image is divided at certain levels (threshold level) into black and white and is rendered in two colors. The threshold level can be set with (Threshold). Input Size In thumbnail view, the cropped document size is displayed after preview. In whole image view, the Paper Size is displayed before preview, and the cropping frame (scan area) size is displayed after preview. You can adjust the cropping frame size by entering the values into Click (Keep Aspect Ratio) and change it to specify the cropping frame size. (Width) and (Height). (Locked) to maintain the aspect ratio when you Important Input size settings are available only when Output Size in Output Settings is Flexible. If you select a size other than Flexible, a cropping frame calculated from Output Size and Output Resolution is displayed, and its aspect ratio is fixed. Note The values you can enter will be within the range of the selected document size. The minimum size is 96 pixels x 96 pixels when Output Resolution is 600 dpi, scaled at 100%. When Auto Crop is performed in whole image view, the aspect ratio will not be maintained since the size will be prioritized. See "Adjusting Cropping Frames" for details on cropping frames. Page top Output Settings Strana 504 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Output Settings Output Settings Output Settings allows you to set the following items: Output Resolution Select the resolution to scan at. The higher the resolution (value), the more detail in your image. Select a resolution from the options displayed by clicking the button, or enter a value within the range of 25 dpi to 19200 dpi (in 1 dpi increments). Resolution Output Size Select an output size. Select Flexible to set custom sizes or select a size for printing or displaying. Select Add/Delete... to set custom size and save it as a new output size option. Flexible You can specify the output resolution and scale, and adjust the cropping frame. In thumbnail view Drag the mouse over a thumbnail to display a cropping frame. When a cropping frame is displayed, the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned. When no cropping frame is displayed, each frame is scanned individually. In whole image view When no cropping frame is displayed, the entire Preview area will be scanned. When a cropping frame is displayed, the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned. Note To enlarge/reduce the scanned image, enter values into (Width) and (Height) in Output Settings Strana 505 z celkového počtu 684 Output Settings or specify a value (by 1%) for %. The maximum value available for % depends on the Output Resolution. % can be specified for up to 19200 dpi (the maximum available output resolution). Paper Size (L, etc.) & Monitor Size (1024 x 768 pixels, etc.) Width, height and scale cannot be specified. The preview image will be cropped according to the selected output size and resolution. The portion within the cropping frame will be scanned at the size of the selected paper/monitor size. You can drag the cropping frame to enlarge, reduce or move it while maintaining the aspect ratio. Add/Delete... Opens the Add/Delete the Output Size dialog box, in which you can specify custom output sizes. In the Add/Delete the Output Size dialog box, you can specify multiple output sizes and save them at one time. Saved items will be registered to the Output Size list and can be selected, along with the predefined items. Add To add a size, select Print or Image display for Destination, then enter Output Size Name, Width, and Height then click Add. The name of the added size appears in Output Size List. Click Save to save the items listed in Output Size List. Delete To delete an item, select it in Output Size List and click Delete. Click Save to save the items listed in Output Size List. Important You cannot delete predefined output sizes such as A4 and 1024 x 768 pixels. Note Save up to 10 items for each destination. An error message appears when you enter a value outside the setting range. Enter a value within the range displayed in the message. Unit varies by Destination. For Print, select mm or inches. For Image display, the unit is pixels. Note See "Adjusting Cropping Frames" for details on cropping frames. Whether or how the cropping frame is initially displayed on a preview image can be specified on the Preview tab of the Preferences dialog box. See Cropping Frame on Previewed Images in " Preview Tab ." (Switch Aspect Ratio) Click this button to rotate the cropping frame. Click again to return it to the original orientation. Data Size An image file is created when the preview image is scanned. Its size when saved in BMP format is displayed. Note When the file size exceeds a certain size, the value appears in red. In that case, a warning Output Settings Strana 506 z celkového počtu 684 message appears when you click Scan. It is recommended that you adjust the settings to reduce Data Size. To continue, scan in whole image view. Page top Image Settings Strana 507 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Image Settings Image Settings Important Do not apply these functions to images without moire, dust/scratches or faded colors. The color tone may be adversely affected. Image correction results may not be reflected in the preview image. Note Selectable settings depend on color mode settings. Scanning may take longer when you use Image Settings. Image Settings allows you to set the following items: Image Adjustment When Image Adjustment is set, the brightness of the specified portion of the image is optimized. Images can be adjusted according to the automatically detected document type or the specified document type. The result of the adjustment will be reflected in the entire image. This setting is Auto by default. None Image Adjustment will not be applied. Auto Applies Image Adjustment by automatically detecting the document type. It is recommended that you normally select this setting. Photo Select this to apply Image Adjustment to photos. Magazine Image Settings Strana 508 z celkového počtu 684 Select this to apply Image Adjustment to magazines. Newspaper Select this to apply Image Adjustment to newspapers. Document Select this to apply Image Adjustment to text documents. Important You can set Image Adjustment after preview. You can set this setting when Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box. Note If the image is not adjusted properly with Auto, specify the document type. The color tone may change from the source image due to the Image Adjustment. In that case, set Image Adjustment to None. Unsharp Mask When this is set to ON, the outline of the subjects is emphasized to sharpen the image. This setting is ON by default. Descreen Printed photos and pictures are displayed as a collection of fine dots. "Moire" is a phenomenon where uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots are scanned. Descreen is the function for reducing this moire effect. This setting is OFF by default. Note Even if Descreen is set to ON, some moire effects may remain if Unsharp Mask is set to ON. In that case, set Unsharp Mask to OFF. Selecting Magazine(Color) in Select Source in Basic Mode tab has the same effect as setting Descreen to ON in Advanced Mode tab. Reduce Dust and Scratches Scanned photos may contain white dots caused by dust or scratches. Use this function to reduce such noise. This setting is None by default. None Dust and scratches will not be reduced. Low Select this to reduce small dust particles and scratches. Large ones may remain. Medium It is recommended that you normally select this setting. High Select this to reduce small/large dust particles and scratches. Evidence of the reduction process may remain and may also remove delicate parts of the image. Important This function may not be effective for some types of photos. Note It is recommended that you select None when scanning printed materials. Fading Correction Use this function to correct photos that have faded with time or have a colorcast. Colorcast is a phenomenon where a specific color affects the entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors. This setting is None by default. None Image Settings Strana 509 z celkového počtu 684 Fading correction will not be applied. Low Select this to correct a small amount of fading and colorcast. Medium It is recommended that you normally select this setting. High Select this to correct a large amount of fading and colorcast. This can affect the tone of the image. Important You can set Fading Correction after preview. Fading Correction may not be effective if the scan area is too small. You can set this setting when Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box. Grain Correction Use this function to reduce graininess (roughness) in photos taken with high-speed or sensitized film. This setting is None by default. None Graininess will not be reduced. Low Select this when the photo is slightly grainy. Medium It is recommended that you normally select this setting. High Select this when the photo is very grainy. This can affect the gradation and sharpness of the image. Important Grain Correction may not be effective if the scan area is too small. Backlight Correction Use this function to correct photos that have been shot against light. When you change the Backlight Correction setting, the result will be reflected in the preview image. This setting is None by default. None Backlight correction will not be applied. Low Select this to correct slightly backlit photos. This will not affect the image contrast. Medium It is recommended that you normally select this setting. High Select this to correct strongly backlit photos. This can affect the image contrast. Important You can set Backlight Correction after preview. You can set this setting when Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box. Backlight Correction may not be effective if the scan area is too small. Note Noise patterns may appear when Backlight Correction is applied. Applying Grain Correction and Image Settings Strana 510 z celkového počtu 684 setting Unsharp Mask to OFF may reduce the noise patterns. Gutter Shadow Correction Use this function to correct shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets. When you set the Gutter Shadow Correction setting in the preview image, the result will be reflected. Preview the effects before scanning, as results vary depending on the type of document and how it is pressed. Unclear or blurred text/lines caused by curved pages are not corrected. This setting is None by default. None Gutter shadow will not be corrected. Low Select this when the effect level is too strong with the medium setting. Medium It is recommended that you normally select this setting. High Select this when the effect level is too weak with the medium setting. Important Do not place items that weigh 4.4 lbs (2.0 kg) or more on the Platen. Also, do not press on the document with a force exceeding 4.4 lbs (2.0 kg). If you press heavily, the scanner may not work correctly or you might break the glass. Align the document with the edge of the Platen. If not, the shadow will not be corrected properly. Shadows may not be corrected properly depending on the document. If the page background is not white, shadows may not be detected correctly or may not be detected at all. While scanning, press down on the spine with the same amount of pressure you used to preview the scan. If the binding part is not even, the shadow will not be corrected properly. How to place the document depends on your model and the document to be scanned. Note Cover the document with black cloth if white spots, streaks, or colored patterns appear in scan results due to ambient light entering between the document and the Platen. If the shadow is not corrected properly, adjust the cropping frame on the preview image. Adjusting Cropping Frames Page top Color Adjustment Buttons Strana 511 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Color Adjustment Buttons Color Adjustment Buttons The Color Adjustment Buttons allow you to make fine corrections to the image brightness and color tones. You can adjust the image's overall brightness or contrast, and adjust its highlight and shadow values (histogram) or balance (tone curve). Important The Color Adjustment Buttons are not available when you select Color Matching on the Color Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box. Note Selectable settings depend on color mode settings. When you adjust the image via the Color Adjustment Buttons, the results will be reflected in the preview image. Click a Color Adjustment Button to set the following items: (Saturation/Color Balance) Adjust the vividness and color tone of the image. Use this function to brighten colors that have faded with time or due to colorcast. Colorcast is a phenomenon where a specific color affects the entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors. Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance (Brightness/Contrast) Adjust the brightness and contrast of the image. If the image is too dark or too bright, or if the image quality is flat due to lack of contrast, you can adjust the levels of brightness and contrast. Adjusting Brightness and Contrast Color Adjustment Buttons Strana 512 z celkového počtu 684 (Histogram) A histogram allows you to see the data concentration at each brightness level of an image. You can specify the darkest level (shadow) and brightest level (highlight) within an image, cut the levels and expand the middle of the tonal range of the image. Adjusting Histogram (Tone Curve Settings) Adjust the brightness of an image by selecting the type of graph (tone curve) showing the balance of tone input and output. You can make fine adjustments to the brightness of a specific area. Adjusting Tone Curve (Final Review) Make a final check of color adjustments. The final synthesized tone curve and the histogram derived from the subsequent image processing will be displayed. There are no settings to make in this screen. For a color image, select a color in Channel to check either Red, Green or Blue, or select Master to check three colors together. If you place the cursor on the preview image, the portion will be enlarged and its RGB values (only K when Color Mode is Grayscale) before and after the adjustments will be displayed. (Threshold) Set the boundary (threshold) at which black and white are divided. By adjusting the threshold level, you can sharpen text in a document or reduce show-through in newspapers. Setting Threshold Custom You can name and save a set of tone curve and threshold settings of the Color Adjustment Buttons. Select Add/Delete... from the pull-down menu. When Color Mode is set to anything but Black and White, the Add/Delete Tone Curve Settings dialog box opens. When Color Mode is Black and White, the Add/Delete Threshold Settings dialog box opens. Color Adjustment Buttons Strana 513 z celkového počtu 684 Enter Setting Name and click Add. The name appears in Tone Curve Settings List or Threshold Settings List. Click Save to save. You can load and apply the saved tone curve/threshold settings to a preview image. To load the settings, select the saved item from the pull-down menu. To delete an item, select it in Tone Curve Settings List or Threshold Settings List and click Delete. Click Save to save settings displayed in Tone Curve Settings List or Threshold Settings List. Note Save up to 20 items. Defaults Reset all adjustments (saturation/color balance, brightness/contrast, histogram and tone curve). Page top Auto Scan Mode Tab Strana 514 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Auto Scan Mode Tab Auto Scan Mode Tab This mode allows you to scan easily by simply placing documents on the Platen and clicking a button. In Auto Scan Mode, documents are automatically detected. You do not need to specify cropping frames or make image corrections. Supported Documents Photos, postcards, business cards, magazines, newspapers, text documents and CD/DVD. Important The following types of documents cannot be scanned correctly. In that case, specify the document type or size on the Basic Mode tab or the Advanced Mode tab and scan again. - Documents other than photos, postcards, business cards, magazines, newspapers, text documents and CD/DVD - Text documents smaller than 2L (5 inches x 7 inches) (127 mm x 178 mm), such as paperback pages with the spine cut off - Documents printed on thin white paper - Long narrow documents such as panoramic photos Scanning in Basic Mode Scanning in Advanced Mode Reflective CD/DVD labels may not be scanned properly. Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned. Otherwise, documents may not be scanned correctly. See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents. Note Scan from the " Basic Mode Tab " or "Advanced Mode Tab " to reduce moire. Placing Documents "Placing Documents " appears. View scanned images Select this checkbox to display the thumbnails of scanned images in a different window. Auto Scan Mode Tab Strana 515 z celkového počtu 684 Scan Scanning starts. Note When scanning starts, the progress will be displayed. Click Cancel to cancel the scan. When scanning is completed, a dialog box prompting you to select the next action may open. Follow the prompt to complete. For details, see Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning in " Scan Tab" (Preferences dialog box). Instructions This page appears. Preferences... The Preferences dialog box opens and you can make scan/preview settings. Preferences Dialog Box Close Closes ScanGear (scanner driver). Related Topic Scanning in Auto Scan Mode Page top Preferences Dialog Box Strana 516 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Preferences Dialog Box Preferences Dialog Box Click Preferences... in the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen to open Preferences dialog box. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to ScanGear (scanner driver) functions via the Scanner, Preview, Scan and Color Settings tabs. Scanner Tab Allows you to specify a folder to save images temporarily and a music file to play during or at the end of a scan. Scanner Tab Preview Tab Allows you to select what to do with Preview when ScanGear (scanner driver) is started and how to display cropping frames after previewing images. You can also select the cropping size for thumbnails of scanned documents. Preview Tab Scan Tab Allows you to select what to do with ScanGear (scanner driver) after scanning images. Scan Tab Color Settings Tab Allows you to select how to adjust color, and specify the monitor gamma value. Color Settings Tab Page top Scanner Tab Strana 517 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Scanner Tab Scanner Tab On the Scanner tab, you can specify the following settings. Quiet Mode Select this checkbox to reduce scanner sound by slowing down the scanner head when previewing or scanning documents. This checkbox is not selected by default. Note Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable this function. Select Folder Where Temporary Files are Saved Displays the folder in which to save images temporarily. To change the folder, click Browse... to specify another one. Sound Settings You can set the machine to play music during/at the end of a scan. Select the Play Music During Scanning or Play Sound When Scanning is Completed checkbox, then click Browse... and specify a sound file. You can specify the following files. - MIDI file (*.mid, *.rmi, *.midi) - Audio file (*.wav, *.aif, *.aiff) - MP3 file (*.mp3) Calibration Settings When you set Execute at Every Scan to ON, the scanner will be calibrated every time before previewing and scanning, to reproduce correct color tones in scanned images. Note Even when Execute at Every Scan is set to OFF, the scanner may be calibrated automatically in some cases (such as immediately after you turn the machine on). Calibration may take time depending on your computer. Scanner Tab Strana 518 z celkového počtu 684 Page top Preview Tab Strana 519 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Preview Tab Preview Tab On the Preview tab, you can specify the following settings. Preview at Start of ScanGear Select what to do with Preview when ScanGear (scanner driver) is started. Display Saved Preview Image is selected by default. Automatically Execute Preview ScanGear (scanner driver) will automatically start previewing at startup. Display Saved Preview Image The previously previewed image will be displayed. The Color Adjustment Button settings, the Toolbar settings, and the Advanced Mode tab settings are also saved. None No preview image will be displayed at startup. Note Select None if you do not want to save the preview image. Cropping Frame on Previewed Images Select how to display cropping frames after previewing images. Execute Auto Cropping on Previewed Images is selected by default. Execute Auto Cropping on Previewed Images The cropping frame will automatically be displayed in the document size after previewing. Display the Last Frame on Previewed Images A cropping frame of the same size as the last used cropping frame will be displayed after previewing. None Preview Tab Strana 520 z celkového počtu 684 No cropping frame will be displayed after previewing. Cropping Size for Thumbnail View Select the cropping size for thumbnails of scanned documents. Standard is selected by default. Larger Displays 105% (in width and height) of the area displayed for the standard size. Standard The standard size. Smaller Displays 95% (in width and height) of the area displayed for the standard size. Note When you change the Cropping Size for Thumbnail View setting, the preview images will be refreshed and cropped to the new size. As the preview images are refreshed, the color adjustments and other settings applied to them are reset. Page top Scan Tab Strana 521 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Scan Tab Scan Tab On the Scan tab, you can specify the following settings. Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning Select what to do with ScanGear (scanner driver) after scanning images. Close ScanGear automatically is selected by default. Close ScanGear automatically Select this to return to the original application when scanning is completed. Do not close ScanGear automatically Select this to return to the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen for another scan when scanning is completed. Display the dialog to select next action Select this to open a screen and select what to do when scanning is completed. Note Even if Do not close ScanGear automatically or Display the dialog to select next action is set, some applications may not support it. Page top Color Settings Tab Strana 522 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Color Settings Tab Color Settings Tab On the Color Settings tab, you can specify the following settings. Color Adjustment Select either of the following. Recommended is selected by default. This function is available when Color Mode is Color or Grayscale. Recommended Select this to vividly reproduce the tone of a document on the screen. It is recommended that you normally select this setting. Color Matching Select this to automatically match the scanner, monitor and color printer colors, thus reducing time and trouble to manually match the monitor and printer colors. Color Adjustment Buttons will be disabled. This function is available when Color Mode is Color. - Source(Scanner): Select scanner profile. - Target: Select target profile. - Monitor: Select this to display preview image with optimum correction for monitor. - Defaults: Returns to the default Color Matching settings. None Select this to disable color correction provided by ScanGear (scanner driver). Note Color Matching is available when ScanGear (scanner driver), monitor, color managementcompliant application (such as Adobe Photoshop) and printer are set up correctly. Refer to the corresponding manual for the monitor, printer and application settings. Monitor Gamma By setting the gamma value of a monitor, you can adjust the input data to the brightness characteristics of the monitor. Adjust the value if your monitor's gamma value does not match the Color Settings Tab Strana 523 z celkového počtu 684 default value set in ScanGear (scanner driver), and the colors of the original image are not accurately reflected in the monitor. Click Defaults to return to the default Monitor Gamma value (2.20). Note Refer to the manual of your monitor to check its gamma value. If it is not written in the manual, contact the manufacturer. Page top Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning Strana 524 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning Adjusting the cropping frame (scan area) Adjusting Cropping Frames Selecting the best resolution Resolution Learning about file formats File Formats Learning about Color Matching Color Matching Matching the colors between the document and monitor See Monitor Gamma in the following section. Color Settings Tab Page top Adjusting Cropping Frames Strana 525 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning > Adjusting Cropping Frames Adjusting Cropping Frames You can specify the scan area by creating a cropping frame on the image displayed in the Preview area of the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen. When you click Scan, only the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned and passed to the application. Cropping Frame Types (1) Focus Cropping Frame (rotating thick broken lines) The settings in Basic Mode or Advanced Mode will be applied. (2) Selected Cropping Frame (stationary thick broken lines) The settings will be applied to the Focus Cropping Frame and Selected Cropping Frames simultaneously. You can select multiple cropping frames by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key. (3) Unselected Cropping Frame (stationary thin broken lines) The settings will not be applied. Note Focus Cropping Frame and Selected Cropping Frames are displayed in whole image view. Initial Cropping Frame In thumbnail view Cropping frame is not displayed initially. Drag the mouse over a frame to create a cropping frame. In whole image view A cropping frame (Focus Cropping Frame) is displayed automatically around the preview image according to the document size. You can also create a cropping frame by dragging the mouse in the Preview area. Note Cropping frames are set according to the document size (Auto Crop) by default. For details, see Cropping Frame on Previewed Images in " Preview Tab " (Preferences dialog box). Adjusting a Cropping Frame (Arrow) when it is positioned over a cropping frame. If you The cursor will change into click and drag the mouse in the direction of the arrow, the cropping frame will expand or contract accordingly. Adjusting Cropping Frames Strana 526 z celkového počtu 684 (Crosshair arrow) when it is positioned within a cropping frame. Click The cursor will change into and drag the mouse to move the entire cropping frame. Note In Advanced Mode, you can specify the cropping frame size by entering the values into Width and Height in Input Settings. Input Settings (Switch Aspect Ratio). However, You can rotate a cropping frame 90 degrees by clicking (Switch Aspect Ratio) is not available when Output Size is Flexible. Creating Multiple Cropping Frames In thumbnail view You can only create one cropping frame per image. In whole image view Click and drag the mouse in a space outside the existing cropping frame to create a new cropping frame in the Preview area. The new cropping frame will be the Focus Cropping Frame, and the old cropping frame will be the Unselected Cropping Frame. Adjusting Cropping Frames Strana 527 z celkového počtu 684 You can create multiple cropping frames and apply different scan settings to each cropping frame. You can also select multiple cropping frames by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key. If you select multiple cropping frames and change the settings on a tab at the right of ScanGear (scanner driver), the settings will be applied to all the selected cropping frames. When you create a new cropping frame, it retains the settings of the latest cropping frame. Note Create up to 12 cropping frames. Scanning takes longer than usual when multiple cropping frames are selected. Deleting Cropping Frames In thumbnail view To delete a cropping frame, click an area outside the cropping frame on an image. In whole image view To delete a cropping frame, select it and click Alternatively, press the Delete key. (Remove Cropping Frame) on the Toolbar. When there are multiple cropping frames, all the selected cropping frames (Focus Cropping Frame and Selected Cropping Frames) are deleted simultaneously. Page top Resolution Strana 528 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning > Resolution Resolution What is Resolution? The data in the image you have scanned is a collection of dots carrying information about brightness and color. The density of these dots is called "resolution", and resolution will determine the amount of detail your image contains. The unit of resolution is dots per inch (dpi). Dpi is the number of dots per square inch (2.54 cm square). The higher the resolution (value), the more detail in your image; the lower the resolution (value), the less detail. Setting the Resolution in MP Navigator EX In MP Navigator EX, you can specify the resolution with Scanning Resolution in the Scan Settings dialog box. Images for Printing Images to be printed should be scanned at a resolution that corresponds to the resolution of the printer. For example, if you want to print using a 600 dpi black and white printer, you should set the resolution to 600 dpi. With a color printer, specifying the resolution at half the resolution of the printer should be fine. For example, if you want to print scanned paper/photos using a 600 dpi color printer, you should set the resolution to 300 dpi. However, with a high-resolution printer, printing takes longer than usual if you set the resolution to half the resolution of the printer. Example of Appropriate Resolution when Printing to Scale If you print a document at twice the size both vertically and horizontally, the resolution of the document will be reduced by half. If the resolution of the original document is 300 dpi, the resolution of the enlarged document will be 150 dpi. If you print the document with a 600 dpi color printer, the lack of detail in the image may be obvious. In that case, if you scan at the Scanning Resolution of 600 dpi, the resolution will be 300 dpi even if you double the size of document and you can print the document with sufficient quality. Conversely, if you print a document at half scale, it should be sufficient to scan at half the resolution. When Printing Color Photos at Twice the Size Document resolution: 300 dpi Scanning resolution: 600 dpi Scale: 200% Print at twice the size Scanning resolution/actual scanning resolution: 600 dpi Printing resolution: 300 dpi Setting the Resolution in ScanGear (Scanner Driver) In ScanGear (scanner driver), you can specify the resolution with Output Resolution in Output Settings on Resolution Strana 529 z celkového počtu 684 the Advanced Mode tab. Example of Appropriate Resolution when Printing to Scale The scanning resolution is automatically set so that the value set in Output Resolution will be the resolution of the scanned image. If you set Output Resolution to 300 dpi and scan at twice the size, the document will be automatically scanned at 600 dpi, and the resolution of the scanned image will be 300 dpi. You can print the document with sufficient quality using a 600 dpi color printer. When Printing L Size (8.9 cm x 12.7 cm) Photos at Twice the Size Document resolution: 300 dpi Output resolution: 300 dpi Scale: 200% Scan at twice the size Actual scanning resolution: 600 Image resolution/printing resolution: 300 dpi dpi Appropriate Resolution Settings Set the resolution according to the use of the scanned image. For displaying on a monitor: 150 dpi For printing: 300 dpi When Output Size is set to Flexible in ScanGear's Advanced Mode tab (Select Source is Platen and the scale is 100%): Document Use Color Mode Output Resolution Copying (Printing) Color 300 dpi Creating a postcard Color 300 dpi Saving to a computer Color 75 dpi - 300 dpi Using on a website or attaching to e-mail Color 75 dpi - 150 dpi Black and white photo Saving to a computer Grayscale 75 dpi - 300 dpi Using on a website or attaching to e-mail Grayscale 75 dpi - 300 dpi Text document Copying Color, Grayscale or Black and White 300 dpi Attaching to e-mail Color, Grayscale or Black and White 300 dpi Color photo Important If you double the resolution, the file size quadruples. If the file is too large, the processing speed will slow down significantly, and you will experience inconvenience such as lack of memory. Set the minimum required resolution according to the use of the image. Note Although you can change Output Resolution in ScanGear (scanner driver), it is recommended that you scan at the default value. Page top File Formats Strana 530 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning > File Formats File Formats You can select a file format when saving scanned images. You should specify the most suitable format according to how you want to use the image on which application. Available file formats vary by application and computer (Windows or Macintosh). See below for the characteristics of each image file format. BMP (Standard File Extension: .bmp) A standard file format for Windows. BMP is often selected for images that are used only on Windows. JPEG (Standard File Extension: .jpg) A file format often used on websites and for digital camera images. JPEG features high compression rates. JPEG images slightly degrade every time they are saved, and cannot be returned to their original state. JPEG is not available for black and white images. Exif (Standard File Extension: .jpg) A file format supported by many digital cameras. It adds information such as the date of image capture, camera model, shutter speed, shooting mode and comments to JPEG files. The file format version must be Exif 2.2 or later in order to print on a Direct Print compatible printer. TIFF (Standard File Extension: .tif) A file format featuring a relatively high compatibility between various computers and applications. (Some TIFF files are incompatible.) TIFF is suitable for editing saved images. Note MP Navigator EX supports the following TIFF file formats. - Uncompressed, black and white binary - Uncompressed, RGB (8 bits per channel) - Uncompressed, YCC (8 bits per component) - Uncompressed, RGB (16 bits per channel) - Uncompressed, YCC (16 bits per component) - Uncompressed, Grayscale PDF (Standard File Extension: .pdf) A file format developed by Adobe Systems. It can be used on various computers and operating systems. Therefore, PDF files can be exchanged between people who use different operating systems, fonts, etc. regardless of the differences. Important Only PDF files created with MP Navigator EX are supported. PDF files created or edited in other applications are not supported. Page top Color Matching Strana 531 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning > Color Matching Color Matching Color Matching adjusts devices as shown below to match the colors of an image displayed on a monitor or a printed image with the colors of the original document. Example: When sRGB is selected as the output profile (target) Input Profile (Source) Scanner ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Output Profile (Target) sRGB OS Application Application Printer Driver Monitor Printer ScanGear (scanner driver) converts the image's color space from the scanner's color space to sRGB. When displaying on a monitor, the image's color space is converted from sRGB to the monitor's color space based on the operating system's monitor settings and the application's working space settings. When printing, the image's color space is converted from sRGB to the printer's color space based on the application's print settings and the printer driver's settings. Page top Ďalšie skenovacie postupy Strana 532 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Skenovanie > Ďalšie skenovacie postupy Ďalšie skenovacie postupy Skenovanie pomocou ovládača WIA Skenovanie pomocou ovládacieho panela (iba pre systém Windows XP) Na začiatok strany Scanning with WIA Driver Strana 533 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Other Scanning Methods > Scanning with WIA Driver Scanning with WIA Driver You can scan an image from a WIA-compliant application and use the image in that application. The procedure varies depending on the application. The following procedures are examples only. For details, refer to the application's manual. Important In Windows 2000, you cannot scan using the WIA driver. Scanning with WIA Driver 2.0 The following is an example of scanning using Windows Photo Gallery. 1. Place the document on the Platen. Placing Documents 2. In File, click Import from Camera or Scanner..., then double-click WIA Canon (model name). The scan setting screen appears. 3. Specify the settings. Scanner The currently set product name is displayed. To change the scanner, click Change... and select the product you want to use. Profile Select Photo (Default) or Documents according to the document to be scanned. To save a new Profile, select Add profile.... You can specify the details in the Add New Profile dialog box. Source Select a scanner type. Paper size This setting is not available for this machine. Color format Select how to scan the document. Scanning with WIA Driver Strana 534 z celkového počtu 684 File type Select a file format from JPEG, BMP, PNG and TIFF. Resolution (DPI) Enter the resolution. Specify a value between 50 dpi and 600 dpi. 300 dpi is set by default. Resolution Brightness Move the slider to adjust the brightness. Move it to the left to darken and right to brighten the image. You can also enter a value (-100 to 100). Contrast Move the slider to adjust the contrast. Moving it to the left will decrease the contrast of the image, thus softening the image. Moving it to the right will increase the contrast of the image, thus sharpening the image. You can also enter a value (-100 to 100). Preview or scan images as separate files Select this checkbox to preview or scan multiple images as separate files. See how to scan a picture Click to open Windows Help and Support. 4. Click Preview to preview the image. The preview image appears on the right. 5. Click Scan. When scanning is completed, the scanned image appears in the application. Scanning with WIA Driver 1.0 The following is an example of scanning using Paint. 1. Place the document on the Platen. Placing Documents 2. In File, click From Scanner or Camera.... (Select the command to scan a document in the application.) 3. Select an image type according to the document to be scanned. Note To scan with the values previously set in Adjust the quality of the scanned picture, select Custom Settings. 4. Click Adjust the quality of the scanned picture and set the preferences as required. Scanning with WIA Driver Strana 535 z celkového počtu 684 Brightness Move the slider to adjust the brightness. Move it to the left to darken and right to brighten the image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127). Contrast Move the slider to adjust the contrast. Moving it to the left will decrease the contrast of the image, thus softening the image. Moving it to the right will increase the contrast of the image, thus sharpening the image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127). Resolution (DPI) Enter the resolution. Specify a value between 50 dpi and 600 dpi. Resolution Picture type Select the type of scan you want for your document. Reset Click to restore the original settings. 5. Click Preview to preview the image. The preview image appears on the right. Drag to specify the scan area. 6. Click Scan. When scanning is completed, the scanned image appears in the application. Page top Scanning Using the Control Panel (Windows XP Only) Strana 536 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Scanning > Other Scanning Methods > Scanning Using the Control Panel (Windows XP Only) Scanning Using the Control Panel (Windows XP Only) You can scan images via the Control Panel of Windows XP using the WIA driver. Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) is a driver model implemented in Windows XP. It allows you to scan documents without using an application. Scan documents from a TWAIN-compliant application to specify advanced settings for scanning. 1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel. 2. Click Printers and Other Hardware > Scanners and Cameras, then double-click WIA Canon (model name). The Scanner and Camera Wizard dialog box opens. 3. Click Next. 4. Select Picture type according to the document to be scanned. Note To scan with the values previously set in Custom Settings, select Custom. 5. Click Custom Settings to set the preferences as required. Brightness Move the slider to adjust the brightness. Move it to the left to darken and right to brighten the image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127). Scanning Using the Control Panel (Windows XP Only) Strana 537 z celkového počtu 684 Contrast Move the slider to adjust the contrast. Moving it to the left will decrease the contrast of the image, thus softening the image. Moving it to the right will increase the contrast of the image, thus sharpening the image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127). Resolution (DPI) Enter the resolution. Specify a value between 50 dpi and 600 dpi. Resolution Picture type Select the type of scan you want for your document. Reset Click to restore the original settings. 6. Click Preview to preview the image. The preview image appears on the right. Drag to specify the scan area. 7. Click Next and follow the instructions. Page top Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre zariade... Strana 538 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) Na začiatok strany Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre zariade... Strana 539 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) > Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) Informácie o nastaveniach tlače pomocou štandardu PictBridge (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) Na začiatok strany Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre zariade... Strana 540 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) > Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) > Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) Pomocou kábla USB odporúčaného výrobcom zariadenia môžete pripojiť zariadenie kompatibilné so štandardom PictBridge, napríklad digitálny fotoaparát, kamkordér alebo mobilný telefón, k multifunkčnému zariadeniu a tlačiť zaznamenané obrázky priamo bez použitia počítača. Poznámka Pri tlači fotografií so zariadením kompatibilným so štandardom PictBridge pripojeným k multifunkčnému zariadeniu odporúčame používať sieťový adaptér dodaný s kompatibilným zaradením. Ak používate batériu kompatibilného zariadenia, skontrolujte, či je úplne nabitá. V závislosti od modelu alebo značky multifunkčného zariadenia možno budete musieť pred pripojením kompatibilného zariadenia vybrať režim tlače kompatibilný so štandardom PictBridge. Po pripojení k multifunkčnému zariadeniu budete možno musieť ručne zapnúť kompatibilné zariadenie alebo vybrať režim prehrávania. Pred pripojením k multifunkčnému zariadeniu vykonajte na zariadení kompatibilnom so štandardom PictBridge všetky potrebné operácie podľa pokynov v príručke tohto kompatibilného zariadenia. 1. Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie zapnuté. 2. Vložte papier do zadného zásobníka. 3. Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie kompatibilné so štandardnom PictBridge vypnuté. 4. Pripojte zariadenie kompatibilné so štandardom PictBridge k multifunkčnému zariadeniu pomocou kábla USB (A) odporúčaného výrobcom kompatibilného zariadenia. Zariadenie kompatibilné so štandardnom PictBridge sa zapne automaticky. Ak sa nezapne automaticky, zapnite ho ručne. Ak je multifunkčné zariadenie správne pripojené ku kompatibilnému zariadeniu, na displeji LED sa zobrazí písmeno c a na displeji LCD kompatibilného zariadenia sa zobrazí hlásenie, že je multifunkčné zariadenie pripojené. Pozrite si príručku k zariadeniu. Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre zariade... Strana 541 z celkového počtu 684 5. Zadajte nastavenia tlače, napríklad typ papiera a rozloženie. Na zadanie nastavenia môžete použiť ponuku na displeji LCD zariadenia kompatibilného so štandardom PictBridge. Vyberte typ a veľkosť papiera vloženého do multifunkčného zariadenia. Nastavenia v zariadení kompatibilnom so štandardom PictBridge 6. Spustite tlač zo zariadenia kompatibilného so štandardom PictBridge. Dôležité Nikdy neodpájajte kábel USB počas tlače, ak to výslovne neumožňuje zariadenie kompatibilné so štandardom PictBridge. Pri odpájaní kábla USB medzi zariadením kompatibilným so štandardom PictBridge a multifunkčným zariadením postupujte podľa pokynov uvedených v príručke kompatibilného zariadenia. Na začiatok strany Informácie o nastaveniach tlače pomocou štandardu PictBridge (le... Strana 542 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) > Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) > Informácie o nastaveniach tlače pomocou štandardu PictBridge (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) Informácie o nastaveniach tlače pomocou štandardu PictBridge (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) Nastavenia v zariadení kompatibilnom so štandardom PictBridge Táto časť opisuje funkciu PictBridge multifunkčného zariadenia. Informácie o nastavení zariadenia kompatibilného so štandardom PictBridge nájdete v príručke dodanej s týmto zariadením. Poznámka V nasledujúcom opise sa názvy položiek nastavenia uvádzajú podľa položiek používaných v zariadeniach kompatibilných so štandardom PictBridge od spoločnosti Canon. Názvy položiek nastavenia sa môžu líšiť v závislosti od značky a modelu vášho zariadenia. Niektoré položky nastavenia vysvetlené v nasledujúcej časti nemusia byť na niektorých zariadeniach dostupné. Ak v kompatibilnom zariadení nemožno zmeniť nastavenia tlače, multifunkčné zariadenie vytlačí fotografie použitím nasledujúcich nastavení: Veľkosť papiera: 4" x 6"/101,6 x 152,4 mm Typ papiera: Photo Tlač s okrajmi/bez okrajov: podľa nastavenia fotoaparátu Rozloženie: 1 na strane Kvalita tlače: štandardná Optimalizácia obrazu: na optimalizáciu tlače sa použije funkcia Photo Optimizer PRO. Táto časť opisuje nastavenia tlače v zariadení kompatibilnom so štandardom PictBridge. Pri ovládaní zariadenia postupujte podľa pokynov uvedených v príručke k zariadeniu. Veľkosť papiera (Paper Size) 4 x 6 palcov/10 x 15 cm, 5 x 7 palcov*1, 8 x 10 palcov/20 x 25 cm, A4, 8, 5 x 11 palcov (Letter), 4 x 7,1 palca/10,1 x 18 cm*2 *1 Môže sa vybrať len na niektorých zariadeniach kompatibilných so štandardom PictBridge značky Canon. (V závislosti od zariadenia sa nemusí dať vybrať.) *2 Na zariadení kompatibilnom so štandardom PictBridge od inej spoločnosti ako spoločnosť Canon sa môže zobraziť symbol Hi Vision. Typ papiera (Paper type) Predvolené nastavenie (Default): Photo Paper Plus Glossy II PP- 201 Fotografický papier (Photo): Photo Paper Plus Glossy II PP-201/Glossy Photo Paper „na každodenné použitie“ GP-501/Photo Paper Glossy GP-502/Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss SG-201 Fotografický papier na rýchlu tlač (Fast Photo): Photo Paper Pro II PR-201 Obyčajný papier (Plain): A4/Letter Ak je položka Paper type nastavená na možnosť Plain, tlač bez okrajov bude vypnutá aj v prípade, ak je položka Layout nastavená na možnosť Borderless. Rozloženie (Layout) Predvolené nastavenie (Bez okrajov) (Default (Borderless)), Zoznam (Index), S okrajmi (Bordered), Bez okrajov (Borderless), 4 na strane (4 -up)* * Rozloženie kompatibilné s papierom veľkosti A4/Letter. Tlač dátumu a č. súboru (Print date & file no.) Predvolené nastavenie (Default) (Vypnuté: Netlačí sa (Off: No printing)), Dátum (Date), Č. súboru (File No.), Oba (Both), Vypnuté (Off) Optimalizácia obrazu (Image optimize) Predvolené nastavenie (Default)*1, Zapnuté (On) (tlač Exif Print), Vypnuté (Off), Tvár (Face)*2, Červené oči (Red eye)*2 *1 Fotografie sa optimalizujú pre tlač pomocou funkcie Optimalizácia Informácie o nastaveniach tlače pomocou štandardu PictBridge (le... Strana 543 z celkového počtu 684 fotografií pro (Photo optimizer pro). *2 Môže sa vybrať len na niektorých zariadeniach kompatibilných so štandardom PictBridge značky Canon. (V závislosti od zariadenia sa nemusí dať vybrať.) Orezanie (Trimming) Predvolené nastavenie (Default) (Vypnuté: Bez orezania (Off: No trimming)), Zapnuté (On) (postupujte podľa nastavenia fotoaparátu), Vypnuté (Off) Na začiatok strany Údržba Strana 544 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Údržba Údržba Čistenie zariadenia Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy Vykonávanie údržby z počítača Na začiatok strany Čistenie zariadenia Strana 545 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Údržba > Čistenie zariadenia Čistenie zariadenia Čistenie Čistenie vonkajších častí zariadenia Čistenie plochého predlohového skla a krytu dokumentov Na začiatok strany Čistenie Strana 546 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Údržba > Čistenie zariadenia > Čistenie Čistenie Táto časť opisuje postup čistenia, ktoré je potrebné na údržbu zariadenia. Dôležité Na čistenie vonkajších častí zariadenia nepoužívajte toaletný papier, papierové utierky, hrubé tkaniny ani podobné materiály, aby ste nepoškriabali povrch. Používajte mäkkú handričku. Na čistenie zariadenia nikdy nepoužívajte prchavé kvapaliny ako riedidlo, benzén, acetón ani iné chemické čistidlá, pretože môžu spôsobiť poruchu zariadenia alebo poškodenie jeho povrchu. Čistenie vonkajších častí zariadenia Čistenie plochého predlohového skla a krytu dokumentov Na začiatok strany Čistenie vonkajších častí zariadenia Strana 547 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Údržba > Čistenie zariadenia > Čistenie vonkajších častí zariadenia Čistenie vonkajších častí zariadenia Použite mäkkú handričku na čistenie okuliarov a opatrne ňou utrite nečistoty na povrchu. V prípade potreby pred čistením vyhlaďte záhyby na handričke. Dôležité Pred čistením vždy vypnite zariadenie a vytiahnite zástrčku napájacieho kábla z elektrickej siete. Nepoužívajte toaletný papier, papierové utierky, hrubé tkaniny ani podobné materiály, pretože by mohli poškriabať povrch. Na začiatok strany Čistenie plochého predlohového skla a krytu dokumentov Strana 548 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Údržba > Čistenie zariadenia > Čistenie plochého predlohového skla a krytu dokumentov Čistenie plochého predlohového skla a krytu dokumentov Dôležité Pred čistením vždy vypnite zariadenie a vytiahnite zástrčku napájacieho kábla z elektrickej siete. Čistou mäkkou handričkou, ktorá nepúšťa vlákna, jemne utrite ploché predlohové sklo (A) a vnútornú stranu krytu dokumentov (bielu plochu) (B). Dávajte pozor, aby najmä na plochom predlohovom skle nezostali žiadne zvyšky. Dôležité Vnútorná strana krytu dokumentov (biela plocha) (B) sa môže ľahko poškodiť, a preto ju utierajte opatrne. Na začiatok strany Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy Strana 549 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Údržba > Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy Na začiatok strany Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy Strana 550 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Údržba > Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy > Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy Ak sa rovné čiary vytlačia nezarovnané alebo ak je výsledok tlače neuspokojivý, upravte polohu tlačovej hlavy. Poznámka Ak je v kazete nedostatok atramentu, hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy sa nevytlačí správne. Vymeňte kazety FINE, v ktorých je nedostatok atramentu. Bežná údržba 1. Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie zapnuté. 2. Do zadného zásobníka vložte obyčajný papier veľkosti A4 alebo Letter. 3. Opatrne otvorte výstupný zásobník papiera a potom aj jeho vysúvaciu časť. 4. Vytlačte hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy. 1. Opakovane stláčajte tlačidlo Údržba (Maintenance) , kým sa nezobrazí malé písmeno u. 2. Stlačte tlačidlo Čiernobielo (Black) alebo Farebne (Color) . Vytlačí sa hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy. Dôležité Na hárku na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy sa nedotýkajte vytlačených častí. Hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy nezašpiňte. Ak sa hárok zašpiní alebo pokrčí, vzorka sa nemusí správne naskenovať. 5. Naskenovaním hárka nastavte polohu tlačovej hlavy. Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy Strana 551 z celkového počtu 684 1. Položte hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy na ploché predlohové sklo a potom opatrne zatvorte kryt dokumentov. Hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy položte vytlačenou stranou SMEROM NADOL a značku alebo jeho ľavý horný roh zarovnajte so značkou zarovnania ( ). 2. Skontrolujte, či sa na displeji LED zobrazilo veľké písmeno U, a stlačte tlačidlo Čiernobielo (Black) alebo Farebne (Color) . Hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy sa naskenuje a automaticky sa nastaví poloha tlačovej hlavy. Po nastavení polohy tlačovej hlavy sa displej LED vráti do pohotovostného režimu kopírovania. Odstráňte hárok z plochého predlohového skla. Dôležité Kým sa skenovanie nedokončí, neotvárajte kryt dokumentov ani nepremiestňujte vložený hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy. Ak automatické nastavenie polohy tlačovej hlavy zlyhá, na displeji LED sa zobrazí kód chyby. Na displeji LED sa zobrazuje kód chyby Poznámka Ak ani po nastavení polohy tlačovej hlavy podľa uvedeného postupu nie sú výsledky tlače uspokojivé, nastavte polohu tlačovej hlavy manuálne prostredníctvom počítača. Zarovnanie polohy tlačovej hlavy Ak chcete vytlačiť hodnoty aktuálneho nastavenia polohy tlačovej hlavy, na displeji LED zobrazte písmeno L a potom stlačte tlačidlo Čiernobielo (Black) alebo Farebne (Color) . Na začiatok strany Vykonávanie údržby z počítača Strana 552 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Údržba > Vykonávanie údržby z počítača Vykonávanie údržby z počítača Čistenie tlačových hláv Čistenie valčekov podávača papiera Zarovnanie polohy tlačovej hlavy Kontrola dýz tlačovej hlavy Čistenie vnútorných častí zariadenia Na začiatok strany Cleaning the Print Heads Strana 553 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Performing Maintenance from a Computer > Cleaning the Print Heads Cleaning the Print Heads The print head cleaning function allows you to unclog clogged nozzles in the print head. Perform print head cleaning if printing is faint or a specific color fails to print, even though there is enough ink. The procedure for cleaning the print heads is as follows: Cleaning 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Click Cleaning on the Maintenance tab The Print Head Cleaning dialog box opens. Follow the instruction shown in the dialog box. Click Initial Check Items to display the items you need to check before performing Cleaning. 3. Execute cleaning Make sure that the machine is on and then click Execute. Print head cleaning starts. 4. Complete cleaning The Nozzle Check dialog box opens after the confirmation message. 5. Check the results To check whether the print quality has improved, click Print Check Pattern. To cancel the check process, click Cancel. If cleaning the head once does not resolve the print head problem, clean it once more. Deep Cleaning Deep Cleaning is more thorough than cleaning. Perform deep cleaning when two Cleaning attempts do not resolve the print head problem. 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Click Deep Cleaning on the Maintenance tab The Deep Cleaning dialog box opens. Follow the instruction shown in the dialog box. Click Initial Check Items to display the items you need to check before performing Deep Cleaning. 3. Execute deep cleaning Make sure that the machine is on and then click Execute. Click OK when the confirmation message appears. Print head deep cleaning starts. 4. Complete deep cleaning The Nozzle Check dialog box opens after the confirmation message. Cleaning the Print Heads Strana 554 z celkového počtu 684 5. Check the results To check whether the print quality has improved, click Print Check Pattern. To cancel the check process, click Cancel. Important Cleaning consumes a small amount of ink. Deep Cleaning consumes a larger amount of ink than Cleaning. Cleaning the print heads frequently will rapidly deplete your printer's ink supply. Consequently, perform cleaning only when necessary. Note If there is no sign of improvement after Deep Cleaning, switch off the machine, wait 24 hours, and then perform Deep Cleaning again. If there is still no sign of improvement, refer to " Machine Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected ." Related Topic Checking the Print Head Nozzles Page top Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Strana 555 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Performing Maintenance from a Computer > Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Cleans the paper feed roller. Perform feed roller cleaning when there are paper particles sticking to the paper feed roller and paper is not fed properly. The procedure for performing the feed roller cleaning is as follows: Roller Cleaning 1. Prepare the machine Remove all sheets of paper from the rear tray. 2. Open the printer driver setup window 3. Click Roller Cleaning on the Maintenance tab The confirmation message appears. 4. Execute paper feed roller cleaning Make sure that the machine is on and click OK. Paper feed roller cleaning starts. 5. Complete paper feed roller cleaning After the rollers have stopped, follow the instruction in the message, load three sheets of plain paper into the rear tray, and click OK. Paper will be ejected and feed roller cleaning will be completed. Page top Aligning the Print Head Position Strana 556 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Performing Maintenance from a Computer > Aligning the Print Head Position Aligning the Print Head Position Print head alignment corrects the installation positions of the print head and improves deviated colors and lines. This machine supports two head alignment methods: automatic head alignment and manual head alignment. To perform automatic head alignment, refer to "Aligning the Print Head" in the manual: Basic Guide and then execute the function from the operation panel of the machine. The procedure for performing manual print head alignment is as follows: Print Head Alignment 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Click Custom Settings on the Maintenance tab The Custom Settings dialog box opens. 3. Switch head alignment to manual Check the Align heads manually check box. 4. Transmit the settings Click Send, and click OK when the confirmation message appears. 5. Click Print Head Alignment on the Maintenance tab The Start Print Head Alignment dialog box opens. 6. Load paper in the machine Load three sheets of A4 size or Letter size plain paper into the rear tray. 7. Execute head alignment Make sure that the machine is on and click Align Print Head. Follow the instruction in the message. 8. Check the printed pattern Enter the numbers of the patterns with the least amount of streaks in the associated boxes. Clicking the patterns with the least amount of streaks in the preview window, will automatically set their numbers in the associated boxes. Aligning the Print Head Position Strana 557 z celkového počtu 684 When you have entered all the necessary values, click OK. Note If it is difficult to pick the best pattern, pick the setting that produces the least noticeable vertical white streaks. (A) Less noticeable vertical white streaks (B) More noticeable vertical white streaks If it is difficult to pick the best pattern, pick the setting that produces the least noticeable horizontal white streaks. (A) Less noticeable horizontal white streaks (B) More noticeable horizontal white streaks 9. Confirm the displayed message and click OK The second pattern is printed. Important Do not open the Scanning Unit (Cover) while printing is in progress. 10. Check the printed pattern Enter the numbers of the patterns with the least amount of streaks in the associated boxes. Clicking the patterns with the least amount of streaks in the preview window, will automatically set their numbers in the associated boxes. Aligning the Print Head Position Strana 558 z celkového počtu 684 When you have entered all the necessary values, click OK. Note If it is difficult to pick the best pattern, pick the setting that produces the least noticeable vertical white streaks. (A) Less noticeable vertical white streaks (B) More noticeable vertical white streaks 11. Confirm the displayed message and click OK The third pattern is printed. Important Do not open the Scanning Unit (Cover) while printing is in progress. 12. Check the printed pattern Enter the numbers of the patterns with the least noticeable horizontal stripes in the associated boxes. Clicking the patterns with the least noticeable horizontal stripes in the preview window, will automatically set their numbers in the associated boxes. Aligning the Print Head Position Strana 559 z celkového počtu 684 When you have entered all the necessary values, click OK. Note If it is difficult to pick the best pattern, pick the setting that produces the least noticeable horizontal white stripes. (A) Less noticeable horizontal white stripes (B) More noticeable horizontal white stripes Note To print and check the current setting, open the Start Print Head Alignment dialog box, and click Print Alignment Value. Page top Checking the Print Head Nozzles Strana 560 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Performing Maintenance from a Computer > Checking the Print Head Nozzles Checking the Print Head Nozzles The nozzle check function allows you to check whether the print heads are working properly by printing a nozzle check pattern. Print the pattern if printing becomes faint, or if a specific color fails to print. The procedure for printing a nozzle check pattern is as follows: Nozzle Check 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Click Nozzle Check on the Maintenance tab The Nozzle Check dialog box opens. To display a list of items that you should check before printing the check pattern, click Initial Check Items. 3. Load paper in the machine Load a sheet of A4 size or Letter size plain paper into the rear tray. 4. Print a nozzle check pattern Make sure that the machine is on and click Print Check Pattern. The nozzle check pattern is printed. Click OK when the confirmation message appears. The Pattern Check dialog box opens. 5. Check the print result Check the print result. When the print result is normal, click Exit. If the print result is smudged or if there are any unprinted sections, click Cleaning to clean the print head. Related Topic Cleaning the Print Heads Page top Cleaning Inside the Machine Strana 561 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Performing Maintenance from a Computer > Cleaning Inside the Machine Cleaning Inside the Machine Perform bottom plate cleaning before you execute duplex printing to prevent smudges on the back side of the paper. Also perform bottom plate cleaning if ink smudges caused by something other than print data appear on the printed page. The procedure for performing bottom plate cleaning is as follows: Bottom Plate Cleaning 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Click Bottom Plate Cleaning on the Maintenance tab The Bottom Plate Cleaning dialog box opens. 3. Load paper in the machine As instructed in the dialog box, fold the A4 size or Letter size plain paper in half horizontally, and then unfold the sheet. Load the paper into the rear tray in the portrait orientation with the crest of the crease facing down. 4. Perform the bottom plate cleaning Make sure that the machine is on and click Execute. Bottom plate cleaning starts. Page top Zmena nastavení zariadenia Strana 562 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Zmena nastavení zariadenia Zmena nastavení zariadenia Zmena nastavení zariadenia z počítača Na začiatok strany Zmena nastavení zariadenia z počítača Strana 563 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Zmena nastavení zariadenia > Zmena nastavení zariadenia z počítača Zmena nastavení zariadenia z počítača Zmena možností tlače Uloženie často používaného profilu tlače Nastavenie kazety s atramentom Riadenie napájania zariadenia Zníženie hluku zariadenia Zmena prevádzkového režimu zariadenia Na začiatok strany Changing the Print Options Strana 564 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer > Changing the Print Options Changing the Print Options You change the detailed print driver settings for print data that is sent from an application software. Specify this option if you encounter print failures such as part of an image data being cut off. The procedure for changing the print options is as follows: 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Click Print Options... on the Page Setup tab The Print Options dialog box opens. 3. Change the individual settings If necessary, change the setting of each item, and then click OK. The Page Setup tab is displayed again. Page top Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Strana 565 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer > Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile You can register the frequently used printing profile to Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab. Unnecessary printing profiles can be deleted at any time. The procedure for registering a printing profile is as follows: Registering a Printing Profile 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Set the necessary items From Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab, select the printing profile to be used and if necessary, change the settings after Additional Features. You can also set necessary items on the Main, Page Setup, and Effects tab. 3. Click Save... The Save Commonly Used Settings dialog box opens. 4. Save the settings Set Name, then click OK. If necessary, set the items in Options.... The printing profile is saved, and the Quick Setup tab is displayed again. The name and icon are added to the Commonly Used Settings list. Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Strana 566 z celkového počtu 684 Important To save the page size, orientation, and number of copies that was set in each sheet, click Options..., and check each item. Note When you install the printer driver again or upgrade the version of the printer driver, the print settings you registered will be deleted from Commonly Used Settings. Registered print settings cannot be saved and preserved. If a profile is deleted, register the print settings again. Deleting Unnecessary Printing Profile 1. Select the printing profile to be deleted Select the printing profile you want to delete from the Commonly Used Settings list on the Quick Setup tab. 2. Delete the printing profile Click Delete. When the confirmation message appears, click OK. The selected printing profile is deleted from the Commonly Used Settings list. Note Printing profiles that are registered in the initial settings cannot be deleted. Page top Setting the Ink Cartridge Strana 567 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer > Setting the Ink Cartridge Setting the Ink Cartridge This feature enables you to specify the most appropriate ink cartridge among installed cartridges according to an intended use. When one of the ink cartridges becomes empty and cannot be replaced immediately by a new one, you can specify the other ink cartridge that still has ink and continue printing. The procedure for specifying the ink cartridge is as follows: Ink Cartridge Settings 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Click Ink Cartridge Settings on the Maintenance tab The Ink Cartridge Settings dialog box appears. 3. Select the ink cartridge to be used Select the ink cartridge to be used for printing and click OK. The specified ink cartridge will be used from the next printing. Important When the following settings are specified, Black Only does not function because the machine uses the color ink cartridge to print documents. Other than Plain Paper, Hagaki A, Hagaki, or Envelope is selected for Media Type on the Main tab Borderless is selected from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab Do not detach an ink cartridge that is not in use. Printing cannot be performed while either ink cartridge is detached. Page top Managing the Machine Power Strana 568 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer > Managing the Machine Power Managing the Machine Power This function allows you to manage the machine power from the printer driver. The procedure for managing the printer power is as follows: Power Off The Power Off function turns off the machine. When you use this function, you will not be able to turn the machine on from the printer driver. 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Execute power off Click Power Off on the Maintenance tab. When the confirmation message appears, click OK. The machine power switches off, and the Maintenance tab is displayed again. Page top Reducing the Machine Noise Strana 569 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer > Reducing the Machine Noise Reducing the Machine Noise This function allows you to reduce the operating noise of the machine. Select when you wish to reduce the operating noise of the printer at night, etc. Using this function may lower the print speed. The procedure for using the quiet mode is as follows: Quiet Mode 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Click Quiet Mode on the Maintenance tab The Quiet Mode dialog box opens. 3. Set the quiet mode If necessary, specify one of the following items: Do not use quiet mode The operating noise of the machine is at normal volume. Always use quiet mode Select this option when you wish to reduce the operating noise of the machine. Use quiet mode within specified time The operating noise of the machine can be reduced during a specified period of time. Set the Start time and End time when you wish the quiet mode to be activated. Important The time specified in Start time and in End time must be different. 4. Transmit the settings Make sure that the machine is on and click Send. Click OK when the confirmation message appears. The settings are enabled hereafter. Note Depending on print quality settings, effects of the quiet mode may be less. Page top Changing the Machine Operation Mode Strana 570 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer > Changing the Machine Operation Mode Changing the Machine Operation Mode If necessary, switch between various modes of machine operation. The procedure for configuring settings is as follows: Custom Settings 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Make sure that the machine is on, and then click Custom Settings on the Maintenance tab The Custom Settings dialog box opens. Note If the machine is off or bi-directional communication is disabled, a message may appear because the computer cannot collect the machine status. If this happens, click OK to display the most recent settings specified on your computer. 3. If necessary, complete the following settings: Prevent paper abrasion The printer can increase the gap between the print head and the paper during high-density printing to prevent paper abrasion. Check this check box to use this function. Align heads manually The Print Head Alignment function on the Maintenance tab is normally set to automatic head alignment, but you can change it to manual head alignment. If the printing results are unsatisfactory even after you execute automatic head alignment, see " Aligning the Print Head Position ," and execute manual head alignment. Check this check box to perform the manual head alignment. Ink Drying Wait Time You can set the length of the machine rest time until printing of the next page begins. Moving the slider to the right increases the pause time and moving the slider to the left decreases the time. If the paper gets stained because the next page is ejected before the ink on the printed page dries, increase the ink drying wait time. Reducing the ink drying wait time speeds up printing. 4. Transmit the settings Click Send, and click OK when the confirmation message appears. The machine operates with the modified settings hereafter. Page top Riešenie problémov Strana 571 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov Riešenie problémov Ak sa objaví chyba Zariadenie sa nedá zapnúť Na displeji LED sa zobrazuje kód chyby Na displeji LED nie je nič zobrazené Nedajú sa nainštalovať ovládače MP Drivers Nedá sa správne pripojiť k počítaču Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé Tlač sa nespustí Kopírovanie alebo tlač sa zastaví ešte pred dokončením Zariadenie pracuje, ale atrament sa nevystrekuje Rýchlosť tlače nie je taká, ako by sa očakávalo Držiak kazety FINE sa neposúva na miesto vyhradené na výmenu Papier sa správne nepodáva Zaseknutý papier Na obrazovke počítača sa zobrazuje hlásenie Pre používateľov systému Windows Na zariadení kompatibilnom so štandardom PictBridge sa zobrazuje chybové hlásenie (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) Problémy pri skenovaní Problémy so softvérom Problémy s programom MP Navigator EX Ak problém nemožno vyriešiť Často kladené otázky Pokyny na používanie (ovládač tlačiarne) Všeobecné poznámky (ovládač skenera) Na začiatok strany Ak sa objaví chyba Strana 572 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Ak sa objaví chyba Ak sa objaví chyba Ak sa pri tlači objaví chyba, napríklad sa v tlačiarni minie alebo zasekne papier, automaticky sa zobrazí hlásenie s návodom na riešenie problému. Vykonajte príslušné opatrenia uvedené v hlásení. Hlásenie sa môže líšiť v závislosti od verzie operačného systému. V systéme Mac OS X v.10.5.x: V systéme Mac OS X v.10.4.x alebo Mac OS X v.10.3.9: Ak sa objaví chyba Strana 573 z celkového počtu 684 Na začiatok strany Zariadenie sa nedá zapnúť Strana 574 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Zariadenie sa nedá zapnúť Zariadenie sa nedá zapnúť Kontrola č. 1: Stlačte tlačidlo ZAP. (ON). Kontrola č. 2: Skontrolujte, či je zástrčka napájacieho kábla bezpečne zasunutá do konektora napájacieho kábla na zariadení, a potom zariadenie znovu zapnite. Kontrola č. 3: Odpojte zariadenie od napájacieho zdroja, potom ho znova pripojte a približne po dvoch minútach znova zapnite. Ak sa problém nevyriešil, obráťte sa na servisné stredisko. Na začiatok strany Na displeji LED sa zobrazuje kód chyby Strana 575 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Na displeji LED sa zobrazuje kód chyby Na displeji LED sa zobrazuje kód chyby Indikátor Alarm svieti na oranžovo Keď nastane chyba, indikátor Alarm sa rozsvieti na oranžovo a na displeji LED sa striedavo zobrazujú písmeno E a číslo (kód chyby). Skontrolujte kód chyby zobrazený na displeji LED a vykonajte príslušné opatrenie na jej odstránenie. * Pri niektorých chybách sa indikátor Alarm nerozsvieti. Kód chyby Príčina Opatrenie E, 0, 2 V zariadení sa minul papier. / Papier sa nepodáva. Správne vložte papier do zadného zásobníka a stlačte tlačidlo Čiernobielo (Black) alebo Farebne (Color) . E, 0, 3 Výstupný zásobník papiera je zatvorený./Došlo k zaseknutiu papiera. Ak je výstupný zásobník papiera zatvorený, otvorte ho. Zariadenie obnoví tlač. Ak sa otvorením výstupného zásobníka papiera problém nevyriešil alebo ak tlač začala s otvoreným zásobníkom, znamená to, že sa mohol zaseknúť papier. Odstráňte zaseknutý papier, do tlačiarne správne vložte nový papier a potom stlačte tlačidlo Čiernobielo (Black) alebo Farebne (Color) . Zaseknutý papier E, 0, 4 E, 0, 5 Nemožno rozpoznať kazetu FINE. Kazeta FINE je možno nesprávne vložená alebo nekompatibilná s týmto zariadením. Otvorte skenovaciu jednotku (kryt) a vložte vhodnú kazetu FINE. Ak sa chyba neodstránila, obráťte sa na servisné stredisko. E, 0, 7 Kazeta FINE nie je vložená na správnom mieste. Skontrolujte, či sú všetky kazety FINE vložené na správnych miestach. Bežná údržba E, 0, 8 Absorbér odpadového atramentu je takmer plný. V tlači pokračujte stlačením tlačidla Čiernobielo (Black) alebo Farebne (Color) na zariadení. Obráťte sa na servisné stredisko. E, 0, 9 Multifunkčné zariadenie nedostalo odpoveď od digitálneho fotoaparátu. Pripojený digitálny fotoaparát alebo digitálny kamkordér nie je kompatibilný s týmto multifunkčným zariadením. (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) Skontrolujte zariadenie pripojené k multifunkčnému zariadeniu. Priama tlač fotografií je možná len pomocou zariadenia kompatibilného so štandardom PictBridge. Ak určitá operácia alebo prenos údajov trvá príliš dlho, môže vypršať časový limit. Môže to spôsobiť zrušenie tlače. V takých prípadoch odpojte a znovu pripojte kábel USB. V závislosti od typu alebo značky zariadenia kompatibilného so štandardom PictBridge Na displeji LED sa zobrazuje kód chyby Strana 576 z celkového počtu 684 možno budete musieť pred jeho pripojením k multifunkčnému zariadeniu a tlačou vybrať režim tlače kompatibilný so štandardom PictBridge. Po pripojení k multifunkčnému zariadeniu budete možno musieť ručne zapnúť kompatibilné zariadenie alebo vybrať režim prehrávania. Pred pripojením vykonajte nevyhnutné opatrenia, ktoré sú opísané v príručke k zariadeniu. Ak sa problém stále neodstránil, skontrolujte, či možno vytlačiť inú fotografiu. E, 1, 3 Nemožno zistiť hladinu atramentu. Tlačiareň pravdepodobne nemá dostatok atramentu. Funkcia rozpoznávania hladiny zostávajúceho atramentu bude vypnutá pretože hladinu atramentu nie je možné správne rozpoznať. Ak chcete pokračovať v tlači bez tejto funkcie, stlačte a podržte tlačidlo [Stop/Reset] (Zastaviť /Vymazať) po dobu aspoň 5 sekúnd. Spoločnosť Canon odporúča použiť na dosiahnutie optimálnej kvality nové originálne kazety Canon. Spoločnosť Canon nenesie zodpovednosť za možné poruchy a poškodenia tlačiarne, zapríčinené tlačou s nedostatkom atramentu v kazete. E, 1, 4 Nemožno rozpoznať kazetu FINE. Kazeta FINE možno nie je kompatibilná s týmto zariadením. Vložte vhodnú kazetu FINE. Bežná údržba E, 1, 5 Nemožno rozpoznať kazetu FINE. Kazeta FINE možno nie je správne vložená. Otvorte skenovaciu jednotku (kryt) a správne vložte kazetu FINE. Bežná údržba E, 1, 6 Atrament došiel. Atrament došiel. Vymeňte atramentovú kazetu a zatvorte Skenovaciu jednotku (Kryt). Ak prebieha tlač a chcete v nej pokračovať, stlačte a podržte tlačidlo [Stop/Reset] (Zastaviť /Vymazať) aspoň 5 sekúnd bez toho, aby ste atramentovú kazetu vymenili. Tlač bude v tomto prípade pokračovať pri malom množstve atramentu. Funkcia rozpoznávania hladiny zostávajúceho atramentu bude vypnutá. Vymeňte prázdnu atramentovú kazetu ihneď po dokončení tlače. Ak budete pokračovať v tlači pri malom množstve atramentu, nebude výsledná kvalita tlače uspokojivá. E, 1, 9 (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) Zariadenie kompatibilné so štandardom PictBridge je pripojené prostredníctvom rozbočovača USB. Ak je zariadenie kompatibilné so štandardom PictBridge pripojené prostredníctvom rozbočovača USB, odstráňte rozbočovač a zariadenie pripojte priamo k multifunkčnému zariadeniu. E, 3, 0 Pri kopírovaní s prispôsobením strane sa nedá zistiť správna veľkosť pôvodného dokumentu alebo je dokument príliš Skontrolujte, či pôvodný dokument zodpovedá požiadavkám a či je správne položený na ploché predlohové sklo. Skontrolujte polohu a smer pôvodného dokumentu položeného na plochom Na displeji LED sa zobrazuje kód chyby Strana 577 z celkového počtu 684 predlohovom skle. malý. E, 3, 1 Zariadenie nie je pripojené k počítaču. Prepojte zariadenie a počítač pomocou kábla USB. E, 5, 0 Nepodarilo sa naskenovať hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy. Stlačením tlačidla Zastaviť/Vymazať (Stop/ Reset) zrušte chybu a potom vykonajte opatrenia uvedené nižšie. Skontrolujte, či je hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy nastavený v správnej polohe a so správnou orientáciou na plochom predlohovom skle. Skontrolujte, či ploché predlohové sklo a hárok na zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy nie sú znečistené. Skontrolujte, či sa typ a veľkosť položeného papiera hodia na automatické zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy. Na automatické zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy vždy používajte jeden hárok obyčajného papiera veľkosti A4 alebo Letter. Skontrolujte, či nie sú upchaté dýzy tlačovej hlavy. Podľa vytlačenej vzorky na kontrolu dýz skontrolujte stav tlačovej hlavy. Bežná údržba Ak sa chyba neodstránila, pripojte zariadenie k počítaču a zarovnajte tlačovú hlavu v ovládači tlačiarne. Zarovnanie polohy tlačovej hlavy Indikátory tlačiarne striedavo blikajú – indikátor Napájanie (Power) na zeleno a indikátor Alarm na oranžovo Ak indikátory Napájanie (Power) a Alarm striedavo blikajú, ako je znázornené nižšie, a na displeji LED sa striedavo zobrazujú písmeno P a číslo (kód chyby), pravdepodobne sa vyskytla chyba, ktorá vyžaduje servisný zásah. Kód chyby P, 0, 2 Opatrenie Zrušte tlač a vypnite zariadenie. Potom vyberte zaseknutý papier alebo ochranný materiál, ktorý bráni v pohybe držiaka kazety FINE, a znovu zapnite zariadenie. Dôležité Dávajte pozor, aby ste sa nedotkli častí vnútri zariadenia. Ak sa ich dotknete, zariadenie nemusí správne tlačiť. Ak sa problém nevyriešil, obráťte sa na servisné stredisko. P, *, * Hodnoty *, * závisia od chyby, ktorá sa vyskytla. Keď sa zobrazí kód P, 1, 0: Vypnite zariadenie a napájací kábel odpojte od zdroja napájania. Na displeji LED sa zobrazuje kód chyby Strana 578 z celkového počtu 684 Obráťte sa na servisné stredisko. Keď sa zobrazí kód P, 0, 3: Ak sa pred zariadením nachádza nejaký predmet, odstráňte ho. Opatrne otvorte výstupný zásobník papiera a potom vypnite a znova zapnite napájanie. V iných prípadoch: Vypnite zariadenie a napájací kábel odpojte od zdroja napájania. Zariadenie znova pripojte a zapnite. Ak sa problém nevyriešil, obráťte sa na servisné stredisko. Na začiatok strany Na displeji LED nie je nič zobrazené Strana 579 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Na displeji LED nie je nič zobrazené Na displeji LED nie je nič zobrazené Ak indikátor Napájanie (Power) nesvieti: Zariadenie nie je zapojené. Zapojte napájací kábel a stlačte tlačidlo ZAP. (ON). Ak indikátor Napájanie (Power) svieti: Displej LED je možno v režime šetriča displeja. Na ovládacom paneli stlačte iné tlačidlo než (ON). ZAP. Na začiatok strany Nedajú sa nainštalovať ovládače MP Drivers Strana 580 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Nedajú sa nainštalovať ovládače MP Drivers Nedajú sa nainštalovať ovládače MP Drivers Ak sa inštalácia nespustí ani po vložení disku Inštalačný disk CD-ROM (Setup CD-ROM) do diskovej jednotky počítača: Spustite inštaláciu podľa nasledujúceho postupu. 1. Kliknite na tlačidlo Štart (Start) a potom na položku Počítač (Computer). V systéme Windows XP kliknite na tlačidlo Štart (Start) a potom na položku Tento počítač (My Computer). V systéme Windows 2000 dvakrát kliknite na ikonu pracovnej ploche. Tento počítač (My Computer) na 2. V zobrazenom okne dvakrát kliknite na ikonu disku CD-ROM . Po zobrazení obsahu disku CD-ROM dvakrát kliknite na súbor MSETUP4.EXE. Dvojitým kliknutím na ikonu disku CD-ROM na pracovnej ploche spustite inštaláciu. Poznámka Ak sa ikona disku CD-ROM nezobrazí, skúste nasledujúce kroky: Vyberte disk CD-ROM z počítača a znovu ho vložte. Reštartujte počítač. Ak sa ikona nezobrazí, vyskúšajte iné disky a zistite, či sa zobrazia. Ak sa iné disky zobrazia, znamená to, že sa vyskytol problém s diskom Inštalačný disk CD-ROM (Setup CD-ROM) . V takom prípade sa obráťte na servisné stredisko. Ak nemôžete pokračovať za obrazovkou Printer Connection: Nedajú sa nainštalovať ovládače MP Drivers Strana 581 z celkového počtu 684 Ak nemôžete pokračovať za obrazovkou Printer Connection, skontrolujte, či je kábel USB pevne zasunutý do portu USB na zariadení a pripojený k počítaču, a potom podľa nižšie uvedeného postupu znovu nainštalujte ovládače MP Drivers. Poznámka V závislosti od používaného počítača sa v systéme Windows Vista môže zobraziť hlásenie Tlačiareň sa nezistila. Skontrolujte pripojenie. (The printer is not detected. Check the connection.). V takom prípade chvíľu počkajte. Ak stále nemôžete prejsť na ďalší krok, podľa postupu uvedeného nižšie opätovne nainštalujte ovládače MP Drivers. 1. Na obrazovke Printer Connection kliknite na tlačidlo Cancel. 2. Na obrazovke Installation Failure kliknite na tlačidlo Start Over. 3. Na nasledujúcej obrazovke kliknite na tlačidlo Back. 4. Na obrazovke PIXMA XXX kliknite na tlačidlo Exit a vyberte disk CD-ROM. 5. Vypnite zariadenie. 6. Reštartujte počítač. 7. Skontrolujte, či nie je spustený žiadny aplikačný softvér. 8. Znova vložte disk CD-ROM a spustením inštalácie Easy Install nainštalujte ovládače MP Drivers. V iných prípadoch: Podľa postupu uvedeného v inštalačnej príručke znovu nainštalujte ovládače MP Drivers. Ak sa ovládače MP Drivers nenainštalovali správne, odinštalujte ich, reštartujte počítač a potom ovládače znovu nainštalujte. Nedajú sa nainštalovať ovládače MP Drivers Strana 582 z celkového počtu 684 Odstránenie nepotrebných ovládačov MP Drivers Pri opätovnej inštalácii ovládačov MP Drivers spustite z disku Inštalačný disk CD-ROM (Setup CDROM) inštaláciu Custom Install a vyberte položku MP Drivers. Poznámka Ak musel byť inštalačný program ukončený kvôli chybe v systéme Windows, systém môže byť nestabilný a nemusí sa vám podariť nainštalovať ovládače. Pred opätovnou inštaláciou reštartujte počítač. Na začiatok strany Nedá sa správne pripojiť k počítaču Strana 583 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Nedá sa správne pripojiť k počítaču Nedá sa správne pripojiť k počítaču Rýchlosť tlače alebo skenovania je nízka/Pripojenie prostredníctvom rozhrania USB Hi- Speed nefunguje/ rýchlejšie“ Zobrazuje sa hlásenie „Toto zariadenie môže pracovať Ak vaše systémové prostredie nie je úplne kompatibilné s rozhraním Hi-Speed USB, zariadenie bude pracovať s nižšou rýchlosťou dostupnou pre rozhranie USB 1.1. V takom prípade zariadenie funguje správne, ale prenosová rýchlosť môže spomaľovať tlač. Kontrola: Kontrolou nasledujúcich podmienok sa presvedčte, či vaše systémové prostredie podporuje pripojenie prostredníctvom rozhrania Hi-Speed USB. Podporuje port USB na počítači pripojenie prostredníctvom rozhrania Hi-Speed USB? Podporujú používaný kábel USB a rozbočovač USB (ak ho používate) pripojenie prostredníctvom rozhrania Hi-Speed USB? Používajte certifikovaný kábel Hi-Speed USB. Odporúča sa používať kábel dlhý najviac 10 stôp/3 metre. Podporuje operačný systém vášho počítača pripojenie prostredníctvom rozhrania HiSpeed USB? Získajte najnovšiu verziu a nainštalujte ju do počítača. Pracuje ovládač rozhrania Hi-Speed USB správne? Získajte najnovšiu verziu ovládača rozhrania Hi-Speed USB kompatibilného s hardvérom a ovládač nainštalujte do počítača. Dôležité Podrobnosti o rozhraní Hi-Speed USB vášho systémového prostredia vám poskytne výrobca počítača, kábla USB alebo rozbočovača USB. Na začiatok strany Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé Strana 584 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé Ak výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé z dôvodu bielych pruhov, nezarovnaných čiar alebo nerovnomerných farieb, skontrolujte najprv nastavenia papiera a kvality tlače. Kontrola č. 1: Zhodujú sa nastavenia veľkosti strany a typu média s veľkosťou a typom vloženého papiera? Pokiaľ sú tieto nastavenia nesprávne, nemožno dosiahnuť správny výsledok tlače. Pri tlači fotografie alebo ilustrácie môže nesprávne nastavenie typu papiera znížiť kvalitu vytlačených farieb. Pri tlači s nesprávnym nastavením typu papiera sa môže vytlačený povrch taktiež poškriabať. Pri tlači bez okrajov môže v závislosti od kombinácie nastaveného typu papiera a vloženého papiera dôjsť k nerovnomernému rozloženiu farieb. Len pre zariadenie MP270 series Kopírovanie ovládané zo zariadenia Skontrolujte pomocou ovládacieho panela na zariadení. Kopírovanie Tlač zo zariadenia kompatibilného so štandardom PictBridge Skontrolujte pomocou zariadenia kompatibilného so štandardom PictBridge. Tlač fotografií priamo z kompatibilného zariadenia (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) Tlač z počítača Skontrolujte pomocou ovládača tlačiarne. Tlač pomocou inštalačného letáka Len pre zariadenie MP250 series Kopírovanie ovládané zo zariadenia Skontrolujte pomocou ovládacieho panela na zariadení. Kopírovanie Tlač z počítača Skontrolujte pomocou ovládača tlačiarne. Tlač pomocou inštalačného letáka Kontrola č. 2: V ovládači tlačiarne skontrolujte, či je vzhľadom na typ média a tlačové údaje vybratá vhodná kvalita tlače. Vyberte možnosť kvality tlače, ktorá vyhovuje papieru, a obrázok, ktorý chcete vytlačiť. Ak zbadáte rozmazanie alebo nerovnomerné rozloženie farieb, nastavte vyššiu kvalitu tlače a tlač zopakujte. V ovládači tlačiarne skontrolujte nastavenie kvality tlače. Zmena kvality tlače a korekcia obrazových údajov Poznámka Len pre zariadenie MP270 series: Nastavenie kvality tlače nemožno zmeniť zo zariadenia kompatibilného so štandardom PictBridge. Kontrola č. 3: Ak problém pretrváva, môžu existovať ďalšie príčiny. Pozrite si aj nasledujúce časti: Nedá sa tlačiť do konca tlačovej úlohy Žiadne výsledky tlače/Tlač je rozmazaná/Farby sú skreslené/Biele pruhy Farby sú nejasné Čiary nie sú zarovnané Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé Strana 585 z celkového počtu 684 Vytlačený papier sa zvlnil alebo obsahuje atramentové škvrny Na papieri sú šmuhy/Vytlačený povrch je poškriabaný Na rube papiera sú šmuhy Po stranách výtlačku sú vytlačené zvislé čiary Farby nie sú rovnomerné alebo majú pruhy Na začiatok strany Nedá sa tlačiť do konca tlačovej úlohy Strana 586 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé > Nedá sa tlačiť do konca tlačovej úlohy Nedá sa tlačiť do konca tlačovej úlohy Kontrola č. 1: Je veľkosť tlačených údajov mimoriadne veľká? Na hárku Page Setup kliknite na položku Print Options. Potom v zobrazenom dialógovom okne začiarknite políčko Prevent loss of print data. Kontrola č. 2: Je na pevnom disku počítača dostatok miesta? Odstráňte nepotrebné súbory a uvoľnite miesto na disku. Na začiatok strany Žiadne výsledky tlače/Tlač je rozmazaná/Farby sú skreslené/Biele ... Strana 587 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé > Žiadne výsledky tlače/Tlač je rozmazaná/ Farby sú skreslené/Biele pruhy Žiadne výsledky tlače/Tlač je rozmazaná/Farby sú skreslené/ Biele pruhy Žiadne výsledky tlače/Tlač je rozmazaná/Farby sú skreslené/Biele ... Strana 588 z celkového počtu 684 Kontrola č. 1: Skontrolovali ste nastavenia papiera a kvality tlače? Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé Kontrola č. 2: Je kazeta FINE správne nainštalovaná? Ak zaisťovací kryt kazety s atramentom nie je spoľahlivo zatvorený, atrament sa nemusí správne vystrekovať. Otvorte skenovaciu jednotku (kryt), otvorte zaisťovací kryt kazety s atramentom, potom zaisťovací kryt kazety s atramentom zatvorte. Pri zatváraní potlačte na zaisťovací kryt kazety s atramentom, kým s kliknutím nezapadne na miesto. Kontrola č. 3: Vytlačte vzorku na kontrolu dýz a vykonajte všetky potrebné operácie údržby, napríklad čistenie tlačovej hlavy. Vytlačením vzorky na kontrolu dýz zistíte, či sa z dýz tlačovej hlavy správne vystrekuje atrament. Informácie o tlači vzorky na kontrolu dýz, čistení tlačovej hlavy a hĺbkovom čistení tlačovej hlavy nájdete v časti Bežná údržba . Ak sa vzorka na kontrolu dýz nevytlačí správne: Po vyčistení tlačovej hlavy vytlačte a skontrolujte vzorku na kontrolu dýz. Ak sa problém neodstráni ani po dvojnásobnom čistení tlačovej hlavy: Vykonajte hĺbkové čistenie tlačovej hlavy. Ak sa hĺbkovým čistením tlačovej hlavy problém nevyrieši, vypnite zariadenie a po 24 hodinách vykonajte ďalšie hĺbkové čistenie tlačovej hlavy. Ak sa problém neodstráni ani po dvojnásobnom hĺbkovom čistení tlačovej hlavy: Tlačiareň pravdepodobne nemá dostatok atramentu. Vymeňte kazetu FINE. Kontrola č. 4: Ak sa v kazete FINE minul atrament, vymeňte ju za novú. Kontrola č. 5: Pri používaní papiera určeného iba na jednostrannú tlač skontrolujte, či je papier vložený tak, aby strana určená na tlač smerovala nahor. Tlač na nesprávnu stranu takéhoto papiera môže viesť k nejasným výtlačkom alebo zníženej kvalite tlače. Informácie o strane, na ktorú možno tlačiť, nájdete v príručke dodanej s papierom. Kontrola č. 6: Je ploché predlohové sklo znečistené? Vyčistite ploché predlohové sklo. Čistenie plochého predlohového skla a krytu dokumentov Pri kopírovaní si pozrite aj nasledujúce časti: Kontrola č. 7: Skontrolujte, či je pôvodný dokument správne položený na ploché predlohové sklo. Vkladanie papiera a originálov Žiadne výsledky tlače/Tlač je rozmazaná/Farby sú skreslené/Biele ... Strana 589 z celkového počtu 684 Kontrola č. 8: Je originál položený na plochom predlohovom skle stranou určenou na kopírovanie nadol? Kontrola č. 9: Kopírujete výtlačok z tohto zariadenia? Len pre zariadenie MP270 series: tlačte priamo z digitálneho fotoaparátu alebo výtlačok znova vytlačte z počítača. Len pre zariadenie MP250 series: výtlačok znova vytlačte z počítača. Pri kopírovaní výtlačku zo zariadenia sa môže znížiť kvalita tlače. Na začiatok strany Farby sú nejasné Strana 590 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé > Farby sú nejasné Farby sú nejasné Kontrola č. 1: Zapnite korekciu farieb. Pokiaľ tlačíte fotografie alebo inú grafiku, zapnutím korekcie farieb v ovládači tlačiarne môžete vylepšiť farby. V dialógovom okne s vlastnosťami tlačiarne vyberte na hárku Effects položku Vivid Photo. V rozbaľovacej ponuke dialógového okna Tlačiť (Print) vyberte položku Color Options a potom v ponuke Color Mode vyberte položku Vivid Photo. V systéme Mac OS X v.10.4.x alebo Mac OS X v.10.3.9 vyberte v dialógovom okne Tlač (Print) položku Special Effects a potom položku Vivid Photo. Kontrola č. 2: Je kazeta FINE správne nainštalovaná? Ak zaisťovací kryt kazety s atramentom nie je spoľahlivo zatvorený, atrament sa nemusí správne vystrekovať. Otvorte skenovaciu jednotku (kryt), otvorte zaisťovací kryt kazety s atramentom, potom zaisťovací kryt kazety s atramentom zatvorte. Pri zatváraní potlačte na zaisťovací kryt kazety s atramentom, kým s kliknutím nezapadne na miesto. Kontrola č. 3: Ak sa v kazete FINE minul atrament, vymeňte ju za novú. Kontrola č. 4: Tlačí sa vzorka na kontrolu dýz správne? Vytlačením vzorky na kontrolu dýz zistíte, či sa z dýz tlačovej hlavy správne vystrekuje atrament. Informácie o tlači vzorky na kontrolu dýz, čistení tlačovej hlavy a hĺbkovom čistení tlačovej hlavy nájdete v časti Bežná údržba . Ak sa vzorka na kontrolu dýz nevytlačí správne: Po vyčistení tlačovej hlavy vytlačte a skontrolujte vzorku na kontrolu dýz. Ak sa problém neodstráni ani po dvojnásobnom čistení tlačovej hlavy: Vykonajte hĺbkové čistenie tlačovej hlavy. Ak sa hĺbkovým čistením tlačovej hlavy problém nevyrieši, vypnite zariadenie a po 24 hodinách vykonajte ďalšie hĺbkové čistenie tlačovej hlavy. Ak sa problém neodstráni ani po dvojnásobnom hĺbkovom čistení tlačovej hlavy: Tlačiareň pravdepodobne nemá dostatok atramentu. Vymeňte kazetu FINE. Poznámka Vytlačené farby sa nemusia zhodovať s farbami na obrazovke kvôli základným rozdielom v metódach použitých pri vytváraní farieb. Spôsob zobrazenia farieb na obrazovke môžu ovplyvniť aj nastavenie kontroly farieb a rozdiely prostredia. Farby sú nejasné Strana 591 z celkového počtu 684 Na začiatok strany Čiary nie sú zarovnané Strana 592 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé > Čiary nie sú zarovnané Čiary nie sú zarovnané Kontrola č. 1: Skontrolovali ste nastavenia papiera a kvality tlače? Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé Kontrola č. 2: Zarovnajte tlačovú hlavu. Ak ste po inštalácii nezarovnali tlačovú hlavu, rovné čiary sa môžu vytlačiť nezarovnané. Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy Poznámka Ak sa zarovnaním tlačovej hlavy problém nevyrieši, vykonajte manuálne zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy podľa časti Zarovnanie polohy tlačovej hlavy . Kontrola č. 3: Je veľkosť tlačených údajov mimoriadne veľká? Na hárku Page Setup kliknite na položku Print Options. Potom v zobrazenom dialógovom okne začiarknite políčko Prevent loss of print data. Kontrola č. 4: Tlačí sa s použitím funkcie rozloženia strany alebo okraja na zošitie? Pokiaľ tlačíte s použitím funkcie rozloženia strany alebo okraja na zošitie, nemusia sa vytlačiť tenké čiary. Skúste zväčšiť hrúbku čiar v dokumente. Na začiatok strany Vytlačený papier sa zvlnil alebo obsahuje atramentové škvrny Strana 593 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé > Vytlačený papier sa zvlnil alebo obsahuje atramentové škvrny Vytlačený papier sa zvlnil alebo obsahuje atramentové škvrny Kontrola č. 1: Skontrolovali ste nastavenia papiera a kvality tlače? Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé Kontrola č. 2: Ak je nastavená vysoká intenzita, znížte hodnotu nastavenia Intensity v ovládači tlačiarne a skúste tlačiť znova. Ak na tlač obrázkov s vysokou intenzitou používate obyčajný papier, papier môže absorbovať príliš veľa atramentu, čím sa zvlní a odrie sa. Skontrolujte intenzitu v ovládači tlačiarne. Úprava intenzity Kontrola č. 3: Používate na tlač fotografií fotografický papier? Pri tlači údajov s vysokou sýtosťou farieb, akými sú fotografie alebo obrázky so sýtymi farbami, odporúčame používať papier Photo Paper Plus Glossy II alebo iný špeciálny papier značky Canon. Vkladanie papiera a originálov Na začiatok strany Na papieri sú šmuhy/Vytlačený povrch je poškriabaný Strana 594 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé > Na papieri sú šmuhy/Vytlačený povrch je poškriabaný Na papieri sú šmuhy/Vytlačený povrch je poškriabaný Kontrola č. 1: Skontrolovali ste nastavenia papiera a kvality tlače? Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé Kontrola č. 2: Používate vhodný typ papiera? Skontrolujte nasledujúce skutočnosti: Skontrolujte, či sa na účely danej tlače hodí papier, na ktorý tlačíte. Vkladanie papiera a originálov Pri tlači bez okrajov skontrolujte, či sa používaný papier hodí na tlač bez okrajov. Ak sa používaný papier nehodí na tlač bez okrajov, môže sa znížiť kvalita tlače na horných a spodných okrajoch papiera. Oblasť tlače Kontrola č. 3: Vyrovnajte zvlnenie a vložte papier. Pri obyčajnom papieri Obráťte papier a opätovne ho vložte tak, aby ste tlačili na druhú stranu. Ak papier necháte dlhší čas vložený v zadnom zásobníku, môže sa zvlniť. V takom prípade vložte papier opačnou stranou smerujúcou nahor. Môže to vyriešiť problém. Odporúčame, aby ste nepoužitý papier vložili späť do balenia a skladovali na rovnom povrchu. Pri inom type papiera Ak je zvlnenie v rohoch papiera vyššie ako 0,1 palca/3 mm (A), môžu sa na ňom objaviť šmuhy alebo sa nemusí správne podávať. V takých prípadoch vyrovnajte zvlnenie papiera podľa postupu uvedeného nižšie. Na papieri sú šmuhy/Vytlačený povrch je poškriabaný Strana 595 z celkového počtu 684 1. Zviňte papier v opačnom smere zvlnenia papiera, ako je znázornené nižšie. 2. Skontrolujte, či sa papier vyrovnal. Odporúčame, aby ste na takto vyrovnaný papier tlačili iba po jednom hárku. Poznámka V závislosti od typu média sa na papieri môžu objaviť šmuhy alebo sa nemusí správne podávať, aj keď nie je skrútený dovnútra. V takých prípadoch sa riaďte postupom uvedeným nižšie a pred tlačou skrúťte papier opačným smerom. Výška zvlnenia nesmie presiahnuť 0,1 palca/3 mm (B). Môže sa tým zlepšiť výsledok tlače. (C) Strana určená na tlač Odporúčame, aby ste na papier skrútený v opačnom smere tlačili iba po jednom hárku. Kontrola č. 4: Ak tlačíte na tenký papier, nastavte možnosť Prevent paper abrasion. Výberom nastavenia Prevent paper abrasion sa zväčší vzdialenosť medzi tlačovou hlavou a vloženým papierom. Ak spozorujete odretie papiera aj pri správnom nastavení typu média zodpovedajúceho vloženému papieru, pomocou ovládacieho panela alebo ovládača tlačiarne nastavte zariadenie tak, aby bránilo odretiu papiera. Ak nastavíte možnosť Prevent paper abrasion, rýchlosť tlače sa zníži. * Po dokončení tlače vypnite nastavenie Prevent paper abrasion. V opačnom prípade zostane toto nastavenie zapnuté pre všetky následné tlačové úlohy. Nastavenie pomocou ovládacieho panela Ak chcete zapnúť funkciu Prevent paper abrasion, opakovane stláčajte tlačidlo Údržba (Maintenance), kým sa na displeji LED nezobrazí písmeno r, a potom stlačte tlačidlo Čiernobielo (Black). Ak chcete funkciu Prevent paper abrasion vypnúť, opakovane stláčajte tlačidlo Údržba (Maintenance), kým sa na displeji LED nezobrazí písmeno r, a potom stlačte tlačidlo Farebne (Color). Nastavenie pomocou ovládača tlačiarne Otvorte dialógové okno s vlastnosťami tlačiarne a na karte Maintenance v oblasti Custom Settings začiarknite políčko Prevent paper abrasion. Potom kliknite na položku Send. Ak chcete otvoriť dialógové okno s vlastnosťami tlačiarne, pozrite si časť Otvorenie dialógového okna s vlastnosťami tlačiarne (Windows) . V aplikácii Canon IJ Printer Utility vyberte v rozbaľovacom zozname položku Custom Settings, začiarknite políčko Prevent paper abrasion a potom kliknite na položku Send. Ak chcete otvoriť aplikáciu Canon IJ Printer Utility, pozrite si časť Otvorenie aplikácie Canon IJ Printer Utility (Macintosh) . Kontrola č. 5: Ak je nastavená vysoká intenzita, znížte hodnotu Na papieri sú šmuhy/Vytlačený povrch je poškriabaný Strana 596 z celkového počtu 684 nastavenia Intensity v ovládači tlačiarne a skúste tlačiť znova. Ak na tlač obrázkov s vysokou intenzitou používate obyčajný papier, papier môže absorbovať príliš veľa atramentu, čím sa zvlní a odrie sa. Znížte hodnotu nastavenia Intensity v ovládači tlačiarne a skúste tlačiť znova. 1. Otvorte dialógové okno s vlastnosťami tlačiarne. Otvorenie dialógového okna s vlastnosťami tlačiarne (Windows) Ak používate zariadenie MP270 series, kliknite sem: Ovládač tlačiarne Ak používate zariadenie MP250 series, kliknite sem: Ovládač tlačiarne * Prv než kliknutím sem otvoríte dialógové okno s vlastnosťami tlačiarne, ukončite všetky spustené aplikácie. 2. Na karte Main vyberte v oblasti Color/Intensity položku Manual a potom kliknite na tlačidlo Set. 3. Pomocou posúvača Intensity na karte Color Adjustment upravte intenzitu. 1. Otvorte dialógové okno Tlač (Print). Otvorenie dialógového okna Nastavenie strany (Page Setup) a Tlač (Print) (Macintosh) 2. V kontextovej ponuke vyberte položku Color Options. 3. Posúvačom Intensity nastavte intenzitu. Kontrola č. 6: Tlačí sa mimo odporúčanej oblasti tlače? Ak tlačíte mimo odporúčanej oblasti tlače papiera, spodný okraj papiera sa môže zašpiniť od atramentu. Upravte veľkosť pôvodného dokumentu v aplikačnom softvéri. Oblasť tlače Kontrola č. 7: Je ploché predlohové sklo znečistené? Vyčistite ploché predlohové sklo. Čistenie plochého predlohového skla a krytu dokumentov Kontrola č. 8: Je vnútro zariadenia znečistené? Pri obojstrannej tlači sa môže vnútro zariadenia zašpiniť atramentom a spôsobiť tak šmuhy na výtlačkoch. Vyčistením spodnej platne vyčistite vnútro zariadenia. Bežná údržba Poznámka Ak chcete predísť znečisteniu vnútra zariadenia, nastavte správnu veľkosť papiera. Kontrola č. 9: V položke Ink Drying Wait Time nastavte dlhší interval. Vďaka tomu bude môcť vytlačený povrch dostatočne vyschnúť, čím sa zabráni jeho zašpineniu a poškriabaniu. Na papieri sú šmuhy/Vytlačený povrch je poškriabaný Strana 597 z celkového počtu 684 1. Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie zapnuté. 2. Otvorte dialógové okno s vlastnosťami tlačiarne. Otvorenie dialógového okna s vlastnosťami tlačiarne (Windows) 3. Kliknite na kartu Maintenance a potom na položku Custom Settings. 4. Posúvačom Ink Drying Wait Time nastavte čas čakania a potom kliknite na tlačidlo Send. 5. Skontrolujte správu a kliknite na tlačidlo OK. 1. Skontrolujte, či je zariadenie zapnuté. 2. Otvorte aplikáciu Canon IJ Printer Utility. Otvorenie aplikácie Canon IJ Printer Utility (Macintosh) 3. V kontextovej ponuke vyberte možnosť Custom Settings. 4. Posúvačom Ink Drying Wait Time nastavte čas čakania a potom kliknite na tlačidlo Send. 5. Skontrolujte správu a kliknite na tlačidlo OK. Kontrola č. 10: Je papier poškriabaný od iného vloženého papiera? V závislosti od typu média sa pri podávaní zo zadného zásobníka môže papier poškriabať od iného vloženého papiera. V takom prípade vkladajte hárky jednotlivo. Na začiatok strany Na rube papiera sú šmuhy Strana 598 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé > Na rube papiera sú šmuhy Na rube papiera sú šmuhy Kontrola č. 1: Skontrolovali ste nastavenia papiera a kvality tlače? Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé Kontrola č. 2: Vyčistením spodnej platne vyčistite vnútro zariadenia. Bežná údržba Poznámka Vnútro tlačiarne sa môže zašpiniť pri tlači bez okrajov, obojstrannej tlači alebo príliš častej tlači. Na začiatok strany Po stranách výtlačku sú vytlačené zvislé čiary Strana 599 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé > Po stranách výtlačku sú vytlačené zvislé čiary Po stranách výtlačku sú vytlačené zvislé čiary Kontrola č. 1: Skontrolovali ste nastavenia typu papiera a kvality tlače? Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé Kontrola č. 2: Je vložený papier správnej veľkosti? Ak je veľkosť vloženého papiera väčšia než veľkosť nastavená v ovládači tlačiarne, na okraji sa môžu vytlačiť zvislé čiary. Nastavte správnu veľkosť papiera zodpovedajúcu vloženému papieru. Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé Poznámka Smer zvislých čiar sa môže líšiť v závislosti od obrazových údajov alebo nastavenia tlače. Zariadenie vykoná v prípade potreby automatické čistenie na zachovanie čistých výtlačkov. Pri čistení sa spotrebuje malé množstvo atramentu. Aj keď sa atrament obyčajne vystrekuje do absorbéra odpadového atramentu, ak je vložený väčší papier, ako je nastavené ovládačom tlačiarne, môže sa vystreknúť na papier. Na začiatok strany Farby nie sú rovnomerné alebo majú pruhy Strana 600 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé > Farby nie sú rovnomerné alebo majú pruhy Farby nie sú rovnomerné alebo majú pruhy Kontrola č. 1: Skontrolovali ste nastavenia papiera a kvality tlače? Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé Kontrola č. 2: Vytlačte vzorku na kontrolu dýz a vykonajte všetky potrebné operácie údržby, napríklad čistenie tlačovej hlavy. Vytlačením vzorky na kontrolu dýz zistíte, či sa z dýz tlačovej hlavy správne vystrekuje atrament. Informácie o tlači vzorky na kontrolu dýz, čistení tlačovej hlavy a hĺbkovom čistení tlačovej hlavy nájdete v časti Bežná údržba . Ak sa vzorka na kontrolu dýz nevytlačí správne: Po vyčistení tlačovej hlavy vytlačte a skontrolujte vzorku na kontrolu dýz. Ak sa problém neodstráni ani po dvojnásobnom čistení tlačovej hlavy: Vykonajte hĺbkové čistenie tlačovej hlavy. Ak sa hĺbkovým čistením tlačovej hlavy problém nevyrieši, vypnite zariadenie a po 24 hodinách vykonajte ďalšie hĺbkové čistenie tlačovej hlavy. Ak sa problém neodstráni ani po dvojnásobnom hĺbkovom čistení tlačovej hlavy: Tlačiareň pravdepodobne nemá dostatok atramentu. Vymeňte kazetu FINE. Kontrola č. 3: Zarovnajte tlačovú hlavu. Zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy Poznámka Farby nie sú rovnomerné alebo majú pruhy Strana 601 z celkového počtu 684 Ak sa zarovnaním tlačovej hlavy problém nevyrieši, vykonajte manuálne zarovnanie tlačovej hlavy podľa časti Zarovnanie polohy tlačovej hlavy . Na začiatok strany Tlač sa nespustí Strana 602 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Tlač sa nespustí Tlač sa nespustí Kontrola č. 1: Skontrolujte, či je zástrčka napájacieho kábla bezpečne zasunutá, a potom zapnite zariadenie. Pokiaľ indikátor Napájanie (Power) bliká na zeleno, zariadenie sa práve spúšťa. Počkajte, kým indikátor Napájanie (Power) neprestane blikať a neostane svietiť na zeleno. Poznámka Pri tlači veľkého množstva údajov, napríklad fotografií alebo grafiky, sa môže tlač spustiť s oneskorením. Kým indikátor Napájanie (Power) bliká na zeleno, zariadenie spracúva údaje a odosiela ich do tlačiarne. Počkajte, kým sa nespustí tlač. Kontrola č. 2: Skontrolujte, či je kábel USB spoľahlivo zasunutý do zariadenia aj počítača, a potom skontrolujte nasledujúce skutočnosti: Ak používate zariadenie na prenos signálu, napríklad rozbočovač USB, odpojte ho, pripojte zariadenie priamo k počítaču a znova sa pokúste spustiť tlač. Ak sa tlač spustí normálne, problém spôsobilo zariadenie na prenos signálu. Podrobnejšie informácie získate od predajcu zariadenia na prenos signálu. Problém môže spôsobovať aj kábel USB. Vymeňte kábel USB a pokúste sa znova spustiť tlač. Kontrola č. 3: Ak tlačíte z počítača, reštartujte počítač. Ak sú v tlačovom fronte nepotrebné tlačové úlohy, odstráňte ich. Odstránenie nežiaducej tlačovej úlohy Kontrola č. 4: Skontrolujte, či je v dialógovom okne Tlač (Print) vybratý názov zariadenia. Zariadenie nebude správne tlačiť, ak používate ovládač určený pre inú tlačiareň. V systéme Windows skontrolujte, či je názov zariadenia vybratý v dialógovom okne Tlačiť (Print). V počítači Macintosh skontrolujte, či je názov zariadenia vybratý v poli Tlačiareň (Printer) dialógového okna Tlač (Print). Poznámka Ak chcete, aby bolo zariadenie vybraté ako predvolené, vyberte možnosť Nastaviť tlačiareň ako predvolenú (Set as Default Printer) (Windows), Predvolená tlačiareň (Default Printer) alebo Nastaviť ako predvolené (Make Default) (v počítačoch Macintosh). Kontrola č. 5: Správne nakonfigurujte port tlačiarne. Nakonfigurujte port USBnnn (kde „n“ je číslo) ako port tlačiarne. 1. Použitím správcovských oprávnení sa prihláste ako používateľ. 2. Spustite Ovládací panel (Control Panel) a pod položkou Hardvér a zvuk (Hardware and Sound) vyberte voľbu Tlačiareň (Printer). V systéme Windows XP spustite Ovládací panel (Control Panel) a potom kliknite na položky Tlačiarne a iný hardvér (Printers and Other Hardware) a Tlačiarne a faxy (Printers and Faxes). V systéme Windows 2000 spustite Ovládací panel (Control Panel) a potom kliknite na položku Tlačiarne (Printers). Tlač sa nespustí Strana 603 z celkového počtu 684 3. Pravým tlačidlom myši kliknite na ikonu Canon XXX Printer a vyberte možnosť Vlastnosti (Properties). 4. Kliknite na kartu Porty (Ports) a skontrolujte nastavenia portu. Skontrolujte, či je v stĺpci Tlačiareň (Printer) zobrazená tlačiareň Canon XXX Printer a či je pre možnosť Tlačiť s použitím nasledovných portov (Print to the following port(s)) vybratý port s názvom USBnnn (kde „n“ je číslo). Ak je nastavenie nesprávne, znovu nainštalujte ovládače MP Drivers alebo nastavte správny port tlačiarne. Kontrola č. 6: Je veľkosť tlačených údajov mimoriadne veľká? Na hárku Page Setup kliknite na položku Print Options. Potom v zobrazenom dialógovom okne začiarknite políčko Prevent loss of print data. Na začiatok strany Kopírovanie alebo tlač sa zastaví ešte pred dokončením Strana 604 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Kopírovanie alebo tlač sa zastaví ešte pred dokončením Kopírovanie alebo tlač sa zastaví ešte pred dokončením Kontrola č. 1: Tlačilo zariadenie dlhý čas bez prerušenia? Ak zariadenie tlačí bez prerušenia dlhší čas, môže sa prehriať tlačová hlava. Z dôvodu ochrany tlačovej hlavy môže zariadenie pozastaviť tlač v momente, keď ukončí tlač riadka, a potom tlač znova obnoviť. V takom prípade vo vhodnom momente na chvíľu prerušte tlač a vypnite zariadenie aspoň na 15 minút. Okrem toho zariadenie, ktoré dlhší čas neprerušene tlačí grafické obrázky alebo fotografie s intenzívnymi farbami, môže zastaviť tlač, aby sa šetrila tlačová hlava. V takom prípade sa tlač automaticky neobnoví. Vypnite zariadenie aspoň na 15 minút. Upozornenie Tlačová hlava a okolité časti vnútri zariadenia sa môžu veľmi zahriať. Nikdy sa nedotýkajte tlačovej hlavy ani okolitých častí. Kontrola č. 2: Je vložený papier? Skontrolujte, či je v zadnom zásobníku vložený papier. Ak sa v zariadení minul papier, vložte ho. Kontrola č. 3: Obsahujú tlačené dokumenty veľa fotografií alebo ilustrácií? Pri tlači veľkého množstva údajov, napríklad fotografií alebo grafických obrázkov, potrebuje zariadenie a počítač viac času na ich spracovanie. Vtedy sa môže zdať, že zariadenie prestane pracovať. Okrem toho pri nepretržitej tlači údajov na obyčajný papier, pri ktorej sa spotrebuje veľké množstvo atramentu, môže zariadenie dočasne prerušiť činnosť. V každom prípade počkajte, kým sa proces nedokončí. Poznámka Ak tlačíte dokument s veľkou potlačenou plochou alebo viacero kópií dokumentu, môže sa tlač pozastaviť, aby uschol atrament. Kontrola č. 4: Ak sa kopírovanie zastaví pred dokončením, pokúste sa kopírovať znovu. Ak sa počas kopírovania vyskytnú niektoré chyby, po uplynutí určitého času zariadenie preruší činnosť. Na začiatok strany Zariadenie pracuje, ale atrament sa nevystrekuje Strana 605 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Zariadenie pracuje, ale atrament sa nevystrekuje Zariadenie pracuje, ale atrament sa nevystrekuje Kontrola č. 1: Sú upchaté dýzy tlačovej hlavy? Vytlačením vzorky na kontrolu dýz zistíte, či sa z dýz tlačovej hlavy správne vystrekuje atrament. Informácie o tlači vzorky na kontrolu dýz, čistení tlačovej hlavy a hĺbkovom čistení tlačovej hlavy nájdete v časti Bežná údržba . Ak sa vzorka na kontrolu dýz nevytlačí správne: Po vyčistení tlačovej hlavy vytlačte a skontrolujte vzorku na kontrolu dýz. Ak sa problém neodstráni ani po dvojnásobnom čistení tlačovej hlavy: Vykonajte hĺbkové čistenie tlačovej hlavy. Ak sa hĺbkovým čistením tlačovej hlavy problém nevyrieši, vypnite zariadenie a po 24 hodinách vykonajte ďalšie hĺbkové čistenie tlačovej hlavy. Ak sa problém neodstráni ani po dvojnásobnom hĺbkovom čistení tlačovej hlavy: Tlačiareň pravdepodobne nemá dostatok atramentu. Vymeňte kazetu FINE. Kontrola č. 2: Je kazeta FINE správne nainštalovaná? Ak zaisťovací kryt kazety s atramentom nie je spoľahlivo zatvorený, atrament sa nemusí správne vystrekovať. Otvorte skenovaciu jednotku (kryt), otvorte zaisťovací kryt kazety s atramentom, potom zaisťovací kryt kazety s atramentom zatvorte. Pri zatváraní potlačte na zaisťovací kryt kazety s atramentom, kým s kliknutím nezapadne na miesto. Kontrola č. 3: Ak sa v kazete FINE minul atrament, vymeňte ju za novú. Na začiatok strany Rýchlosť tlače nie je taká, ako by sa očakávalo Strana 606 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Rýchlosť tlače nie je taká, ako by sa očakávalo Rýchlosť tlače nie je taká, ako by sa očakávalo Kontrola č. 1: Tlačíte v režime Quiet Mode? Rýchlosť tlačiarne sa zníži, ak ste v ovládači tlačiarne vybrali režim Quiet Mode. Ak chcete tlač urýchliť, netlačte v režime Quiet Mode. Zníženie hluku zariadenia Kontrola č. 2: Je nastavená príliš vysoká kvalita tlače? V ovládači tlačiarne zvýšte rýchlosť tlače. Nastavením uprednostňovania rýchlosti sa tlač zrýchli. 1. Otvorte dialógové okno s vlastnosťami tlačiarne. Otvorenie dialógového okna s vlastnosťami tlačiarne (Windows) Ak používate zariadenie MP270 series, kliknite sem: Ovládač tlačiarne Ak používate zariadenie MP250 series, kliknite sem: Ovládač tlačiarne * Prv než kliknutím sem otvoríte dialógové okno s vlastnosťami tlačiarne, ukončite všetky spustené aplikácie. 2. Na karte Main nastavte možnosť Print Quality na hodnotu Fast. Pri niektorých typoch médií nemusí byť hodnota Fast dostupná. 1. Otvorte dialógové okno Tlač (Print). Otvorenie dialógového okna Nastavenie strany (Page Setup) a Tlač (Print) (Macintosh) 2. V rozbaľovacej ponuke vyberte možnosť Quality & Media a potom nastavte možnosť Print Quality na hodnotu Fast. Pri niektorých typoch médií nemusí byť hodnota Fast dostupná. Poznámka V niektorých systémových prostrediach sa podľa postupu uvedeného vyššie nemusí rýchlosť tlače výrazne zrýchliť. Na začiatok strany Držiak kazety FINE sa neposúva na miesto vyhradené na výmenu Strana 607 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Držiak kazety FINE sa neposúva na miesto vyhradené na výmenu Držiak kazety FINE sa neposúva na miesto vyhradené na výmenu Kontrola č. 1: Nesvieti indikátor Napájanie (Power) ? Skontrolujte, či indikátor Napájanie (Power) svieti na zeleno. Držiak kazety FINE sa pohybuje len v prípade, že je zapnuté napájanie. Ak nesvieti indikátor Napájanie (Power), zatvorte skenovaciu jednotku (kryt) a zapnite zariadenie. Pokiaľ indikátor Napájanie (Power) bliká na zeleno, zariadenie sa práve spúšťa. Počkajte, kým indikátor Napájanie (Power) neprestane blikať a neostane svietiť na zeleno, a znova otvorte skenovaciu jednotku (kryt). Kontrola č. 2: Nezobrazuje sa na displeji LED kód chyby? Zatvorte skenovaciu jednotku (kryt), skontrolujte, či sa zobrazuje kód chyby, vykonaním príslušných opatrení odstráňte chybu a potom znovu otvorte kryt. Podrobné informácie o odstránení chyby nájdete v časti Na displeji LED sa zobrazuje kód chyby . Kontrola č. 3: Nebola skenovacia jednotka (kryt tlačiarne) otvorená minimálne 10 minút? Ak bola skenovacia jednotka (kryt) otvorená minimálne 10 minút, držiak kazety FINE sa posunie doprava, aby sa tlačová hlava chránila pred vyschnutím. Zatvorením a opätovným otvorením skenovacej jednotky (krytu) sa držiak kazety FINE vráti doľava. Kontrola č. 4: Tlačilo zariadenie dlhý čas bez prerušenia? Zatvorte skenovaciu jednotku (kryt), chvíľu počkajte a znovu ju otvorte. Ak zariadenie tlačí dlhší čas bez prerušenia, držiak kazety FINE sa nemusí posunúť do stredu, pretože tlačová hlava môže byť prehriata. Poznámka Otvorením skenovacej jednotky (krytu) počas tlače sa držiak kazety FINE posunie doprava. Zatvorte skenovaciu jednotku (kryt) a po dokončení tlače ju znova otvorte. Na začiatok strany Papier sa správne nepodáva Strana 608 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Papier sa správne nepodáva Papier sa správne nepodáva Kontrola č. 1: Pri vkladaní papiera nezabudnite vykonať nasledujúce opatrenia. Keď vkladáte dva alebo viac hárkov papiera, ešte pred vložením ich prevzdušnite. Keď vkladáte dva alebo viac hárkov papiera, skontrolujte, či balík papiera nepresahuje značku limitu vkladania papiera. V závislosti od typu papiera či okolitých podmienok (vysoká, nízka teplota alebo vlhkosť) však vkladanie maximálneho množstva papiera môže byť problematické. V takých prípadoch znížte počet hárkov vkladaného papiera na menej ako polovicu limitu vkladania papiera. Bez ohľadu na orientáciu tlače vždy vkladajte papier v orientácii na výšku. Do zadného zásobníka vkladajte papier stranou určenou na tlač smerom NAHOR a vodiace lišty posuňte tak, aby sa zarovnali s oboma stranami papiera. Vkladanie papiera a originálov Kontrola č. 2: Skontrolujte, či papier, na ktorý sa tlačí, nie je príliš hrubý ani zvlnený. Vkladanie papiera a originálov Kontrola č. 3: Pri vkladaní obálok nezabudnite vykonať nasledujúce opatrenia. Pri tlači na obálky si prečítajte časť Vkladanie papiera a originálov a pred tlačou pripravte obálky. Pripravené obálky vložte v orientácii na výšku. Ak obálky vložíte v orientácii na šírku, nebudú sa správne podávať. Kontrola č. 4: Skontrolujte, či sa v zadnom zásobníku nenachádzajú žiadne cudzie predmety. Papier sa správne nepodáva Strana 609 z celkového počtu 684 Ak sa papier roztrhol v zadnom zásobníku, vyberte ho podľa postupu uvedeného v časti papier . Zaseknutý Ak sú v zadnom zásobníku cudzie predmety, vypnite zariadenie, odpojte ho z napájania a cudzí predmet vyberte. Na začiatok strany Zaseknutý papier Strana 610 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Zaseknutý papier Zaseknutý papier Poznámka Ak počas tlače musíte vypnúť zariadenie, aby ste odstránili zaseknutý papier, pred vypnutím zariadenia zrušte tlač stlačením tlačidla Stop/Reset. Papier sa zasekol v otvore na výstup papiera alebo v zadnom zásobníku V iných prípadoch Na začiatok strany Papier sa zasekol v otvore na výstup papiera alebo v zadnom záso... Strana 611 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Zaseknutý papier > Papier sa zasekol v otvore na výstup papiera alebo v zadnom zásobníku Papier sa zasekol v otvore na výstup papiera alebo v zadnom zásobníku Papier vyberte podľa nasledujúceho postupu. 1. Papier pomaly vyťahujte zo zadného zásobníka alebo z otvoru na výstup papiera (podľa toho, odkiaľ sa dá vytiahnuť jednoduchšie). Poznámka Ak sa papier trhá a kúsky ostávajú vnútri zariadenia, vypnite zariadenie, otvorte skenovaciu jednotku (kryt) a vyberte papier. Dávajte pozor, aby ste sa nedotkli častí vnútri zariadenia. Po odstránení všetkého papiera zatvorte skenovaciu jednotku (kryt) a znova zapnite zariadenie. Ak nemôžete papier vytiahnuť, vypnite zariadenie a znovu ho zapnite. Papier sa možno vysunie automaticky. 2. Vložte nový papier a stlačte tlačidlo Stop/Reset na zariadení. Ak ste v kroku č. 1 vypli zariadenie, zrušia sa všetky tlačové úlohy v tlačovom fronte. V prípade potreby zopakujte tlač. Poznámka Pri opätovnom vkladaní papiera skontrolujte, či používate správny papier a či ho správne vkladáte. Vkladanie papiera a originálov Papier veľkosti A5 je vhodný na tlač dokumentov, ktoré obsahujú prevažne text. Neodporúčame ho používať na tlač dokumentov s fotografiami alebo grafikou, pretože sa výtlačok môže zvlniť a spôsobiť zaseknutie papiera. Ak papier nemôžete odstrániť alebo sa papier vnútri zariadenia roztrhol, prípadne sa chyba zaseknutia papiera opakuje aj po odstránení papiera, obráťte sa na servisné stredisko. Na začiatok strany V iných prípadoch Strana 612 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Zaseknutý papier > V iných prípadoch V iných prípadoch Skontrolujte nasledujúce skutočnosti: Kontrola č. 1: Nenachádzajú sa cudzie predmety okolo otvoru na výstup papiera? Kontrola č. 2: Nenachádzajú sa cudzie predmety v zadnom zásobníku? Ak sú v zadnom zásobníku cudzie predmety, vypnite zariadenie, odpojte ho z napájania a cudzí predmet vyberte. Kontrola č. 3: Je papier zvlnený? Kontrola č. 3: Vyrovnajte zvlnenie a vložte papier. Na začiatok strany Na obrazovke počítača sa zobrazuje hlásenie Strana 613 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Na obrazovke počítača sa zobrazuje hlásenie Na obrazovke počítača sa zobrazuje hlásenie Zobrazuje sa chyba č. B200 – Vyskytla sa chyba tlačiarne. Vypnite tlačiareň a odpojte jej napájací kábel od napájacieho zdroja. Potom sa obráťte na servisné stredisko. (B200 A printer error has occurred. Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord of the printer from the power supply. Then contact the service center.) Zobrazuje sa chyba č. **** – Vyskytla sa chyba tlačiarne. Vypnite a znovu zapnite tlačiareň. Ak sa tým chyba neodstráni, pozrite si bližšie informácie v užívateľskej príručke. (**** A printer error has occurred. Turn the printer off and then on again. If this doesn't clear the error, see the user's guide for more detail.) Chyba zápisu/Chyba výstupu/Chyba komunikácie Zobrazuje sa chyba č.: 300 Zobrazuje sa chyba č.: 1700 Zobrazujú sa informácie o atramente č.: 1688 Zobrazujú sa informácie o atramente č.: 1686 Zobrazuje sa chyba č.: 2001 (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) Zobrazuje sa chyba č.: 2002 (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) Iné chybové hlásenia Zobrazuje sa obrazovka Program rozšíreného prieskumu používania atramentových tlačiarní, skenerov alebo faxov (Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program) Zobrazuje sa ikona Program rozšíreného prieskumu používania atramentových tlačiarní, skenerov alebo faxov (Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program) Zobrazuje sa chyba č. B200 – Vyskytla sa chyba tlačiarne. Vypnite tlačiareň a odpojte jej napájací kábel od napájacieho zdroja. Potom sa obráťte na servisné stredisko. (B200 A printer error has occurred. Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord of the printer from the power supply. Then contact the service center.) Vypnite zariadenie a napájací kábel odpojte od zdroja napájania. Obráťte sa na servisné stredisko. Zobrazuje sa chyba č. **** – Vyskytla sa chyba tlačiarne. Vypnite a znovu zapnite tlačiareň. Ak sa tým chyba neodstráni, pozrite si bližšie informácie v užívateľskej príručke. (**** A printer error has occurred. Turn the printer off and then on again. If this doesn't clear the error, see the user's guide for more detail.) „****“ sú alfanumerické znaky, ktoré závisia od chyby, ktorá sa vyskytla. Zobrazuje sa číslo 5100 Skontrolujte, či nie je blokovaný pohyb držiaka kazety FINE. Zrušte tlač z počítača a vypnite zariadenie. Potom vyberte zaseknutý papier alebo ochranný materiál, ktorý bráni v pohybe držiaka kazety FINE, a znovu zapnite zariadenie. Dôležité Dávajte pozor, aby ste sa nedotkli častí vnútri zariadenia. Ak sa ich dotknete, zariadenie nemusí správne tlačiť. Ak sa problém nevyriešil, obráťte sa na servisné stredisko. Zobrazuje sa číslo 6000 Ak sa pred zariadením nachádza nejaký predmet, odstráňte ho. Na obrazovke počítača sa zobrazuje hlásenie Strana 614 z celkového počtu 684 Opatrne otvorte výstupný zásobník papiera a potom vypnite a znova zapnite napájanie. Zobrazujú sa štyri alfanumerické znaky a hlásenie Vyskytla sa chyba tlačiarne (Printer error has occurred) Vypnite zariadenie a napájací kábel odpojte od zdroja napájania. Zariadenie znova pripojte a zapnite. Ak sa problém nevyriešil, obráťte sa na servisné stredisko. Chyba zápisu/Chyba výstupu/Chyba komunikácie Kontrola č. 1: Ak nesvieti indikátor Napájanie (Power), skontrolujte, či je zástrčka napájacieho kábla spoľahlivo zasunutá, a potom zapnite zariadenie. Pokiaľ indikátor Napájanie (Power) bliká na zeleno, zariadenie sa práve spúšťa. Počkajte, kým indikátor Napájanie (Power) neprestane blikať a neostane svietiť na zeleno. Kontrola č. 2: Skontrolujte, či je v ovládači tlačiarne správne konfigurovaný port tlačiarne. * V nasledujúcich pokynoch znaky „ XXX“ označujú názov zariadenia. 1. Použitím správcovských oprávnení sa prihláste ako používateľ. 2. Spustite Ovládací panel (Control Panel) a pod položkou Hardvér a zvuk (Hardware and Sound) vyberte voľbu Tlačiareň (Printer). V systéme Windows XP spustite Ovládací panel (Control Panel) a potom kliknite na položky Tlačiarne a iný hardvér (Printers and Other Hardware) a Tlačiarne a faxy (Printers and Faxes). V systéme Windows 2000 spustite Ovládací panel (Control Panel) a potom kliknite na položku Tlačiarne (Printers). 3. Pravým tlačidlom myši kliknite na ikonu Canon XXX Printer a vyberte možnosť Vlastnosti (Properties). 4. Kliknite na kartu Porty (Ports) a skontrolujte nastavenia portu. Skontrolujte, či je v stĺpci Tlačiareň (Printer) zobrazená tlačiareň Canon XXX Printer a či je pre možnosť Tlačiť s použitím nasledovných portov (Print to the following port(s)) vybratý port s názvom USBnnn (kde „n“ je číslo). Ak nastavenie portu nie je správne, znovu nainštalujte ovládače MP Drivers alebo zmeňte nastavenie portu podľa používaného rozhrania. Kontrola č. 3: Skontrolujte, či je kábel USB spoľahlivo zasunutý do zariadenia aj počítača. Ak používate zariadenie na prenos signálu, napríklad rozbočovač USB, odpojte ho, pripojte zariadenie priamo k počítaču a znova sa pokúste spustiť tlač. Ak sa tlač spustí normálne, problém spôsobilo zariadenie na prenos signálu. Podrobnejšie informácie získate od predajcu zariadenia na prenos signálu. Problém môže spôsobovať aj kábel USB. Vymeňte kábel USB a pokúste sa znova spustiť tlač. Kontrola č. 4: Skontrolujte, či sú správne nainštalované ovládače MP Drivers. Podľa postupu opísaného v časti Odstránenie nepotrebných ovládačov MP Drivers odinštalujte ovládače MP Drivers. Potom do diskovej jednotky počítača vložte Inštalačný disk CD-ROM (Setup CD-ROM) , spustite inštaláciu Custom Install a výberom položky MP Drivers znova nainštalujte ovládače. Kontrola č. 5: Skontrolujte stav zariadenia v počítači. Podľa nasledujúceho postupu skontrolujte stav zariadenia. Na obrazovke počítača sa zobrazuje hlásenie 1. Strana 615 z celkového počtu 684 Spustite Ovládací panel (Control Panel) a kliknite na položky Hardvér a zvuk (Hardware and Sound) a Správca zariadení (Device Manager). Ak sa zobrazí obrazovka Kontrola používateľských kont (User Account Control), riaďte sa jej pokynmi. V systéme Windows XP spustite Ovládací panel (Control Panel), vyberte možnosť Výkon a údržba (Performance and Maintenance), Systém (System) a potom na hárku Hardvér (Hardware) kliknite na položku Správca zariadení (Device Manager). V systéme Windows 2000 spustite Ovládací panel (Control Panel), vyberte možnosť Systém (System) a potom na hárku Hardvér (Hardware) kliknite na položku Správca zariadení (Device Manager). 2. Dvakrát kliknite na položku Radiče Univerzálnej sériovej zbernice (Universal Serial Bus controllers) a potom na položku Podpora tlače pomocou portu USB (USB Printing Support). Ak sa položka Podpora tlače pomocou portu USB (USB Printing Support) nezobrazí, skontrolujte, či je zariadenie správne pripojené k počítaču. Kontrola č. 3: Skontrolujte, či je kábel USB spoľahlivo zasunutý do zariadenia aj počítača. 3. Kliknite na kartu Všeobecné (General) a skontrolujte, či sa nevyskytol problém so zariadením. Ak sa zobrazí hlásenie o chybe zariadenia, podrobnosti o jej odstránení nájdete v Pomocníkovi systému Windows. Zobrazuje sa chyba č.: 300 Kontrola č. 1: Ak nesvieti indikátor Napájanie (Power), skontrolujte, či je zástrčka napájacieho kábla spoľahlivo zasunutá, a potom zapnite zariadenie. Pokiaľ indikátor Napájanie (Power) bliká na zeleno, zariadenie sa práve spúšťa. Počkajte, kým indikátor Napájanie (Power) neprestane blikať a neostane svietiť na zeleno. Kontrola č. 2: Skontrolujte, či je kábel USB spoľahlivo zasunutý do zariadenia aj počítača. Ak používate zariadenie na prenos signálu, napríklad rozbočovač USB, odpojte ho, pripojte zariadenie priamo k počítaču a znova sa pokúste spustiť tlač. Ak sa tlač spustí normálne, problém spôsobilo zariadenie na prenos signálu. Podrobnejšie informácie získate od predajcu zariadenia na prenos signálu. Problém môže spôsobovať aj kábel USB. Vymeňte kábel USB a pokúste sa znova spustiť tlač. Kontrola č. 3: Skontrolujte, či je v dialógovom okne Tlač (Print) vybratý názov zariadenia. Otvorenie dialógového okna Nastavenie strany (Page Setup) a Tlač (Print) (Macintosh) Zobrazuje sa chyba č.: 1700 Podľa pokynov v odseku E, 0, 8 v časti Na displeji LED sa zobrazuje kód chyby vykonajte príslušné opatrenia. Zobrazujú sa informácie o atramente č.: 1688 Podľa pokynov v odseku E, 1, 6 v časti Na displeji LED sa zobrazuje kód chyby vykonajte príslušné opatrenia. Na obrazovke počítača sa zobrazuje hlásenie Strana 616 z celkového počtu 684 Zobrazujú sa informácie o atramente č.: 1686 Podľa pokynov v odseku E, 1, 3 v časti Na displeji LED sa zobrazuje kód chyby vykonajte príslušné opatrenia. Zobrazuje sa chyba č.: 2001 (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) Podľa pokynov v odseku E, 0, 9 v časti Na displeji LED sa zobrazuje kód chyby vykonajte príslušné opatrenia. Zobrazuje sa chyba č.: 2002 (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) Podľa pokynov v odseku E, 1, 9 v časti Na displeji LED sa zobrazuje kód chyby vykonajte príslušné opatrenia. Iné chybové hlásenia Kontrola: Ak sa chybové hlásenie zobrazí mimo monitora stavu tlačiarne, skontrolujte nasledujúce skutočnosti: Údaje nemožno dočasne ukladať z dôvodu nedostatočného miesta na disku ("Could not spool successfully due to insufficient disk space") Odstránením nepotrebných súborov zvýšte množstvo voľného miesta na disku. Údaje nemožno dočasne ukladať z dôvodu nedostatočnej pamäte ("Could not spool successfully due to insufficient memory") Ukončením iných spustených aplikácií zvýšte dostupnú pamäť. Ak naďalej nemožno tlačiť, reštartujte počítač a skúste zopakovať tlač. Nedá sa nájsť ovládač tlačiarne ("Printer driver could not be found") Podľa postupu opísaného v časti Odstránenie nepotrebných ovládačov MP Drivers odinštalujte ovládač tlačiarne a potom ho znova nainštalujte. Nemožno tlačiť: názov aplikácie – názov súboru ("Could not print Application name File name") Po dokončení aktuálnej tlačovej úlohy skúste tlačiť znovu. Zobrazuje sa obrazovka Program rozšíreného prieskumu používania atramentových tlačiarní, skenerov alebo faxov (Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program) Po troch a potom po šiestich mesiacoch od nainštalovania Programu rozšíreného prieskumu používania atramentových tlačiarní, skenerov alebo faxov sa zobrazí obrazovka s potvrdením odoslania informácií o používaní tlačiarne. Potom sa približne štyri roky bude zobrazovať každých šesť mesiacov. Prečítajte si pokyny na obrazovke a postupujte podľa nasledujúcich krokov. Na obrazovke počítača sa zobrazuje hlásenie Strana 617 z celkového počtu 684 Ak súhlasíte s účasťou v programe prieskumu: Kliknite na tlačidlo Agree a postupujte podľa pokynov na obrazovke. Informácie o používaní tlačiarne sa odošlú prostredníctvom internetu. Ak ste postupovali podľa pokynov na obrazovke, informácie sa začnú automaticky odosielať počnúc nasledujúcim prieskumom a obrazovka s potvrdením sa už nezobrazí. Poznámka Pri odosielaní informácií sa môže zobraziť obrazovka s upozornením, napríklad obrazovka na zabezpečenie internetu. V takom prípade skontrolujte, či je názov programu IJPLMUI.exe, a potom ho povoľte. Ak zrušíte začiarknutie políčka Send automatically from the next time, informácie sa nebudú automaticky odosielať počnúc nasledujúcim prieskumom a v čase nasledujúceho prieskumu sa zobrazí obrazovka s potvrdením. Ak chcete, aby sa informácie odosielali automaticky, pozrite si časť Zmena nastavenia obrazovky s potvrdením:. Ak nesúhlasíte s účasťou v programe prieskumu: Kliknite na tlačidlo Do not agree. Obrazovka s potvrdením sa zatvorí a prieskum sa momentálne preskočí. Obrazovka s potvrdením sa zobrazí znovu po troch mesiacoch. Odinštalovanie Programu rozšíreného prieskumu používania atramentových tlačiarní, skenerov alebo faxov: Ak chcete odinštalovať Program rozšíreného prieskumu používania atramentových tlačiarní, skenerov alebo faxov, kliknite na tlačidlo Odinštalovať (Uninstall) a pokračujte podľa pokynov na obrazovke. Zmena nastavenia obrazovky s potvrdením: 1. V ponuke Štart (Start) vyberte nasledujúce položky. V systéme Windows Vista vyberte ponuku Štart (Start) > položky Ovládací panel (Control Panel) > Odinštalovanie programu (Uninstall a program). V systéme Windows XP vyberte ponuku Štart (Start) > položky Ovládací panel (Control Panel) > Pridanie alebo odstránenie programov (Add or Remove Programs). V systéme Windows 2000 vyberte ponuku Štart (Start) > položky Nastavenie (Settings) > Ovládací panel (Control Panel) > Pridať alebo odstrániť programy (Add/Remove Programs). Poznámka V systéme Windows Vista sa pri inštalácii, odinštalovaní alebo spúšťaní softvéru Na obrazovke počítača sa zobrazuje hlásenie Strana 618 z celkového počtu 684 môže zobraziť dialógové okno s potvrdením alebo varovaním. Toto dialógové okno sa zobrazí v prípade, ak sa na vykonanie úlohy vyžadujú správcovské oprávnenia. Ak ste prihlásení ako správca, pokračujte kliknutím na tlačidlo Pokračovať (Continue) alebo Povoliť (Allow). 2. Vyberte položku Canon Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program. 3. Vyberte možnosť Change. Ak postupujete podľa pokynov na obrazovke a vyberiete možnosť Yes, obrazovka s potvrdením sa zobrazí v čase nasledujúceho prieskumu Ak vyberiete možnosť No, informácie sa budú odosielať automaticky. Poznámka Ak vyberiete možnosť Odinštalovať (Uninstall) (alebo Odstrániť (Remove)), Program rozšíreného prieskumu používania atramentových tlačiarní, skenerov alebo faxov sa odinštaluje. Pokračujte podľa pokynov na obrazovke. Zobrazuje sa ikona Program rozšíreného prieskumu používania atramentových tlačiarní, skenerov alebo faxov (Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program) Ak je nainštalovaný Program rozšíreného prieskumu používania atramentových tlačiarní, skenerov alebo faxov, odosielanie informácií o používaní tlačiarne je naplánované po troch a potom po šiestich mesiacoch od nainštalovania. Potom sa približne štyri roky budú odosielať každých šesť mesiacov. Ak nastane čas na odoslanie informácií o používaní tlačiarne, v Doku (Dock) sa zobrazí ikona Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program. V systéme Mac OS X v.10.3.9 sa Program rozšíreného prieskumu používania atramentových tlačiarní, skenerov alebo faxov neinštaluje. Po kliknutí na ikonu si prečítajte pokyny na obrazovke a postupujte podľa nasledujúcich krokov. Na obrazovke počítača sa zobrazuje hlásenie Strana 619 z celkového počtu 684 Ak súhlasíte s účasťou v programe prieskumu: Kliknite na tlačidlo Agree a postupujte podľa pokynov na obrazovke. Informácie o používaní tlačiarne sa odošlú prostredníctvom internetu. Ak ste postupovali podľa pokynov na obrazovke, informácie sa začnú automaticky odosielať počnúc nasledujúcim prieskumom a obrazovka s potvrdením sa už nezobrazí. Poznámka Ak zrušíte začiarknutie políčka Send automatically from the next time, informácie sa nebudú automaticky odosielať počnúc nasledujúcim prieskumom a v čase nasledujúceho prieskumu sa v Doku (Dock) zobrazí ikona Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program. Ak nesúhlasíte s účasťou v programe prieskumu: Kliknite na tlačidlo Do not agree. Obrazovka s potvrdením sa zatvorí a prieskum sa momentálne preskočí. Obrazovka s potvrdením sa zobrazí znovu po troch mesiacoch. Zastavenie odosielania informácií: Kliknite na tlačidlo Turn off. Program rozšíreného prieskumu používania atramentových tlačiarní, skenerov alebo faxov sa deaktivuje a informácie sa prestanú odosielať. Informácie o spôsobe obnovenia prieskumu nájdete v časti Zmena nastavenia: . Odinštalovanie Programu rozšíreného prieskumu používania atramentových tlačiarní, skenerov alebo faxov: 1. Zastavte Program rozšíreného prieskumu používania atramentových tlačiarní, skenerov alebo faxov. Zmena nastavenia: 2. V ponuke Prejsť (Go) vyberte položku Aplikácie (Applications), dvakrát kliknite na priečinok Canon Utilities a potom na priečinok Inkjet Extended Survey Program. 3. Presuňte súbor Canon Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program.app do Koša (Trash). 4. Reštartujte počítač. Vyprázdnite Kôš (Trash) a reštartujte počítač. Zmena nastavenia: Ak chcete, aby sa obrazovka s potvrdením zobrazovala pri každom odosielaní informácií o používaní tlačiarne, alebo chcete pokračovať v prieskume, postupujte podľa nasledujúcich krokov. 1. V ponuke Prejsť (Go) vyberte položku Aplikácie (Applications), dvakrát kliknite na priečinok Canon Utilities a potom na priečinok Inkjet Extended Survey Program. 2. Dvakrát kliknite na ikonu Canon Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program. Do not display the confirmation screen when information is sent: Ak začiarknete toto políčko, informácie sa budú odosielať automaticky. Ak zrušíte začiarknutie políčka, v čase nasledujúceho prieskumu sa v Doku (Dock) zobrazí ikona Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program. Kliknite na ikonu a postupujte podľa pokynov na obrazovke. Na obrazovke počítača sa zobrazuje hlásenie Strana 620 z celkového počtu 684 Tlačidlo Turn off/Turn on: Kliknutím na tlačidlo Turn off sa Program rozšíreného prieskumu používania atramentových tlačiarní, skenerov alebo faxov deaktivuje. Kliknutím na tlačidlo Turn on sa Program rozšíreného prieskumu používania atramentových tlačiarní, skenerov alebo faxov znovu aktivuje. Na začiatok strany Pre používateľov systému Windows Strana 621 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Pre používateľov systému Windows Pre používateľov systému Windows Nezobrazuje sa monitor stavu tlačiarne Kontrola: Je monitor stavu tlačiarne zapnutý? Skontrolujte, či je v ponuke Option monitora stavu tlačiarne vybratá možnosť Enable Status Monitor. 1. Otvorte dialógové okno s vlastnosťami tlačiarne. Otvorenie dialógového okna s vlastnosťami tlačiarne (Windows) 2. Na karte Maintenance kliknite na možnosť View Printer Status. 3. Ak v ponuke Option nie je vybratá možnosť Enable Status Monitor, vyberte ju. Ak používate systém Windows Vista: Spustenie programu MP Navigator EX pri každom stlačení tlačidla SKENOVAŤ (SCAN) na zariadení Kontrola: Nastavte odpoveď na stlačenie tlačidla SKENOVAŤ (SCAN) na zariadení. Podľa nasledujúceho postupu nastavte odpoveď v počítači. 1. Použitím správcovských oprávnení sa prihláste ako používateľ. 2. Spustite Ovládací panel (Control Panel) a kliknite na položky Hardvér a zvuk (Hardware and Sound) a Skenery a fotoaparáty (Scanners and Cameras). 3. Vyberte položku WIA Canon XXX ser a potom kliknite na tlačidlo Vlastnosti (Properties). Ak sa zobrazí obrazovka Kontrola používateľských kont (User Account Control), kliknite na tlačidlo Pokračovať (Continue). 4. Na obrazovke Vlastnosti zariadenia WIA Canon XXX ser (WIA Canon XXX ser Properties) kliknite na kartu Udalosti (Events). 5. V časti Akcie (Actions) vyberte možnosť Spustiť nasledovný program (Start this program) a potom v rozbaľovacej ponuke vyberte aplikáciu MP Navigator EX Ver3.0. V rozbaľovacej ponuke Vyberte udalosť (Select an event) vyberte požadovanú udalosť a potom vyberte, aby sa pre každú udalosť spúšťal program MP Navigator EX Ver3.0. Ak je už program MP Navigator EX Ver3.0 vybratý pre každú udalosť, kliknite na tlačidlo Zrušiť (Cancel). 6. Kliknite na tlačidlo OK. Na začiatok strany Na zariadení kompatibilnom so štandardom PictBridge sa zobrazuje... Strana 622 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Na zariadení kompatibilnom so štandardom PictBridge sa zobrazuje chybové hlásenie (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) Na zariadení kompatibilnom so štandardom PictBridge sa zobrazuje chybové hlásenie (len pre zariadenie MP270 series) V nasledujúcej časti sú uvedené možné chyby, ktoré sa môžu vyskytnúť pri tlači priamo zo zariadenia kompatibilného so štandardom PictBridge, a postupy na ich odstránenie. Poznámka V tejto časti sú opísané chyby, ktoré sa zobrazujú na zariadeniach kompatibilných so štandardom PictBridge od spoločnosti Canon. Chybové hlásenia a činnosti sa môžu líšiť v závislosti od používaného zariadenia. V prípade zariadení kompatibilných so štandardom PictBridge inej značky ako Canon skontrolujte kód chyby na displeji LED a vykonajte príslušné opatrenia na jej odstránenie. Podrobné informácie nájdete v časti Na displeji LED sa zobrazuje kód chyby . Informácie o chybách zobrazených na zariadení kompatibilnom so štandardom PictBridge a ich riešení nájdete aj v referenčnej príručke k tomuto zariadeniu. V prípade iných problémov so zariadením sa obráťte na výrobcu. Chybové hlásenie na zariadení kompatibilnom so štandardom PictBridge Opatrenie [Printer in use/Tlačiareň sa používa] Ak zariadenie tlačí z počítača alebo sa zahrieva, počkajte, kým sa úloha nedokončí. Zariadenie automaticky spustí tlač, keď bude pripravené. [No paper/Chýba papier] Vložte papier do zadného zásobníka a na displeji zariadenia kompatibilného so štandardom PictBridge vyberte možnosť Pokračovať (Continue)*. * Ak chcete obnoviť tlač, namiesto výberu možnosti Pokračovať (Continue) na kompatibilnom zariadení môžete tiež stlačiť tlačidlo Čiernobielo (Black) alebo Farebne (Color) na multifunkčnom zariadení. [Paper Error/Chyba papiera] Výstupný zásobník papiera je zatvorený. Otvorte výstupný zásobník papiera a stlačte tlačidlo Čiernobielo (Black) alebo Farebne (Color) na multifunkčnom zariadení. [Paper jam/Zaseknutie papiera] Výberom položky Zastaviť (Stop) na displeji zariadenia kompatibilného so štandardom PictBridge zastavte tlač. Vyberte zaseknutý papier, vložte nový papier, stlačte tlačidlo Čiernobielo (Black) alebo Farebne (Color) na multifunkčnom zaradení a pokúste sa znovu spustiť tlač. [Printer cover open/Otvorený kryt tlačiarne] Zatvorte skenovaciu jednotku (kryt) zariadenia. [No Print Head/Chýba tlačová hlava] Kazeta FINE nie je vložená alebo nie je kompatibilná s týmto zariadením. Podľa pokynov v odsekoch E, 0, 4 / E, 0, 5 v časti Na displeji LED sa zobrazuje kód chyby vykonajte príslušné opatrenia. [Waste tank full/Odpadová kazeta je plná]/[Ink absorber full/Absorbér odpadového atramentu je plný] Absorbér odpadového atramentu je takmer plný. Podľa pokynov v odseku E, 0, 9 v časti Na displeji LED sa zobrazuje kód chyby vykonajte príslušné opatrenia. [No ink/Chýba atrament]/[Ink cassette error/Chyba kazety s atramentom] V kazete FINE sa minul alebo sa pravdepodobne minul atrament. Kazeta FINE možno nie je správne vložená alebo nie je kompatibilná s týmto zariadením. Skontrolujte kód chyby na displeji LED a vykonajte príslušné Na zariadení kompatibilnom so štandardom PictBridge sa zobrazuje... Strana 623 z celkového počtu 684 opatrenie na odstránenie chyby. Na displeji LED sa zobrazuje kód chyby [Hardware Error/Hardvérová chyba] Vyskytla sa chyba kazety FINE. Vymeňte kazetu FINE. Bežná údržba Na začiatok strany Problems with Scanning Strana 624 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning Problems with Scanning Scanner Does Not Work ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start Error Message Appears and the ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screen Does Not Appear Scan Quality (Image Displayed on the Monitor) Is Poor Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas Cannot Scan Multiple Documents at One Time Cannot Scan Properly in Auto Scan Mode Slow Scanning Speed "There is not enough memory." Message Is Displayed Computer Stops Operating during Scanning Scanner Does Not Work After Upgrading Windows Page top Scanner Does Not Work Strana 625 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Scanner Does Not Work Scanner Does Not Work Check 1: Make sure that the machine is turned on. Check 2: Connect the USB cable to a different USB port on the computer. Check 3: If the USB cable is connected to a hub, remove it from the hub and connect it to a USB port on the computer. Check 4: Restart the computer. Page top ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start Strana 626 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start Check 1: Make sure that the MP Drivers are installed. If it is not installed, insert the Setup CD-ROM into the computer's disc drive, then select Custom Install and install MP Drivers. Check 2: On the File menu of the application, select Select Source and select the machine. Important Do not select the model name that includes WIA in it. Note The operation may differ depending on the application. Check 3: Start from a TWAIN-compliant application. Page top Error Message Appears and the ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screen ... Strana 627 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Error Message Appears and the ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screen Does Not Appear Error Message Appears and the ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screen Does Not Appear Check 1: Make sure that the machine is turned on. Check 2: Connect the USB cable to a different USB port on the computer. Check 3: If the USB cable is connected to a hub, remove it from the hub and connect it to a USB port on the computer. Check 4: Make sure that the MP Drivers are installed. If it is not installed, insert the Setup CD-ROM into the computer's disc drive, then select Custom Install and install MP Drivers. Check 5: On the File menu of the application, select Select Source and select the machine. Note The operation may differ depending on the application. Check 6: Make sure that the application is TWAIN-compliant. You cannot open ScanGear (scanner driver) from applications not supporting TWAIN. Check 7: Exit ScanGear (scanner driver) if it is running on another application. Page top Scan Quality (Image Displayed on the Monitor) Is Poor Strana 628 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Scan Quality (Image Displayed on the Monitor) Is Poor Scan Quality (Image Displayed on the Monitor) Is Poor Check 1: Increase the scanning resolution. Resolution Check 2: Set the scale to 100%. Some applications do not display images clearly if the image is too small. Check 3: If moire (stripe pattern) appears, take the following measures and scan again. On the Basic Mode tab of ScanGear (scanner driver), select Magazine(Color) in Select Source. On the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear (scanner driver), set Descreen in Image Settings to ON. Image Settings Note If moire appears when you scan a digital print photo, take the above measures and scan again. If you use MP Navigator EX, set Document Type to Magazine(Color) or enable Descreen in the Scan Settings dialog box and scan again. Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents) Check 4: Check the monitor's color depth. From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Appearance and Personalization > Adjust screen resolution to open the Display Settings dialog box. Set the color depth to Medium (16 bit) or Highest (32 bit). Windows XP: From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Display to open the Display Properties dialog box. On the Settings tab, set Colors to Medium (16 bit) or Highest (32 bit). Windows 2000: From the Start menu, select Settings > Control Panel > Display to open the Display Properties dialog box. On the Settings tab, set Colors to High Color (16 bit) or True Color (32 bit). Check 5: Clean the Platen and Document Cover. Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover Check 6: If the document is in poor condition (dirty, faded, etc.), use Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading Correction, Grain Correction, etc. in Image Settings on the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear (scanner driver). Image Settings Check 7: If the color tone of images is different from the original document, take the following measures and scan again. On the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear (scanner driver), set Image Adjustment in Image Settings to None. Image Settings Open the Preferences dialog box from the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear (scanner driver) and set Color Matching on the Color Settings tab. Color Settings Tab Page top Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas Strana 629 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas Check: Specify the scan area. (Auto Crop) in ScanGear (scanner driver) to automatically display the cropping frame (scan Click area) according to the document size. You can also manually specify the scan area, for example when there are white margins along the document or when you want to create custom cropping frames. Adjusting Cropping Frames Page top Cannot Scan Multiple Documents at One Time Strana 630 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Cannot Scan Multiple Documents at One Time Cannot Scan Multiple Documents at One Time Check 1: Make sure that the documents are placed correctly on the Platen. Placing Documents Check 2: Scan each item individually. Some applications do not support multiple image scanning. Page top Cannot Scan Properly in Auto Scan Mode Strana 631 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Cannot Scan Properly in Auto Scan Mode Cannot Scan Properly in Auto Scan Mode Check 1: Make sure that the documents are placed correctly on the Platen. Placing Documents Check 2: Multiple image scanning may not be supported. Some applications do not support multiple image scanning. In that case, scan each item individually. Page top Slow Scanning Speed Strana 632 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Slow Scanning Speed Slow Scanning Speed Check 1: To view the image on a monitor, set the output resolution to around 150 dpi. To print, set it to around 300 dpi. Resolution Check 2: Set Fading Correction, Grain Correction, etc. to None. Image Settings Check 3: In MP Navigator EX, deselect the Correct slanted document checkbox and scan again. Scan Settings Dialog Box Check 4: In MP Navigator EX, deselect the Detect the orientation of text documents and rotate images checkbox and scan again. Scan Settings Dialog Box Page top "There is not enough memory." Message Is Displayed Strana 633 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > "There is not enough memory." Message Is Displayed "There is not enough memory." Message Is Displayed Check 1: Exit other applications and try again. Check 2: Reduce the resolution or output size and scan again. Resolution Page top Computer Stops Operating during Scanning Strana 634 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Computer Stops Operating during Scanning Computer Stops Operating during Scanning Check 1: Restart the computer, reduce the output resolution in ScanGear (scanner driver) and scan again. Check 2: Delete unnecessary files to obtain sufficient free hard disk space, then scan again. Error message may appear if there is not enough hard disk space to scan and save, when the image size is too large (such as when scanning a large document at high resolution.) Check 3: For Location of Temporary Files in MP Navigator EX, specify a folder on a drive with sufficient free space. General Tab Check 4: Multiple devices may be connected to USB ports. Disconnect other devices. Page top Scanner Does Not Work After Upgrading Windows Strana 635 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Scanner Does Not Work After Upgrading Windows Scanner Does Not Work After Upgrading Windows Check: Disconnect the machine from the computer, then uninstall and reinstall the MP Drivers and MP Navigator EX. Step 1: Uninstall the MP Drivers. See "Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers " for details. Step 2: Uninstall MP Navigator EX. 1. From the Start menu, select (All) Programs > Canon Utilities > MP Navigator EX 3.0 > MP Navigator EX Uninstall. 2. When a confirmation appears, click Yes. 3. When uninstallation is complete, click OK. MP Navigator EX is uninstalled. Step 3: Reinstall the MP Drivers and MP Navigator EX. Insert the Setup CD-ROM into the computer's disc drive, then select Custom Install and reinstall the MP Drivers and MP Navigator EX. Page top Software Problems Strana 636 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Software Problems Software Problems E-mail Software Program You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Screen for Selecting an E-mail Software Program Scanned Image Is Printed Enlarged (Reduced) Scanned Image Is Enlarged (Reduced) on the Computer Monitor Scanned Image Does Not Open Page top E-mail Software Program You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the... Strana 637 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Software Problems > E-mail Software Program You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Screen for Selecting an E-mail Software Program E-mail Software Program You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Screen for Selecting an E-mail Software Program Check 1: MP Navigator EX may not support the e-mail software program. The following e-mail software programs are supported. (Image are attached to the mail message automatically.) - Windows Mail (Windows Vista) - Outlook Express (Windows XP/Windows 2000) - Microsoft Outlook Check 2: If an e-mail software program does not operate properly, check that the program's MAPI is enabled. To enable MAPI, refer to the manual of the e-mail software program. Check 3: If using an e-mail software program other than the ones listed above, select None (Attach Manually) when prompted to select a program and attach the scanned image manually. Page top Scanned Image Is Printed Enlarged (Reduced) Strana 638 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Software Problems > Scanned Image Is Printed Enlarged (Reduced) Scanned Image Is Printed Enlarged (Reduced) Check: Set the printing size in the application. Page top Scanned Image Is Enlarged (Reduced) on the Computer Monitor Strana 639 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Software Problems > Scanned Image Is Enlarged (Reduced) on the Computer Monitor Scanned Image Is Enlarged (Reduced) on the Computer Monitor Check 1: Change the display setting in the application. You cannot reduce the display size in "Paint." To reduce the display size, open the images in an application. For details, refer to the application's manual. If you have any questions, contact the manufacturer of the application. Check 2: Change the resolution setting in ScanGear (scanner driver) and scan again. The higher the resolution, the larger the resulting image will be. Resolution Page top Scanned Image Does Not Open Strana 640 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Software Problems > Scanned Image Does Not Open Scanned Image Does Not Open Check: If the file format is not supported by the application, scan the image again and save it in a popular file format such as JPEG. For details, refer to the application's manual. If you have any questions, contact the manufacturer of the application. Page top MP Navigator EX Problems Strana 641 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > MP Navigator EX Problems MP Navigator EX Problems Cannot Scan at the Correct Size Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When Scanning Using the Operation Panel Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Scanned Image Is Slanted Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Orientation Changes in the Scanned Image Page top Cannot Scan at the Correct Size Strana 642 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > MP Navigator EX Problems > Cannot Scan at the Correct Size Cannot Scan at the Correct Size Check 1: Make sure that the documents are placed correctly on the Platen. Placing Documents Check 2: Set Document Size to the actual document size and scan again. If the matching size is not found, scan at a larger size and trim the image. See the Toolbar (Trimming) in " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details. Page top Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When ... Strana 643 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > MP Navigator EX Problems > Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When Scanning Using the Operation Panel Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When Scanning Using the Operation Panel Check 1: Make sure that the documents are placed correctly on the Platen. Placing Documents Check 2: Check that the MP Navigator EX settings are correctly set according to the document. If you cannot scan properly with Auto Scan using the Operation Panel, specify the document type or size in MP Navigator EX. Scanning Photos and Documents Page top Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Scanned Image Is Slanted Strana 644 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > MP Navigator EX Problems > Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Scanned Image Is Slanted Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Scanned Image Is Slanted Check: In MP Navigator EX, deselect the Correct slanted document checkbox and scan again. Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents) Page top Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Orientation Changes in the ... Strana 645 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > MP Navigator EX Problems > Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Orientation Changes in the Scanned Image Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Orientation Changes in the Scanned Image Check: In MP Navigator EX, deselect the Detect the orientation of text documents and rotate images checkbox and scan again. Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents) Page top Ak problém nemožno vyriešiť Strana 646 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Ak problém nemožno vyriešiť Ak problém nemožno vyriešiť Ak problém nemožno vyriešiť pomocou návodov v tejto časti, obráťte sa na predajcu zariadenia alebo servisné stredisko. Zamestnanci podpory spoločnosti Canon sú školení, aby boli schopní poskytovať technickú podporu na uspokojenie potrieb zákazníkov. Upozornenie Ak zariadenie vydáva nezvyčajný zvuk, dym alebo zápach, ihneď ho vypnite. Odpojte napájací kábel z elektrickej zásuvky a obráťte sa na predajcu alebo servisné stredisko. Nikdy sa nepokúšajte zariadenie opravovať ani rozoberať sami. Pokusy zákazníkov opraviť alebo rozobrať zariadenie budú dôvodom ukončenia záruky bez ohľadu na to, či záručná lehota vypršala. Skôr než sa obrátite na servisné stredisko, zistite si nasledujúce skutočnosti: Názov produktu: * Názov zariadenia sa nachádza na prednom obale inštalačnej príručky. Sériové číslo: pozrite si inštalačnú príručku. Podrobnosti o probléme. Ako ste sa pokúsili problém vyriešiť a čo sa stalo. Na začiatok strany Často kladené otázky Strana 647 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Riešenie problémov > Často kladené otázky Často kladené otázky Žiadne výsledky tlače/Tlač je rozmazaná/Farby sú skreslené/Biele pruhy Zariadenie pracuje, ale atrament sa nevystrekuje Nedajú sa nainštalovať ovládače MP Drivers Tlač sa nespustí Kopírovanie alebo tlač sa zastaví ešte pred dokončením Chyba zápisu/Chyba výstupu/Chyba komunikácie Výsledky tlače nie sú uspokojivé Zaseknutý papier Papier sa správne nepodáva Na začiatok strany Instructions for Use (Printer Driver) Strana 648 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Instructions for Use (Printer Driver) Instructions for Use (Printer Driver) This printer driver is subject to the following restrictions. Keep the following points in mind when using the printer driver. Restrictions on the Printer Driver With some applications, the Copies setting in the Page Setup tab of the printer driver may not be enabled. In this case, use the copies setting in the Print dialog box of the application software. If the selected Language in the About dialog box does not match the operating system interface language, the driver screen may not be displayed properly. Do not change the Advanced tab items of the printer properties. If you change any of the items, you will not be able to use the following functions correctly. Also, if Print to file is selected in the Print dialog box of the application software and with applications that prohibit EMF spooling, such as Adobe Photoshop LE and MS Photo Editor, the following functions will not operate. Preview before printing on the Main tab Prevent loss of print data in the Print Options dialog box Page Layout, Poster, Booklet, Duplex Printing, Specify Margin..., Print from Last Page, Collate, and Stamp/Background... on the Page Setup tab Since the resolution in the preview display differs from the printing resolution, text and lines in the preview display may appear different from the actual print result. With some applications, the printing is divided into multiple print jobs. To cancel printing, delete all divided print jobs. If image data is not printed correctly, display the Print Options dialog box and change the setting of Disable ICM required from the application software. This may solve the problem. Software windows may not appear correctly on Windows Vista when fonts are set to Larger scale. When you want to display the windows with Larger scale fonts, set the desktop theme to Windows Classic as follows: 1. Select Control Panel from the Start menu. 2. Select Appearance and Personalization -> Personalization -> Theme. The Theme Settings dialog box opens. 3. At the Theme Settings dialog box, click the Themes tab, and select Windows Classic from Theme. 4. Click OK. Desktop changes to Windows Classic display. Points to Note with Applications There are following restrictions in Microsoft Word (Microsoft Corporation). When Microsoft Word has the same printing functions as the printer driver, use Word to specify them. When selecting Scaled, Fit-to-Page, or Page Layout from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab, the selected printing function may not be effective, depending on the version of Word. If this happens, follow the procedure below. Instructions for Use (Printer Driver) Strana 649 z celkového počtu 684 1. Open Word's Print dialog box. 2. Open the printer driver setup window, specify Page Layout on the Page Setup tab, and click OK. 3. Without starting printing, close the Print dialog box. 4. Open Word's Print dialog box again. 5. Open the printer driver setup window again and click OK. 6. Start printing. Illustrator/Adobe Systems Inc. If bitmap printing takes effect, printing may take time or some data may not be printed. Print after unchecking the Bitmap Printing check box in the Print dialog box. Page top General Notes (Scanner Driver) Strana 650 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > General Notes (Scanner Driver) General Notes (Scanner Driver) ScanGear (scanner driver) is subject to the following restrictions. Keep these points in mind when using it. Scanner Driver Restrictions When using the NTFS file system, the TWAIN data source may not be invoked. This is because the TWAIN module cannot be written to the winnt folder for security reasons. Contact the computer's administrator for help. Some computers (including laptops) connected to the machine may not resume correctly from standby mode. In that case, restart the computer. Do not connect two or more machines or multifunction printers with scanner function to the same computer simultaneously. If multiple scanning devices are connected, you cannot scan from the Operation Panel of the machine and also may experience errors while accessing the devices. Software screens may not appear correctly on Windows Vista when font size is set to Larger scale. If you want to display the screens with Larger scale fonts, change the theme in Appearance and Personalization to Windows Classic as follows: 1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel. 2. Select Appearance and Personalization > Personalization > Theme. The Theme Settings dialog box opens. 3. On the Theme tab of the Theme Settings dialog box, select Windows Classic under Theme. 4. Click OK. Desktop changes to Windows Classic view. Use the default display font size of the OS. Otherwise, software screens may not appear correctly. Scanning may fail if the computer has resumed from sleep or standby mode. In that case, follow these steps and scan again. 1. Turn off the machine. 2. Exit ScanGear (scanner driver), then disconnect the USB cable from the computer and reconnect it. 3. Turn on the machine. ScanGear (scanner driver) cannot be opened in multiple applications at the same time. Within an application, ScanGear (scanner driver) cannot be opened for the second time when it is already open. Be sure to close the ScanGear (scanner driver) window before closing the application. Make sure that you have adequate disk space available when scanning large images at high resolutions. For example, at least 300 MB of free space is required to scan an A4 document at 600 dpi in full-color. ScanGear (scanner driver) and WIA driver cannot be used at the same time. Do not enter the computer into sleep or hibernate state during scanning. Calibration may take time if the machine is connected via USB 1.1. Applications with Restrictions on Use If you start Media Center included in Windows XP Media Center Edition 2005, you may not be able to scan using the Operation Panel of the machine. In that case, restart the computer. You cannot scan images with Media Center included in Windows Vista™ and Windows XP Media Center Edition 2005. Scan with other applications such as MP Navigator EX. In some applications, you may encounter a problem when you switch to thumbnail view in the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear (scanner driver). In that case, scan each document individually, General Notes (Scanner Driver) Strana 651 z celkového počtu 684 changing Paper Size according to the document. In some applications, if you select the View scanned images checkbox in the Auto Scan Mode tab of ScanGear (scanner driver), the window displaying the thumbnails of the scanned images may close automatically. Some applications may not display the TWAIN user interface. In that case, refer to the application's manual and change the settings accordingly. Some applications do not support continuous scanning of multiple documents. In some cases, only the first scanned image is accepted, or multiple images are scanned as one image. When scanning platen size images into a Microsoft Office application (such as Word, Excel or PowerPoint), click Custom Insert in the Insert Picture from Scanner or Camera screen. Otherwise, images may not be scanned correctly. Images may not be scanned correctly in some applications. In that case, increase the operating system's virtual memory and retry. When image size is too large (such as when scanning large images at high resolution), your computer may not respond or the progress bar may remain at 0% depending on the application. In that case, cancel the action (for example by clicking Cancel on the progress bar), then increase the operating system's virtual memory or reduce the image size/resolution and retry. Alternatively, scan the image via MP Navigator EX first, then save and import it into the application. Page top Príloha Strana 652 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Príloha Príloha Oblasť tlače Ako odpojiť a nasadiť kryt dokumentov Odstránenie nežiaducej tlačovej úlohy Aktualizácia ovládačov MP Drivers Odinštalovanie príručiek on-screen manual Preprava zariadenia Otvorenie dialógového okna s vlastnosťami tlačiarne (Windows) Otvorenie dialógového okna Nastavenie strany (Page Setup) a Tlač (Print) (Macintosh) Otvorenie aplikácie Canon IJ Printer Utility (Macintosh) Zdieľanie tlačiarne v sieti Na začiatok strany Oblasť tlače Strana 653 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Príloha > Oblasť tlače Oblasť tlače Na zabezpečenie vyššej kvality tlače ponecháva zariadenie na okraji každého média okraje. Skutočná oblasť tlače bude oblasť vnútri týchto okrajov. Odporúčaná oblasť tlače Oblasť tlače : Spoločnosť Canon odporúča, aby ste tlačili v rámci tejto oblasti. : Oblasť, na ktorú je možné tlačiť. Tlač v tejto oblasti však môže ovplyvniť kvalitu tlače alebo presnosť podávania papiera. Poznámka Tlač bez okrajov Výberom možnosti tlače bez okrajov môžete vytvárať výtlačky bez okrajov. Pri tlači bez okrajov môže dôjsť na okrajoch k jemnému orezaniu, keďže obrázok, ktorý sa má kopírovať, je zväčšený tak, aby vyplnil celú stranu. Na tlač bez okrajov používajte nasledujúci typ papiera: Glossy Photo Paper „na každodenné použitie“ GP-501 Photo Paper Glossy GP-502 Photo Paper Plus Semi-Gloss SG-201 Photo Paper Pro Platinum PT-101* Photo Paper Plus Glossy II PP-201 Photo Paper Pro II PR-201 Matte Photo Paper MP-101 * V prípade zariadenia MP270 series možno tento papier použiť len pri tlači z počítača. Tlač bez okrajov na akomkoľvek inom type papiera môže podstatne znížiť kvalitu tlače alebo spôsobiť zmenu farebných odtieňov výtlačkov. Tlač bez okrajov na obyčajnom papieri môže spôsobiť zníženú kvalitu výtlačkov. Použite ich len na testovaciu tlač. Tlačiť bez okrajov na obyčajnom papieri môžete len pri tlači z počítača. Tlačiť bez okrajov nemôžete na papier veľkosti Legal, A5, B5 ani na obálky. V závislosti od typu papiera môže tlač bez okrajov znížiť kvalitu tlače na hornom a dolnom okraji papiera, prípadne môže vytlačiť tieto časti rozmazane. Formát Letter a Legal Obálky Iné veľkosti ako Letter, Legal a obálky Na začiatok strany Iné veľkosti ako Letter, Legal a obálky Strana 654 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Príloha > Oblasť tlače > Iné veľkosti ako Letter, Legal a obálky Iné veľkosti ako Letter, Legal a obálky Veľkosť Oblasť tlače (šírka x výška) A5* 5,56 x 7,95 palca/141,2 x 202,0 mm A4 8,00 x 11,38 palca/203,2 x 289,0 mm B5* 6,90 x 9,80 palca/175,2 x 249,0 mm 4" x 6" / 10 x 15 cm 3,73 x 5,69 palca/94,8 x 144,4 mm 4" x 8" / 10 x 20 cm* 3,73 x 7,69 palca/94,8 x 195,2 mm 5" x 7" / 13 x 18 cm 4,73 x 6,69 palca/120,2 x 169,8 mm 8" x 10" / 20 x 25 cm 7,73 x 9,69 palca/196,4 x 246,0 mm Wide 3,73 x 6,80 palca/94,8 x 172,6 mm * V prípade zariadenia MP270 series možno túto veľkosť strany použiť len pri tlači z počítača. Odporúčaná oblasť tlače Oblasť tlače Na začiatok strany Formát Letter a Legal Strana 655 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Príloha > Oblasť tlače > Formát Letter a Legal Formát Letter a Legal Veľkosť Oblasť tlače (šírka x výška) Letter 8,00 x 10,69 palca/203,2 x 271,4 mm Legal* 8,00 x 13,69 palca/203,2 x 347,6 mm * Túto veľkosť papiera možno použiť len pri tlači z počítača. Odporúčaná oblasť tlače Oblasť tlače Na začiatok strany Obálky Strana 656 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Príloha > Oblasť tlače > Obálky Obálky Veľkosť Odporúčaná oblasť tlače (šírka x výška) Európska DL* (European DL*) 4,06 x 7,07 palca/103,2 x 179,5 mm US Comm. Env. #10* 3,86 x 7,91 palca/98,0 x 200,8 mm * Túto veľkosť papiera možno použiť len pri tlači z počítača. Odporúčaná oblasť tlače Na začiatok strany Ako odpojiť a nasadiť kryt dokumentov Strana 657 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Príloha > Ako odpojiť a nasadiť kryt dokumentov Ako odpojiť a nasadiť kryt dokumentov Odpojenie krytu dokumentov: Kryt dokumentov držte vo zvislej polohe. Nasadenie krytu dokumentov: Kryt dokumentov nasaďte podľa nasledujúceho obrázka vložením oboch závesov (A) krytu dokumentov do držiaka (B) vo zvislom smere. Na začiatok strany Deleting the Undesired Print Job Strana 658 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Appendix > Deleting the Undesired Print Job Deleting the Undesired Print Job If the printer does not start printing, the print job data cancelled or failed may be remaining. Delete the undesired print job by using the Canon IJ Status Monitor. 1. Display the Canon IJ Status Monitor Click the status monitor button displayed on the task bar. The Canon IJ Status Monitor appears. 2. Display the print jobs Click Display Print Queue.... The print queue window opens. 3. Delete the print jobs Select Cancel All Documents from the Printer menu. When the confirmation message appears, click Yes. The deletion of the print job is complete. Important Users who have not been granted access permission for printer management cannot delete the print job of another user. Note When you perform this operation, all print jobs are deleted. If the print queue list contained a necessary print job, start the printing process over from the beginning. Page top Aktualizácia ovládačov MP Drivers Strana 659 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Príloha > Aktualizácia ovládačov MP Drivers Aktualizácia ovládačov MP Drivers Získanie najnovších ovládačov MP Drivers Odstránenie nepotrebných ovládačov MP Drivers Pred inštaláciou ovládačov MP Drivers Inštalácia ovládačov MP Drivers Na začiatok strany Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers Strana 660 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Appendix > Updating the MP Drivers > Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers The MP Drivers include a printer driver and scanner driver (ScanGear). By updating the MP Drivers to the latest version of the MP Drivers, unresolved problems may be solved. Access our web site through the Internet and download the latest MP Drivers for your model. Important You can download the MP Drivers for free, but any Internet access charges incurred are your responsibility. Before installing the latest MP Drivers, delete the previously installed version. For information on how to delete the MP Drivers, refer to Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers . Related Topics Before Installing the MP Drivers Installing the MP Drivers Page top Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers Strana 661 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Appendix > Updating the MP Drivers > Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers The MP Drivers you no longer use can be deleted. When deleting the MP Drivers, first exit all programs that are running. The procedure to delete the unnecessary MP Drivers is as follows: When There is an Uninstaller 1. Start the uninstaller In Windows Vista or Windows XP, select the Start menu -> All Programs -> "Your model name" -> MP Drivers Uninstaller. In Windows 2000, select the Start menu -> Programs -> "Your model name" -> MP Drivers Uninstaller. The MP Drivers Uninstaller dialog box is displayed. Important In Windows Vista, a confirmation/warning dialog box may appear when installing, uninstalling or starting software. This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task. When you are logged on to an administrator account, click Continue or Allow to continue. Some applications require an administrator account to continue. When you are logged on to a standard account, switch to an administrator account, and restart the operation from the beginning. 2. Execute the uninstaller Click Execute. When the confirmation message appears, click Yes. When all the files have been deleted, click Complete. The deletion of the MP Drivers is complete. Important Printer driver and scanner driver (ScanGear) will be deleted when you uninstall the MP Drivers. When There is No Uninstaller When there is no uninstaller in the Start menu of Windows Vista, follow these steps: 1. Select the printer to be deleted Select the Start menu -> Control Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Printers. Click the model to delete, then press the Alt key on your keyboard. On the File menu, click Delete. 2. Delete the printer When the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue. Then when the confirmation message appears, click Yes. The icon is deleted. 3. Select the printer driver to be deleted Press the Alt key. On the File menu, select Run as administrator, and then click Server Properties.... When the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue. Click the Drivers tab. In the Installed printer drivers list, click the printer to delete. Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers Strana 662 z celkového počtu 684 4. Delete the printer driver When you click Remove..., Remove Driver And Package dialog box is displayed. Select Remove driver and driver package, and then click OK. In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes. When data collection is completed in the Remove Driver Package dialog box, click Delete. 5. Click OK The deletion of the printer driver is complete. Important You may not be able to delete the printer driver properly from the Installed printer drivers list. If this happens, restart your computer, and try again. Page top Before Installing the MP Drivers Strana 663 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Appendix > Updating the MP Drivers > Before Installing the MP Drivers Before Installing the MP Drivers This section describes the items that you should check before installing the MP Drivers. You should also refer to this section if the MP Drivers cannot be installed. Checking the Machine Status Properly connect the personal computer and the machine. For details on connection instructions, refer to the "Install the Software" in the manual: Getting Started. Turn off the machine. Checking the Personal Computer Settings Terminate all running applications. In Windows Vista, log on as a user who has the administrator rights. In Windows XP, log on as the computer administrator. In Windows 2000, log on as a member of the Administrators group. Note When an old version of the MP Drivers is already installed, first delete (uninstall) that version. For instructions on deleting the MP Drivers, see Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers . Related Topics Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers Installing the MP Drivers Page top Installing the MP Drivers Strana 664 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Appendix > Updating the MP Drivers > Installing the MP Drivers Installing the MP Drivers You can access our web site through the Internet and download the latest MP Drivers for your model. The procedure for installing the downloaded MP Drivers is as follows: 1. Turn off the machine Important When you turn on the computer while the machine is on, the Windows Plug and Play function is executed automatically, and the Found New Hardware window (Windows Vista) or Found New Hardware Wizard window (Windows XP, Windows 2000) is displayed. In this case, click Cancel. 2. Start the installer Double-click the icon of the downloaded file. The installation program starts. Important In Windows Vista, a confirmation/warning dialog box may appear when installing, uninstalling or starting software. This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task. When you are logged on to an administrator account, click Continue or Allow to continue. Some applications require an administrator account to continue. When you are logged on to a standard account, switch to an administrator account, and restart the operation from the beginning. 3. Install the driver At the Welcome window, click Next. Read the contents of the License Agreement window. After checking the contents, click Yes. Installation of the MP Drivers begins. After the Installation Complete window is displayed, check that the machine and the computer are connected through a cable. To select the connection port for your machine manually, check the Select printer port check box, and click Manual selection. At the Select printer port window, select the connection destination, and then click OK. 4. Complete the installation Click Complete. Turn on the machine, and wait awhile until the connection is recognized. This procedure installs the MP Drivers is complete. Depending on the environment you are using, a message prompting you to restart the computer may be displayed. To complete the installation properly, restart the computer. Important You can download the MP Drivers for free, but any Internet access charges incurred are your responsibility. Related Topics Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers Before Installing the MP Drivers Installing the MP Drivers Strana 665 z celkového počtu 684 Page top Odinštalovanie príručiek on-screen manual Strana 666 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Príloha > Odinštalovanie príručiek on-screen manual Odinštalovanie príručiek on-screen manual Ak chcete z počítača odinštalovať všetky nainštalované príručky on-screen manual, postupujte podľa nižšie uvedeného postupu. Skôr ako začnete s odinštalovaním príručiek on-screen manual, ukončite všetky otvorené príručky onscreen manual. Všetky nainštalované príručky on-screen manual sa odstránia naraz. 1. Kliknite na položky Štart (Start) > Všetky programy (All Programs) (Programy (Programs) v systéme Windows 2000) > Canon XXX Manual (kde „ XXX “ je názov zariadenia) > Uninstall. 2. Po zobrazení potvrdzujúcej správy kliknite na tlačidlo OK. Poznámka Keď sa zobrazí hlásenie vyžadujúce reštartovanie počítača, kliknutím na tlačidlo OK reštartujte počítač. Všetky príručky on-screen manual okrem Pomocníka ovládača tlačiarne a Pomocníka ovládača skenera sa odinštalujú naraz. 1. V ponuke Prejsť (Go) vyberte položku Aplikácie (Applications). 2. Dvakrát kliknite na priečinok Canon Utilities a potom na priečinok IJ Manual. 3. Priečinok s názvom zariadenia presuňte myšou do koša. 4. Ikonu Príručka on-screen manual k zariadeniu Canon XXX (Canon XXX Onscreen Manual) (kde „ XXX “ je názov zariadenia) presuňte z plochy do koša. Na začiatok strany Preprava zariadenia Strana 667 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Príloha > Preprava zariadenia Preprava zariadenia Pri premiestňovaní zabaľte zariadenie do pôvodného obalu. Ak už nemáte pôvodný obal, zariadenie dôkladne zabaľte do ochranného materiálu a vložte do pevnej škatule. Dôležité Zariadenie neprenášajte ani neskladujte v naklonenej, vertikálnej ani obrátenej polohe, pretože môže vytiecť atrament a poškodiť zariadenie. 1. Vypnite zariadenie. 2. Skontrolujte, či nesvieti indikátor Napájanie (Power) , a zariadenie odpojte od elektrickej zásuvky. Dôležité Zariadenie neodpájajte, kým indikátor Napájanie (Power) svieti alebo bliká na zeleno, pretože to môže spôsobiť poruchu alebo poškodenie zariadenia, a tak znemožniť tlač. 3. Zasuňte podperu papiera a potom zatvorte výstupný zásobník papiera. 4. Odpojte kábel tlačiarne od počítača aj od zariadenia a potom zo zariadenia vytiahnite zástrčku napájacieho kábla. 5. Pomocou lepiacej pásky zabezpečte všetky kryty na zariadení, aby sa počas prenosu neotvorili. Potom zariadenie zabaľte do igelitového vreca. 6. Pri balení pripevnite k zariadeniu ochranný materiál. Dôležité Pri balení nechajte atramentové kazety FINE nainštalované v zariadení. Poznámka Škatuľu zreteľne označte ako „KREHKÉ“ alebo „POZOR SKLO“. Na začiatok strany Otvorenie dialógového okna s vlastnosťami tlačiarne (Windows) Strana 668 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Príloha > Otvorenie dialógového okna s vlastnosťami tlačiarne (Windows) Otvorenie dialógového okna s vlastnosťami tlačiarne (Windows) Okno nastavenia ovládača tlačiarne možno zobraziť prostredníctvom používaného aplikačného softvéru alebo ponuky Štart (Start) systému Windows. Otvorenie dialógového okna s vlastnosťami tlačiarne prostredníctvom aplikačného softvéru Podľa nižšie uvedeného postupu nakonfigurujte nastavenia tlače. 1. V používanom aplikačnom softvéri vyberte príkaz na tlač. Vo všeobecnosti otvorte dialógové okno Tlačiť (Print) výberom položky Tlačiť (Print) v ponuke Súbor (File). 2. Vyberte názov svojho modelu a potom kliknite na tlačidlo Predvoľby (Preferences) (alebo Vlastnosti (Properties)). Otvorí sa dialógové okno s vlastnosťami tlačiarne. Poznámka V závislosti od používaného aplikačného softvéru môžu byť názvy príkazov alebo ponúk odlišné a môže byť potrebných viac krokov. Podrobné informácie nájdete v používateľskej príručke k aplikačnému softvéru. Otvorenie dialógového okna s vlastnosťami tlačiarne prostredníctvom ponuky Štart (Start) Podľa nižšie uvedeného postupu vykonajte operácie údržby, napríklad čistenie tlačovej hlavy, alebo nakonfigurujte nastavenia tlače spoločné pre všetok aplikačný softvér. 1. V ponuke Štart (Start) vyberte nasledujúce položky. V systéme Windows Vista vyberte ponuku Štart (Start) > položky Ovládací panel (Control Panel) > Hardvér a zvuk (Hardware and Sound) > Tlačiarne (Printers). V systéme Windows XP vyberte ponuku Štart (Start) > položky Ovládací panel (Control Panel) > Tlačiarne a iný hardvér (Printers and Other Hardware) > Tlačiarne a faxy (Printers and Faxes). V systéme Windows 2000 vyberte ponuku Štart (Start) > položky Nastavenie (Settings) > Tlačiarne (Printers). 2. Pravým tlačidlom myši kliknite na ikonu s názvom vášho modelu a v zobrazenej ponuke potom vyberte položku Predvoľby tlače (Printing Preferences). Otvorí sa dialógové okno s vlastnosťami tlačiarne. Dôležité Po otvorení dialógového okna s vlastnosťami tlačiarne pomocou tlačidla Vlastnosti (Properties) sa zobrazia karty týkajúce sa funkcií systému Windows ako napríklad karta Porty (Ports) alebo Rozšírené (Advanced). Tieto karty sa nezobrazia pri otvorení prostredníctvom položky Predvoľby tlače (Printing Preferences) alebo aplikačného softvéru. Informácie o kartách týkajúcich sa funkcií systému Windows nájdete v používateľskej príručke k systému Windows. Na začiatok strany Otvorenie dialógového okna Nastavenie strany (Page Setup) a Tlač... Strana 669 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Príloha > Otvorenie dialógového okna Nastavenie strany (Page Setup) a Tlač (Print) (Macintosh) Otvorenie dialógového okna Nastavenie strany (Page Setup) a Tlač (Print) (Macintosh) Dialógové okná Nastavenie strany (Page Setup) a Tlač (Print) môžete otvoriť z aplikácie, ktorú používate. Otvorenie dialógového okna Nastavenie strany (Page Setup) Pred tlačou otvorte dialógové okno Nastavenie strany (Page Setup) a zadajte nastavenia strany (papiera). 1. V ponuke Súbor (File) aplikačného programu vyberte položku Nastavenie strany... (Page Setup...). Otvorí sa dialógové okno Nastavenie strany (Page Setup). Otvorenie dialógového okna Tlač (Print) Pred tlačou otvorte dialógové okno Tlač (Print) a zadajte nastavenia tlače. 1. V ponuke Súbor (File) aplikačného programu vyberte položku Tlač... (Print...). Otvorí sa dialógové okno Tlač (Print). Na začiatok strany Otvorenie aplikácie Canon IJ Printer Utility (Macintosh) Strana 670 z celkového počtu 684 Rozšírená príručka > Príloha > Otvorenie aplikácie Canon IJ Printer Utility (Macintosh) Otvorenie aplikácie Canon IJ Printer Utility (Macintosh) Aplikáciu Canon IJ Printer Utility otvoríte nasledujúcim spôsobom. V systéme Mac OS X v.10.5.x 1. V ponuke Apple vyberte položku Systémové predvoľby (System Preferences). 2. Kliknite na položku Tlač a faxovanie (Print & Fax). 3. V zozname Tlačiarne (Printers) vyberte názov svojho zariadenia a kliknite na tlačidlo Otvoriť tlačový front... (Open Print Queue...). Zobrazí sa zoznam úloh pre vaše zariadenie. 4. Kliknite na tlačidlo Pomôcka (Utility). Otvorí sa okno Zoznam tlačiarní (Printer List). 5. V zozname Produkt (Product) vyberte názov svojho zariadenia a kliknite na tlačidlo Údržba (Maintenance). Otvorenie aplikácie Canon IJ Printer Utility (Macintosh) Strana 671 z celkového počtu 684 Spustí sa aplikácia Canon IJ Printer Utility. V systéme Mac OS X v.10.4.x alebo Mac OS X v.10.3.9 1. V ponuke Prejsť (Go) vyberte položku Aplikácie (Applications). 2. Dvakrát kliknite na priečinok Pomôcky (Utilities) a potom dvakrát na ikonu Pomôcka na inštaláciu tlačiarne (Printer Setup Utility). Otvorí sa okno Zoznam tlačiarní (Printer List). 3. V zozname Názov (Name) vyberte názov svojho zariadenia a kliknite na tlačidlo Pomôcka (Utility). 4. V zozname Produkt (Product) vyberte názov svojho zariadenia a kliknite na tlačidlo Údržba (Maintenance). Otvorenie aplikácie Canon IJ Printer Utility (Macintosh) Strana 672 z celkového počtu 684 Spustí sa aplikácia Canon IJ Printer Utility. Na začiatok strany Sharing the Printer on a Network Strana 673 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Appendix > Sharing the Printer on a Network Sharing the Printer on a Network When multiple computers are being used in the network environment, you can share the printer connected to one computer with the other computers. The Windows versions of the computers connected to the network do not necessarily have to be the same. Settings on Print Server The procedure for setting up a computer directly connected to a printer with a USB cable is as follows: Settings on Client PC The procedure for setting up those computers that will use this printer through the network is as follows: When you execute print, the data is sent through the print server system to the printer. Important In case an error occurred when a document is printed by the client system to a shared printer, the error message of Canon IJ Status Monitor will be displayed both on the client system and the print server system. For regular printing, Canon IJ Status Monitor will be displayed only on the client system. Note Install the printer driver from the Setup CD-ROM that accompanies the machine on the print server system and each of the client systems according to the OS of each system. You cannot share this printer with Macintosh computers. Related Topic Restrictions on Printer Sharing Page top Settings on Print Server Strana 674 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Appendix > Sharing the Printer on a Network > Settings on Print Server Settings on Print Server When you use the printer on a network, set up the printer driver for sharing on the server system. The procedure for setting up the print server systems is as follows: 1. Install the printer driver on the print server system For details on installation instructions, refer to the "Install the Software" in the manual: Getting Started. 2. Select items from the Start menu as shown below: In Windows Vista, select the Start menu -> Control Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Printers. In Windows XP, select the Start menu -> Control Panel -> Printers and Other Hardware -> Printers and Faxes. In Windows 2000, select the Start menu -> Settings -> Printers. The Printers window (Windows Vista, Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes window (Windows XP) is displayed. 3. Click the icon for the model name of printer to be shared In Windows Vista, press the Alt key on your keyboard and then select Run as administrator -> Sharing... from the displayed File menu. In Windows XP or Windows 2000, select Sharing... from the File menu. Important In Windows Vista, a confirmation/warning dialog box may appear when installing, uninstalling, or starting software. This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task. When you are logged on to an administrator account, click Continue or Allow to continue. Some applications require an administrator account to continue. When you are logged on to a standard account, switch to an administrator account, and restart the operation from the beginning. Note Windows XP may display a message recommending the user to use the Network Setup Wizard to set up sharing. When this message appears, choose not to use the wizard and then set up sharing. 4. Set sharing Select Share this printer (Windows Vista, Windows XP) or Shared as (Windows 2000) on the Sharing tab to set a shared name if necessary, and click OK. The setup on the print server system is complete. Next, set up the client systems. Page top Settings on Client PC Strana 675 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Appendix > Sharing the Printer on a Network > Settings on Client PC Settings on Client PC After setting up the print server system, set up the client system. The procedure for setting up the client systems is as follows: In Windows Vista 1. Install the printer driver on the client systems To install the driver, load the Setup CD-ROM that comes with the machine, and select Custom Install. For details on connection instructions, refer to the "Install the Software" in the manual: Getting Started. Note During the installation, a screen prompting you to turn the printer on appears. Click Manual Selection and then select an appropriate port to complete your installation. 2. Start the wizard Select the Start menu -> Network -> Add a printer. The Add Printer window appears. 3. Add a printer Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer, and click the icon for the printer that you have configured on the print server system to be shared, and then click Next. Note If the icon for the printer is not displayed, check that the printer is actually connected to the print server. It may take some time for the icon for the printer to appear. 4. Complete the setup Take the appropriate action as described on the screen and then click Finish. The icon for the shared printer will be created in the Printers window. The setup on the client systems is complete. You can now share the printer in the network. In Windows XP/Windows 2000 1. Install the printer driver on the client systems To install the driver, load the Setup CD-ROM that comes with the machine, and select Custom Install. For details on connection instructions, refer to the "Install the Software" in the manual: Getting Started. Note During the installation, a screen prompting you to turn the printer on appears. Click Manual Selection and then select an appropriate port to complete your installation. 2. Start the wizard In Windows XP, select the Start menu -> Control Panel -> Printers and Other Hardware -> Settings on Client PC Strana 676 z celkového počtu 684 Printers and Faxes -> Add a printer. In Windows 2000, select the Start menu -> Settings -> Printers -> Add a printer. When Welcome to the Add Printer Wizard screen appears, click Next. 3. Add a printer Select A network printer, or a printer attached to another computer (Windows XP) or Network printer (Windows 2000), then click Next. On the Specify a Printer window (Windows XP) or Locate Your Printer window (Windows 2000), click Next and then search for the print server system. Click the icon for the printer that you have configured on the print server system to be shared, and then click Next. Note If the icon for the printer is not displayed, check that the printer is actually connected to the print server. 4. Complete the setup Take the appropriate action as described on the screen and then click Finish. The icon for the shared printer will be created in the Printers and Faxes window (Windows XP) or Printers window (Windows 2000). The setup on the client systems is complete. You can now share the printer in the network. Page top Restrictions on Printer Sharing Strana 677 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Appendix > Sharing the Printer on a Network > Restrictions on Printer Sharing Restrictions on Printer Sharing These are restrictions that apply when you are using a printer in a network environment. Check the restrictions for the environment you are using. When You Are Sharing a Printer in a Network A print completion message may be displayed. To disable the message display, follow the procedure below. In Windows Vista: Press the Alt key from the Printers window on the client system. Open Run as administrator -> Server Properties... from the displayed File menu. Uncheck Show informational notifications for network printers on the Advanced tab, and then restart the computer. In Windows XP or Windows 2000: Open Server Properties from the File menu of the Printer and Faxes window (Windows XP) or the Printers window (Windows 2000) on the print server system. Uncheck Notify when remote documents are printed on the Advanced tab, and then restart the computer. The bi-directional communication function is disabled and the correct printer status may not be recognized. When a client user opens the printer driver properties and then clicks OK with the Enable bidirectional support check box on the Ports tab unchecked, the bi-directional function of the printer server system may also be disabled. In this case, check Enable bidirectional support check box on both the print server system and the client system. When you print from a client system, you cannot use Canon IJ Preview. When the functions on the Maintenance tab cannot be set properly from a client system, they may be grayed out. In this case, change the settings from the print server. When you change the settings of the print server, you should delete the icon of the shared printer from the client system, and then specify the shared settings again in the client system. When the Same Printer Driver is Installed in the Print Server System and the Client System as the Local Printer The net crawl function may automatically create a network printer icon on the client system. Page top Using Easy-PhotoPrint EX Strana 678 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Using Easy-PhotoPrint EX Using Easy-PhotoPrint EX --- Transforming Your Photos into Creative Works of Art --Easy-PhotoPrint EX allows you to create albums, calendars and stickers easily using photos taken with digital cameras. You can also print borderless photos easily. Start Easy-PhotoPrint EX Click Here: Easy-PhotoPrint EX Note See the section below for details on how to use Easy-PhotoPrint EX. Printing with the Bundled Application Software Create a Personalized Photo Album Creating a personalized photo album is an easy task if you use Easy-PhotoPrint EX! All you need to do is select which photos to use, select a layout, then load paper into your printer and print. After you bind the printed sheets, you'll have the one and only album of your memories! You can change the layout and background, and attach comments to photos. You can also select the size and orientation. You can arrange a photo across the left and right pages. CHECK! Select a theme (background design) to create a single-themed album. Decorate Items with Text and Frames You can add text and frames to photos. Attach a description of the photo in an album, and add a frame to enhance the photo's atmosphere. Using Easy-PhotoPrint EX Strana 679 z celkového počtu 684 CHECK! Select Album to add text and frames. You cannot decorate photos with Photo Print. Create a Calendar Using Your Favorite Photos Create calendars easily with Easy-PhotoPrint EX. Create your own calendar using your favorite photos! It'll be exciting to turn the calendar pages. You can use all kinds of photos. You can also create 2-month, 6-month and 12-month calendars. Create Stickers Create stickers easily with Easy-PhotoPrint EX! Create stickers of your favorite photos and share them with your friends! CHECK! You can add text to photos. Using Easy-PhotoPrint EX Strana 680 z celkového počtu 684 Page top Using MP Navigator EX Strana 681 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > Using MP Navigator EX Using MP Navigator EX MP Navigator EX is an application that enables you to easily scan photos and documents. It is suitable even for beginners. Start MP Navigator EX Click Here: MP Navigator EX Note See "Let's Try Scanning" for details on how to scan images using MP Navigator EX. Scan Photos and Documents You can scan easily by navigating through MP Navigator EX screens. You can also save/print scanned images using MP Navigator EX. Scan Small Documents at One Time You can scan multiple small documents (photos, cards, etc.) at one time. It is useful as you do not need to scan multiple times. Scan Large Documents You can easily scan documents that are larger than the Platen using MP Navigator EX. It allows you to scan the left and right halves of a document separately and combine them back into one image. Using MP Navigator EX Strana 682 z celkového počtu 684 Scan with One-click In One-click Mode, MP Navigator EX completes from scanning to saving, with a click of an icon. One-click Mode also allows you to scan and save images as PDF files or attach them to e-mail automatically. Scan and Correct/Enhance Photos You can easily correct/enhance scanned photos using MP Navigator EX. You do not need to use other applications. For details on how to use MP Navigator EX, refer to " Scanning with the Bundled Application Software ." Page top About Solution Menu Strana 683 z celkového počtu 684 Advanced Guide > About Solution Menu About Solution Menu Quick Shortcut!! Solution Menu Solution Menu is a menu window that provides quick access from your desktop to Canon applications, manuals, and online product information. Important The number and types of buttons displayed in the window may vary depending on your printer and region. Starting Solution Menu Click Here: Solution Menu To start from desktop, see below. Double-click the Canon Solution Menu icon on the desktop. Alternatively, from the Start menu, select (All) Programs > Canon Utilities > Solution Menu > Solution Menu. From the next time, Solution Menu starts when Windows starts. If the Start Solution Menu when Windows starts checkbox at the bottom left of the window is not selected, Solution Menu does not start when Windows starts. Note Solution Menu will start automatically when you install it using the Setup CD-ROM that accompanies the printer. Changing the Window Size Click (window size: large) or (window size: small) on the title bar to change the window size About Solution Menu Strana 684 z celkového počtu 684 (large or small). Solution Menu opens with the last used window size next time it is started. When screen size is small Starting an Application 1. Point to a button on the window to display the description of each application. 2. By clicking each button, the introduced application starts. Follow the same steps to view the manuals or online product information. Important Internet connection is required to access the online information. Internet connection fees apply. Exiting Solution Menu Click (Close) on the title bar. Restriction on Use of Solution Menu This software is subject to the following restriction. Keep this point in mind when using it. All icons of the installed applications that support Solution Menu are displayed in the window. After the installation, you cannot rearrange the icons or delete only the icons. Page top
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Key Features
- Home & office Inkjet Colour printing
- 4800 x 1200 DPI
- A4 8.4 ppm
- Colour copying Colour scanning
- 5.6 kg